TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INC.

VOLUME 95, 1971

PART 1, 17 MARCH

Norman, F. I. Movement and mortality of Black Duck, Mountain Duck and

Grey Teal banded in South Australia, 1953-1963 - - -

Womersley, H. B. S. The genus Plocamium (Rhodophyta) in southern Australia

Ludbrook, N. H. Large gastropods of the families Diastomatidae and Cerithiidae

(Mollusca: Gastropoda) in southern Australia - - - -

Tyler, M. J. Voluntary control of the shape of the inflated vocal sac by the

Australian Leptodactylid frog, Limnodynastes tasmaniensis -

Barlow, B. A. Viscum katikianum (Viscaceae), a new species of mistletoe from

New Guinea - - - : : 3 : - A

PART 2, 11 AUGUST

Edmonds, S.J. Australian Acanthocephala No. 13: three new species’ - -

Mawson, P.M. Two new species of Rictularia (Nematoda) from Australian

Rodents - - - - “ 3 Z = “. 3

Inglis, W. G. Marine Enoplida (Nematoda) from Western Australia - -

Tyler, M. J., & Menzies, J. I. A new species of Microhylid Frog of the genus

Sphenophryne from Milne Bay, Papua - - - - -

Brock, E. J. The denudation chronology of the Fleurieu Peninsula, South

Australia - - - - E = = 3 2 2

Aitken, P. F. Whales from the coast of South Australia - - - -

Angel, L. M. Pachytrema calculus Looss, 1907 (Trematoda: Opisthorchiidae

from Australia - - = = » 5 = Z ay

Brittan, N. H. Thysanotus fractiflexus sp. nov. (Liliaceae), endemic to

Kangaroo Island, South Australia - - = = “ 2

Wome;rsley, H. B. S. New records and taxa of Marine Chlorophyta in southern

Australia - - - - - : 2 E Z =

PART 3, 15 OCTOBER—PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION, 1969

Shepherd, S. A., & Thomas, I. M. 1. Narrative . 4 S fs z =

Twidale, C. R. 2. Geomorphology - - - : - ‘ : :

Symon, D. E. 3. Contributions to the Land Flora - = ‘ & : =

Thomas, I. M., & Delroy, L. B. 4. The Pearson Island Wallaby - - -

Smyth, M. 5. Reptiles - - - - - - 7 . f 2

Paton, Joan B. 6. Birds - “ = = - My 1 4 be U

Shepherd, S. A., & Womersley, H. B. S. 7. The Sub-tidal Ecology of Benthic

Algae - - - - - - - - - - -

Mawson, Patricia M. 8, Helminths - . . r -. 5, = 4

105

109

113

121

123

131

143

147

149

155

169

PART 4, 30 NOVEMBER

Smith, Meredith J. Small fossil vertebrates from Victoria Cave, Naracoorte,

South Australia. I. Potoroinae (Macropodidae), Petauridae

and Burramyidae (Marsupialia) — - - = = - -

Daily, B., & Milnes, A. R. Stratigraphic notes on Lower Cambrian fossiliferous

metasediments between Campbell Creek and Tunkalilla Beach

in the type section of the Kanmantoo Group, Fleurieu Peninsula,

South Australia = - - - - - - - - -

Tyler, M. J. Discovery in the Everard Ranges of a species of leptodactylid

frog new to the fauna of South Australia - - - - -

Forbes, B. G. Stratigraphic subdivision of the Pound Quartzite (Late Precam-

brian, South Australia) - as - r # J J

Symon, D. E. Nine new species of Solanum from Australia - - - -

OBITUARY: SIR JAMES HARRISON - - - F : : A =

OBITUARY: SIR JOHN CLELAND - - = Z 2 - b

Annual Report of Council, 1970-71 - - - 2 2 4 sf ns z.

Award of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal - - - - i = * P

Balance Sheet - - ~ : £ 2 : : ze : 2 a

185

199

215

219

227

241

242

248

249

250

MOVEMENT AND MORTALITY OF BLACK DUCK, MOUNTAIN DUCK

AND GREY TEAL BANDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 1953-1963

BY F. I. NORMAN

Summary

Movements shown by recoveries of Black Duck, Mountain Duck and Grey Teal banded at Yalkuri,

Waltowa, Joanna, Merretti and Buckland's Park are discussed. It is shown that Grey Teal disperse

widely in most directions. Black Duck and Mountain Duck populations appear to contain a

proportion which move long distances but the majority of ducks of these two species are recovered

near the banding site. Shooting provided most recoveries in each species and mortality and survival

parameters have been calculated from return of bands from shot birds. Black Duck show a greater

mortality, and consequently a lower expectancy of life, than Grey Teal but Mountain Duck are

apparently subject to a lower shooting pressure, since the life expectancy is greatest in this species.

Since ducks banded in South Australia do move into other states, it is obvious that conservation of

waterfowl and their habitat is of continental concern.

MOVEMENT AND MORTALITY OF BLACK DUCK, MOUNTAIN DUCK AND

GREY TEAL BANDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA, 1953-1963

hy bk. L NORMAN®*

Summary

Movements shown by recoveries of Black Duck, Mountain Duck and Grey Veal banded at Yalkuri,

Waltowa, Joanna, Merretti und Bucktund's Park are discussed. Tt is showa (hat Grey ‘Teal disperse

widely in most directions Black Duck and Mountain Duck populations appear to contain a propar-

lion which move long distances but the majority of ducks of these two species are recovered near the

banding site, Shooting provided most recuveries in each species and smortulity and survival parameters

have been calculated from return of bands from shut birds. Black Duck show ft greater mortality,

and consequently ao lower expectancy of Hle, than Grey Teal but Mountain Duck are apparently

subject to a lower shooting pressure, since the life expectancy is greatest in this species. Since ducks

banded in South Australia do move into other slates, if is obvious that conservation of waterfowl!

and their habitat is of continental concern.

Introduction

Many Austrahan wuterfowl are nomadic and

in, some species varying numbers of local popu-

lations may undertake random dispersal move-

ments at various times (Brith, 1967), Such

nomadism is apparently a response to varia-

lions in rainfall, which jin turn affect water

Jevels and food availability, Selection for a

rigid migeatol'y system, as prevails in many

European and North American waterfowl,

could teat! to reduction in population levels in

times af drought, In several Australian species

of ducks there may be a regular movernent

involving a proportion of u population which

utherwise disperses widely; other members muy

remain in a locality for many years (Frith,

1952, 1967),

Results of bunding operations vonducicd on

some duck Species in South Australia have

beech reported (Frith, 1959, 1962, 1963, 1967).

Data given below presents additional infanna-

tion obtained during banding operations con-

ducted by, ov for, the Victorian Fisheries and

Wildlife Department and the South Australian

Department of Fisheries and Fauna during the

perind 1953 to 1963, Alfention has been paid

only to results obtained by banding Black

Dueck (Anan supercilioxa Gmelin), Mountain

Duck {(Tadorna tadorneides (ardine and

Sellyy)) and Grey Teal (Anas gibherifrans

Miller}, although small numbers of other

waterfowl species were also banded.

Methods

Irregular trapping for waterfowl was con-

ducted af five sites in South Australia between

1953 and 1963. Birds were caught in wheat-

baited traps of the type described hy McNally

and Falconer (1953) at Merretti Lake (near

Renmark), at Yalkuri and Waltowa fun Lakes

Alexandrina and Albert), at Buckland's Park

{near Adelaide) and at Joanna (south of

Naracoorte}, More systematic trapping was

conducted its 1961 and 1962 al Willows, Yal-

kuri and Merretti when the majority of birds

were caught. Once caught, birds were hiinded

hut were generally released without details

of sex and age being taken.

Data discussed below relate to recoveries

(deaths) of these banded birds made to the

end of 1949 and inyolyes only those whose

bands were teturned. It should be noted that

some hands were returned with incomplete

information and such lack of detail accounts

for the variations in totals piven in the tables

below.

Mortality rates and other survival puni-

meters have heen derived by methods dis-

eussed hy Balham and Miers (1959), Bellrose

and Chase (1950) and Reid (1966). In these

calculations note has only heen taken of birds

known and reported to have beetr shor, since

this sample is taken to represent the population

in general, Variation in return of balds as a

result of changes in shooting pressure is mini-

mised by consideration of data eneompassing

sever! seasons, For the calculation of life

expectancy, weighted mortality rates have heen

used 10 allow for variation in the strength of

cohorts available for recovery (Farner, 1955)

During trapping sessions at Yalkuri in

March 1961, samples of ducks trapped were

* Fisheries and Wildlife Depurtment, Victoria: Acthue Rylah Jostitue for Environmental Research,

Brown Street, Heidelberg, Victoria, 3OK4,

Trans. Ro Suc, 8. Aust. Val. 95, Part 1 17ih March 197],

2 PF. 1. NORMAN

fluoroscopically examined using a portable

X-ray unit developed from models described

by Elder (1955) and Bellrose (1959). The

presence and number of shot pellets in these

hirds were noted.

Resulis

1) BANDING TOTALS

Table | presents totals of Black Duck,

Mountain Duck and Grey Teal banded and

released iat the various sites. Whilst other

species were also caught, al each site Black

Duck, Mountain Duck and Grey Teal pre-

donvinated.

TABLE 1

Banding of Black Duck, Mountain Duck and Grey Teal

in South Ausivalia, 1953-1963.

Banding site Black | Mountain} Grey

Duck Duck | Teal

Joanna 384 7 §24

Yalkuri 1462 160 961

Merretti 49: 130 273

Waltowa I 690 104

Buckland’s Park 45 | nil 53

Total 2041 | 1051 i915

ii) RECOVERIES

Table 2 shows the numbers of Black Duck,

Mountain Duck and Grey Teal reported as

dead (recovered) up io the end of 1969, and

the table ulso notes the method of recovery

where: known. In the three species under dis-

cussion, shooting provided the majority of

recoveries.

Undoubtedly a proportion of recoveries re-

ported merely as “found dead”, or without

further information heing submitted, were also

shal,

it) DISPERSAL

Figure 1 shows the location of recoveries of

Black Duck banded at Joanna, Yalkuri and

Merretti. The small number of recoveries

made of birds banded at Buckland's Park and

Waltowa have been omitted. Generally dis-

persal from the more northern banding sites

was, towards the coastal regions or along the

Murray valley but a large proportion of birds

were found close to their banding siles. The

majority of birds banded at Joanna was re-

covered locally: those which dispersed (ended

to travel eastwards into Victoria. Of six re-

coveries of Black Duck banded at Yalkuri

during summer, five were shot in Lake Alexan-

drina, and of 67 reécoverics of birds banded

in. summer and recovered in the first winter

post-banding, 53 (79°-1%%} were in the Lake

Alexandrina region, No birds banded at Joanna

in summer were recovered at Lake Atexan-

drina up to the first winter following banding

but Jater a few reached the area, Three birds

banded at Joanna were eventually recovered in

Tasmania and one in Queensland. Birds

banded at Merretti (mostly in the November-

December period) moved little but those

banded at Yalkuri in the mid-March and early

June period Were recovered widely.

The locations of recovered Mountain Dueks

are shown in Figure 2 and in this figure re-

coveries have been considered as two groups

—those made of birds banded in the simmer

and recovered in their first summer and winter

(direct, recoveries, shown in insert mup), and

all recaverjes made of any bird banded at

uny time (main map). Irregular trapping in

the summer period of this and other species

has restricted the number of direct recoveries

involved. The direct recoveries shown in Figure

2 indicate the limited dispersal of birds. during

TABLE 2

Recovery methods af Black Dueck, Mountain Duck and Grey Teal handed ih South Australia,

eee

Black Duck Mountain Duck ‘Grey Teal

Reeayery method —— oa

% of ¥o OF % of

No. total No, total | No, total

Shot 429 85°8 160 83°0 237 R7-L

No information 60 12-0 28 14-4 19 7-0

Freshly dead 5 1d 2 1-0 6 2:2

Trapped and killed 2 O-4 2 ty § 1-8

Hand-killed 2 0-4 hil nil 4 15

Snared and killed nil nil 1 O°5 1 Od

Netted and killed 2 Ord nil nil nil nil

Total banded 2041 1051 1915

Total recovered 500, 2465 194 18-5 272 14-2

DbCK AND TEAL BANDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 1953-63 3

the first six months following summer banding.

Of the recoyeries of 25 birds banded at Wal-

towy during the summer, 17 (68%) were

recovered in Lake Alexandrina up to the first

winter post-banding, and of 44 recoverics. of

hirds handed at Waltowa made in the first

summer 34 (77°3%) were made in that area,

Later movement occurs mainly along the

Murtay, and through the Coorong into westem

Victoria, particularly the Lake Corangamite

region and beyond,

mortality in the first year post-banding was

high, with more than 53% of Black Duck,

54% of Grey Teal and almost 44% of Maun-

tain Duck recoveries being made within the

year, Average mortality in the four years after

banding is highest in Black Duck (53:99),

with Grey Teal (48+4%) and Mountain Duck

{43-6%), having a greater survival rate, It

is notable that Mountain Duck have a greater

propertion (10-0%) surviving past the first

four years post-banding. Average expectancy

TABLE 3

Distances travelled by Black Buck, Mountain Duck and Grey Teal banded in South Australia.

Black Duck Mountain Duck Grey Teal

Distance in kilometers | — -

%6 of °4 of of

No. total No. total No, total

0 6 1-3 ] 0-6 4 1-5

i—100 314 675 Bq 57+3 98 377

101—200 AG 9°Y 10 6-1 33 i2-7

201—300 48 103 26 15-9 35 13-5

30i—400 21 45 13 8-0 37 14-2

401—500 13 28 15 Q-1 27 10-4

501—1000 if 3-2 5 3-0 20 7

1000- : 2 0-4 nil nil 6 23

Total 465 164 20

Mavements undertaken by Grey Teal away

from their banding site are shown in Figure

3, Comparison with the previous figures shows

the more widespread dispersal undertaken by

this species. Although there is a slight tendency

for coastal movement, or at least coastal re-

coverles, no directional dispersal is noticeable

for recoveries from any banding site, Long

movements have occurred with two birds

banded gt Joanna being recovered in Queens-

land and one being shot at Tarblin, Western

Australia, 36 months after banding,

Table 3 indicates the distance of recoveries

of the three species from the banding sites:

78% of Black Duck, 64% of Mountain Duck

and 53%. of Grey Teal were recovered within

200 km (75 miles) of their banding sites.

iv) Morraciry

The Black Duck apparently suffers a greater

shooting pressure than the other species, with

21% of bands being returned from shot birds.

Comparable figures for the Mountain Duck

and Grey Teal are 15% and 12%. Tahle 4

presenis mortality and survivorship data cal-

culated from recoveries of shut birds for which

dates of recovery are known, For all species

of life based on the shot sample is least in

Black Duck with an expectancy of 1:36 years

after banding as compared with 1-56 years for

Grey Teal and 1-79 years for Mountain Duck.

v) X-RAY EXAMINATION

Table 5 presents the results of limited flura-

scupic examination of a series of Black Duck

and Grey Teal made at Yalkuri in 1961, In

this series more adult males of both species

cartied more shot than females, which in turn

had a higher shot content than juvenile mates.

Overall, 11-0% of Black Duck carried shot

as compared with 4:8% of Grey Teal. Of all

birds carrying shot, 21°2% catried more than

one pellet.

Discussion

Black Duck in South Australia ure found

on the deeper, permanent waters having ranker

vegetation (Condon, 1962; Frith, 1947; Terrill

and Rex, 1950), Recoveries have shown that

most birds do not disperse in any one direction

and most do not move widely at all (Fig. L)-

There is however a proportion which disperse,

generally to the east and south but some birds

banded in the south moye along the Murray

and coastal regions north of Adelside, Birdy

4 F. L NORMAN

TABLE 4

Adartatity and survival parameters based on recoveries af shor Black Duck, Mountain Duck, and Grey Teul banded

in South Australia, 1953-1963, and recovered to the end of 1969,

Recoveries in vears post-banding

—4

Q--] i—2 2-3 — 5—A 6

BLACK DUCK

Total banded aod available

for recovery 2041 2041 2041 2w4l 2041 2041 1996

Total recovered 231 94 42 33 it 5 2

Percentage recovered 11-31 4-41 2°06 T+ 62 0-54 0-25 0-10

Mortality series 55.2 22:49 10:05 7-89 2:63 1-19 O48

Cumulative recovery (9%) 55:26 TT<75 87-80 95-69 98-32 99-51 99-99

Survival series 44-74 22-25 12-20 4-3] 1°68 0-48 0-01

Mortality rate $5°26 50-27 AS 17 64°71 (average, in a year classes,

= 35-85%)

MOUNTAIN DUCK.

Total banded atid available

for recovery Lost LOST 1051 1051 (O51 105) 1051

Total recovered 66 33 24 1 6 5 4

Percentage recovered 628 3-14 2:38 1:05 O:S7 0-48 0:38

Mortality series 43.98 21-98 16-67 7-38 3°99 3°36 2-66

Cumulative recavery (°%) 43-98 65-96 82-63 RY -ON Y3-97 97-33 yg.49

Survival serics 36-02 34-04 17°37 10-02 6°03 2°67 001

Mortality rate 43-98 39-25 48-97 42°35 (average, O—4 year ¢lasses

= 43-64%)

GREY TEAL

Total banded and available

for recovery 1915 1915 195 1915 1915 1915 1862

Total recovered 128 2 32 18 7 5 4

Percentage recovered 6:68 2:19 {+67 0-94 0:37 0°26 (22

Mortality series 5418 17:76 13.54 7°62, 3:00 2:11 1:79

Cumulative recovery (%) 54:18 7194 85:48 93:10 96) 10 98-21 100 00

Survival series 45-82 28-06 14-52 6-90 3-90 1-79 nil

Mortality rate 54-18 34-76 48-26 52°51 (average, wae classes,

= 48-43%)

banded in late autumn at Yalkuri showed the

widest dispersal, in contrast to those banded

at Merretti which moved little. Recovery data

(Vable 3, Fig 1) agree with Frith’s (1963,

1967) conclusion that only a proportion of

any population are involved in dispersal, with

members of various populations moving in any

direction. However recoveries from these more

southern banding sites have not shown w

tendency for a tegular northern movement in

winter and w southerly summer novement as

is apparent in hirds handed in inland south-

eust. Australia (Frith, 1963).

Condon (1962) considered that Mountain

Duck inhabited the open grassy flats, swamps,

lakes and rivers of South Australia, Frith

(1967) found that, though the species pre-

ferred muddy ‘shorelines of brackish waters,

there was a dependence on fresh water and

large congregations moved to Lakes Albert

and Alexandrina to moult. Figure 2. clearly

shows the importance of these freshwater

lakes to this specics (as also is the case with

the Black Duck), Recoveries there presumably

Tefer to birds shot prior to or in the moulting

period, since almost all dispersal up to the

first winter post-banding is limited to Lakes

Albert and Alexandrina, with much smaller

numbers going to the Coorong. Some propor-

uon of birds later disperse widely with an

obvious concentration in the Lake Coranga-

mite region of Victoria. Tt is possible that

this loo might be a moulting region.

Grey Teal are found widely in South Aus-

tralia, on rivers, lakes, swanips and coastal

estuaries or bays (Condon, 1962; Terrill and

Rex, 1950). Though the Murray-Darling basin

is the most important breeding area, coastal

regions of south-cast Australia provide the

majority of refuge areas (Frith, 1962). The

extensive and erratic movements of the specics

have already been discussed (Brith, 1962, 1963)

und recoveries shown in Figure 3 confirm the

more random movements undertaken by the

Grey Teul. It has not been possible with the

present data to examine the movements in this

(and the other) species in relation to climatic

variation,

DUCK AND TEAL BANDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 1953-63

{

1 8

\ |

es 6

f <j Merretti ' &

‘ cw fs) 4, H oO

} st 7 5 i i 2 Bag a‘ 3

os ; 3 8 i al °

4 O¢ ‘ i

hy — 9

Ye i l a

i ad

oe-— Joanna

Joanna a ta]

£1

Merretti ag >

Yalkuri = 2 eS

Location of recoveries of Black Duck banded at Joanna, Merretti and Yalkuri between 1953

Fig. 1.

and 1963.

er ha oa ton

j Xe x ea hil ent

i: | WS

{

i %

Bons 7 |

ee.

NLP,

vo ou \

Joanna as 2

Merretti x xX oe

Waltowa @ @ ts

Yalkuri ao 2 jue

o rite 180

ry) Hw 280

Fig. 2. Location of recoveries of Mountain Duck banded at Joanna, Mcrretti, Waltowa and Yalkuri

between 1953 and 1963. Insert shows recoveries of birds banded in summer and recovered

up to the first winter post-banding.

6 F. I. NORMAN

TABLE 5

Fluoroscopic examination of Black Duck and Grey Teal caught at Yalkuri, South Australia, in March 1961.

EN a EA oll nT Se SR I a a

Number examined

No. of pellets

without with percent

shot shot with shot 1 2 3 4 5

BLACK DUCK

Juvenile male 63 5 7-4 4 — — 1 —-

Adult male 86 14 14-0 13 — 1 = —

All females 113 Il 8-8 6 2 1 é= 2

Unsexed/unaged 37 3 75 3 -

All ducks 299 33 11-0 26 2 2 1 2

GREY TEAL

Juvenile male 83 3 3-6 3 - — _

Adult male 25 3 10:7 2 1 = — —

All females 122 7 5:4 5 2 = = e+

All ducks 230 3 4-8 10 3 — _

In contrast to results obtained by Frith

(1963), Black Duck banded in southern South

Australia suffered a higher mortality than

Grey Teal and had consequently a lower life

expectancy. Parameters recalculated from

Frith’s data according to Reid’s (1966)

methods show that Black Duck banded mainly

in inland New South Wales had a mean mor-

tality of 50% during the first four years of

life and Grey Teal 52:4%. Comparable

figures in this study are 53:9 and 48-4%. It

seems probable that Black Duck banded at

Joanna, Yalkuri, Merretti and Waltowa (ie,

97-8% of the total banded) moved less than

those reported by Frith (1963) and thus were

more prone to local shooting. Indeed the large

proportion of Black Ducks carrying shot

(Table 5) suggests thal they are much more

liable to be shot at than Grey Teal though

they are of course a larger bird. Mountain

Duck, though not considered a good game

species (Frith, 1967), are clearly subject to

Peal

Je. ==

;

a ¥ rd here rea he. es a

Lx a ¢ iS a | oy

ic a] ' 4 6

“NA a B 3 ge i WS, 9 s

& , H a 4 (ax 7

@ s a f

He cee /

ae age o . Um

ae Ai ‘* an M4 \ ok a s al

Waltowa © a a »t se ere 5 a

ge c { /

Joanna a . Pid , Md ec \ }

‘ge Aa es? Z

Merrett x x ad aa J :

Waltowa 2 @ doarina i Sis.

a a aa) of

Yalkusi oO NAb A Ve n Leo ee

“a, at ’

a on

0 sites 180

|i =e ,—_}

Li} km 280

Fig. 3. Location of recoveries of Grey Teal banded at Joanna, Merretti, Waltowa and Yalkuri

between 1953 and 1963.

DUCK AND TEAL BANDED IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 1953-63 7

considerable shooting pressure parhicularly in

the Lakes Albert and Alexandrina region, the

Coorong and western Victoria, However the

lower mortality rate and greater expectancy

of life post-banding suggests that this species

is less attractive, and perhaps less available to

shooters than Grey Teal or Black Duck. Never-

theless Tables 2 and 4 show that Mountain

Duck have a higher overall band recovery than

Grey Teal, a rate dependent mainly on

shooting,

This study has shown the difference in mor-

tality und movement of three species of water-.

fowl common in South Australia. Recoveries:

of banded birds have indicated that Grey

Teal, which is essentially an inland breeding

species, disperse more widely than Black Duck

und Mountain Duck. The two latler species,

though having some individuals which move

long distances, have a higher loca! recovery

raie than the Veal, Black Duck are most seden-

vary and are thus apparently more prone to

local shooting pressures. Though the majority

of recoveries of all specics were returned from

within the state, it is clear that other states,

particularly Victoria, receive birds originating

in South Australia. It 1s apparent that conser-

vation of waterfowl and waterfowl habitat in

one state will affect, at some stage, waterfowl

inhabiting other states,

Acknowledgements

Mr. M. C. Downes. while Superintendent of

Game Management, in the Victorian Fisheries

and Wildlife Department, was responsible for

much of the organisation and collection of

data used in this report. Personnel of the South

Australian Department of Fisheries and Fauna

assisted in 1961 and conducted later trapping

sessions. Mr. J, B, Hood was responsible for

the majority of banding prior to 1961.

References

BALHAM, R. W., and Mires, K. H. (1959)—

Mortality and survival of Grey and Mallard

Ducks banded in New Zealand, NZ, Dep.

Int, Af. Wildl, Publ. 3.

Becxirose, F. C. (1959).—-Lead poisoning as. a

mortality factor in waterfowl population.

Bull, Wi. St. nat. Hivt. Surv. 27, 236-287.

BELLRUSE, F. C., and Cease, E. B, (1950).—

Population losses in the Mallard, Black Duck

and Blue-winged Teal. Mlinwis Nat. Hist.

Surv. Bial. Notes 22, 1-27.

Connon, H. T. (1962).—A handlist of the: birds

of South Australia. S. 4ust. Orn, 23, 86-151.

Exper, W. H.. (1955).—Fluoroscopic measures of

shooting pressure on pink-footed and grey-

lag geese. Rep. Severn Wildfowl Trust (1953-

1954), 123-126,

Farner, D.S. (1955) —Bird banding in the study

of population dynamics. Jn “Recent studies

in avian biology®. (Univ. Wlinvis Press:

Urbana.)

Frith, H. J. (1959),—Ecology of wild ducks in

inland New South Wales. Il. Moyements_

CSIRO Wildl. Res. A, 108-30.

FritH, H. J, (1962}—Movements of the Grey

Teal, Anas gibberifrons Miiller (Anatidae).

CSIRO Wildl. Res. 7, 5-70.

FritH, H, J. (1963).—Movements and mortality

rates of the Black Duck and Grey ‘Tcal in

south-east Australia. CS/RO Wildl. Res. 8,

119-131.

Frito, H, J. (1967).—*Waterfow! in Australia,”

(Angus and Robertson: Sydnzy.)

McNay, J., and Fatconrr, D, (1953) —Trap-

ping and banding operations, Lara Luke,

1952, Emu 53, 51-70,

Rew, B. (1966).—Hand-reared Mallards in South-

land an analysis. of band recoveries. NZ. J.

Set. 9, 630-650.

TsraILL, S. E., and Rex, C. BE. (1950).—The birds

vf South Australia their distribution and

habitat. §. dust, Orn, 19, 53-100.

THE GENUS PLOCAMIUM (RHODOPHYTA) IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY H.B.S. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Eight species of Plocamiurn are recognised on southern Australian coasts, viz. P. angustum (J. Ag.)

Hooker & Harvey, P. cartilagineum (L.) Dixon, P. costatum (C. Ag.) Hooker & Harvey, P.

dilatatum J. Agardh, P. leptophyllum Kuetzing, P. mertensii (Grev.) Harvey, P. patagiatum J.

Agardh and P. preissianum Sender. Characters used in differentiating the species include thallus

dimensions, the number and form of the ramuli in the alternating series, and the position,

morphology and dimensions of the cystocarps and tetrasporangial stichidia; spermatangial position

is used in some species.

Apart from the cosmopolitan P. cartilagineum, the other species are essentially southern Australian

and detailed study is needed of specimens, from other countries, which have been referred to these

Australian species.

THE GENUS PLOCAMIUM (RHODOPHYTA) IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

by H. B. 8. WoMERSLEY*

Sammary

Eight species of Plocaniiume are recognised on southern Australian coasts, vic. P. angustien (1,

Ag.) Hooker & Harvey, P. cortilaginennt CL.) Dixon, P. caste CC. Ag.) Hooker & Ilurvey, P.

dilatarian V, Agatdh, BP, leptaphy|iien Kuetzing, &. mertensii (Grev.) Harvey, P.. patagiatni J, Agardh

and FP. peetssigtin Sonder. Cluructers used in differentiating the species inchide thallus dimensions,

the number and form of the tamuli in the alternating series, and the pusilion, morphology and

dimensions of the cystocarps and tetrasporangial stichidia: spermatangial position is used in some

apecics,

Apart from the cosmepolitan P. curtilavinewm, the other species are essentially southem Aus-

tralian and detailed study is needed of specimens, from other countries, which have been referred to

these Ausiralian species.

Introduction

One of the commonest abd most distinctive

genera af red alge on southern Australian

coasts (from south-west Western Australia to

eastern Victoria und including Tasmania) is

Plocaminm Lamouroux, In general the species

are subtidal, though some occur in deep or

shaded pools on rock platforms, Frequently

they are important. elements in communities of

red algae in: the mid or lower sub-littoral zones

(e.g. sce Shepherd & Womersley 1970) and

some species may be codaminant.

There has. been considerable confusion in

records and herbarium determingtions of Aus-

tralian species of Plocatium, and records of

Australian species trom other countries have

usually been based on inadequate knowledge

of the species in Australia.

This study is based on extensive collections

in he Adelaid= University Herbarium and the

author's field knowledge and collections over

many years. All the suuthern Australian species

recognised here occur in the State of South

Australia, und ull are also found around West

Island, a smull island (less than + km across)

near Victor Harbor, South Australia «(Shep-

herd & Womersley 1970). Collections in the

State and University Herbaria in Perth, Mel-

bourne and Sydney, and also in the British

Museum (N.H.), London, have been studicd

and annotated, and all type specimens have

heen stiuclied,

The Morphology and Characteristics of

Plocaminm

Plocaniuin is a distinctive genus, justly

regarded as a “natural” one. His readily recog-

nised even when sterile by the flat fronds,

“Deparimant of Botany, University of Adelaids, Adelaide, S.A. SU0L.

hranched in one plane, and with the edges of

the branch uxcs bearing alternating series of

2, 3 or more (to 5 or G) ramuli, the lower of

which is normally unbranched and at least

the uppermost is branched,

Numerous axes arise Irom a basal system of

entangled, terete, prostrate branches, some of

which produce recurved attachment branch-

leis, Some species occur on rock while others

(eg. P. leptophyllum) are normally epiphytic

on other algae, including other species of

Plocapium,

The erect axes are sympodially developed

(Fig, 1), and the growth of the axis is con-

tinued by the upper of the ramuli in each

series. If the species has m ramuli in each

series, then the upper ramulus develops a

further series of (n—1) ramuli on its adaxial

margin, ic. facing the previous wuxis apex, and

the latter becomes the lowest of the new serics

of » ramuli, This development proceeds indefi-

nitely giving the regular pattern of branching

and in some species (c.g. P. /eptophyllum) a

distinctly flexuosé axis, The lowest ramulus in

a series (Le. the previous apex of the axis)

normally remains unhranched (excep! often in

P. mertensit) and its morphology (entire or

serrate margin and form) is distinctive for

some species. The upper ramulus normally

develops into a lateral branely with the same

sympodial branching as the axis, though often

it may remain dormant (especialy in P.

patagiainm);, the second ramulus (in species

with series of 3 o¢ more) may also develop to

some extent,

In most species, ramu!i occur only in the

alternating series, P, leptophyilunt, however, is

characterised by small adventitious tani,

Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. Val. 95, Part 1. 7th March 1971.

th) H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

usually simple but occasionally branched,

which aris¢ on the branch margin opposite

each stnes of ramuli; sometimes they also

arise between the original ramuli of 4 series.

This teswits in an almost continuous fringe

of ramull on both sides. of the branches.

In quost species the Lowest ramulus (the

previeus apex) gemuiny relatively straight and

short, In P, leptuphytlum, however, many

though not all of these ramuli (und the branch

end) develop into strongly recurved. hacked

famuli which are most effective in attachment

lo other algae and help to distinguish this

species. Similar hooked branches occur in P.

hamation J, Agardh (1876, p. 338) from

eastern Australia (Queensland, N.S/W., Lord

Howe Is., Norfolk Is.) but in the other

southern Australian specics hooked ramuli

are normally only found irregularly on the

prostrate sysiem,

Cystocarpic plants are common, but male

plants arg much less frequently collected,

Carpoganial branches occur cither on the

agduaial (occasionally abaxial) margin ot the

upper ramuli or adjacent branch margin {rarely

on the fowest ramulus), or on small, reduced

branchlets which arise in the axil of the branch

and upper ramufus and Which apparently cor-

respond to a small, profiferous branch. In the

former case (e.g. PL angustum, P. cartilagi-

neunt) the cystocarp is sessile on the margin of

the ramulus, but in the latter case (eg, FP.

mmertensit) the cystocurp appears pedicellate

with the small branchlet constituting its pedicel.

In some cases the cystocarp bearing branchlet

is recognisable as such but in other cases it is

reduced to a terete pedicel. Several pedicellite

cystocarps may occur in each axi] but usually

one or two develop further than the others.

Cystocarps are usually globulur or hemi-

spherical and smooth surfaced, but in P, preis-

sianuer the pericarp becomes distinctly verru-

cose, Cystocarps have not been seen in P, fepto-

phyla.

Spermatungiw! plants have been found mn

all species except P. leptophyllunt. The sperma-

Limew are cut off trom mother cells produced

by ihe vuter cortical cells, in one of two ways.

In PL oortguevtim, P. costatin, PL diletarum, P-

pretssianyun and P, cartilaégincum the sperma-

lungla cover the surface of the branches and

ramuli near the branch apices, while in the

other species they cover the surface of small.

axiWary brunch tufts.

Tetrasporangial plants. are common in most

species and the zonately divided tetraspurangia

occur in elongate or clavate stichidia borne in

the axil of the branch and upper ramiilus,

In some species they occur also in (he axil of

the second ramulus. In most species the sichi-

dia form uw distinet, compact cluster, but in

others (e.g, P. cartilagineum) they extend in

8 series along the amurgins of the branch and

lo @ Jesser extent along the ramulus, When the

stichidia are clustered, they «atrise from a

slightly swollen tissue. In some species (e.g.

Po mertensil, Po preiysiunuin) individual stichi-

tia are unbranched, consisting of a narrower,

sterile, hosal pedicel and swollen upper part

bearing the retrasporangia. In some cases [e-g,

P. costatum, P ecorrilaginewmn) the stichidia

become branched in their upper parts.

Fertile specimens of Plocaminni, especially

Moall reproductive phases are present, ore

readily determined, and in many gases sterile

specimens are sufficiently distinctive to be

determined, In a few cases apparent inter-

grades occur but these are usually based on

infertile specimens, It appears that compara-

tively little hybridisation occurs between the

Austrahan species of Plocamium even though

they often oceur intermixed.

In most of the southern Australian species,

eystocarpic and tetrasporangial plants occur

throughout the year. In P. leptophyllumn. how-

ever, sexual plants are unknown and. tetra-

sporangial plants have heen found only in

August and September. Cystovarpic specimens

of P, patagictum are known from May to

August and tetrasporangial ones from April

to October, Spermatangial plants in mast

species are rare.

Key to Species of Plocamiom in Southern

Austritia

I. Ramuli mostly in alternate pairs

I. Ramuli mostly in dlternute series of 3-4

Cor more) Y “Res fi

2. Axes mostly onder 2 mm beoads

cystocarps sessile, spermatangly cov-

ering young ramuli |. |

. Axes mostly over 2 mm broad; cysto-

cirps appearing pedicellate and axil-

lacy, spermatangia on terete, axillary

branch clusters (or on reduced, axil-

lary branchlets in P, dilatation) oo 4

3, Axes slender, mostly less than | mm

broad; lower ramulus slender wed usually

entire. stichidia single or in basally

branched Clusters (oj enue de P aleusrun

3, Axes mostly over | mn bread: lower

Timulus sertate; stichidia in clusters.

branched in their upper pal 2 FP eeaterrieen

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 1]

4. Upper ramulus often remaining dor-

mant and digitate, 2-24 mm broad

and usually 3-5 mm long; lower

rumulus simple und usually entire:

axes mostly 3 mim broad.

3. P. patagianiun

4. Upper ramulus commonly develop-

ing mio a lateral branch, not digitate

if undeveloped; lower ramulus usu-

ally serrate. simple or divided; axes

moasiy 2-3 (-3) mm broad 5

5. Thallus relatively delicate. often large

(to 50 em high): lower ramulus entire

or serrate, in many plants hecaming

multifid: stichidia mostly = 75-100,m

liam. tease 4. PL mertensii

Thallus robust, ta 25 em high; lower

ramulus serrate and undivided: stichidia

robust und clavale, about 250,um_ diam.

S. P. dilatatum

6 Ramuli mostly in series af 3; thallus

robust, axes 1$-2 (-3) mm_ broad

and becoming thickened below; sti-

chidia normally in axillary clusters,

basally branched only: cystocarps

sessile and Verrucose 6. P. preisvianun

6 Ranuli in series of 3-4 or more,

rarely with some in pairs: thallus

slender, axes less than 14 mm broad:

stichidia axillary bul on margins of

ramulus and vis, becoming branched

in their upper parts; cystocarps ses-

Sile DUE SMOOEH ov ccccucueermnwe cn 7

7 Ramoli in alternating series of 3-4, with

occasonal piirs; axes mostly I-1! mm

broad, tapering above: adventitious

tumuli. and hooked brunch ends or

hooked lower ramuli, absent.

7. P. varitilagineunt

7, Ramult in alternating series of (3-)4-5

with short adventitious ramuli develop-

ing. from the yxis opposite each series

and often between the members of a

Series; axis aboul 4 mm broad, often

flexuous, ends of branches ar lowest

tamul, commonly recurved to a hook,

8, P. leprophyllun)

1. Plocamium angustum (J. Agurdh) Hooker

& Harvey 1847; 404.7. Agardh 1852;

402, 1876: 343. De Toni 1900: 596.

De Toni & Forti 1923: 32, Ewart

1907: 91. Harvey 1847; 122; 1859h:

318: 1863, syvnop.: 39. Kuetzing 1849;

885. Lucas WOO: 34: 1920a: 19,

1929b: 50. Lueas & Perrin 1947: 211,

fiz. 76Oa (excl b). Muaza L808: 228

(No, 215). Reinhold 1897; 52: 1899:

45, Sonder 1853: G82; 1855: STR:

TS80; 1K Tate 148?: 19, Tepper

I883: 66. Tisdall 1898: 507. Wilsan

1892: 178. Womersley |966: 147

FIGS, 2-6

Thaimnopharg unenusta J,

Harvey [844: 447,

Plocamium angushinin Kuetving 166: 17. ph

ABe-e.

Plocamium gracile J,

Agardh (841; (0,

Agardh L876; 345, De

toni 1900; S98, Lucas L9G9; 35> 1929u-

19. Lucas & Perrin }947: 213, fig. 7k.

May 1965: 372 Sonidler [ROS 19. Tisdull

1894: S07, Womersley 1950: 170,

Plocuminm telfariae sensu Guiles 1YS2: 90,

Levring 1946; 222. May 1965: 372 (not

P. fellairive (Harvey) Koetzing from

Mauritius ),

Thallus (Fig. 2) to 25 cm high, with

numerous, erect, slender, rather linear axes

arising from the prostrate base. Axes usually

‘Lo mm broad, rarely to 14 mm. bearing

ramuli in alternating pairs, the upper offen

developing into a lateral branch similar to the

axes, Lower ramuli subulate, 1-14 (2) mim

lang. less than 4 mm hread yt their base,

usually entire but in some plants with several

small serrations or spines on the abaxial

margin. Cystocarps sessile on adusial base of

ramalus or on adjacent uxis (Fig. 3), globular,

smooth fo slightly Vverrucose, 600-900um

across, Spermafangia covering the surkice of

slender ramuli near the branch apices in male

plants (Pig, 4). Srichidia in the axils of

ramuli, becoming tufted (Fig. 5) and basally

branched. the tufts enlarging with age and in

some plants stichidia extending alonu the

adaxial margin af the ramuli; sperangium-

bearing part of stichidia usually unbranched

and swollen (Pig, 6), 60-100,nm thick, terete

and fairly straight. the stalk remaining slender:

telrasporangia SO-7Oum) long and 25-30um

broad,

Type localityv—'Novae Hotlandive”.

Type—Herb. Agardh, LID, 28026

Distribution—From Elliston, Eyre Penin-

sula, S, Aust) to Tuggerah Lakes, N,S,W,

and around Tasmania, Common on cousts

of rough to moderate wave action and

Known from depths from shaded pools

near low water level to 50 im,

Po angustum is usually readily recognized

by ats slender, rather linear axes rarely over

! mm broad, the tufts of basally branched

slichidia. und sessile cystocarps, Some jnter-

grades to FP, cosrariiny oceur however, including

12 H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 1. Thallus development in Plocamium (with series of 3 ramuli). 1, 2, 3 etc. indicate

branching units; ‘a’ indicates the previous apices now left as the lowest ramulus in

euch series.

Figs. 2-6, P. angustum. Fig, 2—Habit. Lady Julia Perey Is., Wic. (Shepherd, 3.11968; ADU,

A32397). Fig. 3.—Branch with cystocarps. Carpenter Rocks (Cape Banks), S. Aust.

(Shepherd, 4.xi.1968; ADU, A33111). Fig. 4.—Spermatangia covering terminal ramuli

of a branch. West Is.. S. Aust, (Shepherd, 11.1969; ADU, A33237), Fig. 5,—Stichi-

dial branch (A33111). Fig. 6—Stichidia (A33111).

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 13

oceasiomal with serrate

ramiuli:

The type of Po anguytun is sterile but there

is no doubt as to its relationships, P. aneus-

tdtwn Kuetzing (holorype in L, 941,240. ,

35) is from Tasmanian (J DB. Hooker. 1304

u Gunn specimen). The type bears a few

stichidia and is within the range of Py anyas-

tun. Po gracile J. Agardh (hololype in LD,

28075. from Tasmania (Gurn)) also bears

stichidia, in this cause mainly from neuer the top

of spinase ramuli but aceusionally in the axils,

This form is common in PL ungustin and it

\Ilustrates the range in siichidia posdion found

in this species.

The W-S.W. distnhution 1 based on sterile

phits und requires confirmation, The record

of Lucas (1931. p. 35) from Rockinghani Buy,

Ole. 1 almost certainly incorrecr, and that

from Lord Howe Island (Lucas 1935, p, 222)

needs confirmation. The illustration of Kuet-

zing (1966, p. 17, pl. 48a-b) is not of P,

anzustiory but probably of P, caytatum,

Levring (1945, p. 16) ceferred P) nagustiun

10 Po wifairiae (Harvey) Kuelzing (1849. p,

885) from Mguritus. Examination of the type

al the latter speeres (in TCD) shows thar they

are quite distinct, Whereas P. aneiistint has

small cortical cells forming a continuous layer

over the surface and the stichidia sre usually

basally branched only, Po telfatriue has a

rosetie appearance in surface view of the cor

ticul cells: the fatter do nol form a continuous

leyer and ure also larger than in Po sagusinm,

The stichidia of P re/fairiee are more clongate

and branched in their upper sporangil regions.

P. telfatriag also has broader und less linear

wxes and more dense branching than P. angiis-

runny

P_ angusiun has been recorded from New

Yeulund (e.g. Hurvey 1855b. p. 246, Laing

1927, p, 159; 1939, p. 153. Naylor 1954. p,

636). but specimens of Laing’s in ADU hive

cystocarps on slender pedicels and the stichidia

are branched, Specimens from New Zealand

in MEL show similarity to FP. angisiin but

are inadequate Jor full comparison, New Zea-

land records must be regarded with doubt and

compurisons made of 4 range of ferble plants.

specimens slightly

2. Plocamium costatum (C, Agardh) Hooker

& Harvey? 1847: 404. J. Agardh

[852: 403; 18762 344, De Tani Lon:

SUT. Ewart 1907° 9 Guiler 1952;

BY. Harvey L847: 122; 1aS9h: 31h,

1863, synop.: 39 Kuelzing 1849:

R86; |S6H> 18, pl S2d, ce. Lueas 1904:

342 1929y° 18: 1929h; SO. Lucas &

Perrin 1947" 212. fig. 77. May 1965:

372. Mazza 908: 228 (No, 216),

Reinbold |}S¥7* 52. 1899: 48. Sonder

1855: 519: TS8O, IY. Tale 1Ss2) 19.

Tisdall (HOA: SOT. Wilsait [S92: 175

Womersley 1950, 170: T966: 147,

FIGS, 7-11

Delesseria plocamivin var. connie ©. Agardh

823: INI: (824) 354.

Thantmophara casa (C. Agardht J. Aeardh

ISat: lO. Aurvey 1844: 447-

Thallus (Fig. 7) erect. fairly slender. to

30 em high from the prostrate base, Ereet

axes 1-14 (-24) mm broad, often with f lighter

coloured ceniral part and thus appearing cos-

late in mid and lower parts of the axes.

Ramuli in pairs, strongly and evenly serrate

with short blunt teeth on the convex whuxial

side, adaxial side straight to slightly concave:

rumuh 1-2 (3) mun long with lower ramulus

usually about + mm broad at the buse. Ciysi-

carps sessile, globular, about 2 mm digm,.

smooth. sometimes slighily verrucose when

dry. variously placed in the axil, on the wdunial

edge of the ramulus, or more frequently ou the

abaxial edge of the lower ramulus (Fig. &).

Sperimatingia covering ends of branches and

proliferous branchlers (Fig, 9) in usils of

upper ramuli, Svichidie in densely branched

clusters (Fig. 10) in the axils af ranuti,

closely branched several simes at wide angles

especially in their upper paris (Fig, 11);

clusters to uhout 14 mm high with brunches

tainly uniform in width and about TOO in

diam.: in some causes the stichidial clusters.

extend in a series along the adaxial margin of

the Jower ramulus and up the axis to the

base of the obaxiul surface of the upper

ramulus, Telrasporangia densely arranged in

apices of slichidial branches, 50-65, long by

35-45,m_ broad.

Type locality—Novae Hollandiae (Dey-

Jontaines).

Type—Herb, Agardh, LD, 28056

* Ut is uncertain whether this combinauon should he credited to Hooker & Harvey or Harvey.

Hooker & Harvey (1847) probably was published in Pt. 8 or Pt. Y (Aug, or Sept.) of Vol. 6 of the

London Journal of Bolany, which appeared in 12 monthly parts. Harvey (1847) hus the preface dated

May 24, i

paper states “Full deseripltions , .

press,

1847. but actual date of publication is unknown. The introduction to the Hooker & Harvey

_ have further appeared in Dr, Harvey's ‘Nereis Australia’, in the

H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

OT 5 Plevawiiwin cesta ticesleag)n

TT pai HH ] Voetied Wavbene, 5 fae 4

hy 3 3 2 4 6 ? * 2 © Decbt

a4} a} i949

Fias. 8,9,10

1mm

8 v4

eel

Figs. 7-11, P. costatum., Fig. 7.—Habit, Victor Harbor, 8. Aust. (Womersley, 24.vii.1949: ADU.

A11163), Fig. 8—Branch with cystocarps in axils of ramuli. Robe, 8. Aust. (Womersley,

15.v,1967; ADU, 31491), Fig. 9—Branch of a male plant with small axillary branches

bearing spermatangia (A31491). Fig. 10.—Stichidial branch (A31491). Fig. 11,—

Stichidia (A31491).

PoC AMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALLA 14

Divirihurion— From Elliston, Eyre Penin-

sulu, S. Aust, to Point Dromedary [16 km

(10 miles) south of Naroamal, N,8,W, and

around Tasmania. Found on coasts of rough

(o moderate wave actiou, and known [rom

depths of 3 to 20 m-

P. costal is distinguished by the clustered

stichidia which ure branched in their upper

purts (often near their apices), und sessile

eystocarps. The thallus branches are broader

than in FL dnenstii and also have strongly

serrate, curved ramuli; in thallus characters

PF. vastatum is close to P, dilaratign but the

mujssive, unbranched stichidia und pedicellate

eystocarps distinguish the latter,

In sume specimens of P. casraruat, the

cystaeurps in young branches appear pedicel-

late This, however, is due to their oceurrence

on short proliferous branehes arising in the

axils of older branches and the cystocarps ure

uelually sessile on very slender ramull; older

piurts of such plants show typical sessile cysto-

carps on mature ramull,

P. costatuny has been recorded from New

Zealand by Harvey (18556, p, 246). Laing

(1927, p. 154: 1939 p. 154), Chupman (1961,

p, 350) and others, These records are based,

at least in part, on that of PF. eunatnghenii

(Grev.) Harvey which was referred by Hooker

& Harvey (1847, p. 404) Lo P. cousrarum. These

New Zedlund records need eritical revision to

establish whether true PL coyreert occurs

theres w closely related taxon is present but il

is doubifully the sare as the Australian

Species,

Po coslahun was yecarded with doubt from

Tapan by Yendo (118, p. 68) and Okamura

(1923) p. FRY, pl 19s) but later redeseribed

as P. serrularum by Okamura (1932, p. 101).

3. Plocaminm patagiatum J. Agardh 1894:

142. De Ton) 1900: GIs 1924: 317.

Guiler 1952: YO. Lucas |909: 3S,

Lucas & Perrin 1947; 215. May

1965: 372. Muaza 19O8: 230 (No,

218)

FIGS, 12-16

Thallus (Fic 12) robust, to 30 em high.

Frect axes 3-4 (-5) mm broad, fairly regularly

branched. Ramuli in alternate pairs, the upper

ramulus commonly remaining dormant, other-

Wise developing mto a Jong, straight lateral

beuring regular ramuli with occasional further

laterals; the upper ramulus of each pair

usuully 2-2 mm broad and 3-5 mm long,

digitate with divisions more on the abaxial

side; lower ramulus simple. entire. rarely ser-

rate, subulate, acuminate (1-)14-24(-4) min

long und $-] mm broad at its base, Cy vrorripy

1-2(-3) in axils of upper or ower ramuli (Fly.

(3), globular and smooth, $-1(-1!) mm diam,

with a pedicel 4-1 times as long as the cysto-

carp and somelimes bearing abortive cysto-

curps on branches af the pedicel, Spernuiangid

covering the surface of much divided branch-

lets (Fig. |4) forming dense, globular clusters

to 4 mnt high in the axils of ramuli, Sriehidia

in dense, globular clusiers in the axils ot

ramuli (Pig. 15); individual stichidia basally

branched only (Fig. 16), oblong and swollen

where bearing tetrasporangia, On & narrower

stalk, 300-400(-500) jum Tong und (TO0-) 120-

150(-170) ym broad. Tetrasporangia in lwo

series, 75-100 pm long and 40-60 pm broad,

Type loelity—Eneounter Bay, S. Aust,

(Hussey),

Type—Herb Agardh, LD, 28174.

Disiribution—From Encounter Bay, S.

Aust. to Warrnambool fan Gabo fs.), Vie.

and araund Tasmania Found on coasts of

strong wilve action und known from depths

of 10 (0 26 m, A Sterile specimen, ap-

parently of this species, is krown from

Elliston. Eyre Peoinsula, S. Aust,

P. patagiatim was not distinguished from

Po omertensii until 1894, and untl then had

probably been included under the latter, How-

ever. its distribution is restricted compared to

that of P) mertensti which occurs all along

southern Australia, and i differs clearly in

the form and size of the stichidia (which are

shorter, slouter und more clavate than in P.

mertensti) and usually in the haba and fornt

of the upper and lower ramul. In contrase to

Po mertensii, the upper ramulus of P, peitayia-

tum is broadly digitate and often remains

dormant and the lower ramulus remains tn-

divided, A few sterile specimens appear to be

intermediate in form between these two spectes

hut tetrasporaungial specimens wre readily dis-

tinguished.

4, Plocumium mertensit (Greville) Harvey

1847, 122; I8$5a: 553. J. Agacdh

1852; 401; 1876; 346. De Toni 1900-

399, Guiler T1952: 90. Lucius 1909:

35; 19294. 19, 1929b- 50. Lucas &

Perrin 1947: 215, fg, 80. May 1965:

372, Mazza 1921: 1545 (No. 767).

Reinbold 1897: 52, Sonder 1853; 682)

1880: 19. Tate 18825 19, Tepper

1883: 66, Tisdall 1893; 507. Wilson

1892; 178. Womersley 1950: 170;

1966; 147.

Figs. 12-16.

Figs. 17-23,

(Opposite

page)

H. B. 8S. WOMERSLEY

Habit. West Is., S. Aust. (Shepherd, June 1966; ADU, A30568).

P, patagiatum, Fig. 12.

Fig. 13.—Branch with cystocarps in axils of ramuli, West Is., S. Aust. (Shepherd, June

1966; ADU, A30568). Fig. 14.—Cluster of spermatangial branches in axil of ramulus.

Port Elliot, S. Aust. (Womersley, 23.v.1953: ADU, A18720). Fig. 15.—Stichidial

branch (A30568), Fig. 16.—Stichidia (A30568).

P. mertensii. Fig. 17.—Habit. West Ts., S. Aust. (Shepherd, 13.vi.1970: ADU, A35914).

Fig. 18—Habit of the form with much-branched lower ramuli, Tipara reef, S, Aust.

(Shepherd, 24.vi, 1970; ADU, A35943). Fig. 19.—Branch with cystocarps in axils of

ramuli (A35914). Fig. 20.—Branch with axillary clusters of spermatangial filaments.

Daly Head, Yorke Pen., S. Aust. (Woelkerling, 22.iv.1969; ADU, A34138). Fig. 21—

Spermatangial branches from a cluster (A34138). Fig. 22.—Stichidial branch (A39514).

Fig. 23.—Stichidia (A39514).

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 17

Is H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

FIGS 17-23

Thamnophoara nrertensti Greville 1830: xhix,

Sonder 1846; 193.

Thamnocarpus mertensil (Grey.) — Kuetzing

1849 S87. 1BRG: 19, pl. SSd-h,

Delesseria placaniwn var. procerim C, Agardh

1823: IR; 1824: 357.

Thamnaphara procera (C. Agardh) J. Agardh

(hdl: 10. Harvey 1844: 447.

Plocamiunt procera (C. Agardh) Hooker &

Harvey (845; 442; 1847: 404. J. Agardh

}852) 400: 18746: 347, De Toni 1900; 600.

Guiler 1952: 90. Harvey i847: 122,

W8S5u: S53, 1859b: FIX; Tk62> pl, 223

(inel. Var. pertensii), L863, synop,: 39

Gack var. mreriensii). Kuelzing 1R49: BRE:

1866; 19, pl S4a-d? (muy be P. patugia-

noe). Leveine 14: 929. Lucus $9095 Fa!

19299, 19: [929h; S50. Lueas & Perrin

1947: T14. Ne, 79, Muy 1965; 372. Mazza

192); (547 (No, 768), Reinbold 1897; 52,

Sonder 1853: 682: IKSO: 19. Tate L&R?:

19. Tisdall 1893: S07, Wilsan 1892: 178.

Mlocamtin praverdin vue nidifienn Harvey

1863) synap.: 39 (nomen nudum).

Moramunn nidiheum Harvey ex J. Agurdh

(87h: 346: 1894: 1341, De Toni 1900:

S99, yy: 317. De Yoni & Forti 1923:

32, ol, UE 6-7, Levring 1946- 292, Lueas

1909; 35; 1929h: 30 Lucus & Perrin 1947:

214. Muy 1965: 372. Reinhold 1897: 52:

1899: 45. Sonder 18802 19. Tale IRR2: 19.

Tepper 1883: 66, Tisdall (893; 307. Wilson

wag2: 178, Womersley VY50: 170; 1993:

Thallus (Pigs. 17, 18) to 50 ent high, much

branched with spreading laterals. Erect axes

(1-)2-3{-S) mm broad. thin and delicate in

younger regions whieh are usually broader

than older purts of axes, Ramuli in alternate

pairs: upper ramulus divided, often developing

mlo # lateral branch, lower ramulus subulate,

(4-)1-14(-5) mm long and usually less than

{mm hroud at its hase, entire or serrate in its

upper part either on the abaxial cdge only or

on both edges: lower ramulus frequently be-

coming divided and often proliferaning inte

dense clusters of sub-ciehotanious pinnules

which may occur commonly on older branches

(Pig. 18), or on occasional branches. or he

totally absent m some plants (Fig. 16). Cysre-

carps in axils of either of the two ramuli,

1-2(-3) maturing, globular und pedivellate.

4-}(-1) mm diam... yrising on small branchlets

in the #xils (Pig, 19). Spermafangia covering

the Surface of terete branchlets in dense axil-

lary clusters (Figs. 20, 21). Suehidia in dense

hemispherical clusters arising from a pad of

Ussue in the uxil of either ramulus, or of

laterals (Fig. 22); individual stichidia (Fig,

23) simple or branched basally only, linear,

1-4(-l)mm long and (S0-175-100(-125) em

broad, becoming curved us they clongate;

eecasional old. eclangate stichidia become

branched near their apex. Tetrasporangia in

1 or 2 series, ovate, 50-75 «xm long and 25-50

um broad

Type

(Frayer).

Type—Herb, Greville. B,

Disiribution—From Nickol Bay, north-

west of W. Aust. to San Remo, Vic, and

around Tasmania. Found on eoasts of strong

to moderitte wave action and Known Irom

shaded pools near low tide jevel and depths

down to 50m

The range of yariation in this species is con-

siderable though most specimens are readily

recognised The frequent presence of much-

divided ramiuli tthe lower of each pair) form-

ing conspicuous tufis. characterises many

specimens which were deseribed as a separate

Variety or species, nfdificuim. However. many

plants are totally without such tufts. while

others form them only oeeasionully ar on

certain branches. The type specimens ol P.

nertenyii and OF Py precerua are essentially

without stich cufts,

Apatt from this variable feature, PL amer

tensii is characterised by its tnuch branched,

rather thin, thallus with relatively broyd axes

pedivellate evystocarps and unbranched. linear

oy cilpyed und relatively long and slender

suchidia, The spermatangia ure borne Gn much

branched tults in the axils af the upper pamu-

lus of each pair, as distinet (rom the vegetative

tufts developing from the lower raniulus. Cyste-

curps normally originute on only slightly

branched «axillary branchlets, but ja one speci-

mien trom Geographe Bay, W. Aust. (in MEL)

gystocarp beating tufts are densely branehed.

similir lo those bearing spermatungia.

Po merrensii is most elosely related tw P

putlagiatunt, differences are discussed under the

Jutter Species.

This species, us PF. proceruni hus been

credited to other countries, The earliest cde-

scription. as Delesseria plocamiin var pro.

cerum C. Agardh, was based on specimens

from Western Australia and South Africa, but

J. Agardh (1841. p, 10) in raising this variecy

to specific rank excluded the South African

specimen. J. Agardh’s species. was. however.

then pre-dated by Th. mertensii Greville 1830.

The cambination Po praceriun (C. Agardh)

Hooker & Harvey (1845, p, 542) was estah-

lished for a New Zealand record, but the pre-

sence of this tuxon in New Zealand has not

lovality ~“Nevae Wollandiae’

Figs. 24-28.

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 19

Ps sate versa Witatietuin may

P. dilatatum. Fig. 24.— Habit. Lady Bay, Southport, Tas. (Wollaston & Mitchell,

27.11.1964: ADU, A27528). Fig. 25.—Branch with cystocarps in axils of ramuli. Point

Roadknight. Vic. (Womersley, 6.vi.1953; ADU, A18789). Fig. 26—Male branchlets

at apex of a branch. Marion Bay, Tas. (Shepherd, 13.41.1970; ADU, A35637). Fig. 27.

—Stichidial branch (A35637), Fig. 28—Stichidia (A35637).

an H. BOS, WOMERSLEY

been satisfactorily established although it is

recorded by severul authors (e.g. Harvey

1855b, p 246, Laing 1927, p. 160; 1939, p

155),

5. Plocaniun dilatatum |. Agardh 1876: 347.

De Toni 1900) 601, Gruiler 1952. 90,

Lucas 1909; 35; [429a; 19; 1929h;

30. Lucas & Perrin 1947. 215. May

1965) 372. Reinbold 1898: 46, Sonder

1880; 19, Tate (882" 19. Tisdall

1803. S07,

FIGS. 24-28

‘Thallus (big. 24) ereet. robust, much

branched, to 25 em high trom the prostrate

hase, Erect axes ()4-}2-24(-34) mm broad,

centrally thickened and heeoming costate

below, Ramuli in alternate pairs: lower ramu-

lus robust, (14-)2-3(-4) mim long and about

To mm broad at its base, with the adaxial side

usually straight ancl the abmvxial side convex

with course. short serrations. C\ystecurps aris-

ing trom small xillury branchlets (Fig. 25),

uppearing pedicellate, globular and smooth

surtaced. Spermatangia (observed in one

specimen anly) covermeg the surface of small

hut normal branchlets ansing in the axils of

Upper ramul) (Fig, 26). Sresiedia in clusters

(Fig. 27) to 14 min high in axils of ramutli,

basally branched only: individual stichidia

(Fig. 28) clavate, with vw relatively slender

pedical, 2-1 mm long and about 250 pm broad.

Telrusporungia im two distinct series. YO-150

om long by 60-80 pm broad,

Leclatype locality Tasminia,

Herb. Agardh. LD

Distibuven—From Eneounter Bay anil

“Adelaide”, S. Aust. to Port Phillip Bay,

Vie, and around Tasmania (doubtfully from

New Zealand). Found on cousts of strong to

moderate wave action and known from

depths of 3-22 m.

In his original description, J. Agardh gave

hoth New Zealand and Tasmania as localities.

und Latog (1927, p. 159) credits it to New

Zealund but later expresses doubt (1939, p.

154). 1. Agardh’s formal description included

Ty pe-

referred to pedicellate eysiociups as well as

the characteristic suchidia, The Tasmanian

specimens in Herb, Agardh bear stichidia us

described by J. Agurdh, whereas the New

Zealand specimen (from Otago. LD. 28210) os

cystocurpic. Since the original description (as

distinct fram the discussion) covered only

stichidia, and the species is based largely on.

and characterised by. these siructures, one of

the stichidial Tasmanian specimens should be

regarded us lectotype of the species.

Only one ¢ystocarpic southem Australian

specimen af P. dilatatum has been seen (ADU,

AI8789 from Point Roadknight. View). Here

the cystocarps arise From soiall axillary branch-

lets of normal form and the slender branchler

forms the stalk oF thre ecystocarp, No stichidinl

specimens (similar to the Australian ones)

from New Zealiund have heen seen and it

remains to be established that P, dilaratunm

does occur in New Zealand,

FP. dilhitatum is characterised by the mussive

suchidia borne on slender pedicels in axillary

clusters. It as superficially similar to P. costae

run (Which has slenderer, branched slichidia) ,

hut the thallus of P. dildtatie is more robust

with somewhat larger ramuli. Experience with

these species permis their separation on thallus

features ulone.

6. Plocamium preissianum Sonder 1845: 354;

B46: 192. 1853: 682, J. Agardh

I8S2: 309; [876s 342. De Toni loo:

S94; 1924: 316. De Tom & Fort

1923; 32, Harvey I85So: 553: |859a:

pl. 3: 1863. synop.: 39. Kuerzing

1849: 885; 1866: 14 pl 53d-f (fig.

as PL preissii), Leyring 1946; 222,

Lucas T90U: 34: 1929b: 50. Lucas &

Perrin )947; 2I1. fig. 75. May 1965:

372. Mazeu 1908: 227 (No, 213)

Reinhold 1898: 46, Sonder 1853: 682;

S880: TI. Tate 1882: 19. Tisdall

1893: 507, Wilson 1898: 178 Wom-

ersiey 1950; 170. 1966: 147,

FIGS. 29-35

Thallus (Fig. 29) robust, to S50 em high.

Erect axes (1-)14-2(-4) mm broad, usually

the stichidia only but in the discussion he long and irregularly branched, becoming

Figs, 29-35. Po preissianun, Fig, 29,—Habit, West Is, S Aust (Shepherd. lavil970, ADU,

(opposite ABS5912). Fig, 30-—Branch with sessile, yverrucose. cystoearps. West Ts,, S. Aust.

page) (Shepherd, 1.0969; ADU, A33242). Fig. 31—Male braneh with spermatangial branch-

lets at apex (A33242). Fig. 32,—Branchlets bearing spermatangia (A33242). Fig. 33.

—Branch with typical axillary clusters of stichidia (A35912),

Fig. 34. —Branch with

stichidia extending wlong margins of branch and tumuh (4393242), Bre. 7 3.—Stichidia

(AS35912)

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 2)

22 WH, B.S. WOMERSLEY

thickened and sometimes appearing costate jn

older parts. Ramul in alternating series of

31-4), occasionally with some in pairs in cer-

tain plants, the uppermost ramulus (occasion-

ally the upper two) usually developing into 4

lateral branch; lower ramuli subulate to linear.

(14-)2-3(-4) mm long and (200-) 300-400

(-500) pm broad at their base, usually strongly

serrale abaxially (rarely entire). Cystacarpy

single or occasionally adjacent, sessife on the

axis or on either margin of the ramuli or

sessile in comparable positions on small axil-

lary branchlets, f-1(-14) mm across, globular

and becoming strangly verrucose (Fig. 30).

Spermatangia covering extensive areas on both

surfaces Of Young apices and ramult in male

plunts (Pigs, 31, 32), Stichidia in dense wxil-

lary clusters (Fig. 33) and frequently extend-

ing along the margins of the adjacent axis and

ramuli (Pig. 34): individual stichidia (Fig. 35)

simple or basally branched only, lineararcuate

(100-) 200-500, long (sometimes continuing

growth to LS mim long) and (25-)S0-75(-100)

pm broad, Tetrasporangla in 1-2 series. ovoid.

53-66 juin long and 40-53 jum broad,

Type localint-austro-oceidentale Novae

Hollandiae™ Preiss),

Type—MEL., 1005964.

Disiribution—trom the Abro'hos Islands

and Geraldion, W, Aust to Wilson's Pro-

montory, Vie. Common an coasts subject to

rough Wave action and known from depths

of 2 to 50m,

C, preissienum is one of the most distinctive

of the Australian species of Placamium and

is readily recognised when sterile by its robust.

relulively broad thallus and series of three

runuli. The sessile, verrucose eysfocarps and

spermatangial areas covering ramuli are a'so

distinctive compared to other robust species

hut the stichidia are rather similar to those of

P, merlensii,

This hus probably always been a well-under-

stood species, though Kuelzing (1866, p!.

53d-1) used the name 2. pretssii for his ilus-

tration Conly) and Harvey (1847, p, 122)

Figs, 329, Po curnlavinewmn,

incorrectly placed if uy a synonvm ob P,

costatiim, later (Harvey 18598, pl, 43) recog-

ising P. preissianum ax distinct.

7. Plocamium — cartilaginceum (1_.)

1967: 58.

FIGS, 36-39

Plocaniiunt coccineum (Hudson) Lyngbye.

Dixon

J. Agurdh 1852; 395; I876: 339,

Harvey 1846: pl. d4: | R47: 123:

M8554; S553; 1859b: 317; 1863,

synop.: 39. Kylin 1923; 49, figs, 34,

35, 1944: 53, pl. 10. fig. 37. Levnnu

1945: 17: 1946; 221. Sonder IRRU:

18. Tisdall 1893; 507. Womersley

1960; 147.

Plocuminny pusitum Sonder W845: 54; 1B46-

192: T8880: 18, J. Agardh L852: 405,

Harvey 1847, 123. Kuetzing [R49 SR.

Visdull 1893: 507. Wilson 1892: 178.

Plocumium angushin fo pusittum (Sonder)

Harvey 1863, synop.: 39,

Plocamiun leplophylliun sensu Lucas 19294"

19; 1929h; 50. Lucas & Perrin 19475 210,

fix. 74 (in part. excel fig. ¢). Reinbold

1899" 45. Sunder 1853; 683? Womersley

19502 170.

Thallus (Fig, 36) slender and much

branched. to 20 cm high. Erecr axes (4-) |-14

mm broad. Ramuli normally in alternate series

of 3-4, occasionally in pairs ar as mony as

5-10: normally all ramuli except the lowest

are branched, with the uppermost and somte-

limes the second developing as long laterals:

lowest ramulus subulate (o almost linear, often

curved, entire, 1-2(-24) mm long and about

F mm oor less broad at its base. Cysrecarps

sessile, globulur, smooth, 4} mm diam., borne

singly or several adjacent in the axils ar on the

margins of camuli (Pig. 37), Spermraraneia

eovering the surface of ramuli und axis in

upiciul regions (Fig. 38). Sriehidin borne in

the wails of tamuli or grouped of the upper

margin of ramuli and along the axis (Pig. 39),

usually simple and lanceolite al first but be-

caming branched at wide angles near their

ipper ends, sometimes — suhdichotaomously

branched I- times lower down; indlyidiual

stichidia (150-)250-400(-1000) jm long and

Fig. 36.—Habit. West Is. 8. Aust. (Shepherd. Wil 970: ADL,

ARS979). Fig. 37.—Bratch with sessile cystocarps (435979), Fig. 38.—Male brinch

with spenmatingial ans | A35979). Fig. 39—Suchidial branch (A35979)-

Figs. 40-42,

{opposite

page}

Branch bearing stichidia (A%ou1T)

P. leptopliylin, Fig. 40.—Huabit. West Is.. S. Aust. (Shepherd, 1.1.7969, ADU, A33238)

Fig, 41—Upper part of a branch with adventitious ramuli and hooked branch ends anu

lower ramuli, West Is. S. Aust. (Shepherd, 3.1970; ADU, A3GlT7y.

Fie. 42.

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

Yeu te ph agthaan Mardy

Phe mene

Ung hy Theote

So - wh

fal Oy Aust

ash

(ov vet

SSas

ae th,

44 H, B. S. WOMERSLEY

about 100 jam diam, with a short pedicel.

‘Tetrasporangia biseriute, avoid, 40-55 jum long

wud 27-32 pm broad.

Type lecaliiv—Northern Europe.

Type—L, “10, Tht... 14 (see Dixon

1967),

Distribution —From Rottnest ts., Wo Aust.

uround southern Australia to NeWweastle,

NLS.W. (probably to Caloundra, Old) and

around Tasnmunia. Found on coasts of strong

to moderate wave action and kaown from

depths of 2-26 m. Widespread in most tem-

perate and cold waters of both northern and

southern hemispheres,

Dixon (1967, p SS) bus shown that the

well-Knowo nume PL cuceinenian hus to he

rephiced by P. cartilage. Previous te this,

it had been kaown for some years as P. val

vare Lamx. (see Dixon).

The type of P. pusillin Sender (MEL.

1005815) includes young, sterile tragments

under 3 em high, with ramuli in series of

2or 3, Itas similar to better developed speci-

mens in PERTH which agree well with P.

cartilaginedin

P. cartilagingun is the only very widespread

species of Plocamiin, being recorded from

maoy temperate seas. The Australian forms

compare well in hubit with those from Burope

vind are distinctly less robust than the Pacific

North Americun forms distinguished — pre-

viously as P. ceceinenin var pucificuin J. Ag.

While there is considerable variation in habit

and dimensions within the complex, the con-

sient branching pattern, sessile cystocarps

and the morphology of the stichidia distinguish

the species.

Several variznes of P. cartilaginenmn (as P-

caccinewn) haye heen deseribed (J, Agardh

1852, p, 395; S76, p, 339) and these in-

cluded plants from Australia. Most of them

(ew, var, atstrale J, Agardh 1852, p. 395)

are apparently forms within 2. cartilugineum,

bul var. flexuoyun Hooker & Harvey (1847,

p. 404), based on Gunn 1335, is P. leplo-

phylum Kuetzing. Jo Agardh (1852. p. 396)

wive var. flexvosenr as a variety of PL eacei-

myn and ia 1876 (pp, 339) pave this variety

under PF. fepraphyllim larvey’s. Alo Aust,

Fas. 356 boas P. cocernenm var. fleawesin,

Salsa Po lepropliyliin, bur bis illustration

(1847, pl 43, as PL flexnaysin) is faulty in

that i does not show the adventiiious ramull

whigh aie present on both Gunn's und Harvey's

specimens.

Var. vaeinainin J, Agardh (1852, p, 396),

recorded by J, Agardh Jrom nnimy areas. fie

cluding Tasmania. appears to be bused on

specimens with recurved tumuli near the hase

of the thallus. Such reeurved ramuli ezeur to

several specics us part of rhe basal prostrate,

attachment system, bul ure distimer from the

frequent hooked ramuli on the upper paris af

Po leprophyllin

PL eystephyllion 1, Agord)) is a nomen

nudunt in Wilson (1892. p, 178) and Tisda’l

(1893, p, 507), Wilson's specimens so named

in MEL are of P. earulaeinewn, and some

numed as Po eyytaplwiinar var. flewiosun ure

P leptephyllain.

Relationships with P. leprophyllun ave

further discussed under this speetes.

8. Plocamium leptophyllum Kuelaing | 84%

ARS, T8660: 16. pl. 45a-c. J. Agardh

1852: 405; 1876: 338 (probubly ex-

cluding var. srrietim), De Tani 1900;

389; 1924: 314, Levring 1Y46; 222,

Lucus 1909; 34, Lucas & Perrin 1947:

210 (in part?). Reinhold 1897: 52,

Sonder 1853: G83; ISSO: LS (exclud-

ing some loc). Tisdill 189%; 507

Wilson 1898; 178

FIGS. 40-42

BP. lepraphyllan var. flexnosun J. Agardh i876:

339 De Toni 1900: 589,

PO eoceinenm var. fle eitetyitim

Tlarvey 1847; 404. J

Hooker &

Awardh (852: 294,

Guiler 1952: 9, Harvey t847: 124, pl.

43: I859b> 317, Kuetaing 1849: BRS.

Venda 1915. 114.

PL flecuasunt (Hooker & Harvey) Sonar 1853;

O82. Lucha 199945 [YL LUTb: SO.

Thallus (Pig. 40) delicate. usually epiphyte

on other algae. densely branched with clus-

tered fronds from indefinite entungled bases,

to 15 em high, Axes often slightly to distinetty

flexuous and frequently bearing haoked branch-

lels corresponding to the branch apex or the

lowest ramulus of a series: axes ubout ! mm

browd above, heconting slightly thickened and

subterete below. Raniuli in alternate series ol

(3-)4-5, sub-lineur. commonly all branched

except the lowest. with sbort, sdventitious

tumuli developing on the margin of the axis

hetween the series (Fig, 41) und also between

ramuli of the series, frequently forming an

almost continuous fringe of ramuli along the

branches; lowest ramuli in the series l-14 mm

long and about 50(-100) pani broud ot their

hyse. Sexual plants unknown. Srielitdia 200-

250(-750) pm Jong and 75-100 am broad,

borne singly or in groups in the axils or on

the upper edge of ihe ramult (Fig. 42), simple

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 25

of branched at wide angles in their upper

parts, lanceolate With a short pedicel and

nsually with an acute, sterile tip. Tetra-

sporangia in one of two rows, ovoid, about

40 ym long.

Type focaliey — Georgctown, Tasmania

(Guan 1335). Two isolype specimens are in

NSW.

Type—L, 941, 181 ,. . 471.

Distribarion—From West Is. (Encounter

Bay), S. Aust. to Wilson's Promontory,

Vic., and around Tasmania, Usually epi-

phytic on other algae on coasts of strong

Wave action and kaown from depths of

2-25 m,

P. leptophyllum Kucizing 1849 is the earliest

valid name for this species, though Hooker

and Harvey (1847, p, 404} and Harvey (1847,

p. 124) had distinguished it previously as P,

coccinenm vat. flexwosunt [Harvey (1847, pl.

43) uses the uame PL flexwosumn under his

lustration but not in the texl], Both P. fepro

phyllum Kuetzing and P, coceinevn var.

fiexnoxam Hooker & Harvey are based on

Gann 1335 from Georgetown, Tasmunia,

FL feptaphyllum is most closely related to

slender forms of P, curtilagineum but is readily

distinguished by the presence of adventitious

ranmuli and usually by the hooked ends to

heanches and some lower ramuli. No sexual

plants have been recorded and few (ctra-

sporangial plants are known. P. leptopleyliene

is normally an entangled epiphyte on other

species of Plocamium ov other bushy algae.

However, P. cartilaginewm and P, fepro-

phylum have frequently been confused in

southern Australian records, Reinhold’s (1899,

p. 43) record of the latter from Investigator

Strait, S, Aust, as represented by specimens

in ADU, is slender P. cartifaginenin. Probably

other references to P. Jeplophwihen are based

on specimens which include P. cariilaginewmn,

at least in parnt_ Comparisons such as those

of De Toni (1900, p, 390) and Lucas (1919,

p. 13) are based only io part on true P, lepio-

phyllam and involve mainly forms of P. ciyri-

fagincum. P. Jeptophyllim in the key of May

(1965, p. 372) does not involve the essential

characters and includes mainly FP. certilugt-

neum, The record of Lucas (1931, p, 55) from

Rockingham Bay. Qid.. probably applies to

P. cartilagineunt, as does that of Lucas (1935,

p. 221) from Lord Howe Is,

P. deptophyllum vac, strictum J, Agatdh

(1876, p. 338), is prohably a form of P.

cartiaginewm, Var, reeurvatuen J, Agardh

(1376, p. 339) from “Tasmania and New

Zealand” needs investiguiton from the type

material.

P, feptophyllum has been recorded from

New Zeulund (Laing 1927, p. 159; 1939, p-

155) and specimens in ADU (such as Lin-

dauer’s Alg. Nov-Zel. Exs. 193) show the

form anil presence of adyentifious ramuli

characteristic of this species; booked ramuli,

however, are virtually absent in the ADU

specimens, Comparison of further fertile

material is needed to confirm the presence of

P, leptephyllum in New Zealand. The record

from the Auckland Islands (Papenfuss 1944,

p. 36) is unlikely to he P: leprophyilunt.

P. leptephyllam has been recorded also

from Japan (Yendo 19175, p, 113}, and as

P. leptophyllum vat. flexuesun by Okamura

(1913, p. L4, pl, 103 (6-7)), Arasaki (1964,

p, 99, fig. 355) and Segawa (1956. p. 86, fiz,

408), The tilustrations and descriptions of

these authors indicate that the Japanese plants

are probahly forms of P. cartilaginenm and nat

true PL feprephylfum, and although Yeddo

{1935, p. 114) in also recording P. coceineum

var, flexucsum: comments on the presence of

adventitious ramuli as characteristic in this

variety, there is no statement that they occur

in Japanese plants-

Biogengraphy of Plocamiam in Southern

Australia

Eight species of Plocamitin accut along

southern Ausiralla, but only two extend

throughout this region, viz. the widespread

P. cartilaginesm and also P. mertensti. The

next most widespread species, P, preissianum,

occurs all along southern Australia (to central

Victoria) but not in Tasmania. Only these

three species are found in southern Western

Australia.

All eight species occur in the eastern region,

ie. in eastern South Australia and in Victoria.

P. angustum and P. costetum ate found as fac

west as the west coast of Eyre Peninsula, §,

Aust, and in the east extend inte N.S.W, Three

species, P. dilatatuni, P. leprephylltm and P-

petagiaium are apparently limited to the region

from about Victor Harber. S. Aust. ta Wil

son’s. Promontory, Vic. and around Tasmania,

This distribution is in general agreement

with that of many other southern. Australiaa

Marine algae, with 2 slrong eastem group.

moderate general southern Australian proup

and smaller western group of species,

The range of species of Plocamium up the

N.S.W. coast is not well known, This applies

26 H. B. 3. WOMERSLEY

particularly to P. angustum and P. cartilagé-

etn. Occurrence of southern Australian

species outside Australia (¢,g. in New Zea-

land) must also be regarded with dowbt, but

on the basis of the above descriptions of the

southeen Australian specics it is hoped that

comparisons with festile, liquiu-preserved

material will establish the relationships of Aus-

tralian and New Zealand specres.

Acknowledgements

Tam grateful to the Directors of the State

Herbaria of Western Australin, Victoria and

N.S.W,, and to the Departments of Botany of

the University of Weslern Australia, University

of Melbourne aid University of Queensland,

for Ioan of their collections af Flocamium,

The Perrin collection in the British Museum

(N.1h) was also Kindly made available for

study.

Technical assistance was provided through

the Australian Research Grants Committee

and 1 am grateful to them and to Mrs, E, 1.

Robertson for this assistance. Many recen| and

abundant collections of Plucamium were made

hy Mr. S. A. Shepherd by SCUBA diving and

has assistance is acknowledged.

References

Acaapit, C. A. (4623).—"Species Algacum". Vol,

1, Pl. 2, gp. 169-53),

Acanoy, ©. A. (1824),—‘‘System

(Lund, )

Acaron, J, G, (1841).—In historiam algarum

symbolae. Linnaea 15, 1-50, 443-57,

AuanouH, J, G, (1852).—"Spevies, Genera et Or-

dines Alparum”. Vol, 2, Pt. 2, pp. 337-720.

(Lund. )

Aqaarpi, J, G. (1876),—" pecies, Genera el Or-

dines Algarum”. Vol. 3, Pt, 1, pp, 1-724—

Fpigrisis systematis Floridearam, (Lund.)

Acarpn, J, G, (1894),—Analecta. algologica, Cunt,

T. Acta Univ. lund. 29, 1-444, Plates 1, 2.

Arasakt, S, (1964)—How io know the seaweeds

of Japan and its vicinity, (Hokuryakan,)

CuArMan, V. 3. (1961),—A contribution to the

ccology of the Kermadec Islands, Pacif. Sci.

15, 347-351.

De Toni, J, B, (190)—"Sylloge Algarum om-

nium hucusque Cognitarium”. Vol. 4, Flovi-

deac. Sect, 2, pp. 387-776. ( Padua.)

ber ‘Tony, J, B, (1924)-—"Sylloge Algarum: om-

Tium hucusque Cognitarium"™. Vol, 6, Flori-

sleae. | Padua.)

Dre. Tone, J. B. & Forty, A. (1923).—Alghe di

Australia, Tosmanise, Nuova Zalanda.

Memurte R. (si. veteto Ye. 29 (3), 1-183.

Dison, P. S. (1967),—The aypilicution of Frens

cartilepineus L. and F, corners Huds, Blenea

15, 55-62.

Ewart, A. J. (1907)—Notes on a collectian of

marine algse from King Island. Fécterian

War, 23, 90-2, ;

Guevitte, BR K. (1830}—"“Algac Britannicac".

(Edinburgh. '

Guinier, E, RK. (1952).—The marine algae of

Tasmunia: check list with localities, Pay.

Proc, R. Soc, Tasm, 86, 71-106,

Ijakver, W. H. (1844).—Algac of ‘asmania.

Lond, J. Bot. 3, 428-54. ;

Harvey, W. H. (1846)—"“Phycologia Britan-

nica”, Yor. 1. (London.)

Harver, Wi. H, (1847)—"Nerets Anstralis”.

(Reeve: London.)

Harver, W. HW. (1855a).—Some account of the

marine botany of the colony of Western

Australia, Trans. &. Tr. Acid. 22, 525-66.

Harvey, W.H, (1855b),—Algae. fa J, BD, Hooker,

“The Botany of the Antarctic Voyage’. Part

Algarum”,

1], Flora Novae-Zelaniiae. Vol. 2, pp. 211-16,

Plates 107-121.

HaRvey, W. H. (1859a),—"Phycologia Aus-

tralicn”. Vol, 2, Plates 61-120.

Harvey, W. H. (1859b).—Alone, Jn 1. 1, Hooker,

“The Botany of the Amarctic Voyage”. Pact

(it. Flora Tasinanive. Vol. 2, pp. 282-343,

Plates [85-196.

Llanvey, W. A, (1862),—“PRycolugia Australicn”,

Vol. 4, Plates 181-240.

Hagvey, W. HH, (18639) —“Phycologia Australica”.

Vol. 5, Plates 241-300, synop., pp, 1-73

Hooker, J, BD. & Harvey, W, H. (1845)—Algae

Novae Zelandiae. Lend. J. But, 4, 421-51,

Hooker, J. D. & Hanvey, W, H. (1847).—Algae

Tasmanicae. Lond. J. Bot, 6, 397-417.

Kuetzina, F, T. (1849),—"“Species Algarumn”™.

(Leipzig. )

KurrinG, BT. (1866).—"Tabulae Phycolopicae’™.

Vol. 16. (Nordtausen,)

Krom, H. (1923).—Studien iiber die Pnritwick-

lungsgeschichte der Plorideca. K, svemske

VerenskAkad., Handl. 63, 1-139.

KrLis, H. (1944)—Die Rhodophyceen der

Schwedischen Westkiiste. Acta Univ. land,

N.F. Avd..2, 40 (2), 1-1b4, pl, 1-32.

Laine, R. M. (1927),—A reference list of New

Zealand marine algae. Trans, Prec. NiZ. Inar

57, 126-185,

Tans, RK. M. (1939).—-New Zealand Seaweeds—

Reference list Na. TT. The RKhodophyceac—

Part A. (RBangiales, Nemalionales, Crypto-

Remiales, and Gigartinales), Trans, Proc, R,

Soc, N.Z, #9, 134-164,

hevring, 'T. (1945)—Marine alguc fron some

Antarctic and Sub-antarctic Islands. Acta

Univ. lend. NUE, Avd. 2,41 (7), (-36, Plate 1,

LEvRING, T. (1946)—A list of marine alpac from

Australia and Tasmania. Acta Hartt gotho-

burg 16, 215-27.

Lucas, A. II. 5. (1909).—Revised list of the

Fucoideac and Floridcas of Australia. Proc.

Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 34, 9-60.

Lucas, A. H. S$, €1919).—The algae of Common-

wealth Bay, Australasian Antarctic Expe-

dition 1911-14. Scientific Reports, Seriey C—

Zoology and Botany, Vol. VII, Part 2, pp,

5-18, Plates 1-9.

Twucas, A. H. S..(19294)—The marine algae of

Taleo, Pup. Prov. R. Sav. Tasm, 1928,

PLOCAMIUM IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 27

Lucas, A. H, S. (1929b).—A census of the marine

algae of South Australia. Trans. R, See, 8.

Ansi. 53, 45-53.

Lucas, A. H. S. (i1931)—Tbe marine algae

hitherto recorded from north-east Australia,

Rep. Gt. Barrier Reef Comm. 3, 47-57.

Lucas, A, H. &. (1935).—The marine algue of

Lord Howe Island. Proc. Linn, Soc. NWSW,

60, 194-232, Plates 5-9.

Lucas, A. H, S. & Perrin, F. (1947) —“The Sea-

weeds of South Australia”. Part Il The Red

Seaweeds. pp, 109458. (Goyt. Printer:

Adelaide, )

May, V. (1965).—A census and key to the specics

of Rhodophyceaée (red algae) recorded from

Australia, Contr. N.S... natn. Herb. 3, 349-

429,

Mazza, A. (1908),—“‘Sagegio di Algologia Occan-

ica”. Nuova Notarisia 19, Nos. 202-225,

Mazza, A. (1921)—‘“Sapgio di Algologia Ocean-

ica.. Nuova Noetarisia 32, Nos. 738-769.

Navior, M, (1954) —A check list of the marine

algae of the Dunedin district. Trans. R. Soc.

N.Z. 82 (3): 645-663.

Oxamura, K, (1913)-—‘“Teones of Japanese

Algae”, Vol. 3 (1), pp. 1-24, Plates 101-105.

OxamMurs, K, (1923)—‘“Icones of Japanese

ro el Vol. 4 (10), pp. 185-205, Plates 196-

Oxamurs, K, (1932)—'Tceones of Japanese

Algae’, Vol, 6 (10), pp. 91-96, Plates 296-

3K).

Papenruss, G. F. (1964).—Catalogue and biblio-

graphy of antarctic and subantarctic benthic

marine algae. Am. geophys, Un, Antarctic

Res. Ser,, Vol. 1, pp. 1-76,

Retngorp, T. (1897)—Die Algen der Lacepede

und Guichen Bay. Nuova Notarisia 8, 41-62.

Remsgorp, T. (1898).—Die Algen der Lacepede

und Guichen Bay (Siid Australien) und deren

niherer Umgebung, gesammelt von Dr. A,

Engelhart-Kineston. HW. Nuova Notarisia 9,

33-54.

ReinBoLD, T. (1899).—Meerésalgen von Investi-

gator Street (Siid Australicn), gesammelt von

Miss Nellie Davey (Waltham, Honiton).

Hedwigia 38, 39-51.

Secawa, S. (1956)—Coloured illustrations of the

seaweeds of Japan. (Haikusha, Osaka.)

SHEPHERD, 5. A. & WOMERSLEY, H, B, S. (i970).

—The sublittoral ecology of West Island,

South Australia. I. Environmental feaiures

and the algal ecology. Trans, R. Soc. 9. Aust.

94, 105-138.

Sonper, O. G. (1845) —Nova algarum genera et

Species, quas in itinere ad oras occidontales

Novae Hollandiae, collegit L. Preiss, Ph,Dr.

Bot. Ztg. 3, 49-57.

Sonoer, O. G. (1846) —Algac. In C. Lehmann,

“Plantae Preissianae”. Vol. 2. pp, 148-195.

(Hamburg. )

Sonper, O, G, (1853)—Plantae Muellerianac,

Algae. Linnaea 25, 657-709.

Sonper, Ow. G. (1855)—Algac annis 1852 et

1853 collectae. Linnqeq 26, 506-68,

Sonvex, O. G. (1880)—/n F, von Mueller,

“Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae”. Sup-

plementum ad volumen undecinum: Algae

Australianae hactenus cognitae. Pp. 1-42,

105-7.

TATE, R. {1882).—A list of the charas, mosses,

liverworts, lichens, fungs, and algals of extra-

tropical South Australia, Trans, R. Sve, S.

Aust. 4, 5-24.

Tepper. J. G. OG. (1883)—Botanical notes re-

lating to South Australia, Trans. R. Soc, §.

Aust. 6, 65-7,

TispaLL, H. T. (1898).—The algae of Victoria.

Rep. 7th Mect. Aust. Ass. Adv, Sci., Sydney,

1898, pp. 493-516.

Witson, J, B. (1892).—Casaloguc of algae col-

lected at or near Port Phillip Heads and

Western Port. Prac. R, Soc. Viet, 4, 157-90.

Womrrstey, H. B. S. (1950},—The marine algae

of Kangaroo Island, Ill, List of species 1.

Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. 73, 137-97,

Womerscey, H. B. 8S. (1953)—The Archipelago

of the Recherche. 3b. Marine ulgae. Ausz.

geogr. Sac, Rep. 1 (3b), 36-9.

Womers.ey, H. B, S. (1966).—Port Phillip survey,

1957-1963: Algae. Mem. natin. Mus., Vict.

No, 27, 113-56.

Yenpo, K, (1915)—Notes on algae new to

Japan. IU. Bot. Mag., Tokyo 29, 99-117,

Yenpo, K. (1918)—Notes on algae new to

Japan, VII. Bot. Mag,, Tokyo, 32, 65-81 .

LARGE GASTROPODS OF THE FAMILIES DIASTOMATIDAE AND

CERITHITDAE (MOLLUSCA: GASTROPODA) IN SOUTHERN

AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. LUDBROOK

Summary

The stratigraphical and geographical distribution of species of Diastoma (Miocene to Recent),

Campanile (Miocene to Recent), Jetwoodsia (Eocene to Miocene), Thericium s.str. (Pilocene),

Thericium (Chavanicerithium) (Lower Micene to Pleistocene) in sedimentary basins of southern

Australia are determined.

Three species of Diastoma, D. adelaidense Ludbrook sp. Nov., D. melanioides (Reeve) and D.

provisi Tate; three species of Campanile, C symbolicum Iredale, C. triseriale Basedow and C.

virginiese Ludbrook sp. Novy.; two species of Jetwoodsia gen. Nov., J apheles (Tenison Woods) and

J. nullarborica (Chapman & Crespin); Thericium (T.) fallax (Ludbrook), ad eight species of

Thericium (Chavanicerithium), T. (C.) adelaidense (Howchin & Cotton), T. (C.) darraghi

Ludbrook sp. Nov., T. (C.) flemingtonense (McCoy), T. (C.) pritchardi (Harris), T. (C.) tatei

Ludbrook sp. Nov., T. (C.) torri (Tate), T. (C.) westraiense Ludbrook sp. Nov. and T?. (C?.)

wynyardense Tate) are described or noted.

LARGE GASTROPODS OF THE FAMILIES DIASTOMATIDAE AND

CERITHUDAE (MOLLUSCA : GASTROPODA) IN SOUTHERN

AUSTRALIA

by N. H. Luparook®

Summary

The stratigraphical and geographical distsibution of species of Digstoma (Miocene ta Recent),

Campanile (Miocene to Recent}, Jefwoodsia (Eocene to Miocene), Thericium s.sir, (Pliocene),

Thentcium (Chavanicerithium) (Lower Miocene to Pleistocene} in sedimentary basins of southern

Austvalia are determined,

Three species of Diastoina, D. ddelaidense Ludbrook sp. nov., D, melanivides (Reeve) and

D, provisi ‘Tate; three species of Cumpanile, C. symnbolicum Iredale, C. triseriale Basedow and C.

virginiense Ludbrook sp, nov.; two species of Jefwoodsia gen. nov,, J, apheles (Fenison Woods) and

J. nullarhorica (Chapman & Creapin); Therlcium (7,) fallax (Ludbrook), and eight species of Thevi-

clum (Chavanicerithinn), T. (C.) adelaidense (Howchin & Cotton), T, (C.) darraghi Ludbrook

sp. nov., T. (C,) flewningionense (McCoy), T, (C.) pritvhardi (Harms), T.

(C.) fatet Ludbriiok sp.

nov., T, (C.) forri (Tate), T. (C.) westrallense Ludbrook sp. nov. and T?. (C?.) wynyardense (Tate)

ate described or noted.

Introduction

Middle and late Cuinozoic molluscan as-

semblages in the limestones and sandy lime-

stanes of the Eucla and St, Vincent Basins

characteristically contain large bivalves, mostly

Milthe and Anodontia, and gastrapeds Cam-

pande and Diastomtu, often only in the form of

casts and moulds. Over a period of some ninety

yeurs rocks containing these genera have been

correlated with one another, first. us of Miocene

age, und more recently as Pliocene,

It is now known that the association hegan

in the Miocene of the Eucla and $t. Vincent

Basins, flourished in the late Pliocene of the

St. Vincent Basin and early Pleistocene of the

Eucla Basin, with the gastropods surviving in

present scas of the western part of the Pila-

derstan Provinee of southern Australia. Sys-

tematic revision of the large gastropods became

necessary during a monographic study of

Pleistocene molluscs from the Roé Plain at

the western end of the Eucla Basin. Rich

collections have recently been made along the

Ryre Highway and from foundation holes ex-

cavated for the Hampton Microwave Repeater

Tower site. 33 miles (53 kilometres) east of

Maditra,

The molluscan assemblage containing Miltha

first appears In the Nullarbor Limestone (Lud-

brook 1969), the Melton Limestone near Wal-

laroo, northern Yorke Peninsula, and the

limestones at Deep Creek, 20 miles (32 kilo-

metres) south-west of Whyalla, Whyalla 1:

250,000 geological sheet (Lindsay 1970), all

of Miocene age. Great care must be exercised

in assessing the stratigraphical position of rocks

containing the Diastoma-Campanile-A nedortia-

Miltha assemblage since some of the species

such as Diastorma adelaidense and Analonta

sphevicula are Jong-tanging and only the

accompanying molluscs and foraminifera and

the lithology will distinguish the Miocene from

the Pliocene limestones.

From field observations and study of the

microfaunas and lithologies, Lindsay (1970)

has shown that limestone outcrops on northern

Yorke and Eyre Peninsulus are of Miocene

age, and not Pliocene as previously recorded,

particularly by the present writer. Limestones

of Miocene age in the Eucla Basin and those

south of Whyalla and at Wallaroo and Tickera

which have been recorded as Pliocene or cor-

related with wnits now known to be of Plio-

cene age are: the crystalline limestones at

Tickera (Melton Limestone) and “Bunda Cliffs

marbles” (Nullarbor Limestone) correlated by

Tate (1379, p. iii) with the “Upper Aldinga

Series” {j.e, the Hallett Cove Sandstone);

sumples Sl and $3 from the surface near

Koonalda, Abrakurrie and Weebubbie Caves

determined by Crespin [in King 1949, p. 57)

as. Lower Pliocene, but presumably as Sample

$2 from the Nullarbor Limestone; at the foot

of Poynton Scarp and in Deep Creek (Miles

* 110 Watson Avenue. Toorak Gardens, §. Aust. 3065-

Trans. R. Soe, S. Aust. Vol, 95, Part I, i7th March 1971

1952, p. 96, pl. VIT; Cotton it Miles 1955,

p- 25; and Ludhrook in Miles 1955, p. 25);

localities 2 and 3 of Ludbrook (1959, p. 220;

1963, fig. 1; 1967a, fig. 3); and of Crawford

(1965, p. 36)—-"6 feet of nodular limestone

of Pliocene age near Wallaroo and Point

Hughes".

N. H. LUDBROOK

Acknowledgements

Material used in this study is in thé collec-

lions of the Department of Geology, Univer-

sity of Adelaide (AUGD), Geological Sur-

yeys of South Australia (GSSA) and Western

Australia (GSWA), Western Austrulian (WAM)

and South Australian (SAM) Museums, and

NGORTHEAN

TERRITORY

WESTERN

AUSTRALIA

EUCLA BASIN|

ee —— 18 —~ gy_viNCENTS |

yg BA

REFERENCE

Suminer isotherm °C ek eel

Winler lemperature "C____ 16

PMB SOM NH Ludbyuek 1971

QUEENSLAND

{ Tropre of Copricorn t

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

}

VICTORIA K.

Fig. 1. Australian fittoral provinces and the distribution of Diastoma (D) and Campanile (C).

Figure |, showing the present distribution. of

Campanile and Diaytoma, incorporates iso-

thermal data adapted from charts of Sverdrup,

Johnson and Fleming (1942) and of the Royal

Netherlands Meteorological Institute (1949),

and shows the littoral biogeographical pro-

vinces of Bennett and Pope (1953, p, 139).

Diastoma and Campanile aré now restricted

to the Flindersian Province, partly equivalent

to Crespin’s (1950) Austral Indo-Pacific

Province (Ludbrook 1959a). The Eucla and

St. Vincent. Basins fall within this province.

the National Museum of Victoria (NMV).

The assistance piven by the Director of Mines,

South Australia, Director of the Geological

Survey of Western Australia, Or. Helene Laws

of the South Australian Museum, Dr. Mary

Wade of the University of Adelaide, and Mr.

T. A. Darragh of the National Museum of

Victoria, in making the material available is

gratefully acknowledged. ‘To Mr, G, Kendrick

of the Western Australian Museum, particular

thanks are duc for his help in many ways,

including the provision of the photograph on

DIASTOMATIDAE AND CERITHTIDAE IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

Plate 3, figuce 5. Mr. Richard Carver donated

the specimen of Campenile symbelicu,

M3231,

The paper is published with the perniission

of the Director of Mines, Sowlh Australia.

Family DIASTOMATIDAE (emerndl. pro

DIASTOMIDAE)

Genus DIASTOMA Deshayes, 1850

Diastoma is best known from the Eocene of

the Paris Basin; it is now living only in a very

restricted area in south-western Australia and

off Eyre Peninsula in South Australia. The

genus has been recorded (Wenz 1940, p, 750},

as having a cange of Upper Cretaceous (Seno-

nian) to Recent, and occurring in Europe,

Esypt. East Indies, North and South America,

and Australix, However, small cerithiids auch

as those described from Southern California

as Diustome fastigiata Carpenter, D. oldroydae

Bartsch, and D. stearmsi Bartsch (Bartsch 1911;

Oldroyd 1927) and three cerithioid species

from the Eocene of Peru, D. geositta Olsson,

D, furnaria Olsson, and D. elaeria Olsson,

placed doubtfully in Diastoma by their author,

appear from the figures to differ from Dia-

stoma in style of sculpture and in the posses-

sion of a broad siphonal canal. as also docs

D. virginica Henderson & Bartsch, of which

the South Australian Museum has specimens

in the Elliot Collection

From advice and material received from

Cossmann, Tate (1894) was able to affitm that

his Diastoma provist, Mesalia melanioides

Reeve ["nrelanoides” Tate, error for mielani-

cides) and Diastoma cesieilatan Lamarck, the

type species of Déastome, were congeneric,

and that Oiasforza was present in the South

Australian Pliocene and Jiving m southwestern

Australia. The distribution and evolutionary

history of the genus have been subsequently

obscured by the introduction of w separate

genus for Q. melanioides,

The genus Digstoma was described in con-

siderable detail by Deshayes (1364) from four

species-——D. costellata, 1. variculose, D.

interrupia and D. inérmis from the calcaire

grussier, sables moyens and sables. inferieurs

of the Paris Basia. Harris (1897) brieffy but

udequately described the generic characters as:

“Shell turriculate, varicose, with a high

spire; aperture avate, oblique, canaliculate and

detached hehind, sinuous, but not canaliculate

itt front, columella slightly concave, covered

hy 4 thin, shining and somewhat detached plate

or a affixed callosity, and carrying, towards

the middle, an oblique plication not always

well marked.”

Diasiome was placed in the Certthiidue by

Fischee (1884) and by Cossminn (1839),

Catton ¢1932) Intfoduced the genus

Neadiasoma for the Recent shell Mesalie

melanieides Recve, the aperture of which was

described as being “oblique, inner lip glazed,

more thickly glazed anteriorly, the two degrees.

of glazing separaled by a sharp columella

plait; outer lip slightly notched anteriorly near

the columella, . . . Neadiastame differs. from

Diastoma in the anterior notch of the outer

lip. and from Mevalia in being variced. . . -

This genus had probably better be placed in

the Family Cerithiidae for the present."

Wenz (1939), reproducing Reeve’s figure of

Mesalia welanioides showing no anterior

notch, placed Neodiastuma melunioides

(Reeve) in the Turritellidae near Mfesalia, and

Diastoma (type species Melenia costellate

Lamarck) in a separate family Dinstomidac

with Sandbergeria and several other genera of

small shells such as Obtertia-

The close relationship heiween the Pliocene

D. provisi and the Recent MN. melanieides

prompted Ludbrook (1941), Crespm én King

(1949), and Cotton (1952) to List DB. preyist

in Neadiastama,

Cossmann's early opihion was coniirmed by

Chavan in 1952 in correspondence wilh the

writer: “Neodiasrama provish that [ have re-

ceived from you belongs to Diustoma sense

snicto, this is not a Neadiastoma according

to the charucterstics of this unit." Ludbrook

€1957) redesceibed and figured D, previsi as

a “restricied and typical Jossil of the Dry Creek

Sands and their equivalents”. While this state-

ment still applies to D. provisi, tt is now

obvious from the more abundant material

available that Diastoma has been present in

southern Australia in the Eyela und S, Vincent

Basins fiom Lower Miocene to Recent times,

teaching its maximum ahundance in the fate

Pliocene and early Pleistocene, and that

Neadiastoma is a synonym of Diasroma,

Although the specics appears to be rare

and very restricted in its present distribution,

topotypes of D. mefanioides do not exhibit

uny More conspicuous anterior notching uf the

outer lip than does D, covtelfatyor, as is de-

monstrated by the specimens figured on Plate

1, Cotton appears not to haye noticed the

broken apertures of some of the specimens

on which he hased his diagtiosis of Neodia-

stoma, one of which is illustrated in figure

18. 22, melanioides usually lacks the tendency

32 Nw H, LUDBROOK

far the wperlurce to separate at the suture, buc

it may be present to a slight depree (figure 13).

The median folding of the columellar lip is a

common feature of all the species here placed

in Diesiema,

Three specics are recognized. D, adelaidense,

The longest ranging, first appearing in the

Lower Miocene Nullarbor Limestone and the

youngest member of the Melton Limestone of

Yorke Peninsula and its equivalents on Eyre

Peninsula, and dying out in the Pleistocene of

the Roe Plain; D. previsi, commen in the Dry

Creek Sands but restricted to the Upper Plic-

cene; and D, miclanioides, abundant in the

Pleistocene of the Roe Plain and surviving in

a very restricted area between Cheyne Beach,

50 miles (80 km) NE of Albany, and Duke of

Orleans Bay, 275 miles (443 km) ENE of

Albany, and also iat depths of less than 20

fathoms (37 m) off islands aff the coast of

Evre Peninsula.

Diastoma adelaidense Ludbrock sp, pov.

PL. 1, FIGS. 3-7: PL. 6 FIGS. 9, lO.

Diaxtoma provisi Ludbrook, 1957; 22 tin

part). 1959: 221 (in part) (non Tate).

Shell of moderate size and thig¢kness, ¢clon-

gate, turreted, with a small dome-shaped protu-

canch of one-and-a-half turns, aduli whorls 14,

all more or less varived, often with three strang

vatices per wWhorl; whorls obliquely axially

Plicate, with from 15 to 20 plicae per whorl,

surmountest by fine spiral lirae increasing from

3 in the carly whorls to about 20 in the

penultimate whorl, with fine secondary jirae

between them; suture deep, Imbricating; aper

ture ohligue, Joop-shaped, with « short adupi-

cal channel, columetlur lip thickened and

divided medially by a sharp thin columellar

fold. reflexcd anteriorly to the basal lip which

is broadly reflected in a slight siphonal canal,

Dimensions; height 48. diameter 14 mm.

Types: holotype GSSA M 609, Mitchell's

Bore, sec. 353. Kd. Yatula, 420-499 feet

(127-151 m); purstype GSSA M O11, Koo-.

yonga Golf Club Bore 1932, sec. 2028. hd.

Adelaide, 390-478 feet (118-145 m); WAM

f9.487 Hampton Microwave Repeater

Tower site,

Type jocality: Mitchell's Bore, sec. 353,

hd. Yatala, 420-499 feet (127-151 m),

Adelaide Plains Sub-Basin, St. Vincent Basin,

Dry Creek Sands. Upper Pliccene.

Material! 253 specimens from sludges from

depths varying from 238 to 507 feet (72-154

m) of 21 bores, in the Adelaide Plains Sub-

Basin betwee; West Beach and Salisbury,

drilled into the Dry Creek Sands; 11 speci-

mens WAM 9.487 from the Pleistocene of

-the Roe Plain at Hampton Microwave Re-

peatet Tower; external moulds in sundy lime-

stone on Kangarow Island, 11 miles (17 km)

WSW of Kingscote, sec. 268, hd. Menzies;

external moulds feam the Melton Limestone ut

Wallaroo, Port Hughes. and | mile (1.61 km)

NE of Myponie Point on Yorke Peninsula and

from Deep Creek and Murninnic of NE Eyre

Peninsula,

Stratigraphical range; lower to Middle Mic-

cene of the Melton Limestone to Pleistocene

of the Roe Plain (Eucla Basin) in Western

Australia,

The species. resembles Diastoma hypermeces

Cossmann from the Oligocene of Rennes, It

may be readily distinguished by the relatively

few axial plicac per whorl and by ils tendency

lo be strongly varicate; it has the longest range

and is the most widely distributed Diostormnea

in southern Austrafia.

Diastoma melanioides (Reeve),

PL. L, FIGS, 12-21.

Mesctia inelanioides Reeve,

Mesalia, fig. 3, sp. 3.

Diasiome melanaides (err. pro mefanjojdes)

Reeve; Tate, 1844: 177.

Mesalia exilis Sowerby, 1913: 236, pl iii,

fiz. 9,

Neodiastoma

1932: 541.

Shell of moderate size, lurreted, with a

protoconch af 2 smooth whorls; adult whorls

12 in a height of 42 mm, early whorls rather

irregularly vartced, the varices becoming

obsolete towards the last whorl; the first two

adult whorls are finely spirally lirate, the num-

ber of lirae increasing from 6 on the first two

whorls to 12. primary and numerous secondary

lirae over the last whorl and base; third and

following whorls axially plicate, with about 30

plications on each whorl weakly tuberculated

at the intersections with the primary spiral

firae; suture linear, imbricating, hase rounded.

Aperture oblique, Joop shaped, with an

adapical channel, outer lip thin, basal lip re-

flected anteriorly towards the columella; colu-

mellar Jip with 2 distinct cyltoused areas

divided by a sharp columellar fold; the an-

terior part is reflected to the basal lip which is

Téeflected or has a slight broad shallow siphonal

canal.

Celuur white, flecked with chestnut spots

on the spiral ribs,

Direensions: height 42, diameter 14 mm.

849: ph,

melanioides Revve; Catton,

DIASTOMATIDAE AND CERITHIIDAE IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 33

Vypes: hypotypes WAM 70,1145, Esper-

ance; SAM D 14994, 14995. 14997 Esper-

ance; D 14996 St, Francis Island, South

Australia. WAM 7U.1088, 0-4 miles (0-65

kin) nurth of Hampton Microwave Repeuter

Teawer; GSWA F 6920 (1-3), 13 miles (21

Kini) northeast of Eyre,

type lecality: Esperance, Western Aus-

tralia,

Material 7 topotypes and L9 ofher specimens

from localities in southwestern Australia and

of Eyre Peninsula; 310 specimens from 16

localiti¢s in the Pleistocene of the Roe Plain,

Strarigraphical range: abundant in the Pleisto-

eene of the Roe Plain, rare in Recent shallow

water to 20 fathoms (37 m).

Geographical Distribution; In the Pleistacene

of the Eucla Busin from 38 miles (61 km)

eust ta 4 miles (6-3 km) southwest of Madura;

Recent, Fsperance, Cheyne Beach, and Duke

of Orleans Bay in Western Australia, St.

Francis Island in the Nayts Archipelago, South

Atstralia, Cotton (1932) recorded the species

also from Thistle Island, Spencer Gulf, Sir

Jescph Banks Island and Petrel Bay.

Diastoma provisi Tute.

Pl_ |, FIGS. 8-11.

Diastomm provisi Vate, 1894: 177, ph x,

fig. 6; Ludhrook. L957: 22 (in part), pl I,

fig, + (synonymy); Ludbrook, 2969b:

Fig. Y6, 12.

Shell thick, solid and heavy, large and

broad for the genus, protoconch of 24 high,

convex, smooth whorts, adult whorls 12 in a

height of 44 mm, usually withoul varices,

sculptured with fine somewhat sinuous oblique

axial plicae, about 40 per whorl, crossed by

from 5 in the early whorls to about 24 spiral

lirae in the last whorl and base. Aperture

oblique, loop-shaped; outer lip thin, incurved

posteriorly, columellar lip calloused, the pas-

terior callus thin, the anterior callus separated

from the postetior by a thin sharp columellar

fold, which is accentuated in the adult; basal

lip reficcted.

Dimensions; height 46, diameter 14 mm.

Types: holotype T 1541B and hypolypes

T 154t E44 on tablee TIS41A-P all from

Dry Creek Bore; GSSA M2727.

Type locality: Dry Creck Borg, sec, 980,

hd. of Port Adelaide, 320-400 feet (97-121

m); Dery Creek Sands.

Material: 357 specamens Crom sludges. from 6

bores in the Adglaide Plains Sub-Basin hetween

Konyonga Golf Links and Two Wells, drilled

into the Dry Creck Sands, Moulds in lime.

stone from the Pliocene of Wardang. Islatie

and Redhanks on the River Light, sec, 5, hd,

Grace.

Siratigraphical range; Upper Pliocene of the

Dry Creek Sands and Hallett Cave Sandstone

and of Wardang Island, south tip.

D. previst is a heavy thick shell with 40 axial

plicae per whorl in contrast with about 30 in

YD, melanioides and from 15 to 20 in (-

adelaidense, It is very rarely varicate.

Family CERITHIDAR

Genus CAMPANILE, Bayle in Fischer, 1884

A geographical and stratigraphical distribu-

lion map of Campanile was published hy

Wrigley (1040): its present distribution in

Agstralnia waters is shown on Figure 1.

Campanile symbolicum Iredaic,

PL, 2, FIGS, 1-7.

Cerithivm leve Quoy & Guimard, 1834: 106,

pl. 54, figs, 1-3 (non Cerithiam laevin

Perry, 1810).

Campanile symbolicnuar tredate, 1917> 326,

nom, nov. for Cerithinm feve Quoy &

Gaimard; Wrigley, 1940: 1115 Cotton,

1950: 337; Hodgkin et wl, (v6. 41, pl.

15, fig G.

Shell large, thick. subnlaie, concave in pro-

file, whorls numerous, about 30 in a height of

140 mm, flat except For slight constriction at

the sutures; sutures imbricating; ite first about

20 whorls sculptured with 2 spiral cords one

at the abapical suture and a second immedi-

ately above it, below the adcapical suture the

whorl is weakly gemmulate; the spiral sculp-

lure heeomes obsolete in the aduwt whorls

which are smooth except for sinuous axial

growth striae faintly crossed by microscopic

irregularly waving spiral striae; lust whorl

one-sixth height of shell, roundly angulale at

the periphery, base moderstcly convex; aper-

ture relatively Jow and marraw, about one-

quarter of arca of last whorl, subrectangular,

slightly oblique, outer lip thin, columella con-

cave, siphonal canal short. reflected, deep,

Dimensions; WAM. 69,384 height (esiimated)

140, diameter 47 mm. Recent and Pleistocene

shells are as large as 200 mm high.

Types! holotype Mais, nat. Uist. Paris;

hypolypes WAM 69.384, Pleistocene, 25

miles (40-25 km) east of Madura; WAM

61.54 (b) Pleistocene, 20 miles (32-2 km)

east of Maidura; GSSA M254 Pleistocene,

Madura Cave; M3231 Pleistacenc, 0-4 miles

a4 N. H, LUDBROOK

(0-6 km) north of Hampton Microwave

Repeater Tower; M 3239, Recent, Israelite

Bay; M 3240 Pleistocene, Madura Cave,

type focality: King George Sound, Al-

bahy, Wester Australia,

Material: 33 specimens from Rockingham,

Geraldton, [sraclite Bay, antl other localities

between Esperance and Geraldton; 55 speci-

mens [rom 9 localities in the Pleistutene of the

Eucla Busia.

Strativraphical range; Pleistocene of the Rae

Plain to Recent.

Geographical distribution: Pleistocene of the

Roe Plain from 36 miles east of Madura to 4

miles (6-44 km) southwest of Madura: Re-

cent, sublittoral, sandy bottoms, Recherche

Archipelago to Geraldton (Hodgkin et al 1966).

Shell structures Wrigley (1940, p, 99) des

seribed (the unusual shell structure of Can

panile corrucopige (J. Sowerby) revealed by

crosion ef the shells “On the inside there are

two thick lamellar layers , ... next come two

thinner compact layers and a thin outer layer

of spongy subsiance, . . . The whole surface

is pitted by minute holes grranged on incised

lines.“ Fossil specimens of C. synbolicum and

some Recent specimens have similar structures,

shown on Plate 2, figures |, 2, 6, 7. Erosion af

the surface of GSSA M 3231 shows clearly a

piled layer and a thick cellular layer beneath

it (PI, 2, fig. 7). Unlike those attributed to

C.. cornucopiae, the pilings are for the mes

part irregular, although there are some on

incised lines. The section through GSSA M

3240 (Pl. 2, fig. G) shows the apparent cellular

structure of the shell, but the fuct that it ex-

tends to the columella and that the section

through the Recent specimen GSSA M 3239

(Pl, 2, fig, 2) shows only partial boring. in-

dicate that the cellulur structure is mot a

primary feature but is produced by horing

organisms. This type of bering is usually

attributed to small sponges,

Campanile triseriaie Hasedow

PL. 3, FIGS, 1, 4,

Cumpanile teiseriale Basedow, 1902: 130, pl,

2, fig. 1, Ludbruok, 1959-231, pl, 3, figs.

2,3, 4

This species, with its three rows of spiral

lubercles, is known only from the Upper Plio-

cene Hullett Cove Sandstone at Hallett Cove

and Q'Sullivan Beach and its equivalents at

FEdithburg and on section 140, hd. Moorowie,

Yorke Peninsula, and the Dry Creek Sands

af the Adetiide Plains Sub-Basin,

Campanile virginiense Ludbrook sp. nov.

PL, 3, FIGS. 2, 3.

Shell large, subulate, whorls numerous,

estimated about 25 in a height of 150 mm,

prominently sculptured wilh an adapical

band of large tubercles, 20 per whorl, and

ai abapical band of small tubercles, about

26 per whorl, hetween and over which are

numerous spiral threads, thase on the adapical

three-quarters. of the whorl being regularly

spiral and those on the abapical one-quarter

unduliting and interrupted by the axial growth

striae; there is a conspicuous spiral striation

separating the discrepant sculptures. Last

whorl low, about one-fifth height of shell, uper-

ture oblique, small. subrhomboid, outer lip

thin, columella concaye, thinly calloused with

a fold at the base bordering the short deep

siphonal canal.

Dimensions; holotype height (estimated) 156,

diameter 47 mm; paratype GSSA M2013 in-

dicales that the species must grow to a height

of about 200 mm, diameter about 60 mim.

Types: holotype GSSA M 236l) Adelaide

Plains Observation Bere A, Virginia; para-

type GSSA M 2013, bore of F. Virgin, see,

3224, hd. Munne Para, 238-350 feet {102-

106 m).

Type focalitv: Adelaide Plains Obserya-

lion Bore A, Virginia, sec, 3036, hd. Munn

Para, 209-217 feet (63-3-65-8 m), Dry

Creck Sands.

Distribution. Upper Pliocene of the Dry Creek

Sands in the Virginia area.

C_ virginiense is readily distinguished from

C. trisertale by its ane bane of large and one

hand of small tubercles.

Campunile sp,

PL, 3, FIG. 5.

Casts and moulds of Campanile sp. in Null-

urhor Limestone have been collected from rail-

way ballast quarries on the Transcontinental

Railway line at Watson, Naretha, Forrest and

Loongana, and from GSWA localities 14265,

Warbla Cave, and 12694C,, "50-mile Claypan™.

The “large species of Cerithium probably

referable ta the subgenus Campanile fromm

Kadina, South Australia’ (Harris 1897, p,

228) is probably the satne species From the

Melton Limestone.

The Species attains the sume height of 200

mm as C. syboltewm, but the shell itself is

unknown.

Type; WAM 10448, Forrest, Western .Aus-

tralia, Nullarbor Limestone.

DIASTOMATIDAE AND CERITHIIDAF IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 35

Genws THERICIUM Monterosato, 1890.

Subgenus THERICIUM 5-1r

Thericium (Yhericium) fallax (Ludbrook).

PL, 6, FIGS, 6, 7,

Terebralia fallax Ludbrook, 1941; $l, pl, 4,

fig. 21.

Phericrum (Therieiurn) fallax (Ludbrook),

1957: 24, pl, 1, fig, 5.

Only one species of the genus, with erect,

angular plications and prominent spiral threads,

occurs in the Cainozoic of southern Australia.

It is known from some 88 specimens from 7

hores entering the Upper Pliocene Dry Creek

Sands of the Adelaide Plains Sub-Basin.

Types: holotype AUGD T 1621, Abat-

toirs Bore; hypotypes AUGD F 15177

Pecze’s Bore sec. 4251. hd. Munno Para,

and GSSA M 2730, De Ruro Bore sec.

4259, hd. Munno Para,

Subgenus CHAVANICERITHIUM Ludhrook,

1937.

The subgenus, with type species Terebrelia

ddeluidensis Howchin & Cotton, has a long

range in the Cainozoic basins. of southern Aus-

iruliu. The earliest representative is Thericium

(Chavanicerithium) pritchardi (Harris) from

the Lower Miocene (Longfordian) of Table

Cane, Tasmania, and the latest ure the two

new species T.(C.) darraghi and T. (C,) wes-

tratiense Ludbrook from the Pleistocene of

the Roe Plain. The affinities of 7. (C.) pritch-

ardt with the Europewn Eocene Cerithinn

(Vulgucerithium) semicostarum Deshayes were

noled hy Harris (1897, p. 224). Fulgo-

certthiiin is a synonym of Thericium, The

diagnostic features distinguishing € hewverneeri-

Minn from Therfeium s.str. have heen de-

scribed (Ludbrouk 1957, p. 30).

Thericium = (Chavanicerithium) sdelaidense

(Hlowehin & Cotton).

PL. 4, FIGS, 7, 4,

Centhiion sp. Howehin, 19357 90.

Terebralia adelaldensis Howchin & Cotton,

1936; 31, pl 1, figs. 1, 2: Ludbrook,

1941: 100,

Campanile cdvlaicdensis Howchin & Cotton;

Cotton, 1952; 245,

Therictum (Chavanicertthium) adeclatdenase

(Howchin & Cotton); Ludbrook, 1957;

29, pl. 1, fig. 3.

The species, restricted to the Upper Pliocene

Dry Creek Sands of the Adeluide Plains Sub-

Busin, is known trom 22 specimens from 10

borings between the western suburbs uf Ade-

faide and Salisbury. It has been fully described

previously,

Types: holotype, SAM D 12852, Glanville

Bore, 375-400 feet (113-121 m); hypotypes

AUGD F 15178, Hindmarsh Bore. 450-485

Feet (3615-147 m); GSSA M 765A Cawan-

dilla Bore, 485-307 feet (147-l54 m); M

643 Keoyonga Bore 1932, 491-501 feet

(149-152 m).

Thericium = (Chavanicerithiam) darraghi Lud-

braok sp. nav.

PL. 5, FIGS. 7, 8.

Shell of moderals size, solid, elongate-

conical, apical angle 17°, profile slightly con-

vex, protoconch high, apparently of 3 turns,

adult whorls 12 in a height of 533 mm, whorls

conver, sculptured with slightly curved axial

ribs increasing in number from 15 on the

early whorls to 21 on the penultimate whorl,

crossed by spiral threads of which there are 5

oh the early whorls, the adapical 2 being finer

and set in a constricted band below the stiture,

the abapical three producing weak tubercles

on the axial ribs; finer secondary threads de-

velop between the primary threads on succecd-

ing whorls. Last whorl about two-fifths height

of shell. base convex with about 5 irregularly

spaced striae.

Aperture oblique, subovate, with a con-

spicuous parietal ridge on the parietal Jip and

a well-marked adapical channel, columellar lip

smooth. outec lip thickened, siphonal canal

deep,

Dimensions: WAM 69.457 height (estimated)

53, diameter 18 mm,

Types: holotype WAM 69.457,

Type locality: 04 miles. (0-64 km) north

of Hampton Microwaye Repeater Tower,

33 miles (53 km) east of Madura, Western

Australia,

Material: the holovype and 16 other specimens

from the type locality and from Netrinu and

Madura Caves,

Stratigraphical range; Pleistocene of the Rue

Plain,, Eucla Basin,

Compared with 1. (C.) westrallense this is

a less attenuated shell with convex whorls, rhe

axial ribs are stronger and fewer than those of

westraliense; the spiral threads are fewer and

not. separated by incised striac on the later

whorls.

Thericium = (Chayanicerithium) flemingtonense

(McCov).

PL, 4, FUGS, 5, 6, 9, 10,

36 N. H. LUDBROOK

Cerithiva flemingtonensis McCoy, |&76: 28,

pl. XXYVI, figs. 3-9,

Cerithium flemingtonense McCoy; Harns,

1897; 226; Gill & Baker, 1455: 40. pl. 1,

figs, 3, 4,

Shell lurge, clongate-conical, spire angle

about 25°, whorls about 15 in a height of

85 mm, fiat, constricted just above the middle,

sculptured with from 12 to 20 slightly sig-

modal primary axial ribs, more numerous on

the early whorls, prominent in the abapical

part of the whorl and abruptly cut off or ren-

dered obsolele ut the adapical constriction;

between the primury tibs and continuing to the

udapical suture there afe numerous fine sip-

modal axial growth folds and on the early

Whorls an occasional varia: axial sculpture

‘crossed hy numerous spiral striae, Base convex

with from 3 to 10 unequal spiral lirae. Aper-

ture oval, columella concave, parietal lip with

# parietal ridge. siphonal canal short.

Dimensions: height (estimated) 87. diameter

a1 mm.

Types; syntypes NMV P I214) A, B

(figs. 3, 5), P 12142 (fig. 7). P 12146 (tig.

9), P 12145 (fig. 6); hypotypes NMV P

16831 (figured Gill & Baker, 1955); P,

279814; GSSA M 3234.

Type locality: Flemington, Melbourne,

Newport Formation.

Material; 5 latex casts: from the Newport

Formation at Flemington and West Essendon

(Aberfeldie): 3 latex casts from Melton Lime-

stone, old flux quarry, Wallaroo.

Stratigvaphical range: Lower to Middle Mio-

cene of the Newport Formation, Mclbourne

Districl, Victoria, and youngest member of

the Melton Limestone of northem Yorke Pen-

insula, South Australia.

Thericium = (Chavanicesithium) —_ pritchardi

(Harris).

PL. 4, FIGS. 1-4.

Porualdes semicostatuin Tate, W885) 226,

non Cerithium semticostaiunm Deshayes;

Pritchard, 1896; 116,

Cervithlion pritchardi Harris, 1897; 225, pl.

7, fig, 3 (nam, nov, for Putumides semi-

ecstatum Tate non Cerithinm semicoy-

rar Deshayes).,

Therichom (Chavanicerithiun) pritehardi

(Harris); Ludbrook, 1957: 30; Ludbrook,

1967b; 67, pl. 4, fig. 15,

(Description slightly modified from Harris,

1897.) Shell large, solid, elongate-conical,

tupering, of 12 slightly convex to flat whorls

much widened abapically; suture widulating,

slightly incised; sculptured with slrong, dis-

tant, elevated, rather oblique obtuse costae

extending over the abapical half of the whorls

only, 10 to 1] on the penultimate whorl the

whole surface of the whorls covered by close,

ireegular, spiral striations, interrupted by very

fine growth corrugations which in the adult

whorls may border the adapical sutures as fine

obsolete tubercles; last whorl with a large vari-

ciform swelling.

Aperture oblique, ovate, columella concave,

columellac lip thick, narrow, reflected over the

columella, ouler lip expanded, slightly thick-

ened, i conspicuous parietal ridge and narrow

deep adapicul channel, siphonal canal deep,

strongly reflected.

Dimensions: height 110, diameter 33 mim;

AUGD F [5482 from the Bookpurnong Beds

has an estimiuted height of 120 mm

Tvpes: holotype, Tasmanian Museum,

Hobart. B 83; hypocypes British Museum

(Natural History} G 9491, AUGD T 356.

F 15482, FP 15488.

Type locality: Table Cape, Tasmania;

Table Cape Group, Freestone Cove Sand-

atone. Longfordian, Lower Miocene

Material: 10 topotypes; one specimen from

Bookpurnong Beds, AUGD F 15482.

Stratigrephical range; Lower Miocene (Lone-

fordian) of Table Cape to Lower Pliocene (?

Upper Miocene) of the Bookpurnong Beds,

Thericium (Chavauicerithium) tatei Ludbrook

Sp. nov,

PL, 5, FIGS. 3, 4,

Thericium (Cheapanicerishivm) torri Lud-

brook, 1957: 30 (in part), pl. 1, figs. 4, 2

thot of Tale, 1899); 1969b: fig. v6, 13,

Shell of moderate size for the genus. solid,

elongare-conieal, whorls slightly convex, con-

strictecl in the adapical one-third, sutares im-

bricating; sculplured with from 11 to L5

oblique and slightly curved axial ribs) per

whorl: in the early whorls the ribs are un-

interrupted hut in the middle whorls are first

interrupted by the adapical constriction and

in. the fast 3: whorls are broken into three or

four rows of tubercles; the whole surface js

microscopically spirally lirate in the early

wWhorls but the lirae weaken and are replaced

by faint spiral striae and numerous micro-

scopk: axial growth striae in the later whorls;

eatly whorls usually varicate, a large varici-

form swelling in the last whorl; base short.

convex, spirally lirate, Aperture oval, columella

concave, cofumellar tip culluused and reflected

DIASTOMATPIDAE AND CERITHIIDAE IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 37

over the columella with a well-marked parietal

ridge and adapical channel; siphons) canal

short, reflected.

Dimensiens: height 80. diameter 2L nun.

Types: holotype GSSA M 3224, hypo-

types AUGD F 15175, F 15176,

Type locality: Adelvide Plains Observa-

tion Bore A, Virginia, sec. 3036, hd, Munno

Pata, 209-217 feet (63-3-65-8 mj, Dey

Creek Sands, Upper Pliocene.

Marerial. 90 specimens from 14 borings en-

tering the Dry Creek Sands of the Adelwide

Plains Sub-Basin

Stratigraphical range: Upper Pliocene of the

Dry Creck Sands,

T. (C.) tate’ a a smaller shell with fewer

uxial ribs than T. (€.) forri,

Thericium = (Chavanicerithium) —torri

PL. 3. FIGS. 1, 2.

Cerihinen wort Tate, 1899; 109, pl. J, fiz 2

(nor Thericiwn (Chavanicerithivm) terri

Ludhrook, 19575 30, pl. 1, figs. 1, 25

1968b; Fig. 96, 13).

Shell large, solid, clongate-conical, whorls

flat, sculptured with 25 moderately sigmoidal

axial costae interrupted by a constriction in

the adapical one-third of the whorl; in Jatur

whorls the costae tend to hecome nodulose in

as many as 3 spiral bands, the whole surface

finely sculptured by mictoscopic spiral striae

and axial growth striae; suture tmbricating.

Aperture oval, not completely known as the

outer lip is broken in the two specimens,

columella concave, a weak parietal ridge and

an adapical channel; siphonal canal short,

reflected,

Dimensions; holotype height (estimated) 120.

diameter 31 mm; paratype height (estimated)

140, diameter 31 mm,

Types: holotyps AUGD T L613, paratype

AUGD T 832,

Type locality: “River Murray Desert”,

i.e. Bookpurnong Beds, probably from bor-

ing at Mindarie, South Australia. In the

tuble (1899, p, 104), Tate records both

C. terri and C. pritckardi from Tareena,

New South Wales. Sinze the tablets T §32

and F 15482 on which these are mounted

are similar and the age of hoth given as

Eocene? it may be assumed that T 832 came

from Tareenw. T 1618 is differently mounted

and the age given as Post-Eocene: it may be

assumed that the holotype T 1618 is from

Mindarie.

Muaterfal: the holotype and paratype oily, both

(Yate).

from borings in the Murray Basin penetrating

the Bookpurnong Beds, the characteristic litho-

logy of which is confirmed by matrix in the

apertures of the two specimens.

Stratigraphical range: Lower Pliocune (2 pper

Miocene) of the Bookpurnong Beds, Murray

Basin.

Thericium =(Chayanicerithium) westraliense

Ludhrook sp. nov.

PL, 5, FIGS, 5, 6.

Shell of moderate size, but rather small fur

the genus, solid, elongate-conical, apleal angle

15°, with 15 adult whorls in a height of 71 mm,

early whorls convex, later whorls flat to slightly

convex, sculptured in the early whorls with

about 10 axial ribs on the abapical part, which

become weaker and more numerous in the

later whorls; the axial ribbing is discrepant he-

tween the adapical and abapical parts of the

whorl, in the earlies adult whorls. the ribs ure

more numerous in a constricted band about

one-quarter the width of the whorl immediately

below the suture; in the later whorls additional

ribs rise im the abapical one-third between the

ptimary ribs which become more ablique and

sinuous, about 30 on the penultimate whorl,

crossed by spiral threads which are convex

in the carly whorls and flat in the later whorls,

separated by linear striae; the axial ribs pro-

duce slight uodulations on the linear sutures,

Aperture oblique, subovate, with a con-

spicuous parietal ridge on the purietal lip and

a well-marked adapical channel; columellar

lip smooth, outer tip thickened, siphonal canal

deep, strongly reflected.

Dimensions: height 71, diameter 18 mm,

Types: holotype WAM 70,14.

Type locality: Hampton Micruwave Re-

peater Tower, 33 miles (53 km) east of

Maduta, Western Ausiralig, Roe Plain,

Pleistocene,

Material: holotype and 7 tapolypes; 1 spect-

men from Nurina Cave, surface.

Siratigraphical range: Pleistocene of the Ree

Plain,

Thericium

(Tate).

(Chavanicerithiom) wynyardense

PL. 6, FIGS. 8, il,

Poramides pyramidale Tate, 1885: 226.

Potamides, wynyardense Tate, 1896: 135,

nom, nov. for “P. pyramidale Tate non

Shell large, biconival, broad, with an apical

angle of 40? (jo 40°, whorls Aart, about 10 in

38 N, A. LUDBRODK

a height of 95 mm, last whorl half height of

shell, sculptured with from 10 ta 12 large

nodular axial ribs on the abapical part of each

Whorl, weak or absent on the adapical part,

und about 10 fine spiral threads per whorl,

about 16 over the last whorl and convex hase;

last whorl with a large variciform swelling

above the columella. Shape of the aperture

and outer lip not known from the material

available: columella concave, columellar lip

thickened and reflected over the columella: a

parietal ridge on the parietal lip and a small

idapical channel.

Derienstons; height 95, diameter 53 mm.

Types; holotype missing: hypotypes

AUGD F 15483, F 15484.

Type locality: Table Cape, Tasmania}

Table Cape Group, Freestone Cove Sanid-

stone. Longfordian, Lower Miocene.

Muarerial: the two hypotypes only. Tate Collec-

hon.

Stratigraphical range: Lower Miocene {Long-

fordian) of Table Cype.

The nomenclature of this species is doubiful

in all respects, Describing it originally as

Potumides pyramidale, Tate (1896) changed

the name to P. wynyardense because lhe nume

Was preoccupied by an unnamed author. Care-

ful search has so far Faded to locate the prior

P.. pyrwnidale, but Tate's substitute same is

tentatively accepted. The generic and sub-

generic location of the hruadly biconical species

is also in doubt, hut the available material is

toa poor and scarce for a firm opiniun to be

formed, The species has some features in com-

mon with the New Zealand Upper Eocene

genus Speightia Finlay, but there appears ta

be no evidence of the sinus on the shoulder

slope linking the Speightiidae with the Turridae.

The apertural features and the variciform

swelling on the fast whorl Jink it with the

Tertiary cerithiids.

Genus JT WOODSIA Ludbrook, gen, nov,

Type specics—Cerithiwn apheles Tonison

Woods

Generic characters: shell turreted or subu-

late, With a high polystrephic protoconch and

numerous whorls which ate slightly convex

at first but become gradually more conven;

axial sculpture dominant, of curved oblique

nibs crossed by fine spiral striae, more promi-

nent in the early whorls and tending to become

obsolete in the later. Last whorl with a promi-

nent variciform swelling, Aperture ovate,

columellar lip thick and reflected over the

columella, a conspicuous parietal ridge and

short adapical channel, siphotial canal short,

reflected,

The genus is named for the Reverend Father

J. E. Tenison Woods, a pioneer of soulhern

Australian geology and palaeontology, who

described the species. ll seems to have been

telatively short lived, first appeuring in the

Upper Eocene and dying out in the Middle

Miocene (Balcombian),

Jetwoodsia apheles (Tenison Woods).

PL, 6, FIGS. 1-3.

Cerithitent aupheles Tenison Woods. 1879:

232, pl, XX, fig. 15; Harris, 1297; 224,

pl. WIL figs. 1, 2.

Shell fairly large, subulate, with aboot 24

whorls in a height of 1/8 mm; first whorts

nearly Hat, then becoming convex, protoconch

of 4 smooth whorls with an erect tip; the first

6 10 8 whorls are sculptured with about 20

axial ribs crossed by 12 fine spiral striae, in

the next ahout 6 whorls the axials weaken or

hecome obsolete, bul in the aduli siuge the

uxials become fewer and more prominent on

the convex whorls where they are usually re-

stricted to the median part of Ihe whorl; both

udupically and abapicully the whorls are con-

stricted: the early whorls are more or less

vuaricate, the adult costite whorls rarely so

excepl for the last whorl on which there is a

large variciform Swelling; base convex, lost

whorl and base with 6 spiral lirae,

Aperture ovate, columella slightly concave,

columellar lip thi¢k, and reflected over the

culumelln, a conspicuous. parietal zidge and

short adapical channel, outer tip expanded,

slightly thickened, siphonul canal short, re-

Nected.

Dimensions: height 118, height of last whorl

26, diameter 23 mm.

Types: holotype Australian Musetm F

1704; hypotypes Britsh Museum (N.H.) G

4134, AUGD EF 15485, F (S489, F 15490.

Type foealiry:s Muddy Creek. Hamilton,

Victoria; Muddy Creek Marl. Miocene ( Bal-

combhian),

Material; 19 topotypes, 3 specimens from the

Balcombe Clay, Fossil Beach and Schnapper

Point. 7 from Gellibrand Marl, Gellibrand

River, Victovia.

Stratigraphical range: Middle Miocene (Bal-

combiun) of the Otway Basin and Port. Phillip

Suoklamd (Melhourne Basin,

DIASTOMATIDAE AND CERITHUDAE IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 49

Jetwoodsia nullarburien (Chapman & Crespin)

PL 6, FIGS. 4. 5

Cerithuen aullarboricum Tale, t879h: W7.

hott nid.

Pyrazts aldingense Tate & Dennant, 1896:

127, Hom, hud,

Pirtamides nullarboricun: Chapman & Cres-

pin, 1934; 123, pl. XL, figs, 31-33,

Shell rather small, thin, turreted. with a

high protoconch of three smooth turns and 15

adult whorls sculptured with narrow slightly

oblique curved axial ribs, from 13 to 1S per

whorl, and fine microscopic spiral striac and

axial growth striae: suture undulating, incised,

Jast. whorl with a farge variciform swelling,

earlier whorls with an occasional varix. base

convex to flatly oblique, spirally microscopr-

cally lirate,

Aperture obscured or broken in all available

specimens, columella concave, colurnzellar Jip

calloused and reflected over the columella,

with a parietal ridge, outer lip expanded,

Diniensions: height (estimated) 43, diameter

13 mm.

Types: holotype Dennant Collection,

National Museum of Victoria, 13674. para-

iype 13675; hypotypes GSSA M 3237, M

3238,

Type locality: Blanche Point, Aldinga

Bay, South Australia; Blanche Point Marls,

Lipper Eocene.

Moterial: 24 topotypes. 1 specimen Kent ‘Fawn

C“Adelwede") Bore,

Sratigeriphical range; Upper Eocene {Aldin-

gun) Blanche Point Marts of the St. Vincent

Rasin and Plantagenet Beds of southwestern

Australia,

Nomenclature; Chapman & Crespin (1934, p,

123) named the species from a Tate mamu-

script name in the Bennant Collection. The

manuscript name Pyrazus aldingense piven to

the species in the ‘Fate Collectlon, University

of Adelaide, was published in Tate and Den-

mant's list (1896) of the Eacene fossils from

Aldinga and Adelaide.

References

BARTset, P. (1911),—The Recent and fossil mol-

Susks of the genus Piustama from the west

coast of America, Pron, OLS, Nat. Afus. 39,

SR1-3584,

Basnpcw, H, (1902).— Descriptions of New

Species of Fossil Mofiysea fron the Miocene

Limestone near Rdithburg. Troma, R. Soe, 4,

Avwst. 26 (2), 130-132, pl. 2. -

Bennett. Tsope., & Porr, Enizwnrtn C, (1953),

—Intertidal zonation of the exposed rocky

shores of Vicloria, logethes with a rearrange.

ment of the biogeographical provinces of

femiperate Australlau shores, Twat. J, rue.

freshwat. Res. 4 (1), 105-159.

Chapman, F., & Cresrin, Tene (1934)— The

Palaeontology of the Plantagenet Beds of

Western Australia, J, Proc, R, Soc, WL Aust.

20, 103-136.

CossMann, M, (7889) —Catalogue THustre des

Coquilles Fossiles de (Rocene des Envirans

de Paris. Annis, Soc Ro matical. Belg. 24,

3-381, pls, I-LX.

Corton, B.C. (1932) —Notes on Australian Mol-

lusca, with Descriptions of New Genera and

New Spovies, Ree, S. Aner Mus. 4 (41, S37-

547

Cucrun, BC, ¢1950)—Mollusca from Western

Australia. Rec. S. dust, Mus, 9 (4), V53-358,

Corton, B. C. [(1952)—-The Mollusca of the

Adeluidean Stage Bull. geol. Surv. S. Aust.

27, Appendix 4, 239-249.

Crawrorpo, A, R. €1965).—The Geulozy of

Yorke Peninsula, Aull. peel Soe 4, Aust 39,

{-82, text figs. 1-6, 3 maps.

Cresprx, TRENn (1950).— Australian Tertiary

microfaunas and their relationships to as-

semblages elsewhere in the Pacific Region.

J. Palennt, 24 (4), 421-429,

DesHaves, M. G. BP (1864).—Description des

Animaux sans Vertebres decoiverts duns le

Bassin de Paris , . . 1, 1-968, 1866, Atlas,

pls, 1-107.

Fiscuer, P. HE (1880-)887).—Maogel de Con-

chyliologie et de Paleontologic conchylogique.

Paris, i-xxv, t-1369, pls. 1-23.

Gir, & DD, & BAKER, A. A, (I955).—lertia’y

fossils at Aberfeldie, Melbourne. Wictoriue

Nut, 72 (3), July, No. 859, 39-43,

Harris, G. F. (1897)—Catalogue of Tertiary

Mollusca in the Department of Geolagy,

British Museum (Natural History). Part 1,

The Australasian Tertiary Mollusca, London,

British Museum (N. H.), 1-407, pls. 1-8.

Henvexson, J. Bi, and Barrscn, P. (1914)—.

Littoral maring mollusks of Chincoteugue

Island, Virginia, Prac, US. Nat. Mus. 47,

411-421, pls. xili-xiv,

HaogkIn, B. P., KENDRICK, G.. MARSH, LOESETTE.

pnd Svack-Smivni, SHircey (1966).— The

Shelled Gustropuda of Western Australia,

Rest Aust. Naturalists’ Club, WZandboek 9.

1-78,

HowcHIn, W. (1935)—Nates on the peological

sections obtained by several borings situated

on the plain between Adelaide and Gult St.

Vineenl. Trans, R. Sec. 3. Aus. SY, 68-102.

Irepawe, To (1917)—More moalluscan name

changes, generic and specific. Proc. melacel,

Soe. Lond, 12, Aug. 22, 322-330,

Kinc, DL (1849), —Geological notes on the

Nullarbor Cavernous limestone, Trans. R,

Noe, 3, Aus, 73 (1), 52-58, pl, 4.

Linosay. J. M, (1970).—Melton Limestone:

Multiple Mid-Tertiary Transgressions, South-

eastern Gawler Platform, Quart, geol, Notes,

geal. Surv. 3, Aust. 33, 2-10.

Limereox, N, H (1941) —Gastropoda from the

Abasttuirs Bore, Adelaide, South Australia,

40 N. H. LUDBROOK

together with a list of some miscellaneous

fossils from the Hore, Trans, R. Sac. §, Aust.

65 (1), 79-102, pls, 4, 5.

Lupsrook, N. H. (1957).—The molluscan fauna

of the Pliocene strata underlying the Adelaide

Plains, Part 1V—Gastropoda (Turritellidae to

Struthiolariidae). Trans, R. Soc, §, Aust, 80,

17-58, pls. 1-4,

Luprrook. N, H. (1959).—A widespread Pliocene

molluscan fauna with Anadontia in South

Australia. Zrens. Ro Soc. S, Aust. 82, 219-

233, pls. 1-5.

Lupsrook, N. H, (1963).---Correlation of the

Tertiury rocks of South Australia. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. &7, 5-15.

LubpsrooK, N, H. (1967a)—Correlation of Ter-

tiary rocks of the Australasian Kegion, ‘ler-

tiary Correlations and Climatic Changes in

the Pacific. llth Pacific Science Congress,

Tokyo (Sasaki Printing and Publishing Co.

Lid.. Sendai, Jupan).. 7-19.

LunsrooK, N, H. (1967b),—Tertiary molluscan

types from Table Cape in the Tusmanian

Museum, Hobart. Pap. Proc. R. Soc. Taxn.

101, 65-69, pls, 1-4,

Lupsroox, N. H, (1969a).—The genus Miltha

(Mollusca: Bivalvia) in the Australian Caino-

zoic. Trans. R. Sac. §. Aust 93, 55-63, pls.

L-5.

Lupsroox, N. H, (1969b)—Tertiary Period. {1

PARKIN, L. W. (ed.). Handbook cf South

Australian Geology, Geol. Surv. S. Aust.

McCoy, F. (1874)—Prodromus of the Pslaeon-

tology of Victoria. Decade 3, Geof. Surv,

Vier.

Mires, K. R, (1952).—Tertiary faulting in morth-

eastern Eyre Peninsula. Tras. Ro Soc. S.

Aust. 75, 89-96, nls. 6-7.

Micrs, K. R. (1955).—The Geology and Tron

Ore Resources of the Middleback Range

Area, Bull. geol. Surv. S. Aust. 33, 1-198,

OLproyp, IpA StiEPARp (1927).—The marine

shells of the west coast of America, Stanford

init’, Publ. geal. Sciences. 2 (3).

Oxsson, A. A. (1929) —Contributions to the Ter-

tiary Paleontology of Northern Peru. Part 2,

Upper Focene Mollusca and Brachiopoda.

Bull. Amer. Paleant. 13 (57), 1-50, pls. 1-8.

PRITCHARD, G. B. (1896) —A revision of the fossil

fauna of the Table Cape Beds, ‘l'asmania, with

descriptions of new species. Proc. R. Svc.

Vict, 8 (ns), 74-150.

Quoy, J. R. C., & GaArmaro, J. PL (1834) —IJn

Dumonr Duavitre, J. S. C.. Voyage de

decouvertes de ln Corvette l'Astrolabe. 3,

Zoologie. 1833. Atlas, 2 vals.

Rerve, L. A. (1849) —Conchologia Iconica. V,

Mesalia, June.

ROYAL NETHERLANDS METHOROLOGICAL INSTITUTE,

1949. Sea areas around Australia. Oceanog,

Meteorol. Data, no. 124.

Sowersy, G. B. (1913).—Descriptions of new

species of Mollusca, Ann. Mag, nat, hist. th

ser., 12, 233-239, pl. UL

Syexprur H. U., Jounson, M. W., & Fouminc,

R. H. (1942)—The QOceuns, their physics,

chemistry and general biology. (Prentice-

Hall; New York).

Tate, R. (1879a).—The Anniversary Address of

the President, Jrans. R. Soc. §. Aust. 2, li-

Iviii.

Tatk, R. (1879b)—The natural history of the

country around the Head of the Great Aus-

tralian Bight, Trans. R. Soc. §. Aust. 2

94-128.

TATE, R. (1885)—Deseription of néw species of

Mollusca of the Upper Eocene beds at Table

Cape. Pap. Proc, R, Soc, Tus. for 1884, 226-

235,

Tarr, R. (1894)—Unrecorded genera of the

Older Tertiary fauna of Australia; inclucing

diagnoses of Some new genera and species,

Jj. Fxce: R. Soc. NSA, 27, 167-196, pls-

10-13,

Tate, R. (1899).—On some Older Tertiary fos-

sils of uncertain see from the Murray Desert.

Trans, R. Soc. S. Aust. 23 (1), 102-111, pl. 4.

Tate, R., & DENNANT, J. (1896)—Correlation

of the marine Tertiaries of Australia, Part 3-

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust, 20 (1), 118-148.

Wenz, W. (1940) —Handbuch der Palkiozoolugie.

Part 6, Gastropoda, 3, 721-960. (Gebriider

Borntraeger. Berlin).

Woons, J. F. Trenisow (1879), On some Ter-

tiary fossils from Muddy Creek, Western

Victoria. Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 3 (3),

222-240, pls. 20, 21.

Wrictey, A. (1940) —The English Eacene Carm-

panile. Prac. melucal, Sac. Lond. 24 (3),

97-112,

’

BIASTOMATIDAF AND CERITHMNDAF IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 41

FENPLANATION OF PLATES

PLAtE |

All figures X L

Hjastoma castellaiem Caamurck). AUGD F 15487, Middle Eocene, Lutetian, Chausay.

Diustuma adelaidense Ludbraok, 3, 4. GSSA M 609A, holotype; Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek

Sands, sec. 453, hd. Yatala, 420-499 feet (127-151 m); 5. 6, WAM 69.487, paratype, Pleisto-

cene of the Roe Plain, Hampton Microwave Repeater Tower; 7, paratype, GSSA M 611, Koo-

yonga Golf Club Bore. 1942.

Diasioma previst Tate. 8. AUGD T 1541B, Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek Sands, Dry Creek

Bore, sec. 980, hd, Port Adelaide, 320-400 feet (97-121 m), 9 AUGD T 1541G, hypotype

from type serics: 10, AUGD T 1541E hypatype from type series; 11, GSSA M 2727, hypo-

type, Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek Sands, Kooyonga Golf Club Bore 4, sec. 2028, hd. Adelaide,

500 feet (152 m).

Diastoma melanivides (Reeve). Pleistocen2 cf the Rog Plain; 12, GSWA F 6920(2): 13,

GSWA F 6920 (1): 14. WAM 70. 1088, 0+4 miles (0-65 km) north of Hampton Microwave

Repeuter Tower; 15, GSWA F 6920 (1); 14, GSWA F 6920 (3) locality 5439, 13 miles (21

km) NE of Eyre,

Diasioma melaniaies (Reeve), Recent; 17-20 from type locality Esperance; 17, SAM D 14997;

18. D 14994, with broken aperture: 19. WAM 70,1145 a; 20, SAM D 14995: 21, SAM D

14996 St. Francis Island, South Australia-

PLatr 2

All figuees X 2/3

Campanile symbolicum Iredale. {-2, Recent GSSA M 323%, dead specimen, Israelite Bay, 1,

showing surface paltetn of borings; 2. axial section, only one side of shell is extensively

bored, presumably where it has been lying in the substratum; 3-7, Pleistacene of the Roe

Plain: 3, WAM 69,384, 25 miles {40 km) eust of Madura; 4, 61.54 B, juvenile showing

sculpture on early whorls, 20 miles (32 km) east of Madura; 5, GSSA M 2564, Madura

Cave, intermediate between C. rrixeriadle Basedow and Cy. svnbalicum in ity retention of 3

faint spiral ribs on the whorls; 6, GSSA M3240, axial section showing shell and part of the

columella extensively bored and giving fhe appearance of pomary shell stricture, Madura

Cave, 7, GSSA M 3231 showing surface pitting and cellutJar under layer due to extensive bor-

ing, 0-4 miles (0-65 km) north of Hampton Microwave Repeater Tower,

PLATE 3

Figures I-4, X 1, figure 5, X 0.5

Campanile triseriale Basedaw, Upper Pfiocene, Hallett Cove Sandstone: 1, AUGD F 15480

Edithbure. topotype: 4, AUGD F 15481 Hallett Cove.

Campanile virginiense Ludbrook, Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek Sands; 2, GSSA M 2360, holo-

type, Observation Bore A, Virginia, sec. 3036, hd, Munno Para, 209-217 feet (63-3-65-4 m):

3, GSSA M 2013, paratype, F. Virgin Bore, Sec, 3224, hd. Munno Para, 338-350 feet (102-

106 m)-

Canipanile sp. Lower Miocene, Nullarbor Limestone, WAM 10448, Forrest, Western Aus-

tralia, Western Australian Muscum photo.

PLATE 4

A figures X |

Thericium (Chavanigertthuan) pritchardi (Hartis): 1-3, from type locality, Table Cape Tus-

mania, Table Cape Group, Freestone Cove Sandstone, Longfordian, Lower Miocene; 1,

AUGD T 356; 2, 3, AUGD F 15488; & AUGD F 15482, from “Murray Desert”, ic, Book-

purnong Beds, Lower Pliocene (? Upper Miocenc), boring wt Tarecna, New South Wales.

5-6, 9-10. Thericium (Chayanicerithium) flemingtanense (McCoy), all Jatex casts: 5-6, 10, from New-

port Formation, ? Ratcombian, Middle Miocene; 5, NMV P 27981, Flemington: 6, NMV P

16381, West Essendon, figd. Gill & Baker, 1955; 10, NMV P 27484 West Essendon; 9,

GSSA M 3234 upper part of Melton Limestone, old flux quarry, Wallaroo, South Australia

Thericiam (Chavanicerithium) adelaidense {Howchin & Cotton), Upper Pliocene. Dry Creek

Sands; 7, GSSA M 765A, Cowandilla Bore, sec, 92, hil. Adelaide, 485-507 feet (147-154 m):

%, GSSA M 643, Kooyonga Bore 1932, sev. 2028, bd. Adelaide, 491-501 feet (149-152 m),

N. H. LUDBROOK

PLATE 5

All figures X 1

Thericium (Chavanicerithium) torri (Tate), “Murray Desert”, i.c. Boukpurnong Beds, Lower

Pliocene (? Upper Miocene); 1, AUGD T 1618, holotype, Boring at ? Mindarie, South

Australia; 2, AUGD T 832, paratype, boring at 9? Tareena, New South Wales.

Thericium (Chavanicerithium) tatei Ludbrook. Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek Sands; 3, GSSA

M 3224, holotype, Observation Bore A, Virginia, sec. 3036, hd. Munno Para, 209-217 feet

(63°3-65°8 m); 4, AUGD F [5486, paratype, A. H. Kinnish, Direk, Bore 2, sec. 3076, hd.

Munno Para, 265 feet (80 m).

Thericium (Chavanicerithium) westraliense Ludbrook, Pleistocene of the Roe Plain; 5, WAM

Sante holotype, Hampton Microwave Repeater Tower; 6, WAM 70.1133 paratype, same

ocality.

Thericium (Chavanicerithtunt) darraghi Ludbrook, Pleistocene of the Roe Plain; WAM 69.547,

0-4 miles (0-65 km) north of Hampton Microwave Repeater Tower.

Thericium (Chavanicerithinm) sp,ct. 1. (C.) darraghi Ludbrook, Pleistocene of the Roe Plain,

WAM 69.483, Hampton Microwave Repeater Tower.

PLATE 6

All figures X |

Jetwoodsia apheles (Tenison Woods), Balcombian, Middle Miocene, Victoria; 1, AUGD F

15485, Balcombe Clay, Fossil Beach, Mornington; 2 AUGD F 15489, Muddy Creek Marl,

Muddy Creek, Hamilton, juvenile, close 10 holotype: 3, AUGD F 15490 Muddy Creek Marl,

showing varicate early whorls and development of sculpture.

Jetwoodsia nullarborica (Chapman & Crespin), Aldingan, Upper Eocene, Blanche Point

Marls, Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay; 4, GSSA M 3238; 5, GSSA M 3237.

Thericium (Thericium) fallax Ludbrook, Upper Pliocene, Dry Creek Sands, GSSA M 2730,

De Ruro Bore, Waterloo Corner, sec. 4259, hd. Munno Para, 240-245 feet (72'8-74+3 m).

“Thericium (Chavanicerithium) wynyardense” (Tate), Longfordian, Lower Miocene, Table

Cape Group, Freestone Cove Sandstone, Table Cape, Tasmania; 8, AUGD F 15484 juvenile;

11, AUGD F 15483.

Diastama adelaidense Ludbrook; Lower to Middle Miocene, upper part of Melton Limestone,

Wallaroo, latex casts; 9, GSSA M 3241; 10, GSSA M 3242.

N. H. LupBrRooKk PLATE

LUDBROOK

PLATR

N. H. LupDBROOK PLATI

H, LupBrRooK

PLATI

PLATE

LUDBROOK

PLAYE 6

VOLUNTARY CONTROL OF THE SHAPE OF THE INFLATED VOCAL SAC

BY THE AUSTRALIAN LEPTODACTYLID FROG LIMNODYNASTES

TASMANIENSIS

by M. J. TyLer*

Summary

Individuals of the Australian leptodactylid frog Limnodynastes tasmaniensis were observed to

voluntarily modify the shape and position of the inflated vocal sac structure. A study of the anatomy

of superficial mandibular features was correlated with profile sketches of the positions occupied by

the inflated vocal sac structure. In the absence of audibly detectable differences in mating calls emitted

from partially or completely inflated vocal sacs, it was concluded that neither shape nor position of

the vocal sac structure influence call composition.

Introduction

The sounds produced by male frogs to ad-

vertise their territorial inclinations or sexual

aspirations have been the subject of study by

many workers. Recognition of the specificity

of mating calls has resulted in numerous

analyses of the calls, and of their role in

pre-mating isolating mechanisms. In contrast,

data on the actual mechanics of sound pro-

duction, and particularly of the role of the

inflated vocal sac are insufficient to substan-

tiate some widely accepted assumptions.

It may be inferred from the behaviour of

species lacking vocal sacs that such structures

amplify sounds produced in the larynx. For

example, Moore (1961) noted that such a

species, Litoria (Hyla) lesueuri, had “a pecu-

liar soft call that I found difficult to detect

beyond ten feet”. Whether the vocal sac con-

tributes to detectable call parameters (spectral

composition) is uncertain, although in Rana

catesbiana, Capranica (1965) concluded that

variation in capacity did not.

One would expect differences in the gross

morphology of the sac, and particularly its

shape and position in relation to the larynx,

to influence call structure. Whether this is in

fact the case remains uncertain.

In the course of studies on the morphology

and function of anuran vocal sac structures,

some individuals of the Australian lepto-

dactylid frog Limnodynastes tasmaniensis were

observed to be capable of voluntarily modify-

ing both the shape and position of the inflated

vocal sac structure. Comparable observations

have not been reported on any other anuran

species. The modification could be distin-

guished from partial inflation of the entire

structure, and indicated the existence of a

refined mechanism of control of the muscles

or skin underlying the vocal sac.

Detailed attention was therefore paid to L.

tasmaniensis to establish the morphology of

the submandibular region, the positions of sub-

mandibular structures during vocal sac dis-

tension, the mechanism by which changes in

the shape and position of the inflated vocal

sac structures are effected, and the influence

of shape and position of the vocal sac structure

on the emitted call.

Material and Methods

Over a period of several years observations

were made on Limnodynastes tasmaniensis

calling in static or very slowly running water,

in the vicinity of Adelaide and the adjacent

Mt. Lofty Ranges. Specimens in breeding con-

dition were transferred to vivaria in the labora-

tory in early August 1969 where they con-

tinued to call during the daytime.

Profile drawings were prepared of specimens

observed to exhibit the control of the vocal

sac structure described in this paper. The

same specimens were then killed in a 5%

solution of urethane, fixed in 60% alcohol,

and the position of the superficial mandibular

muscles and of the vocal sac subsequently

determined by dissection with the aid of a

low-power binocular microscope.

“Vocal sac” is here used to refer to the

inflatable diverticula intruding between the

superficial ventral mandibular muscles, and

the deeper musculature of the tongue and

hyoid apparatus. The vocal sac together with

the Musculus intermandibularis, M. _ inter-

* South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. Vol. 95, Part I. 17th March 1971.

50 M. J. TYLER

hyoideus and the skin ventral to these muscles

are collectively referred to as the “vocal sac

structure”.

Morphology of the Vocal Sac Structure

A description of anuran vocal sac structure

has been presented elsewhere (Tyler, 1971).

The musculature of L. tasmaniensis is atypical

in that the most anterior fibres of the inter-

mandibularis do not follow the customary

transverse path, but pass forwards and attach

upon the ventral surface of the submentalis

(Fig. 1) so obscuring much of the latter

muscle from the ventral aspect. The most

antero-medial segment of the intermandibularis

is aponeurotic.

interhy.

Fig. 1. Superficial mandibular musculature from

ventral aspect. imand. = Musculus inter-

mandibularis; interhy. = M. interhyoi-

deus; mand, = Mandible; submen, = M.

submentalis.

The only myo-integumental attachment in

the submandibular region is via the post-

mandibular septum.

The innervation of the superficial mandibu-

lar musculature corresponds to that described

by de Watteville (1875) in Rana esculenta,

The skin underlying the intermandibularis is

innervated by the inframaxillary branch of the

fifth cranial nerve, and the skin beneath the

interhyoideus by the seventh.

The vocal sac extends antero-medially to the

posterior border of the intermandibularis and

antero-laterally to the limits of the elongate

vocal sac apertures,

Calling Behaviour

Two races of this species are recognised on

the basis of differences in mating call: a

southern call race characterised by “a short

single pulsed mating call”, and a northern

call race characterised by “a mating call com-

posed of two to five pulses” (Littlejohn and

Martin, 1965; Littlejohn, 1967). The frogs

which I studied are members of the northern

call race.

Limnodynastes tasmaniensis usually calls

from an exposed position in water, The frog

floats with the body submerged and the limbs

extended. Prior to inflation of the vocal sac

the long axis of the body is horizontal.

Inflation of the vocal sac alters the buoyancy

of the individual. The head and chest are raised

so that the vocal sac structure lies above the

level of the water. The longitudinal axis of the

body is tilted to an angle of approximately

sixty degrees from the horizontal, and the trunk

submerges.

The mating call of this species is customarily

emitted with the entire mandibular region

grossly distended. In profile the vocal sac

structure extends beyond the anterior portion

of the sternum (Fig. 2A); when viewed from

above the vocal sac structure extends laterally

beyond the mandibles.

of,

Fig. 2. Profile views of inflated vocal sac. A =

fully inflated; B = partially deflated;

C = posteriorly inflated; D = entirely

deflated.

Following completion of vocal activity the

vocal sac structure is usually rapidly and

entirely deflated (Fig. 2D). On occasions how-

ever it is either partially but uniformly de-

flated (Fig. 2B), or the anterior portion of the

structure is completely deflated whilst the

posterior remains inflated (Fig. 2C). Inter-

mittent vocal activity is occasionally resumed

with the vocal sac structure thus incompletely

VOCAL SAC CONTROL IN LINNODYNASTES 51

deflated. There was no audibly detectable

difference between the calls emitted with the

vocal sac maximally inflated or incompletely

deflated.

Discussion

Studies on the disposition of submandibular

vocal sacs in other anuran genera indicate that

they occupy one of two positions: they extend

anteriorly above the interhyoideus and inter-

mandibularis, or lie above the interhyoideus

but do not extend anteriorly beyond the border

of the intermandibularis.

From the observation that when the vocal

sac of L. tasmaniensis is maximally inflated

the entire submandibular region is distended,

this species could be anticipated to possess a

vocal sac of the former type, with the inter-

mandibularis composing the muscular lining

of the anterior segment of the inflated vocal

sac structure. The vocal sac is however of the

latter type and so is not free to intrude above

the intermandibularis. Vocal sac inflation can-

not therefore direct any portion of this muscle

into a position above the intermandibularis.

Although the hyoid plate lying above the

intermandibularis can be considerably raised

or depressed in freshly killed frogs, it is

attached posteriorly via the postero-medial

processes to the larynx, which is attached via

other processes to the oesophagus, heart and

lungs. Thus the hyoid may depress the inter-

mandibularis, but the possibility of the former

being also capable of forcing the latter against

the anterior segment of the skin during maximal

inflation can be excluded. It is therefore

concluded that during maximal inflation the

interhyoideus passes forwards to underly the

intermandibularis (Fig. 3).

The anterior margin of the posteriorly in-

flated vocal sac structure correlates perfectly

with the position of the border between the

intermandibularis and interhyoideus, and in-

dicates quite clearly that in this form of

inflated structure the interhyoideus is by some

means prevented from intruding beneath the

intermandibularis. The profile view also reveals

that the intermandibularis is not depressed.

Thus the skin covering the intermandibularis

appears to be responsible for restricting the

inflated interhyoideus to a posterior position.

The term “elastic” has been applied to a

submandibular skin which is recognised to

contribute to the potential distension of the

vocal sac structure (Inger, 1956; Blair, 1964),

The extreme and prolonged distension of sub-

mandibular skin, such as occurs during vocal

genhy.

submen.

skin mand.

Fig. 3. Interpreted position of superficial man-

dibular muscles during maximal] inflation

of vocal sac structure. Enlargement re-

presents sagital section. epith. = epi-

thelial lining of vocal sac; genhy. =

Musculus geniohyoideus. For Key to

other abbreviations see caption to Figure

activity associated with the breeding season,

stretches it and may result in loss of the ability

to contract fully. The skin becomes irregu-

larly pleated and hangs loosely in species that

lack direct myo-integumental contact (e.g.

many Neotropical Hy/a spp.).

The tissue most likely to produce skin con-

traction is the thin layer of muscle at the base

of the corium. In view of the difference in

innervation of the skin beneath the inter-

mandibularis from that beneath the inter-

hyoideus, the existence of a nervously mediated

mechanism for constricting one portion and

not the other, so producing the effect observed

in L. tasmaniensis, is indicated.

The absence of any audibly detectable

difference between the calls of L. tasmaniensis

emitted with the vocal sac completely or par-

tially inflated, suggests that neither shape nor

position in relation to the larynx influence

spectral call composition.

Although the observations are subjective,

the conclusion is supported by Blair’s (1959)

afrangement of anuran species into groups

on the basis of similarities in mating-call

structure, instead of the customary means of

resemblance in internal or external morpho-

logy. Blair so divided thirteen species of Hyla

occurring in the U.S.A. into several species

groups. This resulted in associating the species

baudini with the H. versicolor group, although

he noted that whereas versicolor and the other

species had a customary submandibular (“sub-

gular’) vocal sac structure, baudini possessed

a sac with paired posterior lobes. Starrett

By M. J. TYLER

(1960) placed baudini in the redefined genus

Smilisca, so indicating that call similarities are

of little value in establishing the higher group-

ings of species.

Acknowledgements

I am greatly indebted to Dr. W. G. Inglis,

Director of the South Australian Museum,

for constructive criticism of the manuscript.

References

Bair, W. F. (1959).—Call structure and species

groups in U.S. tree frogs (Hyla). SWest.

Nat. 3, 77-89.

(1964).—Acoustic behaviour of Am-

phibia. 7n R. G. Busnel (Ed.) “Acoustic

Behaviour of Animals”, pp. 694-708. (Else-

vier.)

CapRANICA, R. R. (1965).—The evoked vocal

response of the bullfrog: a study of com-

munication by sound. Res. Monogr. Mass.

Inst. Technol. (33), 1-110.

INGER, R. F. (1965).—Morphology and develop-

ment of the vocal sac apparatus in the African

frog Rana (Ptychadena) porosissima Stein-

dachner. J. Morph. 99 (1), 57-72.

LITTLEJOHN, M. J. (1967).—Patterns of Zoo-

geography and Speciation in South-eastern

Australian Amphibia. in A. H. Weatherley

(Ed.) “Australian Inland Waters and _ their

Fauna”, pp. 150-174. (Australian

University Press, Canberra.)

LITTLEJOHN, M. J. and Martin, A. A. (1965). —

Mating call structure in three sympatric

species of Limnodynastes (Anura, Leptodac-

tylidae). Copeia 1965 (4), 509-511.

Moore, J. A. (1961).—The frogs of Eastern New

South Wales. Bull. Amer. Mus. nat. Hist.

121 (3), 153-385.

STARRETT, P. (1960).—A redefinition of the genus

Smilisca. Copeia 1960 (4), 300-304.

TyLer, M. J. (1971).—The phylogenetic signifi-

cance of vocal sac structure in hylid frogs.

Univ. Kans. Publs. Mus. nat. Hist. 19 (4),

319-360.

WATTEVILLE, A. de (1875).—A description of

the cerebral and spinal nerves of Rana

esculenta. J. Anat. Physiol., Lond. 9 (1),

145-162.

National

VISCUM KATIKIANUM (VISCACEA), A NEW SPECIES OF MISTLETOE

FROM NEW GUINEA

BY B. A. BARLOW

Summary

A new species, Viscum katikianum, is described. It is known only from a single collection made

near Wau, New Guinea. It belongs in section Mesandrum Tiegh., but differs from the Asian-

Australian species of the section in its large ovate leaves and perhaps by its minutely spotted fruits.

VISCUM KATIKIANUM (VISCACEAE), A NEW SPECIES OF MISTLETOE FROM

NEW GUINEA

by B. A. BARLow*

Summary

A new species, Mixewn katikianym, is described Tt is knawn only from a single collection made

near Wau, New Guinea, Lt belongs in section Mesandrim Viegh., but differs from the Asian-Australian

species of the section in its large ovate Jeaves and perhaps by its minutely spotted’ fruits.

Viscum katikiznum Barlow, sp. nov.

Glauber. Frutex gracilis ad omni nodum

vamosus sed caulibus individuis distincte

monopadialibus; surcult laterales non valde

divaricati. Felia opposita; lamina anguste ovata,

h-11 cm longa, 2'5-4+5 cm lata, tenuis, apice

leniter attenuata obtusa vel late acuta, basi

in petiolum infirme distinguibilis (+S-1 ¢m

longum attenuata, curvinervis nervis tres yel

quingue longitudinalibus utringque distinctis et

in petiolum distinetis remanentibus et anasto-

moose supra distincta, JAflorescenttide © nodis

deinveps cyolutac, ad basin. omni prophylliis

hinatis c. 1 mim longis subtentis; pedunculus

teres, ¢, + mm longus, 1 mm crassus sed in

fructum accrescens, apice duo bracteae in navi-

culam 2-3 mm longam connatae pracditac;

cymae triflorae. Flos maseulus centralis, glo-

basus, ¢. 1-5 mm diam., 4-merus; perigonii

seementa triungulares. ¢. 1 mm longae; un-

therue ad perigoniorum segmenta sessiles, de-

pressac pyramidalis, 6- vel @-eellulares.. Flores

Jeminel in triadum laterales, cylindricae, c,

2 mm longae, 4-merac; perigonis segmenta

triangulares; oc. 0°7 mm longoc; stigma de-

pressum canicum, c. 0-3 mm longum. Frees

fusiformis ellipsoideus, c. 5 mim longus, stig-

mate persistenti coronato, laevis sed minute

spirsim maculatus,

TYPUS: Wau forestry area, Morobe Dis-

trict, New Guincy, c. 1360 m eley,, parasitic

on Aniyema strongylophylium (Barlow 948),

Barlow 947, 11.1,1965 (AD 97046179, holo-

typus; CANB: LAB).

Glabrous, Slender shrub, branching at every

node but with the individual stems distinctly

monupodial; lateral shoots not strongly divari-

cale, Leaves opposite; lamina narrow ovate.

6-10 cm long, 7-5-4+5 cm wide, thin, weakly

atteavate and obtuse or broadly acute at the

apeX, altenuate at the base into w weakly diller-

entiated petiole 0-3-1 om long; venation curvi-

nervous with three or five Jongitudinal veins

distinct on both sides and remaining distinct

in the petiole; reticulate venation distinct on

the upper surface. Inflorescences developing

successively at the nodes, each subtended at

the base by a pair of triangular prophylls c.

1 mm long; peduncle terete, c, 4 mm Jong and

L mm thick but enlarging in fruit, bearing at

the apex a boat-shaped pair of connute bracts

2-3 mm long which subtends a triad of flowers,

Mule flower central in the triad but apparently

deciduous, globular, c. 1-5 mm in diameter,

4-merous; periunth segments triangular, c. J

mm long; anthers sessile on the perianth seg-

ments, depressed-pyramidal, 6- to &-celled,

Female flowers lateral in the triad, cytinurical,

¢e, 2 mm Jong, 4-merous; perianth segments

trianguiar, c, 0-7 om long; stigma depressed-

conical, c, 0-3 mm Jong. Fruit fusiform-

ellipsoidal, ¢, 5 mm Jong, crowned by the

persistent stigma, smooth but minutely and

sparsely dark-spatted,

SPECIMENS EXAMINED: Type collection

only.

Discussion

Viscum katikianum belongs in Section

Mesandrum Tiegh,, which is distinguished hy

ils inflorescences in which the central flower is

male (van Tieghem, 1896). Tn the most

recent revision of the Indomalayun species of

Viscum, Danser (1941) recognised four

species which can be placed in this section,

although he did not employ infra-generic

categories. These are Fb’. trilobatuin Talbot

and V, capitellatum Smith from. India and F.

hancro/lii Blakely and V, whitei Blakely frorm

Queensland, To these has been added the

recently described V. flexicuyfe from the

Northern Territory (Barlow, 1970), Vixeurn

keadikianuin is thus the first species of this

group ta he recognised from New Guinea. It

¢ Schwal of Biological Scicnves, Flinders University of South Australia, Hedfurd Park. S.A S042.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. Vol 95, Purt 1 12{h March 1971,

54 B. A. BARLOW

differs from all of the abovementioned related

species in its much longer leaves and perhaps

in its minutely spotted fruits, which have not

been mentioned in accounts of the other

species, Like the other members of the group

it is probably almost exclusively parasitic on

mistletoes of the family Loranthaceae.

The herbarium specimens on which the de-

scription is based are unfortunately sterile. A

small amount of flowering and fruiting material

was collected in alcohol, and was lodged with

the holotype in AD.

The species is named in honour of Mr. Paul

Katik, Division of Botany. Department of

Forests, Lae, New Guinea, who has pravided

willing assistance on my field trips to New

Guinea, and who assisted in making the

collection cited aboye.

saa

Fig. 1. A, portion of plant, x 4; B, inflorescence, x 3; C, perianth segment of male flower, with

anther, x 12; D, female flower, x 11; E, fruit, x 5-5.

References

Bartow, B. A. (1970).—Viscum flexicaule, a

new species from Northern Australia. Con-

trib. N.S.W, Nat. Herb., 4, 95.

Danser, B., H. (1941)—The British-Indian

species of Viscum revised and compared with

those of South-Eastern Asia, Malaysia, and

Australia. Blumea 4, 261-318.

VAN TiEGHEM, P. (1896)—Sur le groupement

des espéces en genres dans les Ginalloées,

Bifariées, Phorandendrées et Viscées, quatre

tribus de la famille des Loranthacées, Bull.

Soc. bot. Fr, 43, 161-194.

VOL. 95, PART 2 11 AUGUST, 1971

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

CONTENTS

Edmonds, S. J. Australian Acanthocephala No. 13: three new species - - 55

Mawson, P. M. Two new species of Rictularia (Nematoda) from cuir

Rodents - - - - - - - - - 61

Inglis, W. G. Marine Enoplida (Nematoda) from Western Australia - - 65

Tyler, M. J., and Menzies, J. I. A new species of Microhylid Frog es the apenas

Sphenophryne from Milne Bay, Papua - - af)

Brock, E. J. The denudation chronology of the Fleurieu Peninsula, South

Australia - - - - - - . - - - 85

Aitken, P. F. Whales from the coast of South Australia = - - . - 95

Angel, L. M. Pachytrema calculus Looss, 1907 Gremaicgo: ypitosetiies

from Australia - - - - 105

Brittan, N. H. Thysanotus fractiflexus sp. nov. (Lilaceae), endemic to

Kangaroo Island, South Australia - - - - - 109

Womersley, H. B. S. New records and taxa of Marine Cilponhye in southern

Australia - - - - - - 113

a eS i a a EE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING

NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA No. 13: THREE NEW SPECIES

BY S. J. EDMONDS

Summary

Three new species of acanthocephalans are described from Australian hosts. A note on

Arhythmorhynchus johnstoni Golvan, 1960 (= A. frassoni of Johnston and Edmonds, 1951) is also

included. The new species are - (1) Pseudoacanthocephalus perthensis from Litoria moorei

(Copeland) and Limnodynastes dorsalis (Gray), (2) Neoechinorhynchus aldrichettae from

Aldrichetta forsteri (Cuvier and Valenciennes), and (3) Arhythmorhynchus limosae from Limosa

lapponica (Linnaeus) .

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA No, 13: THREE NEW SPRCTIES

by S&S. J, Epvioyns*

Summary

Three new species of acanthocephaluns are described from Australian hosts. A note on Arhythme

elivachus johasiani Galvan, 1960 (= A. frassent of Johnsion and Edmonds, 1951) is also included,

The new species are—(1) Psendoacanthacephalus perthensis from Litoria moore’ (Copeland) and

Linmedynastes daryaliy (Gray). (2) Neoechinorhynchus aldrichettae from Aldrichetta forsteri: (Cuvier

am! Valenciennes), and (3) Arhythmorhyachus limosae tron Limosa lapponica (Linnaeus).

Pseudoacanthocephalus perthensis n. sp.

FIGS. 1-5

Pregdoucanthocephalus Petrotschenka, L956;

Golvan, 1969: 286,

Host and Locality. About Y specimens

were collected from frogs at Rockingham,

near Perth, Western Australia by Dr. W. G.

Inglis of the South Australian Museum, 6

from Litoyia meorei (20/8/66) and 3 trom

Limmnodynesles dorsalis (26/4/66), ‘The

specimens were found in the intestine of the

frogs.

Type speciniens (male and female); Aus-

tralian Museum, Sydney.

Description. The parasites are small and stout,

the female being longer and more cylindrical.

The trunk of both gexes is curved ventrally to

a slight extent.

"The trunk of the male specimens is 2+6-3-2

min long and hag a maximum width of Or6-0-8

mm. The corresponding measurements of the

jemale are 5-1-6-9 mm and 0:8-1-1 mm, The

irunk lacks spines and ils body wall is thick.

The introvert (s subcylindrical to ovoidal in

shape and arises anteriorly on the Ventral side

of the mid line of the trank. Is length is 0-35-

0-40 mm and width 0-21-0°30 mm. It is

armed with 12-14 rows of 4-5 hooks per row.

The length of the hooks. measured directly

from the highest point on the curve of the

hook to the tip of the hook is about 70-90 ,m.

All the hooks have well developed, posteriorly

directed rooting processes. The sheath is

double-walled and the cerebral ganglion Jies at

its base. The lemmisci are short and stout and

about as long as’ the sheath.

The testes of the male lie either in tandem

or so as to overlup slightly. There are three

pairs of cement glands. which in all but one

specimen are pressed closely together. The

male aperture is terminal, The female com-

plex of uterine bell, uterus and vagina is about

0:7-0-9 mm dong and the femalé aperture

wppears to he subterminal, The eggs are ellip»

soidal und do not possess polar prolongations

of the middle shell, They are 45-55 pm long

and 20-25 um wide,

Systematic position. This species differs from

P. bufonis (Shipley), P. betstleo Golvan, Houin

and Brygoo (in Golvan, 1969; 291), P. bigueti

(Houin, Golyan & Brygoo, 1965), P. bufeni-

cola (Kostylew) and P, eaucasicus (Petrat-

schenko) Jargely in the number of hooks found

on the introvert.

This species luck$ polar prolongations of the

middle shell. I have not been able to ascertain

whether the integument of the acanthor hears

spings over its entire surface (Golvan, 1969:

287),

Golvan (1969: 287) says, “Quant 4 Ii

validité du genre Psewdoucanthocephalus, bien

que jet) ai d’abord douté (Golvan, 1960) elle

me parait aujourd'hui parfaitement acceptable,

et ce n'est pas l'un des moindres meériics de

Petrotschenko de l'avoir établic”.

Neoechinorhynchus aldrichettae o. sp.

FIGS, 6-9

Nevwechinarhynchus Hamann, 1892; Golvan,

1959; 20,

Host and lacality, About 70 live specimens

were collected from the posterior gut of

three specimens of the local mullet Aldri-

chetta forsteri (Cuy, and Val.) at Port Pirie,

South Australia. The finding of wcantho-

cephalans embedded in a mucous region of

the posterior gul about 25 mm broad and

about 35 mm anterior to the anal aperture

is, ws Jar us L know, untisuil The parasites

were found in @ similar position in the gut

of each of the three fish and there is nu

* Department of Zoology, University of Adeluide, Adelaide, S.A. 5000.

Trans, R. Soc. S, Aust. You. 95, Part 2. 11th August 1971.

36 8. J. EDMONDS

Figs. 1-5. Pseudoacanthocephalus perthensis, Fig. 1—Male. Fig. Rearmys ety aby Fhe 3.—Intro

hanks, Fie. 4. —Female oomplex. Fig. 5. —Eges. Mea

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA No. 13: THREE NEW SPECIES 57

doubt in my mind that they were attached

to the gut in this region. The collection con-

tained only seven males.

Type specimens (male and female); Aus-

tralian Museum, Sydney.

Description. All specimens are less ihan 8-0

mm long and tapered slightly posteriorly. An-

teriorly there is a small, globular introvert sur-

ae «2 I

a a J ¥

10 ‘\ é

)

Figs. 6-9.

mounted on a short, unarmed, truncated neck,

The trunk lacks spines.

The length of the body of the males is 4-1-

6-4 mm and the maximum width 0-3-0-6 mm.

The corresponding measurements of the female

ure 4-8-7:8 and 0:5-0:7 mm. The posterior

extremity of the female is capable of ¢ msider-

able invagination.

O05

Neoechinorhynchus aldrichettae. Fig. 6.—Introvert. Fig. 7.—Introvert hooks. Fig. 8—

Male. Fig. 9—Female complex. Measurements in mm.

Fig, 10.

Arhythmorhynchus johnstoni—introvert.

The maximum. length of the globular intre-

vert is 0-09-0-13 mm in the male and 0-10-

O14 in the femule, The maximum width is

Orl}-O+tS mm in the male and 0°13-0°15 in

the female. The width of the neck at its junc-

tio WIth the introvert is 0°09-0°13 and the

length 105-0-08 mm.

The introvert haoks lie in six spiral rows of

three hooks per row. The anteriormost hook

ol each nuw ts largest and is 49-62 jam long,

measuring in a straight line trom the highest

puint on the huok to the tip of the hook, It

bears a strong posteriorly directed rooting pro-

eess. The length of the second hook is 29-34

tm and the third (8-25 um.

_ A single-walled receptacle arises just pos-

terior to the point of insertion of the last hook

und is about 0:32-0:52 om long. The eerebral

ganglion Les at the hase ol the receptacle. The

lemmisci are about one third as long us the

trunk. There are clearly eight large subcuticular

nuclei, six on one side and two on the other

side af the body wall.

The position of the male reproductive struc-

Vures varies, In the longest specimen they ure

placed in the pustenor half of the animal but

in olhers they are in the anterior half. The

estes are 0-25-0'50 mm long and sither over-

lap slightly or are in tandem. The cement gland

is Jarge and O-5-0-9 mm long and syncytial.

The number of nuclei which jt contains has

nat been dejermined with certainty, There is a

cement reservoir and SwelYiigen's pouch, The

male aperture is terminal,

The posterior extremity of many of the

females is invaginated. The female structtites

are comparatively short and about 0+2-0-4 mm

long. The vaginal region ts olten marked by the

presence of cougulated material. The eges are

small and measure 25-30 yn by 11-L6 ym.

Synenutc posttion. The specimens are nearest

N. agitis Hamann, a species described from

Mugilidue of Europe (Meyer, 1932: 172) and

Japan CYamagwti, 1935; 275), The introvert

hooks of Hatnann’s specimens, however, are

more than twice the size of the Australian

species. This is also true of Yamaguti'’s spec¢i-

mens.

Southwell and MeFre (1925) described a

single immature acanthocephalan from Queens-

land as N. magnus. The host is unknown. Al-

though the size of the hooks is comparable with

those of N, aldrichettae the length of the body

is given as 90 mm and the width 1-5 mm, that

is the body length of N, magnus is more than

len lines What of N. aleri¢hetive, The measure-

mJ. EDMONDS

ment of 90 mm appears ti be correc! because

Southwell and MecFie in their text state “the

species differs from all other species in being

much larger’. N. jnageus, then, appears co be

different fram the South Australian specimens,

Tripathi (1959) described a number of neq-

echitforhynchs from some Indian fish, including

N, bahgent from Mugil tade and N. elengatus

from Muzil subviridis. The lengths of the hooks

of N, bangor? (0°026-0-038 mm) are con-

siderably smuller than those of N. aldrichetiqe

and the well developed rooting process on the

third or last hook of cach row uf N. bangoni

is not present in N. aldrichetrae, Tripathi's

figure of N. elongdrus might well serye for N,

aldrichentae, The two species, however, are

different because Tripathi's figure 4 shows that

ouly two subculicular nuclei are present und

because the egg of N. elongatus is 0-11 mm

long and 0°0266 mm wide.

N. butinerae Golvan. 1956 from Myletes fs

close but is described as possessing 5 | 2

subcuticular nuclei and net 6 + 2. NM. aldri-

chetlae resembles in many respects N. aero.

nucleatus Tubangui, 1933, deseribed, however,

from a fresh-water fists.

Arbythmorhynchus limosae np, sp,

FIGS. 11-15

Arhythimorhyachus Lite;

382.

Host and Locality. Eight specimens col-

levted by Dr, A.J. Bearup (School of Public

Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney)

from the gut of the god-wit, Limose fap-

poricd, wt Townsville, (Quéenslund on

28/1/59,

Type specimens (male and female); School

of Public Health and Tropical Medicine,

Sydney,

Veveription. The specimens are long and slen-

der but swolleii slightly anteriorly, ‘The length

of the teink of the males is 14-22 min and

that of the females 21-41 mm. The swollen

anterior region of the trunk of the mules is

0-5-0-7 mm wide and thar of the females

Q°5-L-O.mm, The surface of the swollen region

is armed with numerous rows of hody spines

which extend over a greater area of ihe ventral

than the dorsal surface, The rest of the trunk

is cylindrical and unarmed and about 6+3-0-5

mm wide in females,

The armed portion of the introvert 14 1-1-

1-4 mm long and generally cylindrical; its

width 1:25-0'7 mm (in saute specimens its

Golvan, 1%6¥:

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA No. 13; THREE NEW SPECIES

jigs

qt ;

)

(Sc

anh

ealobe

pene

ph a Ss

EP oan

AIRS

OYUN

12 |

Arhythmerhynehus limesae, Fig. 11a-b,—Anterior and posterior regions of male, Fig. 12.

—Introvert. Fig. 13—Inirovert hooks. Fig. 14.—Body spines. Fig. 15.—Egys. Measure-

ments in mm.

Figs. 11-15.

40 S.J. EDMONDS

maximum width is at the anterior extremity),

It arises from a short unarmed neck about

{)e 14le2 mm long, In most specimens the neck

is retracted into the unk. tn none of the speci-

mens is the introvert swollen near its mid-

length, the condition in a number of specics of

the genus, The introvert ls armed with about

19-20 rows of 20-21 hooks per row, The

aitertor-most hooks are stoutest and. possess

MIrong, postertorly directed rooting processes.

The hooks generally decrease in size the fur-

ther they lie away trom the tp of the introvert

and their posteriorly directed rooting processes

gradually disappear, an anteriorly directed pro-

cess appearing in its place {Frig, |3). The

posterior six ‘hooks’ of each row are more

spiniform and have very well developed

anterior rooting processes. The spines arc

slightly longer than the houks which imme-

diately precede them. The hooks on the dorsul

and ventral surfaces of the mlrovert appear lo

he the same size and have the same shape, The

introvert sheath iy double-walled anu its miaxi-

mum length is 21 mm,

The testes lie ina very anterior position of

the trunk, usually in the swollen part. They

are 0-8-1-0 mm long and 0-20-0-28 mm wide.

The cement glands are very long. slender and

pressed closcly together: they traverse the

length of the trunk that lies posterior to the

testes. Saefftigen’s pouch is 1-0-l+3 mm long

and the male aperture is terminal.

The length of the female complex in a speci-

men about 30 mm long is 4 mm. Ripe cges are

76-80 wm long and 26-30 pm wide and, like

those of A. Jravsani. lack polar prolongations

of the middle shell.

Systematic position. This species is different

from 4. johnstonit Golvan (= A, frassent of

Johnston and Edmonds, 1951), described from

three mule specumens that were vollected [rum

Numenius eyanopus in Queensland. At first

sight A, jehnstoni and A. limoxae resemble

each other closely. A re-examination of the

three specimens shows that the two species

dilfee most noticeably in the structure of the

introvert hooks. Those of 4. juhastoni are

largest in the centre of the introvert, especially

on the veotenl side.

A. limosae differs from all other species of

the genus in the spination of its introvert.

Arhythmorhynchas jolinstoni CGiolvan.

FIG. 10

A. johnstont Golvan, 1960; 384 = A. fru

sont of Johnston & Edmonds, 1951,

Type specimen (mule); Australian Museum,

Sydney,

Johnsion and Edmonds. 1951, described

three male acanthocephalans from Nuenentus

cyanopus as A. frassoni (Molin, 1858). A.

frasson{ has been reported from Nunientes

arguatux and N, tenuirestris, Golyan (1960)

made the Australian specimens a new specres.

He gave no reasons for his action, This note is

to record thal the type muterial of Golvan’s

new species has now been lodged in the Aus-

tralian Museum, Sydney, A figure showing the

arrangement of the hooks on the introvert of

A, jefasxtoni is included in the present paper.

The drawing is made from 4 mounted speci-

nen which is slightly damaged,

References

Garvan, ¥-J, (1956) — Acanthacéphales d’Ama-

gonie Avnts, Perasit, tran, comp, 34 (5-6),

§00-524.

Griivan, Y-I. (1959).—1.e phylum des Acuntho-

cephala. Deuxitme note. annie. Purasit. dain.

eyvmyp. 34 (1), 1652,

GoLyan, YS, (1960).—Le phylum des Avantho-

cephala. Troisiéme note. tunis, Parasit. tum.

ennp. 35 (3), 350-386.

Garvas, Y-), (1965) —Acanthooéphales. de Mada-

pascar recoltes. par EB. R. Brygoo, Aanls,

Parasié, hun, conip. AW (3), 303-316.

Goivas, ¥-S_ (1969),—Systématique des Acantha:

céphales. 1. Mem. Muy. Nat. i ixtaire Natar.

(ns } Ser, A, Zoologie. 57 (1), 1-373,

HAstANN, O, (1892) —Das System der Acantho-

cephalen, Zvol, Avgtiy. VS, 195-197.

Hou. RK. GOLvsn, Y-}. and Brycoo, EF, R,

(1965 ).—Acanthocephatsas higweti ™ Sp, a

parsxite of a serpent. Bull. See. Zovl., France,

» 599-605.

Junnsvos, T. H. and Bumones, 5, J. (195]),

Australuin Acanthocephala. No, 8 Trans &.

Soc. S. Aust. T4 (1), 2-5,

MEYER. A. €1932).—Acanthocepbila. Jn Bronn’s

“Klassen unc Ordnungen des Tierrei¢hs’ 4

(2), 1-583 (Leipsig.)

PeTRo'scHENKO, V. 1. (1956)—Acanthocephala

of wild and domestic animals, 1, af&ad, Nawk,

SSR, 1-435 (in Russian}.

Petrotsenunko, V. Lb (1958),—Acanthocephala

of wild und domestic animals. Ih. 4kad. Naek.

§.S.R,, 1-458 (in Russian).

SOUTHWELL, ‘Ll. und McFie, N, (1925)—On a

collection of Acanthocephala in the liverpool

School of ‘ropicul Medicine. Ann. Trap,

Med. Parasitol. 19 (2), 141-148.

Trievcut, ¥. R. (1959).—Studies on Parasites of

Indian Fishes, 5. Acanthogephala, Ree, Ma,

Mus. 54 (1-2), 61-99,

Tusanaui, M. A. (1933).—Notes on Acantho-

cepbala in the Philippines. Philipp, #. Sc, 50,

115-128.

Yamacutr, S. £1955).—Studies in the Helminih

Fuuna of Japa, Acanthocephala 1, Jap, J.

Zina, & (1), 247-27R.

TWO NEW SPECIES OF RICTULARZA (NEMATODA) FROM

AUSTRALIAN RODENTS

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

Two new species of Rictularia, the first of the genus to be recorded from Australia, are described.

In R. carstairsi, from Rattus villosissimus (Northern Territory), the mouth is rounded; the female is

up to 68 mm long, with cuticular spines (37-42 pre-vulvar, 17-35 post-vulvar) restricted to the

anterior half or less; the male is 10.1-15.5 mm long, with 54-69 cuticular spines, and equal spicules

80- 90 urn long. In R. mackerrasae from Rattus fuscipes assimilis (northern Queensland) the mouth

is slit-like and the buccal capsule dorsoventrally compressed; only females are present; these are up

to 82 mm long, with cuticular spines (30-33 pre-vulvar, up to 11 post-vulvar) restricted to the

anterior quarter or less of the body.

TWO NEW SPECIES OF RICTULARIA (NEMATODA) FROM AUSTRALIAN

RODENTS

by PatriciA M, Mawson*

Summary

Two new species of Rictularia, the first of the genus to be recorded from Australia, are described.

In R. carstairst, from Rattes villosissimus (Northern Territory), the mouth is rounded; the female is

up to 68 mm long, with cuticular spines (37-42 pre-vulvar, 17-35 post-vulvar) restricted to the an-

lerior half or less: the mate is 10.1-25,5 mm long, with 34-69 cuticular spines, and equal spicules 80-

90 um long. In R. mackerrasue from Ratias fuscipes assimilis (northern Queensland) the mouth is

ylit-like and the buccal capsule doarsoventrally compressed; only females are present; these are up to

82 mm long, with cuticular spines (30-33 pre-vulvar, up lo 11 post-vulyar) restricted to the wnterior

quarter ar less of the body.

Introduction

There is no record of a valid Rierularia sp.

from an Australian animal, Rictularia dis-

parilis Irwin-Smith, 1922 was described from

an Australian lizard but was placed by Dolllus

and Desportes (1945) in a new genus Pseudo-

rictulaurie and may be related to Preunianemut

liliguae Johnston.

However, the genus Rierularia is not un-

commer in native rats, A large collection of

male worms us well as females was recently

given to me by Mr. J. Carstairs (Zoology De-

partment, Monash University, Melbourne) who

found theni commonly in the long-hnired rat,

Rattus villosissimus, which he is studying, Dr.

M. J. Mackerras has given me four collections

from Rattus fuycipey assimilis from Northern

Queensland. In Ravtis fuscipes murrayi trom

Pearson Island, South Australia, Rintnlaria sp.

was present in two of four rats dissected in

1969 and in one dissected in 1923. The speci-

mens fram the first two of these hosts are

described in this paper, those from the (hird

will be described shortly, with other nematodes

from Pearson Island animals. I am most grate-

ful to Dr. Mackerras and to Mr, Carstairs for

providing the nematodes.

Rictularia carstairsi n. sp

FIGS. 1-7

Hast and locality; Raiius villosissintus,

Brunette Downs Station, Northern Territory.

The collector, Mr. Carstairs, found the

warms usually in the duodenum just behind the

pyloric sphincter but sometimes in the stomach,

This is'a very long species, the female worms

reaching 68 1mm, the males 15-5 in length.

Among about 150 females there are 15 males.

Although the female worms are all very similar.

two of the males differ from the other 13, and

these are described separately. In all specimens

the buccal capsule is wider than devp, its

anterior border hears ahouwt 28-32 small punted

teeth (in both sexes), more or less evenly dis-

tributed around the edge. The mouth opening

is at ahout 45° to the lang axis. of the worm.

‘The head bears the typical cephalic papillae,

an inner ting of six papillae and behind these

four submedian double papillae. The amphids

lie postero-dorsally to the Jateral papillae ot

the inner circle. The excretory pore is slightly

in front of, and the cervical papillae usually

behing, the junction of glandular and muscular

parts of the ocsophagus,

In the Female the sub-luteral spines do not

extend as far as midlength of the hady, The

vulva, almost at the level of the posterior end

of the oesophagus, is a transverse stil with

salient lips, the cuticle for au short distance

anterior and posterior to the vulva (bet not on

the salient lips) is raised into large irregularly

disposed rounded bosses (Fig. 5). The pre-

vulvar spines (37-42), are overlapping; the

17-35 post-vulvar spines become increasingly

far apart, and affer the first 10 they are very

sparse. and small, and the apparent variation in

numbers is due ptabably to their small size

In the male there are 54-69 pairs of spines

extending from just behind the hiuccal capsule

nearly to the cloaca. The first 35 pairs are aver-

lapping, and have large thick hases; the rest

become progressively further apart and more

hook-like until in the last filth of the body

cach is separated from the preceding by about

a hook’s length. There is usually one preanul

* Zoology Department. University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S. Aust. S000.

Trans. R. Soc, 8, Aust. Vol. 95, Part 2, 11th August 1971,

62 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Figs. 1-7.

Rictulavia carstairsi. 1, lead, dorsal view; 2, anterior end, lateral view; 3 and 4, lateral

and ventral views of male tail; 5, region of vulva, lateval view; 6 and 7. the fourth and

most posterior cuticular spine respectively.

fan, but in one specimen there are two, and

in another none, ‘The spicules are equal or

nearly so; a gubernaculum is present. The

ventral body surface around the cloaca is

raised into broken longitudinal ridges. The

extent of these and the arrangement of the

cloacal papillae are indicated in Figs, 3 and 4.

It is much as postulated for the genus (at least

for the species from rodents) by Tiner (1948)

except that there is an extra pair of preanal

papillae.

Measurements—Male: 10-1-15-5 mm _ long,

diameter 10 900 wm. Anterior end to cervical

papillae 710-1115 um (7th-9th spine), to nerve

ring 380-350 tm; oesophagus 2+4-3-4 mm

(23rd-28th spine), its muscular part 480-750

um, Spicule length 80-90 um. Female: Length

35-68 him, diameter to 1500 um, Ocsophagus

6:0-7-2 mm, its muscular part 1000-1250 im.

Anterior end io cervical papillae 1000-1250

um (7th-9th spine), to nerve ring 590-800 tum,

and to excretory pore 800-1050 hm. Tail 350-

750 um. Eggs 48-50 x 36-38 um.

Among species of Rictularia of which the

males haye been described this one most

closely resembles R. harrisi Baylis 1934. How-

ever, in R, harrisi the papillae of the male tail

were noi determined exactly, and the spicules

are rather shorter. Among species of which the

female only has been described, those with a

RICTULARIA FROM AUSTRALIAN RODENTS 6

similar number of spines anterior and posterior

to the viilva are R. caucasica, Schulz, 1927 and

R. magna Kreis, 1937. The available descrip-

tion of R. cancasica does not allow detailed

comparison. In R. magna there are only 18

denticles around the anterior border of the

buecal capsule.

Rictularia mackerrasae n. sp.

FIGS. 8-11

Host and locality: Raitus fuscipes assimi-

lis, near Innisfail, northern Queensland.

Only females of this species are present in

four collections. They were sent to me some

time ago by Dr. M. J. Mackerras,

The worms are up to $2 mm long. The sub-

lateral spines are restricted to about the first

quarter (or less) of the body length: they are

loO0um

Fig. 8-11.

hed

small and even the most anterior spines are

hook-like rather than imbricate; each is well

separated from the next. There are 30-33

spines between the head and the vulva, and up

to 11 behind this.

The mouth opening is directed dorsally, and

the cuticle on its ventral margin is very thick;

the ventro-lateral and lateral cephalic papillae

of the inner circle have long peduncles travers-

ing this cuticle. The two pairs of large sub-

median papillae of the outer circle are probably

double, but this is not clear. The amphids lic

close to the lateral cephalic papillae, slightly

dorsal and posterior to them.

The buccal capsule and mouth are dorso-

ventrally. compressed. The dorsal oesophageal

tooth is small and ventral teeth are absent. The

nerve ring is at about midlength of the anterior

muscular part of the oesophagus, the large

itll,

Richilaria mackerassue. & anterior end, lateral view; 9, head, dorsal view; 10, region of

vulva, lateral view: 11, fifth spine from anterior end.

Figs, 12,13. Rictuleria sp, from Rattus villosissimus. 12, head, laterial view; 13, posterior end of male.

64 PATRICIA M, MAWSON

cervical papillae at three quarters its length

(Sth or 6th spine) and the excretory pore

shortly in front of the cervical papillae.

‘The vulva is close to the posterior end of

the ocsophagus, it Jies in a transverse depres-:

sion of the body wall, and the lips are salient.

The cuticle around, including the lips, is finely

manimillated (Fig. 11).

Measurements—Female: length 65-82 mm:

oesophagus 5°7-6°3 mm, its anteriot muscular

section 900-1300 wm; distance from anterior

end to nerve ring 500-700 jm, to cervicil

pupillae §10-1150 um, and to excretory pore

800-1000 um. Vulva 5-0-5°9 mm from head;

eggs 46-50 x 30-31 uo. Tail 530-550),m.

Tiner (1948) notes thal Rictularia spp, in

American rodents are of two types, one in

which the ural opening jis circular and more

anteriorly directed (e.g. R. coloradvensis) and

another in which it is narrow, transverse and

dorsally directed (e.g. R. citelli). Species from

rodents belonging to the second type have been

recorded from various purts of the world, R.

prani Seurat (Africa and Europe), R. ani

rensis Schulz and R. strurica Dimitrova, Genov

and Karapchanski (Europe), R. elvirue

Parona (Burma), &. oligepectinea Wi

und Hu (China), R. dhama Inglis and Ogden

(India) and R. cilelli Mcleod (? Syn; R, hatti

Sandground according to Tiner) trom America.

R. mackerrasue is now described from an Aus-

tralian rat, it differs frony others of the group

chiefly in the number, size and arrangement of

tecth on the anterior border of {the buccal

capsule.

Inglis and Ogden (1963) suggest that the

exlent to which the mouth is directed dorsally

may depend on the degree to which it is. opened

or closed. This temporary movement however

would net account for the greatly thickened

culicle anteriorly, or for the greater length af

the median dorsal teeth on the anterior border

of the buccal capsule, which appear to be asso-

ciated with the nore dorsal slit-like mouth ip

the species listed ahove. Moreover the fact

that the condition is present in all specimens

frum a number of hosts of the same species

in one locality. (as is the case in the Australian

specimens) suggesis that it is a character with

specific rather than temporary significance.

Rictularia sp.

FIGS. 12, 13

Host and Locality; Rattus villosissimiy,

Brunctte Downs, Northern Ferritory.

Two male worms in the collection from this

rat differed from those desenibed ay R~. car-

stairsi, in that the spicules are distinctly un-

equal, the longer 145 jem and 150 wm, the

shorter 70 ptm and 75 pm, there are more

preanal fans, three in one and four in the

other. The worms are slightly shorter, 9-0 and

9-2 mm, Apert from these points, no. Teal

difference in the morphology from that of R.

carstqivst can bz found, As all the specimens

trom Ratins villosivsinws had been pul into

one container, it is not known if these two

mules, vecurred alone, or wilh Fernales and/or

other males.

References

Barus, H, A. (1934),—On a callection of ecstodes

and pemaodes from smal) mammals in Tan-

gunyika Territory. <n. Mug Nat, Mist, Ser.

10, 13, 348-353,

Doiirus, R. P. and DEsPoRTEs, C. ()945)—Sur

le genre Rictilaria Froelich, 180? (Néema-

todes Spiruvoidea). Annis. Parasit, Ain,

cen. 20, 6-34,

Inchis, W. G. and Ocnen, G. OG. (1945}—

Miscellanea Nematodologica WV. Rierularia

dhanre sp, noy, from a squirrel in Nepal.

Zoal, Anz. V74, 227 231.

Trwin-SnitH, VY, (1922),—A new nematode para-

a hig fizard. Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S’. 47,

31L3Ea.

Karis, H, A. (1937), —Beitrage zur Kengtnls purca-

sitischer Nematoda IV. Neve und wenigz

bekannte parasitische Nematoden. Zrwtralhl,

jitr Bakteriol, Purasitenkunde 1 Abt. Orig.

138, 487-500.

Scnorz, R. FE. (1927).—Zur Kenntnis der Helmin-

thenfaunu der Nagttiere der Union S.S.R, 1,

Spirurata Roilliet et Henry 1914. Trovanse de

t inst, d'Etadt de la Méd. Vel. Expér. Moxcan

14, 36-65.

Tinen, JT. D. (1948) —Ohservations on the Riclu-

luria (Nematoda: Thelaziidue) of | North

America. Trans, Amer, Micr, Seo. 67, 192-

200,

MARINE ENOPLIDA (NEMATDA) FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA

BY W. GRANT INGLIS

Summary

Ten species of Enoplida are described from the coast of Western Australia: Anticoma cobbi sp.

nov., Leptosomella phaustra sp. nov., Leptosomatum micoletzkyi sp. nov., Phanoderma serratum

Ditlevsen, 1930, Paraphanoderma robynae gen. et sp. nov., Enoplus meridionalis Steiner, 1921, E.

alpha sp. nov., Epacanthion georgei sp. nov., Eurystomina eurylaima (Ditlevsen, 1930) and

Prooncholaimus mawsonae sp. nov.

MARINE ENOPLIDA (NEMATODA) FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA

by W. Grant INGLis*

Summary

Ten species of Enoplida are described from the coast of Western Australia! Atticoma cohbi sp,

nov., Leplosemella phausira sp. nov... Leptosomatum micoletzkyi sp. nov.. Phanaderma serratum

Ditleysen, 1930, Paraphanoderma rebynae gen. et ap. nov., Enoplis meridionalis Steiner, 1921, E. alpha

ap. noy., Bpacanthion george: sp. nov., Burystomina eurylaima (Ditleysen, 19303 and Provncholaimus

ntaWsonde sp, Nov.

Introduction

Among nematodes collected along the coast

of Western Australia in 1966 and 1967, are

the ten species of Enoplida described below-

These species, of which seven are new, are

referable to nine genera—Aniicaoma, Lepto-

somella, Leptoxametum, Phanederma, Pare-

phanoderma noy,, Enepliis, Epacanthion,

Kuryviemina and Proancholaimmux—at five

families, The extension in the known range of

these genera and the Jarge number of new

species is not unexpected, The collection's

interest is that it contributes confirmatory evi-

dence on some aspects of the general structure

af marine Enoplida which was described in

detail elsewhere (Inglis, 1962, 1963, 1966).

In particular the structure of the head in

Leptosomella supports the view that the Family

Leptosomatidae represents a sequence in which

the cephalic ventricles are never well developed

and in which oesophageal musculature extends

anteriorly as a distinct Jobe through those

ventricles, In contrast the conditions in Para-

Phanoderma support the view that the Phano-

dermatidae are characterized by the presence

of cuticulur rods which are associated with the

inner circle of cephalic sense organs. The

relationships of the Phanodermatidae and

Enoplidae are close and the unequal onchia in

Paraphanoderma suggest the interesting possi-

bility that the Enoplidge with unequal onchia

originated from one group of Phanodermatidae

while the equal onchiaté forms arose from

another, This would certainly resolve some of

the problems in the analysis of the Enoplidae

Where at least two groups occur: the equal or

reduced onchiate forms culminating in Lrepins,

and the markedly unequal onchiate forms cul-

minating in, or originaling wilh, Oxyonchus

and Savaljevia,

Holotype males of all new species are

deposited in the Wesiern Australian Muscum

while Paratypes are in that institution and the

British Museum (Natural Hisiory),

Family

LEPTOSOMATIDAE

Anticonia cobhbi sp. nov.

FIGS. 1-3

Locality. From among weed wnd hi-wulyes

in rock pools just exposed al low tide, Hall's

Head, Mandurah,

Measurements (mm)—Male: Body Jength:

1°82. Body breadth: 0-046, Ocsophagus

length: 0-342, Length of cephalic setae, long/

short: 0-007/0-005, Distance from anterior

end of amphid/excretory pore/cervical setae/

netve ring: 0-014/0-030/0-039/0- 18. Length

of spicules: 0-047. Length of gubernaculam:

O-O11, Precloacal supplement, length/distance

anterior to cloacal opening: 0+017/0-070, Tall

length; 0+226, Cloacal diameter: 0-039,

The cephalic capsule jis poorly developed

aod there are no onchia in the oesophastome.

The sense organs form an inner circle of six,

slightly thorn-like setae and an outer circle of

ten long setae of which six are about a third

langer than the remaining four, The excretory

pore opens roughly as. far posterior to the

amphidial opening 45 that opening is from the

unterior end of the body. There ate four

cervical setae lying posterior to the level of the

excretory pore.

The tail ends in q long Magellate region and

the pre-cloaca! supplement is simple and slim,

The spicules are Lairly short and stow with

narrow alac. The gubernaculum is a small,

oblong mass enclosing the distal ends of the

spicules. The usual series of stoutish sete lie

hetween the cloacal opening and the pre-

cloacal supplement.

* South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S. Aust. S400,

Trans. R. Soc: S. Aust. Vol. 95, Part 2. bith August 1971.

66 W. GRANT INGLIS

, X

Figs. 1-3. Anticoma cobbi. Fig. 1—Anterior end, lateral view, Fig. 2.—Spicule and gubernaculum

detail. Fig. 3—Posterior end male.

Figs. 4-8. Leptosomella phaustra. Fig. 4.—Anterior end, lateral yiew. Fig. 5—Posterior end male.

Fig. 6.—Head en Jace; note system of dense material surrounding nerves to sense organs

and anterior lobes of oesophagus, mouth opening wholly black. Fig. 7.—Spicule and

gubernaculum detail, Fig. §—Anterior end. ventral view.

(Scale a= 0-02 mm in Figs. 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8: a= 0-05 in Fig. 3; b=0-5 in Fig, 5.)

MARINE ENOPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA 67

Discussion, This species resembles A. arctica

Steiner, 1916 and 4. acwminate (Eberth,

1863) in the position of the excretory pore

but differs from both jn the unequal cephalic

selae and the relatively shart spicules swith

blune posterior ends,

Leptosomella phaustra sp. tov.

FIGS. 4-2

Locality, From weed and associated sand.

without sili. on exposed heach jn 23 cm

water: Sarge Bay, Cape Leeuwin.

Measurements (rim)—Miles; Body length:

1-85: 2*2l; 2°32, Body breadth: 07-087;

0-092, (104. Ovsophagus length: 0-494;

0-451; 0-494, Length of cephalic setae, long/

shart; @:009/0-007; 0:013/0-011; 0-009/

0008. Cephalic capsule. length’ posterior din-

meter: 0:013/0-026; 0-013/0°022; O-014/

0-021. Distance from anterior end of amphid

eye-spol/exeretory pore/nerve ring: O-O11/

0°036/0-063/0-175; 0-022/0-040/0-064/

0-182; 0-021/0'039/0-068/0-187. Length of

spicules; 0-056; U-Neb: 9-058. Lenath of

gubernaculum; 0-019; 0-022; O-O16, Pre-

cloacal supplement. length/ distanze anterjor to

cloacal opening: 0:013/60°106; O-OL6/0- 131:

0-017/0-099, Tail length: 0-076; 0°092;

(068. Cloacul diameter; 9-050; 0-057; 0-039.

Feinaless Body length: 2°98; 3:29, Body

breadth: 0-13; Q- 15, Ocsophagus length: 0-493;

0-348. Length of cephalic setae, Jong/shor:

0-008/0-007; 0-008/0-007, Cephalic capsule,

Jength/posterior = diameter: == 0-13/0-020;

0-016/0-028, Distance from anterior end of

umphid/eye-spot/excretory pore/nherve ring}

0-013/0°043/0-057/0-183; 6 :012/0-046/

0-065/0-218, Tail length 0-091; 0-096. Anal

diameter: 0-069; 0-073, Distance of vulva

from anterior end of body: 2-69; 1-74,

The curlele is thick und smooth with w few

long setae on the body anterior to the nerve

ting but very few posteriorly until the tail

region in the male and the extreme tip of the

jail in the female. Jo particular there ure twa

setae, between the amphids and the cye spots,

which are about the same length as the cephalic

setae.

The heud is relatively small and the cephatiec

capsule is long, prominent and simple with a

series of small granulations along its posterior

edge which continue round the body posterior

Io the amphids although the capsule itself stops

anterjor to Lhe amphids (Fig. 4), The amphids

are prominent with elongate openings. The

mouth opening is triradiate and flanked by an

inner cirele of six slightly papillose sense

organs The remaining cephalic sense organs

are ten setae in one circle, relatively far pos-

tenor in pusition, and all about the same

length. Of these setae the lateral members are

slightly dorsal in position,

the mouth leads into a triangular cheilo-

slome and there are slight unterior lobes of

the oesophagus lying wholly ¢mbedded within

the surrounding tissue of the head. In eve /aoe

view, there is what appears as a system of

thickened rods, within each lip, of which the

median rods form «a distinct triangle while

each nerve lo the inner sense organs is sur-

rounded by a curved rod (Fig. 6), lam unable

to establish the conditions fully in view of the

small size of the head but these siractures

appear to tepresent a system of dense material.

seen in optical section, surrounding the nerves

io the sense organs and possibly the surface

of the anterior lobes of the oesophagus. They

are possibly comparable ta the system de-

scribed by Timm (1953, 1960) and ofhers in

yarious. members of the Leptosomatidac but

they definitely do not form simple rods as tn

the Phanodermatidae (Inglis, 1962). In adui-

tion to these structures the dorsal wall of the

cheilostome appears to be thickened to form

an odontium-like structure which does not arse

from the anterior end of the oesophagus,

Ocelli with Jens are present, The exerelury

pore js prominent and leads into a very mas-

sive ceevical gland which expands posteriorly

over the posterior half of the oesophagus and

displices the oesophagus dorsally, In this

feature the conditions agree with those de-

seribed by Filipjev (1927) for Leprosearella

ucracerca Filipjyey, 1927. ‘The oesophagus is

not “cellulor” in appearance posteriorly.

The toil is shorr in bath sexes and a mmid-

ventral rod-like supplement is present on the

mule. The spicules are of an even width with

distinct, slightly striated, alae, The pubernacu-

lum is small with rounded, poorly chitinized

lateral pieces, The caudal glands lie unteriur 10

the cloacal opening or anus, The reproductive

system is doubled and opposed in the Temitles.

Disenssion. This species appears 10 be most

similar to Leptosometla crocerta Vilipjev,

1927, the type specics of Leprosoimella Filipjev,

1927. a genus to which I seter il with some

reservations. ‘The genera Leprosomnutom Bas-

tian, 1865, and Leprosomatides Pilipjyev. 1918

are both similar to Leptosemella byt the latter

g2nus appests to be characterized hy setose

6% W. GRANT INGLIS

cephalic sense organs. an obvious eacretory

sysiem and a relatively prominent, but simple,

cephulic capsule. 1f my generic reference of

this new species L. phaustre is correct, Lepie

sumella, previously based on female characters

only, is further delimited by the presence of a

tod-like precloacal supplement and ocelli The

arrangement of the structures of the head can

be easily interpreted as u simple stage of the

(ymical Therdcostoma-type head, for example.

in which the musculature of the anterior end

of the otsophagus extends anteriorly as a

median block from the anterior end of each

secior of the oesophagus. Thus the central

triangular shape in Fig. 6 represents the outer

horders of the muscle block while the remain-

ing 'Wo Spaces represent the precursors of the

cephalic ventricle,

Leptosomatum micoletzkyi sp. nov.

FIGS, 911

Locatiiy. Among weed and assoginted

hold-fasts on w rocky Mat in about 10 em

water; Cowaramup Bay.

Measurements (mm)—Matle: Body length: 50

Rody breadth: 0-098. Ocsophagus length: |-03-

Heal cliameter (posterior end cephalic cap-

sule); 0-026, Length of cephalic setue, long/

shart; 0-005/0-004, Distance from anterior

end of amphid/cye-spot/nerve ring; 0-073/

0'11/0-29, Length of spicules; 0-083, Pre-

cloacal supplement, distance anterior to cloacal

opening: 0-16, Tail length 0'078. Cloucal dia-

meter: (}+069,

The body is covered by very chick stonth

cuticle on which no setae could be found

postenor to about the level of the nerve ring,

except on the ventral surface and the extreme

end of the fail. The head is rounded and

slightly set-off with an indistinct cephalic cap-

sule. There is no mouth cavity or modification

at the anterior end of the oesophagus except

lor a stight flange bordering the edge of the

Figs, 913, Leptosomatum micoletzkyi.

mouth opening. The dorsal ocsephageal gland

npens al the Jevel of the posterior edge of the

cephalic capsule. There is an inner circle of

six finy, slightly setose sense organs and an

outer circle of ten stout setae of which six art

slightly longer than the remaining four-

The tiny, relatively far posterior, opening

of the amphid leads into a prominent irregu-

larly shaped pouch, The cye-spots have definite

lens. The nerve ring is obvious; between it and

the anterior end of the body is a series of

seta2 in regular dorsa+ and veniro-lateral rows

hut irregularly scattered on the lateral sur-

faces. There do not appear to be any wholly

dorsal and ventral in position, No excretory

pore was found,

The tail is conical, short and bluntly rounded

with a series of tiny sctac near the posterior

end, A papillose pre-claacal supplement is

present with a series of ventro-lateral setae

between it and the cloacal opening just anterior

and lateral to which ure two pairs of tiny

setae lying close together.

The structure of the spicules and guber-

naculum is difficult to ¢stablish but the spicules

appear lo be relatively simple with median

supporting ridges or flanges, Vhey are slightly

double bent and end distally in blunt tips, The

gubernaculum js most styongly developed as a

rod-like process which lies lateral and ventral

fo the spicules, enfolding them near their

distal ends, More anteriorly or proximally the

gubernaculum becomes much jighter in struc-

ture and more difficult to make out bul appears

to expand rapidly to form large poorly sclero-

tized membranes (Fig. 10).

Orrcussion, ‘This species is. most similar to

Leplasematun: keiense and £. steineri, both

Micoletvky, 1930 and ZL. runjhai Timm, 1960

in possessing a papillose pre-cloacal suppie-

ment. Wowever it differs murkedly in the

Posterior position of the amphids and eve-

spots, the apparently relatively long cephalic

setue, and in the shape and structure of the

spicules and gubernaculum.

Fig. 9.—Anterior end, luteral view; note posicriur position of

small amphid, Fig: 10.—Spicule and puberniteulum detail, note prominent ventra-distal rad

of gubernaculum. Fig, 11,—Posterior end male.

Figs. $2. 14, 16.

Phanoderma serratum, Fig. 12—Anterior end, lateral view, Fig. 14,—Posterior end

male. Fig. 16.—Posterior end spicule and gahernaculum, detail.

Fags. 13, 15, 17-19, Paraphunoderoia robyaue: Fig,

view (sketch). Fig, 15 —Head vm face:

13,—Detail of cesophasiomal dentition, dorsal

fote rods associated with inner cephalic sense

organs. Fig. 17.—Anlerior end, dorsi] view, Fig, 18.—Posterior end male. Fig, 19.—

Spicule and gubernaculum, dewsil.

(Seale — 0-02 mm in Figs. 9, (0, 12, 15, 16, 17, 19: Seste = 00S in Figs. 14, 14, 18)

MARINE ENOPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA

mil) W, GRANT INGLIS

Family PHANODERMATIDAE

Phanudermiu serratem Ditlevsen, 1930

FIGS. 12. 14, 16

Localities, Weed and associated sand with-

our silt on fairly exposed beach m 25 cm ot

water, Sarge Bay, Cape Leeuwin, Finter-

like Sreen sea-weed, in rocks awash at low

tide: Hunker Bay, Geographe Bay. Weed

and associated sand in hold-fasis. on exposed

rocks; Goode Beach, Albany.

Measnrements (mm)—Males; Body length:

3°09" 3+29) 3-42, Body breadth: 0:094; 0-110;

0140. Oesophagus length: 0°74; Or81; 1°78.

Length of cephalic setae, long/short: 0-013/

O11; O°013/0°011; 0°013/0-011, Cephutic

capsule length: 0-030; 0-027; 0-033. Distance

from jintertar end of eye spols/excrelory pore/

nerve fing: §-036/0-035/0-26, 0-046/0-046/

0-34; 0)038/0-039/0-032. Length of spicules;

O-115: 0-155; 0°152. Length of gubernaculum:

(1039; 0-038; G-039. Pre-cloacal supplement,

length’ diktance anterier to cloacal opening;

N-027/0-13; 0°033/0:15; 0°033/0-13, Tail

Jongth: 0°083; 0-083; 0-083. Cloaeal diameter.

0-046; 0-046; 0-052.

The head is typical (Inglis, 1962) with six

buccal rods, two large ventral onchia and a

smal! dorsal, plus.a well marked, longitudinally

Strinted region posterior to the cephalic cap-

sule. Eye spots are present, fairly close to the

posterior edge of the capsule and well anterior

to the opening of the excretory pore.

The spicules are long and slim with a series

of plate-like mdges on their distal ends, ends

which have a slight swelling just anterior to

the rounded tips. The gubernaculum is snail

und simple, rather like ji. cap round the end of

the Spicules The tail is short and stoutish,

Discussan, This species is most casily charac-

terized by the slim serrated spicules, the

presence of eye-spots and the presence of 4

striated cervical capsule, all of which it has in

commen with P, purafilipjevt Allgén, 1939 (see

Inglis, 1962).

fis, in fuct, doubtful if these two species,

P. servatum and P: parafiliplevi, can be dis

Unguished and it should he noted that my

measurement (Inglis, 1962) for the length

of the male tail in P. parajilipjevi is wrong and

should read 0-078 instead of O- 14.

Nevertheless 1 leave the 1wo species distinet

sinve the striated posterior region of the

spicttles of the Australain specimens in much

areater than in P. parafilipjet, the gubernac-

lum is a different shape, and the dorsal

onehium %& shorter than the ventral in PB.

ferratun but almost equal in length in P. pura-

filipjevi.

This Species was originally described by

Ditlevsen (1931) from Bay of Islands, New

Zealand,

Paraphanoderma robynae pen. ec sp. nov.

PUGS, 13, 15, 17-19

Locality. From among sei-weed and fine

sand. among rocks just wwash and in rock

pools; Bunker Bay, Geogruphe Boy

Measurements (mm)—Mates: Body length:

4-50; 4-84, Body breadth; Uri; 0813, Geso-

phagus length: 0-91. 0-94. Cephalic setae,

long/short: O°012/0-0095 0-012/0-008,

Cephalic capsule, posterior diameter! 0-025.

0035, Distance from anteriur end of excretory

pore/eye spots/nerve ring: 0°039/0/039/0° 19:

0-034/0+044/0°30, Length of spicules: O-J27:

O-131, Length of gubernaculum; 1) 027; 0-026,

Pre-clovcal supplement, lcagthy distanze anterior

to cloacal opening: 0°027/1°133; 0-026/

0-146, Tail length: 0-102; 0-132, Cloacal dia-

meter! 0-068; 0°079, Females; Body length;

3-89, Body breadth: 0-21, Ovsophagus length:

1.01. Cephalic setae, long/short: 0°013/Q-01L-

Cephalic capsule, posterior diameter: 0-026.

Distance from anterior end of excretory pure!

vye spot/nerve ring: 0-043/0-049/0-33. Tail

length: 0°142. Anal diameter: 0-099. Distance

of vulva from anterior end of body: 3-25.

Size of eggs (sphericul;diameter) 0: 102,

The cephalic capsule is poorly developed and

there is some slight dotting of the cuticle

posterior to it. The mouth opening is smull

and hexagonal and is surrounded by six thern-

like setae which ace stipported by six buccal

rods (Pig. 18), The ouler setae are in twa

circles of six and four of which the more

posterior four are longer. The amphid is small

and lypical in shape. Eye spots withaut lenses

are present aid the excretory pore opens on a

fevel with er anterior to them, There are two

poorly developed, thin, sharp, somewhat necdle-

like ventro-lateral onchia and a simifar, but

very small, dorsal onchium in the female, al-

though its presence in the male is uncertain,

The lateral cephalic setae lie slightly dorsal pf

the amphid and the lips of the excretory pole

are prominent and slightly swollen. The tail is

stout and roundish and the caudal glanels lie

anterior to the clodeal opening.

The spicules are fairly stout with simple alae,

A simple, mikhke pre-cloucal supplement is

MARINE EXNOQPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA 7

present and the gubernaculum is a simple plate-

like structure lying slightly ventral ancl lateral

to the spreules (Pig, 19).

The female reproductive system is doubled,

and upposed with reflexed ovaries. The uten

contain large numbers of eggs packed in two

or three rows.

Disenyssion, Dillicullies arise in placing this

species because of the unsatisfactory descrip-

lions of many of the type species and the

diagnoses of many of the genera referred ta

the Phanodermatidae. Of those far which it is

possible to reuch some reasonable conclusions

this species is. most like PAanoderma itsell ond

Phanedermapsis Ditlevsen, 1926, with o slight

chance that it tay resemble Phanodermella

Kreis, 1928, However it differs most markedly

from Phanodermopsix in the presence of a pre-

clauca) supplement and eye spots und from

Phanodermia in the extreme simplicity of the

cephalic dentition and the poorly developed

cephalic capsule. The deseription of Pharne-

dermella donsyiceudata Kreis, 1928, the type

species of Phenadermefia, is such that it is

impossible 16 Compare it an detail but that

species appears to lack onchia and 7 suspect

that ii ts prohably # species of Anticemea in

which the cephalic capsule is prominent.

] therefore propose fo refer the Western

Australian species to a new genus, thus:

PARAPHANODERMA gen- nov,

Phanodermatidae: cephalic capsule poorly

developed; poorly developed onchia present,

two ventro-taterals needle-like and small and

no or a poorly developed dorsal; eye spots

preset, Male: pre-cloacal supplement

present; spicules alate; tai! hluntly rounded,

Type species: Paraphanoderma rohynae sp.

nov.

Ii ss just possible that Phankadernropsis necta

Gerlach, 1957 is referable to (his genus since

it is nor happily referable to Phanodermopsis.

Family ENOPLIDAE

Enoplos meridionalls Steiner, 1921,

FIGS. 20-26

Locality. Weed and sand associated with

hold-fasts in 30 cm water; Radar Reef.

Stickland Bay, Rottnest Island.

Measurements (mmj—dMoales: Body length:

3 16, 3°28. Body breadih: 0-093; 0-116. Ocsu-

phagus [ength: 0:5); 0-52. Diameter of head:

0-045; O'O42. Length of manmlibless O Ole;

O'Ol7. Length of cephalic setac, long/short:

0:017/0-015; 0-017/0+014, Sptcule length:

0-108; 0-100. Gubernaculum length) 0-036;

0034. Pre-cloacal supplement, length/ distance

anterior to cloacal opening: 0°065/0+19;

0°062/0-23. Tail length: 0-175; 0-162.

Cloacul diameter: O:1078; G°O83, Females.

Body length: 3°46: 3:72. Body breadth:

0-135; 0/127, Oesophagus length: O'51; (53.

Diameter of head: 0-047; 0-048, Length of

mandibles; O-O18; 0-019, Tywl length: (+22:

0:24. Anal diameter: O- G79; 0-081. Distance

of vulva from anterior end of body: 2:08;

. 231. Size of cyys (spherical;diameter) : 0-089

(13 present); 0-087 (11 present),

The head is typical with the openings of

the amphids slightly anterior to the posterior

edge of the cephalic capsule and with. masses

of tateral pigment at the anterior end of ihe

oesophagus,

The male tail is relatively stout and is curved

ventrally in fixed specimens, There is a single,

median papilla-like organ on the posterior lip

of the cloacal opening which is the external

expression of an internal tube (Figs, 24 & 261.

There is a raised region, an which are borne

iwo barb-like setae, about two thivds of the

length of the tail pasterior to the cloacal open-

img The pre-cloweal supplement ts slightly

trumpet shaped (Fig, 23) und there is a

number of promment ventro-luteral sziac be-

tween it and the cloacal opening.

The spicules are massive and qoughly the

same breadth throughout their lengths except

towards the posterior ends where they nurruw

evenly to end in points which are curved out-

wards, As a consequence the spicules terminale

posteriorly as hooks. ‘Vhe gubernaculuim 1s

relatively small and pear-shaped with distinct

lateral flanges near the posterior end.

Dixeussien, This species was described by

Steiner (1921) as a variety of Anoplas com-

munis Bastian, 1865 but differs from that

species markedly in the less pronounce pre-

cloucal supplement and the form of the spic-

ules, As a consequence Allgén (1947) and

Wieser (1953) recognize EL meridionalis as a

distinct species,

The specimens described shove agree very

well with the original description given by

Steiner (1921) and the species is well charac-

lerized by the slightly Leumpet-shaped supple-

ment, the massive spicules with their

hovked posterior ends, the post-cloacal papills-

like structure and the pair ol hook-likke setae

ot Lhe tail, The structure of the gubermaculonr

72 W. GRANT INGLIS

also appears to be characteristic and is the only

discordant feature since Steiner illustrates a

slightly different shape. It should be noted that

the structure of the spicules was established

after dissection.

‘This species was described originally from

the Canary Islands in the North Atlantic but

has since heen found at Port Willunga in

South Australia (Mawson, 1953) and by Chit-

wood (1936) from the coast of North America,

Both these reports ure supported by descrip-

tions which leave little doubt that the same

species was studied. E. meridionaliy 1s, there-

fore, a very widespread species which may be

cosmopolitan.

£. meridionalis is also reported and described

from La Jolla, California by Allgén (1947)

bul the illustrations and descriptions are such

that it is impessible ta know what species was

studied.

Enoplus alpha sp. nov.

FIGS, 27-31

Locality, Weed and sand associated with

holdfasis, in 30 cm water; Radar Reef,

Stickland Bay, Rottnest Island.

Measurements (mm)—Males: Body length:

2:39; 3:19. Body breadth: 0°096; 0-109,

Oesophagus length; 0:43; 0-48. Diameter of

head: 0-043; 0°043, Length of mandibles:

0-016; 0-017, Length of cephalic setae, long/

short: 0-014/0°010; O°014/0:'010. Spicule

length; 0:109; 0-149, Gubernaculum, length/

breadth: 0-030/0-021; 0:038/0-024, Pre-

cloacal supplement, length/ distance anterior 10

cloacal opening: 0:029/0-11; 0-039/0-12,

Tail length: 0-198; 0-202, Cloacal diameter;

0-074, 0-081,

The head is typical and the amphids open

slightly anterior to the posterior edge of the

cephalic capsule, Masses of pigment are present

on the Jateral sides of the oseophagus near the

anterior end, The tail is relativety long with

a distinctly raised region about half way along

its length from which two spineike setae

arise, Two papilla-like structures, on one oval

base, occur on the posterior lip of the cloacal

opening. The pre-cloacal supplement is simple

and rod-like, al right angles to the ventral

surface of the body.

The spicules are stout with “doubled” an-

terior ends duc to an infolding of their dorsal

surface (Figs, 28, 30, 31) and also bear a

barb-like flange about two thirds from the an-

terior end, The gubernaculum is small with

rounded Jateral pieces in tateral view and

paired median pieces which carry hair-like pro-

cesses on their posterior ends,

Diseussion, This species shows similaritics 10

E. berhami Ditlevsen, 1930; E. paralinoralis

Wieser, 1953 and E. michaelsent Linstow, 1896

but differs from them all in the combination of

a simple rod-like pre-cloacal supplement, a

pair of post-cloacal papillae, a small guber-

naculum and the shape of the infolded spicules

with only one barb-like plate on the ventral

surface,

Epacanthion georgei sp. nov.

FIGS, 35-37

Locality. Beach sand in about 20 ¢m of

water, exposed to breaker action; Cowara-

mup Bay.

Measurentents {mm)—Male: Body length:

3-28. Body breadth: 0-074, Oesophagus

length: 0-72. Cephalic capsule, postenor dia-

meter: 0-047. Length of cephalic setae, inneér/

outer short/outer long: 0-013/0-027/0-033,

Spicule length: 0046. Gubernaculum length:

0-029, Tail Jength: G+242. Cloucal diameter:

0-049. Females. Bady length: 3°95; 4-26;

4°43, Body breadth; 0-11; 0-092; 0-10, Ocsa-

phagus length: 0-77; 0-82; 0°87, Cephalic cup-

sule, depth/ posterior diameter: 0-029/0/055;

0:026/0-053; 0-028/0°056, Length of cephalic

setae, inner/outer short/outer long: O-017/

0-017/0-039, O-018/0-016/0:033, 0-017/

Figs, 20-26.—Eneplus meridionalis, Fig, 20—Spicule. inner surface. Fig. 21---Spicule and guber-

naculum, outer surface. Fig. 22.—Distal tip pre-cloacal supplement, Fig, 23.—Pre-cloacal

supplement. Fig. 24.—Oblique view posterior ends spicules and gubernaculum, with

cloacal opening and post-cloacal pore-like sense organ. Fig. 25.—Head en face, Fig, 26.

—Posterior end male.

Fies. 27-31,

Enoplas alpha, Fig, 27—Gubernaculum detail. Fig. 28,—Spicule, outer surface, Fig. 29,

—Posterior end male. Fig. 30.—Spicule, inner surface. Fig, 31.—Spicules and guber-

nacudum with doubled post-cloacal sense organ, ventral view.

Fix, 32

Prooncholaimus mawsornne, Posterior end male,

(Seale » = 0-05 mm in Figs. 26, 29; b= 0-02 in Figs, 22, 25; ¢> 0-05 in Figs. 20, 21,

2, 24, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32,9

MARINE ENOPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA

74 W. GRANT INGLIS

9-OL7/0-036, Length of taili 0-312; O-377:

374. Anal diameter; 6'069; 0'063; 0-066.

Distance of vulva from anterior end of body:

2:35 2639; 241, Sive of eggs; 0-325 % O66

{in 4-26 mm specimen wnly).

The heast bears three high, narrow lips with

semi-lunar striations. The setae of the inner

circle aré fairly long while the six of the inter-

mediate circle are very long with the lour of

the outer circle much shorter and Iving imme-

dialely posterior io the dorso- and ventno-

lateral components of the intermediate circle.

The small pockets ol the cephalic slits are

almost wholly Iateral in position while the

amphids are small and typical,

The mundibular:onchial complex is repre-

sented hy mandibles which appear, in optical

section, 10 consist of two hooked rous joined

hy a thin central sheet of cuticle, The usual

squarish blocks of dense material, developed

in the outer body cuticle, lie on a level with

the anterior ends of the mandibles, The onchia

are subequal in size, with the dorsal slightly

smaller, and lie on the level of the posterior

edge of the mandibles. thus approximating Lhe

conditions described for EL naddripapillatum

(Wieser, 1959), There are no obvious onchial

plates (Figs, 33-34),

In the female there is one eircle of short

cervical setae just posterior to the posterior

edge of the eephalic capsule, The total number

of these setae varies from specimen to speci-

men but they form six groups dorsq-, and

ventro-lateral and wholly lateral in position.

The conditions in the male are more complex

with a circle of twenty-four setae in twelve

pairs lying posterior to the outer cephalic setae,

About the same distance posterior to this circle

of cervicw] setae as this circle is from the

anterior end of the body lJics another circle

consisting of setae arranged in roughly the

same twelve groups bul there are not always

two setae per group. Almost immediately pos-

terior Lo this circle again is a Series of Four

patches of about ten setaé dorso- and ventro-

lateral in position, Immediately posteriar to

these patches is yet another circle of setac

arranged roughly in twelve groups { Fig. 37).

Setae become scarcer on the body posterior to

this level hut occur sporadically over the length

ot the body-

The tail is long and slim in both sexes and

there is no pre-cloacal supplement or other

modifications an the male. The spicules are

short and stout with expanded proxinial ends

and there is a small plate-like gubernaculum.

Discussion. This species is characterized hy

the distribution uf the cervical sctae, by tke

shart, stout spicules in association with the

long stim tail, the small gubernaculum and the

absence of any pre-cloacal supplement(s), In

the characters of the male tail it resembles

most closely &. olfffi Inglis, 1966 and Ey mtri-

papitlatun (Wieser, 1959) but differs from

buth in the spicules. which are not serrated

posteriorly, and in the number and arianee-

ment of the cervical setae, In addition Fy oliffr

lacks a gubernaculum while in &. mteltipapilla-

tam the guhernaculum bas a s'igzht, hook-like

apophysis.

Vanily ENCHELIDIIDAE

Eurystomina eurylaima (Ditlevsen, 1939),

FIGS, 38-40

Manonellia curvlaima Dilleysen, 1930,

Leculities, Among gravel und weed in 5

metres of water; off Woodman’ Point in

Cockhbum Sound. Weed and sand in | meire

of water; Radar Reef, Strickland Bay, Rott-

nest Island.

Measurements (mm)—Maie: Body length:

213; 3°94, Body breadth: 0-040; 1-049.

Ocsophagus length: 0-55; 0-65. Length of

cephalic setae, long/short: 1-008/0-005, Bue-

cal cavity, total length/ breadth antérior cham-

bers 0°013/0-005; 0°016/0-009, Distance

from anterior end of eye spot/nerve ring:

O:144/0-205: 0-048/0+216, Chordal length of

spicules: 0046; 0-059, Gubernaculum length:

O:027; 0-029, Pre-cloacal supplements, dis-

tance unteriur to cloacal opening, anterior/

posterior: = 0-11/0-054; 0°13/0-081. Tail

lengih; 099; 6°113, Cloaval diameter:

0-035; 0-043.

The head ts typical with three tings of small

denticles in the buccal cavity of which the

Posterior ring 3s incomplete, lacking denticles

Opposite the right ventro-luteral onchium. The

amphids are in their typical dorse-lateral

position, with the nerves entering them lrom

the literal end, and an eye spot is. present. ‘The

six cephalic sense organs of the inner circle

are slightly setose and in the outer ng of ten

sefae six are longer than the remaining four,

The tail is relatively short and the usual two

pre-cloacal supplements are prevent with an-

teriorly and posteriorly directed “wings”, The

spicules are evenly curved and of an even

width throughout their lengths cxacept for a

slight constriction before the distal tip which

is rounded and bulb-like. The gubermaculam os

Figs. 33-37.

Figs, 38-40.

MARINE ENOPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA 75

Epacanthion georgei. Fig. 33——Male head, ventro-lateral view. Fig. 34—Female head,

dorsal view. Fig. 35—Posterior end male. Fig. 36—Spicule and gubernaculum. Fig. 37—

Anterior end male showing distribution of cephalic and cervical setae.

Eurystomina eurylaima, Fig, 38—Posterior end male. Fig. 39—Spicule and guber-

naculum. Fig. 40.—Anterior end, lateral view.

Beg o= ORs mm in Fig. 37; b=0-02 in Figs. 33, 34, 36, 39, 40; b =0-05 in Figs.

5, 38.

Th W. GRANT INGLIS

prominenl, roughly triangular in lateral out-

line and ends ina rounded, slighthy bulb-like

lip.

Discussion, In his original description Ditlevsen

(1930) was unable to find amy cephalic secure,

amphids or eye-spots and the pre-cloacal sip-

plemenis lacked “wings”, This latter feature

his been reported from other species as un

sbnermaslity and the remaining “missing”

structures could easily have been lost during

preservation, 4 Ditlevsen himself points out.

The similarities between the specimens de-

scribed here and the description giver. by Dit

levsen are greal, with the same shape of spicule

with ils posterior swelling and u very similar

gubernaculum, The greatly discordany feature

is, however, in the lengihs of the specimens

since Ditlevsen’s male was 6:3 mm long [

assume that my specimens are young mules

since all the measurements are roughly in pro-

portion,

It is perhaps worth drawing attention to and

stressing the fact that on the structure of the

head it would he impossible to distinguish this

species from many others of the genus and

that | am sure that because of the obviously

poor condition of his specimens (see Ditlev-

sen’s figure 371 Ditlevsen overlooked the third

row of deuticles, L have stressed elsewhere that

the structure of the mule reproductive organs,

spicules and gubernuculum, are very useful in

delimiting species within this genus (Inglis,

1962). Nevertheless [ am prepared to accept

the point made by Wieser and Hopper (1967)

that I was over enthusiastic since, obviously,

ocher features (which had been stressed before)

are of same value, just as the mule characters

(which had nat been stressed before) ire

clearty of great value, Bur Wiesser and Hopper

use, a4 a example of the wenokness of my

argument}, &, yminutircevlae Chitwood, 1951,

which they redescyite. But T find it impossible

to accept that the species they redescrihe is the

same as thal deseribed originally hy Chitwood

in I9St although it is very like the species

described Hy Timm (1952) under that name-

On the other hand it looks considerably more

like the speetmen deseribed hry Chitwood ay &-

americaia in 1936,

fe 18 mMoonceivable to me thal Chitwood,

even at his worst (which is usually better than

mast bests) could have drawn the massive

Square gubecnaculum of F. yi/nutiveutae in

mistake for the slim structure described by

Wieser and Hopper and by Timm. L further

cannot agree that the differences between the

gubernacula of the two species as illustrated

hy Chitwood are slight, always accepting that

such a judgement is very much a matter of

opliion, On the other hand if the slight differ-

ences, which run to « totally different outline,

could be due to errors in observation it is

equally Feasible, and to me much more likely,

that the denticles in the buccal cayily were

misinterpreted... No mater which answer we

accept there is an errar in the descriptions

sumewhere, as Wieser and Hopper imply.

Family ONCHOLAIMIDAE

Proonocholaimus mawsonae sp. nov-

FIGS. 32, 41-43

Locality, Collected from the water filters

of the sea-water aquarium in the Znolugical

Departmem, University of Western Aus-

tralia.

Measurements (mm)* Males: Body length:

2°54; 2-85; 3-44, Body breadth: 0-08; 0066;

O-U79. Oseophagus length: 0:43: 0-44) 0-47,

Leagth of cephalic setac: 0004; 0-005; 0-004,

Buceal cavity, length/hreadth: O-034/0-OL7;

0-038/0-017; 0-036/0419. Disjance From

unterive end of exeretory pore/nerve ring:

O-O11/0-22; 0010/0723; 0-012/0+23.,

Spreule length: 0-085; 0-096; 0-083. Guber-

naculum length: 0017: 0-015; 0-012. Tait

length: 0-13; 0-14; O-f4, Cloacal diameter:

0-024: 01030; 0-030, Females, Body length:

V-25: 3°50; 3-351. Body breadth: 0-086;

0-089; 0-089. Oesophagus length: 0-44; 0-46;

0-48. Length of cephalic setae: 0:005; 0-006;

0-006. Buccal cavity. length/ breadth: G-th4/

0-019; 0-042; 0-019: 0°043/0°018, Distance

from the anterior end of excretory pore/ nerve

ring: 0-092/0-22; 0°021/0'23;, 0°023/0-23,

Tail length: O-t5; 0-68; 0:17. Anal diameter:

0-035; 0-040; 0°039, Distance of vulva from

anterior end of body! 2°44; 2°54; 2°73. Size

of eggs: 0066 “« O:066 and 0°059 “< 0-067,

This species is typical of the genus wilh

slightly subequal cephalic setae, pnd a large

Iniceal cavity in which the left Ventro-lateral

onchium is larger than the other two which are

equal. The usual bubble-like cells. are present

bul variable, particularly in the males where

they weré almost aol present in some speci

mens,

The tail is long and slim in both sexes and

the posterior lip of the cloacal opening in the

mile is not cut hack relative to the anterior tip,

The cloacal opening is usually surrounded hy

a series ol sik puirs of setac. The spicujes are

MARINE. ENOPLIDA FROM WESTERN AUSTRALIA 7?

Fins, 41-44,

Prooncholuimus mawSsonae. Fig. 41.—Male cloacal region ventral view. Fig. 42,—Head,

ventral view. Fig. 43.—Head, lateral view. Fig. 44—Male cloacal region, lateral view.

(Scale a = 0-02 mm in Figs, 41, 44; b=0-02 in Figs. 42, 43.)

typical with barbed posterior ends in which

the barb is not set-off from the shaft of the

spicules by a distinct “handle” (Fig. 44). The

guhernaculum is a rounded mass_

The female veproductive system is single

with a reflexed ovary.

Discussion. The form of the spicule which has

ro distinctly set-off barb eliminates P. bafryu-

lensis Inglis, 1962 and P. hastatus Wieser and

Hopper. 1967 from consideration and leaves

P. eberthi (Filipjev, 1918), P. ornatys Kreis,

1932, P. uransas Chitwood, 1951 and P.. mega-

stoma (Eberth, 1863). Wieser and Hopper

(1967) treat P. mediterraneus Schuurmans

Stekhovyen. 1943 and P. megastama var, nea-

politanus Micoletzky, 1924 as synonyms of

P. megastoma. With this I agree, also with their

treatment of three species numed by Kreis

(1932) as species inguirendae,

The present species differs from P, ornatus

and P. aransas in the barbed spicules, and

differs from P. eberthi in the sharply pointed

posterior end to the barh of the spicule (blunt

in Filipjev’s illustration, Plate 4, Fig. 27d) and

the short guhernaculum (long and slim in

Filipjev’s Fig.). In addition to the slight differ-

ence in the shape of the posterior end of the

spicule this species differs from P. banyulensis

in the greater number of peri-cloacal setae, rhe

sharter cephalic setae (0-°004-5 against 0-007),

the poorly developed “balloonings”, and the

relatively shorter spicules.

This leaves P. ne gastoma to be considered, a

species reported by Mawson (1957) from

South Australia, The original description of

this species is poor but if we accept that P.

mediferraneus is the same species, the Western

Australian species difters from it in the hooked

posterior end to the spicule as well as the

length of the spicules which, [rom Schuurmans

Stekhoven's (1950) figure of the male tail

(Fig. 28D), must be about 0-26 mm long.

Here they are only 0-083-0-096 mm long,

although the total body lengths are comparable,

Tt is difficult to be sure about any of this

because the barb on the spicules is not pro-

nounced and could have been overlooked.

Until there is further information this species

must he considered different from P. mega-

stoma and also from the species recorded under

the same namie hy Mawson (1957).

Acknowledgments

My thanks go to the Director and staff of

the Western Australian Museum, where the

specimens were collected; to Mr, J. W. Coles

and Miss E. M. Mitchell for assistance in the

British Museum (Natural History), where the

1s W. GRANT INGLIS

specimens were sorted and initially prepared

for study, and to Mrs. J, Murphy for typing

and retyping the manuscript of this pape in

South Australia, where it was. completed.

Acknowledgement fs due to the Mark

Mitchell Research Foundation for financial

assistance in South Australia which enabled

me to complete this. work,

References

Actcén. C. (1939), —Die Phanodermen des Mit-

felmecres. Fesrschrife zim 60. Geburtstage van

Prifesser Dr. Embrik Strand. 5, 394-404,

Alusrm, ©, A. (1947).—Papers from Dr, Th.

Murienstn's Pacific Expedition 1914-14,

LXXV. West American marifie nemutodes.

Wideask, Medd, Dansk. naturh. Foren. 140,

65-219,

Abtokn, ©, A. (1951),—Papers from Dr, Th.

Mortensen’s Pacific Expedition 1914-16,

LXXVI, Pacific freeliving marine nematodes.

Vidensk, Medd. Dansk. naturh. Foren. 113,

263-411,

Bastian, C. ff. {1865).—Monogtaph of the An-

puilluilidac or free nematoides, marine, lane

and fresh-Water| with descriptions of 100 now

species. Trans. Linn, Soc, Lond. 25, 73-184.

CHitwoon, B. G. (1936),—Some marine nema-

todes of the superfamily Enoploidea. Trutts,

Amer. nicer, Sec, S5, 208-213,

Civtwoop, B. G. (195!)—North American free

living marine nematodes, Texas J, Sel, 3, 617-

677.

thiLevsen, H. (1926) —Freeliving nematodes,

Dan. Tagolf-Exped. 4 (6), 1-42.

Ditvevsin, HW. (1930).— Papers from Dr. Th.

Murtensen's Pucific Expedition 1914-16, LIL.

Marine frecliving nematodes from New Zca-

lurid. Vidersk. Medd. Dusk, nuturh, Foren,

BT, 20-242.

Beret, C J, (1863)—‘Untersuchungen Uber

Nematoden".. (Leipzig. }

Firterev, TON. (1918) —{Preeliving nematodes

from ihe region of Sevastopol, 1.] Trav. Lat.

Zool, Setustapel. 2 (4), 1-350 Cin Russiany.

Filinday, I, N. (1927).—Les nematodes libres

des. dners septentrionales appartenant & Ja

famille des Enoplidae. dreh. Naturgesch. 9A,

1-216,

ClERLAcH, S, A. (1957).— Die Nematodenfauna

des. Snndstrandes an der Kuste von Mittel-

brastien, Mar. 2vel, Muy, Bertin, 33, 411-459,

[Notis, W. G. (1962).—Marine neniatodes From

Banvuls-sur-Mer! with a review of the genus

Eurvsteming. Ball, Brit, Mus. nat. Uist (7ae-

Ingy) & (5), 209-283,

Incuis, W. G. (1963).—The marine Enoplidu

{Nematoda}: = comparative study of the

head. Bull, Brit, Mus. nat. Hist, (Zoelopy)

ML (4), 263-376.

Incus, W. G, (1966),—Maring nematodes Irom

Durban, South Africa. Bull. Bers. Mus. nal,

Hist. (Zoelogy) 14 (4), 79-106-

Kreis. H. A. (1928)—Die freilebendett mariner

Nematoden der Spilzbergen. Expedition von

F. Roemer und F. Schaudinn im Jahre L898,

Mitr. gaol, Mus, Berlin, 14, 132-197.

Linstow, O. von. (1896). .—Nemathelminthen,

ffamb, Mapathaensische Saimmetreise. pp.

1-22,

Mawson, PL M. (1953) —Some muiring freeliving

nematodes from the Australian Coust, Trans,

R, Soc. S. Aust. 76, 34-40.

Mawson, P, M. (1957),—Marine freeliving nenr-

lodes from South Australia. Part [. True. R-

Soc. S. Aust. 80, 98-108.

Mitocerzky, H, (1930).-—Papers from Dr. Th.

Mortensen's Pacific Expedition 1914-14 LIM.

Freilebende marine Nematoden von den

Sunda-Inseln. I. Enoplidac. (Rdited by Hans

A, Kreis.) Widensk, Medd, Dansk. newer.

Keren, 87, 243-339.

Scuuukmans Siexsoves, JH. (1943) - -Preile-

bende marine Nematoden des Mittelmeeres.

iV. Freilebende marine Nematoden der

Fischercigriinde bei Alexandrien. Zuol. fb.

(Syst. ere.) 76, 323-380,

Sciuumsatans STERHOVEN, J. H. (1950) —-The Frae-

living marine nemas of the Mediterranean t-.

The Bay of Villefranche. Mémi.. drst, Sci. nat.

Belg. (Ziéme Ser.) 37, 1-220,

Srriner, G. (1916).—Freilebende Nemutoden aus

cee Barentsee. Zool, Jh. (Sysr. cic 139, S11-

Sremyen, G. (1921)—Reitrige zur Kenntnis

ma nt Nematoden, Zool, Ji. (Syst, ere.) 44,

-65,

Timm, R. W. (1952) —A survey of the murine

nematodes of Chesapeake Bay, Maryland

Biol, Stud, Cath, Univ. Amer. 23, 1-70.

Timm, R. W. (1953).— Observations an the morpho-

logy and histological anatomy of a tnarine

nematade, Leprosomatint acephelatem Chit-

Wool, 1936, new combination (Enoplidac:

yi tosomatinag). Amer, unldl, Nat. 49, 229-

TimMM, R. W. (1960) —A new species of Lepio-

somaian (Nematoda) from the Aruhtan Sea.

J, Helminth. 34, 217-220.

Wresan, W, (1953) —Reports of the Lund Uni-

versity Chile Expedition 1948-1949, 10, Fres-

living marine nematodes. 1. Enoploidea. cfs,

Univ, fund. NT. 49 (6), 1-155.

Wiesen, W, (1959),—Free-living nematodes and

other small invertebrates of Puget Sound

beaches.” (Lniversity of Washington Press,

Seattle.)

Wieser, W. & BH. Horere (1967).—Marine nen

todes of the East Coast of North America. 1

Florida, Bull. Mus. contp. Zool Harv, 135,

239.344,

A NEW SPECIES OF MICROHYLID FROG OF THE GENUS

SPHENOPHRYNE FROM MILNE BAY, PAPUA

BY M. J. TYLER AND J. I, MENZIES

Summary

A new species of terrestrial, forest-dwelling, microhylid frog, Sphenophryne dentata is described. It

is unique amongst Papuan members of this family in having well developed maxillary and

premaxillary teeth, and numerous, prominent folds on the skin of the dorsum. The mating call is

analysed and described, and is noteworthy in lasting for nearly ninety seconds. Ecological

differences between this species and twelve other species found in the same forest are briefly

discussed.

A NEW SPECIES OF MICROHYLID FROG OF THE GENUS

SPHENOPHRYNE FROM MILNE BAY, PAPUA

by M. J. Tyrer®* and Lol. Menzresy

Summary

A pew Species of terrestrial, forest-dwelling, microhylid frog, Sphenaphryne dentata is described.

Tt is unique amongst Papuin members of his. amily in having well developed maxillary and pre-

maxillary teeth, anu numerous. prominent folds on the skin of the dorsum, The mating call is analysed

and deseribed, and is noteworthy in lasting for nearly ninety seconds. Ecological differences. between

this species and twelve other species found in the same forest are briefly discussed.

Introduction

Nineteen Species of microhylid frogs have

heen found al the south-eastern extremily of

Papua and from islands adjacent to this por-

tion of the mainland. Parker (1934) reported

seven species, Zweifel (1956) a further ten,

und Zweifel (1963) two more, OF the total,

eight species are currently Known solely from

this area. Milne Bay is located at the extreme

eustern end of Papua. Cojlechons made there

by one of us (J.1.M.) in 1969 and L970. In-

cluded twenty-two specitens of an undescribed

species of the microhylid genus Sphenophryne.

In our description of this species we haye

followed very closely the methods, descriptive

format, and terminology adopted by Zweifel

(1967). The abbreviations used in the text are

as follows: S-V == length fron snoul to vent,

TL = tibia length: HW -— head width:

E — eye cdhameter; PN — internarigl span;

E-N = eye to naris distance; SN = snout

length; T — tympanum diameter,

Mating calls were recorded in the field on

an E.M.L type L.4 tape recorder, and ana-

lysed on a Kay Electric Company Sonagruph.

For the terms used in describing the sona-

prams see [rhy-Davis (1964),

The type series has been deposited in the

collections of the Department of Biology,

University of Papua and New Guinea (abbre-

viated in the test to ULPLN.G.) and the South

Australian Museum (S,A.M.).

Sphenophryne dentata new species

Holotype: S.A.M, No, R,12063 collected

near Alotau, Milne Bay, Territory of

Papua on Lt November 1970, by J. 1.

Menzies,

Paratypes: U.P.N.G. No. 1727. S.A.M. No,

R.11828, collected at the type loculity on

% October |969; ULP.N.G, Nos. 2625-

2629, 2640-2646, S.A.M. Nos, R.EIS1Y-

11827. collected at the type locality during

the period 6-12 November 1970.

Diagnosis: This is a terrestrial species, and

the combination of characters. that is unique

to iL is us follows: body sizer moderate (snout

to vent length up to 37.2 mm): maxillae and

premiaxillae dentigerous, fingers and toes with

small dises, skin of dorsal surface of body

hearing. numerous prominent tubercles and

raised folds.

Description ef Holotype (tig, 1): The holo-

lype is a gravid, adult female with the follow-

ing measurements! S-V, 37.2 mm; TL, 184

mm; HW, 16.6 mm; bh. 4.8 mm; E-N, 3.7 mm;

IN. 4.0 mo; SN. 6.2 mm: T. 2.9 mm: disc of

third finger, 0.8 mms: penultimate phalanx of

third finger, D,7 moi dise of fourth toe, 1.4

mo: penullimate phalanx of fourth toe, 0.7

min. The maxillary bones are cleutherogna-

thine and bear, as do the premasillaries, small

(eeih, The post-choanal portion of the vomer

bears a transverse ridge on which there are

numerous. minute odontvids, There are two

iransverse pre-pharyngeal ridges: a diffuse

glandular one, preceding a more highly de-

veloped posterior ridge terminating in Wi-

angular serrations. The tongue ts extremely

broad. approxmmiately one-half free and has

two posterior flaps

The pectoral girdle is similar to that of 5,

cormuta described and illustrated by Parker

(1934).

The snout is blunt and very slightly rounded

when viewed from whove and in profile. The

~ South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adelaide, S. Aust. S000.

+ Department of Biology, University of Papuuw aml New Guinea, Boroko, Territory of Panua and

New Guinea,

Trans, R, Soc. 8, Aust, Vol. 95, Part 2, 1 1}th August 1971.

gO M, J.

Pir. |, Sphenephivne denita new species,

head is as browd as the hody, and its width is

slightly less than one-half af the snout te vent

length (HW) S-Vo = 0,45).

The eyes are large and prominent with a

horizontal pupil and the interorbital distance

is anly slightly greater than the width of an

upper eyelid, The snout is wpproximately one

und one-third times the length of the eye

(SN/ RP == 1.29). The loreal region is sloping

und slightly concyve, and the canthus. rostralis

slightly rounded bur not proniinent, The nos-

toils ure directed laterally. and the distance

from eye to naris is slightly less than the inter-

TYLER ann

1. 1) MENZIES

rarial span (B-N/IN = 0.92). The tympanum

is distinct,

The fingers and toes bear small rermital

dises on which there are imarginal grooves.

The discs of the toes are much larger than

those of the fingers; the ratio of the width ot

the dise of the third finger to that of the fourth

toe is 0.64. The relative difference in develop-

ment af finger and toe dises is reflected hy

the ratios of dise width te the width of the

penultimate phalanx, Those of the above digits

aré 1.29 and 2.0 respectively. Fingers and

(oes in decreasing orders of length 3>4=52>1

and 4>3>5>2>1 respectively. Subarticulir

lubercles ure poorly developed heneath the

fingers but well developed beneath the toes.

There is un clongate and) prominent inner

metatarsal tubercle and i circular and poorly

developed outer metatarsal tubercle.

The skin of the dorsal surfuce of the head

and body is extremely irregular, bearing

numerous prominent tubercles and sharply

defined skin folds. The skin folds follow the

longitudinal axis of the body except for those

immediately hehind the head which form the

letter W. There is a prominent supratympanic

fold. The ventral surfaces are smooth and the

flanks slightly tubercular

In preservutive the ground colouration at

the dersal surface of the body and limbs is

durk brown, Upen the dorsum there are u lew.

irregularly shaped, smull patches now fading

Irom orange to grey, A pair of these patches

are located within the W mark on the buck.

and others on each side of the coecyx and on

other portions of the hack and flanks. The

posterior surfaces of the temora bear pale.

narrow transverse bands. The mandibular

herder is brown and the remainder ol the

ventral surface of the body lacks pigment,

Variation: The Wenty-one paratypes ine}ude

wdults and juveniles. Several of the adult

femules gre gravid, the smallest having a snout

fo ¥ent length of 34.7 mm and the largest 47

wm, The means and ranges af the characters

recorded are us follows: TL/S-V — 0,50

(O.47-0.54); HWyS-Vo = 0.43 (041-045):

SN/E = 1.20 (1.07-1,29)° E-N/IN = 0.91

(0 80-100).

All paratypes share with the holotype a

dark brown dorsal ground colouration. The

lighter murkings described abave vary (ni their

distribution and are absent im several speci-

ens,

In life the colouration of the dorsal sur-

face varies from sandy brown to weddish

NEW SPECIES OF SPHENOPHRY NE FROM

brown, stippled ar mottled with darker and

lighter brown, and with occasional orange

patches of an ieregular distribution. The

scapukuy Wanark is occasionally reddish, The

bucks of the thighs are usually grey. and finely

stippled with white, but sonietimes pmkish-

The yentral surface is white, with sparse grey

mottling on the sides of the throal. The groins

and lower sides of the hind limbs are reddish.

sametimes bright red. There is u light diagonal

Stripe through the tympanic membrane and

the tris is a greenish gold,

Compurison with Other Specics

Sphenophryne denfota ditlers trom all

Papuan microhylids in possessing well de-

veloped teeth, and bears a striking resemblance

to members of the rapid genus Planyinantis

This 1s, however, only a superficial resem-

hlance because the pectoral guule is typically

thar of Sphenophryne and further lacks the

bony onmiosternal clemnents that characterise

Papuan ranids. Similarly the Musculus cuta-

neous pectoris which is present im all Papuan

ninid genera is licking in this species, as in

all other miicrohylids examined (Tyler 197 La,

1¥7th), Additional Jeatures supporting the

lumilial dispasition of the species ure the pro-

goelous condition of the vertebrac, dilation of

the sacral diupophyses und the presence of

prepharyogeal, palutal folds.

The presence of teeth and of numerous.

skin folds are Unigue to this species and

render it one of the most distinctive menthers

of the genus. Of the fourteen species currently

recognised, three Australiin species (8. fry.

5. plicvialis, and 8, rohyste) and tive Papuan

species (S, brevierus, §, brevipes, S. crassa,

So tnehelyi and 8. polvsrcra) are small robust

animals not exceeding 30 mm. tn length.

Some of the salient distinguishing characters

oF the remaining species are as follows: &.

puliipes. sympatric with S. dentate, 1s mainly

uquatic and is readily distinguished by the

presence of extensive webbing between the

toes fabsent in SS. denttad. Sphenopheyne

cormiva possesses vestigeal iceth but exhibits

a large conical tuberele on euch upper eyelid,

und jn Jife may be bright red on the ventral

surfaces §, Jaoglandi has a prominent snout,

smooth skin and a different colouration.

Sphenapliryvne macrarhiyacha, alsa mainly an

quatic species, has slight webbing between

the loes, and the nostrils are equidistant be-

tween the eye and tip of the snout: S. rhe

dacrvie has w dark ventral surface with lighter

markings, the finger dises are hirger than the

MILNE BAY, PAPUA a1

toe discs, and the maximum recorded snout

fo vent length is 60 mm. Sphenaphryue

selilaginfaufenti possesses skm folds on the

Scupular region but lacks the other folds and

rugosities of S. dentate. Wt is readily distin-

guished fram S$. dentwta by the shape of the

snout (angular dnd strongly projecting in pro-

tile, with a very sharp canthus rostralis) and

hy ils possession of uw black loreal musk.

Ecological Nute

All the specimens were collected on the

forest floor of hillsides above the town of

Alotau, Milne Bay District of Papi. These

hillsides are steep and are dissected into

numerous ridges and gullies by sovull streams

running down to Milne Bay, The forest js well

developed and remains largely untouched

other than in the immediate vicinity of the

town. The rainfall of the region is high (annual

mean approximately 3.000 mm; 120 inches)

but a season in which there as slightly less

rainfall than in the remainder of the yeur

usually conimences in| November and lasts

until March or April,

In Octoher 1969 few males were heard call-

ing and only two were collected. However. in

November 1970 large numbers were heard

and found all over the forest floor, Because

many of the adult females collected on the

latter occasion were gravid. it appears that

the breeding season carrespands to the ‘dry’

season ut Milne Bay,

All the specimens in the type series were

collected at altitudes between 60) und t50

metres (200-500 [1) tbave sea level. The

maximum altitude at which the species oecurs

there is unknown, but the mountains in the

region do not extend much above 1000 metres

(approximately 3000 St). The species occurs

at slightly higher elevations on Mt Dayman,

approximately 100 Km nurth-east of the type

locality. A specimen taken at 15350 metres

(American Museum of Natural History No

56734) and tentatively referred to §. sehilagin-

haufeni by Zweifel (19561 has been examined

by one of us (J.1.M.)_ and js considered to be

a juvenile S, dentata.

Twelve other species of frogs, inchidine

nine microhylids were collected in the same

forest as S. denteta. but ecological differences

appear to separate most of them, Spheno-

pliryne pulinipey is aquatic: Literta ventnecu

futa (formerly Ayla genimacrlata) wad Oree-

pPhryne biroi are arboreal: a species of Rene

is Gnly found at the streamsides: Caphixalis

verrueosas, OC. ateles, and an Oreapliryee

82 M. J. TYLER Anpb J. I. MENZIES

05 sec. 1-0

Fig. 2. Sphenophryne dentata. Sonagrams made from the middle of the call, (a) narrow filter, (b) wide

filter. The continuous trace above 3 KHz is insect noise.

NEW SPECIES OF SPHENOQPHRYNE FROM MILNE BAY, PAPUA 83

species hide in leaf litter on the forest floor

during the day, but ascend low vegetation at

night. Asterophrys doriae has been collected

in subterranean burrows; Platymantis papuen-

sis fayours the forest floor but at this locality

is usually found lower down the hillsides.

Metopostira ocellata, Cophixalus oxyrhinus

and Astérophrys rufescens are the only species

which appear to occupy exactly the same

habitat as S. dentata.

Voice

The call of the male consists of a very long

succession of identical components, at first in

acceleration then at a steady rate, finally in

deceleration, It lasts for nearly ninety seconds

and includes approximately 300 motifs, each

of 0,1 second duration and including twelve

figures. There is no clearly defined frequency

intensity maximum: several bands hetween 2

and 3 KHz appear of equal importance. Sono-

grams of a small portion of the middle of the

call are shown in Figure 2.

The acoustic impression is rather like the

rapid bark of a dog and the call can be heard

at a distance of several hundred metres,

Acknowledgements

We wish to express our thinks to Mr Colin

Jennings, formerly of Alofau High School, for

much assistance in the field, and to Dr Richard

G. Zweifel (American Museum of Natural

History) and Dr W. G. Inglis (South Aus-

tralian Museum) for helpful comments on the

manuscript.

References

InBy-Dayis, L. (1964),—Brological acoustics and

the use of the sound spectrograph. Swead.

Nat. 9 (3), 118-145.

Parker, H. W. (1934)—-A monograph of the

frogs of the family Microhylidae. viii + 208

pp. (British Museum (N.H.), London).

Tyrer, M. J. (1971a)—Observations on anuran

myo-integumental attachments associated with

the vocal sac apparatus. J. nat, Hist. 5 (2),

225-231.

TyLerR, M. J. (1971b)—The occurrence of the

Musculus cutaneous pectoris in the Anura,

Herpetologica 27, 150-152.

ZWEIFEL, R, G, (1956)—Results of the Archbold

Expeditions. No. 72 Microhylid frogs from

New Guinea, with descriptions of new spe-

cics. Amer. Mus. Navit. (1766), 1-49.

ZweiFeEL, R. G. (1963).—Results of the Archbold

Expeditions. No. 84 New Microhylid frogs

(Baragenys and Cophixalus) from the

Louisiade Archipelago, New Guinea, Amer,

Mus, Novit (2141), 1-10.

ZWEIEEL, R. G. (1967).—A new species of micro-

hylid frog (Genus Sphenophryne) from New

Guinea. Amer. Mus. Novit. (2309), 1-6,

THE DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF THE FLEURIEU PENINSULA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY E. J. BROCK

Summary

Some aspects of the geomorphology of the Fleurieu Peninsula are examined from an evolutionary

standpoint. Convex and concave breaks of slope serve to delineate physiographic regions defined on

the Peninsula.

Summit planate remnants, capped by laterite, have been mapped. These are the dissected remnants

of a peneplain, named the Parawa Peneplain, to which a Mesozoic age is assigned, Various forms of

laterite are described, and the question of their origin and age crucial to a reconstruction of the

evolution of the Peninsula, is examined. A Mesozoic to Early Tertiary age is assigned to the high

level laterite. Other lower level laterites are interpreted as low-slope cappings formed after the high

level ones.

The morphology of Tunkalilla Creek and the associated dissected terrain is examined and erosional

chronologies of the Creek are proposed. A chronology based on a three-phased uplift of the

Peninsula in Eocene (?), Late Miocene, and Plio-Pleistocene times is preferred.

Evidence of high sea levels attributed to Tertiary tectonism is cited for 201-207, 183-192, 119-125,

and 58-64 m ASL. Lower levels at 40-44 and 8 m ASL are related to glacioeustasism of the

Pleistocene.

Ideas based on the model of Kennedy, and to some extent of Davis and Penck, appear most

appropriate for the construction of the evolution of the region.

THE DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF THE FLEWRIEU PENINSULA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

hy BE. J, Brock*

Summary

Some aspects of the geomorphology of the Fleurien Peninsula are examined [rom an evolution-

ary standpoint. Convex and concave breaks of slope serye to delineate physiographic regions defined

un the Penimsuls.

Summit planate remnants, cupped by Jatcrite, have been mapped. These are the dissected jem-

nants of a peneplain, named the Pariwa Peneplain, to which a Mesozoic age ix assigned. Varions

forms of laterite are described, and the question of their origin and ape crucial to a reconstruction of

the evolution of the Peninsula, is examined, A Mesozoic to Early Tertiary age is assigned to the high

level Jaterite, Other lower level Jaierites are interpreted as low-slope cappings formed after the high

evel ones.

The morphology of Tunkalilla Creck and the associated dissected terrain is examined and

erosivnyl chronologies of the Creek are proposed, A chronology based on a thyee-phased uplift of

the Peninsula in Eocene (?), Late Miocene, and Plio-Pleistocene times is preferred.

Evidence of high sea levels uttributed to Tertiary tectonism is cited for 201-207, (83-192, 119-

125. anc 78-64 m ASL, Lower levely at 40-44 and & m ASL are related to glaciveustasisn: of the

Pleistocene.

Ideas based on the model of Kennedy, and to some extent of Davis and Penck. appear most

appropriate for the construction of the evolution of the region.

Tutrodaction

Several general theones of landscape eyo-

Jution have been propased and it is the. purpose

of this paper lo examine the Fleurieu Penin-

sula with particular reference to the cyelic

nodels of Davis (1954) and Penck (1953)

and the noncyclic model of Kennedy (1962)

fur whom the issue revolves around the rela-

live rates of uplift, erosion, and denudation.

Vopograpbi¢ and Geologic Setting

Fleurieu Peninsula, the most southerly part

of the Mt. Lofty Range Province!, mses to

375 m above sea level", and covers an areca

of approximately 518 square kilometers. Jt is

flanked by Gulf St, Vincent, Backstairs Pas-

sdoc. and the Souther) Ocean. To the north

lies & valley depression, Inman Valley, which

trends ESE-WNW from Encounter Kay to

Yankalilla Bay. Within the study area streams

radiate from the lateritic backbone of the up-

land. In their lower reaches they are cut in

cither the metusediments of Cambrian, Pre-

terozvic, and Archatun ages which form the

basement rock of the Peninsula and upon

which the laterite profile has developed, or in

* Department of Science, Academy of the New

unconsolidated sands, clays, and compact swnd-

stones of Permian age which lie unconform-

ably on the older rocks.

The Province his been subjected to at least

three phases of orogeny. Little is Known con-

cerning the first in Archaean time, The second

in the early Palaeozoic was characterized by

intense folding of the sediments of the Adc-

Ixide geosyncline. Low angle shears and

thrusts developed either in place of or accom-

panying the folds. Che third, in Tertiary time,

was characterized by block faulting along lines

of weakness inherited from. the Pulaeozuic

phase (Sprigg 1942; Glaessner 1953, Campana

1954) Webb 1958).

During the Tertiary the Peninsula acted as

a tectonic unit, Uplift began in the early Ter-

liary and continues (o the present day (Kerr

Grant 1955; Sution & White 1968). The tec-

tonics involved three major phases of uplift

of the Mt, Lofty Ranges (Webb 1958); the

first in Early Tertiary (Eocenc ?) time, the

second in the Late Miocene bringing sedi-

mentation to a close in the Myponga and

Hindmarsh Valleys, and the jhird in Late

Pliocene or Early Pleistocene time. Campana

Church, Bryn Athyn, Pennsylvynia, USA 19009,

1 The tern “Province” is used as defined by Linton (1951). and refers to a tegion throughout which

there has heen unifarmity of structural evolution,

2 AU heights are referred to the Port Adelaids Datum, designated ASL in the text.

Trans, R. Soc, 8, Aust, Vol. 95, Part 2. 11th August 1971.

&6 EB. J. BROCK

and Wilson (1953) note that Oligo-Miocene

limestone crops out in the Mypohga and

Hindmarsh Valleys at some 211) m below the

level of the nearby Iateritic plateau, and attri-

bute this difference to pre Oligo-Miocene up-

ward movements; these caused the exhumation

of Permian glacial valleys and hasins. Cam-

pana and Wilsun (1955) further conclude

that the cumulative effect of the Tertiary tec-

tonics was an uplift of the “pre-Tertiary

peneplain” of some 460 m in the Myponga

region, half af which is altributed to the pre

Miocene phase.

FLEURIEU PENINSULA

Physiographic Regions

~pe

Tos

ervis

Sth,

‘

ape 4

K lor sires

Fig. |~ Explanation of key. 1:

Geomorphology of Typical Regions

and Features

The Parawa High Plain

The Parawa High Plain occurs as isolated

remnants on um E-W ridge, and on spurs

hranching from this spine. In plan, most

lateral extensions and isoluied outtiers are

located south of the sping, and in section they

ale parts of a dissected dome. Euch remnant

is of low relief (Fig. 2) and is capped by a

laterite profile (Stephens 1946). Following

Prescott and Pendleton (1952), the term

rs fr

= +

; =

" 5

vat 3 -

Oe XK,

= ? \.

56,

Palo

f ‘ os wre

‘ )

RYE at | ‘W a, is

ef SF

{

}

Parawa High Plain, remnant of the Parawa Peneplain, 2; Etch surface

capped by truncated laterite, 3: Surface of partial peneplanation graded to 61 m ASL hase

level, 4; Bedrock scarp, 3: Convex break of slape. 6; Concave break of slope. 7: Regional

boundary along ridge crest, 8: Spot height, metres. ASL.

‘the southern pact of the Peninsula upon

whieh the enquiry 15 focused has been divided

into a number of morphological regions

(Brock, M. A. thesis, University of Adelaide,

19464). In summary, the centrally located

Parawa High Plain and Ridge & Vale Section

are surrounded by the South Coast Valley

Region, Cape Jervis lowland, Mt. Rapid Hill

Country, Pinnis Yale Region. and the Inman

Valley Lowland (see Fig. 11,

“laterite” is used to refer to the ferriercte

developed within the laterite profile typicul

of southern Australia and orginally desertbed

hy Walther (1915}.

The plain remnants. are commonly bounded

by bluffs formed on the laterite (the “break-

aways” of Jutson 1934), particularly where

headwater streams ate actively undercutting

them, Elsewhere they merge into a lower sur-

face not capped hy laterite, oa lateral spurs

DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF FLEORLEU PENINSULA 87

by way of concave hreak af slope. However,

on this surface lateritic gravels in places over-

lie mottled yellow clays, while élsewhere ifon-

stone occurs a5 an amorphous mass containing

fragments of weathered bedrock, or as wea-

thered bedrock cemented hy iron oxides, Both

of these varictics of ironstone were formed by

the secondary deposition of iran hydroxides

accompanying or tollowing the dismantling of

the High Plain laterite (see D’Hoore 1954).

It is likely that this topographically lower

surface has been formed hy the stripping of

the High Plain Jaterile profile because it is

generally contiguous with the latter und iis

soil profile is indeed that of 4 truncated laterite

(Stephens 1946; Mulcahy 1940}. As such it

is a Eype of etch surface, and is the morpho-

logical equivalent of the Balkuling Surface of

Western Australia (Mulcahy & Hingsion J461,

who called it a pediment), aod the Maranhoy

Surface of the Daly River Basin (Wright

1963); genetically it belongs ta the Ridge &

Vale Section.

The pisolitic Jaterne of ihe High Plain

resemble in appeurince the West Australian

varieties described by Walther (i915) and

Muleahy (1960), and the “Elewner Sands"

of Kangaroo Island (Northcote 1946), Dis-

section encourages lateral movement of sur-

face and subsurface waters. Whether or not

further accumulation. of iron oxides takes

place appears to depend in part on the amount

of telief {D*Honre 1954). Where slopes ave

gentle and lateral movement of water is slow,

then wecumulation forms low-slope cappings.

However, sttomg dissection encourages rapid

movement of surface and subsurface water,

and uceumulation of iron oxides ms not fiv-

oured, This condition may account for the low

incidence of lateritic detritus in the Ridge and

Vale Section.

Two yYarieties of ironstone oscur on the

glacigene sands ol the Coolawahg Creek head-

water basin, First, an gentle slopes if occurs as

4 ferruginous sandstene. a “low-slope cap

ping" (D'Huore 1954; the “seepage laterile™

of Alexander & Cady 1962) formed after the

initiation of dissectioh of the High Plain.

Secon. a vesicular and poorly laminated form

summounts an isolated summit planate surface

(MR 6412, 6093. Torrens Vale, sheet 6326-1.

Austvalia 1:50,000) oceurting between 275

and 290 m ASL, and has been mapped as a

Parawa High Plain remnant. The laminated

form tx alinbuied fo the structure of the host

sediments,

The age of Ue Parawa High Plain resis on

the age of the laterite developed upon it

Campana & Wilson (1953) consider, without

citing direct evidence, that weathering cul-

minating in the formation of the laterite on

the Fleurieu Peninsula is of Pliocene to Recent

age and that ii 1s still active.

Horwitz (1960) has deduced that two

phases of lateritizalio are evidenced in the

Southern Mt. Lofty Ranges. The first sug-

vested phase oceurred in pre-Miocene, possibly

Eocene time. Horwitz cited the occurrence of

glazed pisolites which occur in the hase uf

the Oligo-Miocenc limestone near Scrathalbyn

and whith wete presumably derived from a

preexisting lateritized surface.

The second phase occurred in the Plincene

accompanying peneplanation. Horwitz’ evi-

dence for this is twofold, Lower Miocene

limestone intersected in a bore sical’ Clover-

diule in the Upper Hindmarsh Valley is over-

Jain “By extrapolation by over 300 feecr (152

m) of brown ferruginous sands, cross bedded

and mottled ... which are capped by a crust

of limonite cemented gravels" (Thomson &

Horwitz 1961, The geology of the Milang

Sheet. p. 10 Mines Dept, 8, Aust; unpub-

lished). The Latter occur on an isolated hill.

In addition, the high plateau laterite (the

equivalent of the Parawa High Plain latcrite)

is elsewhere continuous with the limonile

cemented gravels (fn the Upper Hindmarsh

Villey) which overlie the Tertiary sediments,

This provides evidence that the lateritization

of the high plateau occurred in post Lower

Miocene time, assuming that the lower level

laterite on the sands of the Hindmarsh Valley

was indeed formed at Ihe same lime as the

high plateau Jaterite. However, similar oecur-

sences of Jaterite Pound as iran oxide cementert

sunds on Jow angle slopes and at elevations

lower than the High Plain laterite (see ahove)

have heen interpreted ns fow-slope cappings

formed after the latter. The supposed con-

Temporaneity of the high and lower level

fnterites is thus called into question.

Turkalilla Creek

The ‘Vunkalila Creek drainage basin and

its associated landform assemblages, which

constifute the Ridge and Vale Section and

South Const Valley Region, typifies all the

streams draining south tn the Southern Ocean,

and its erosional chronology may be taken

as chavacteristic of areas marginal lo the

Parawa High Plain,

In the headwater embayments below the

Jhigh Plain, peat marshes commonly ocetir

88 E. J. BROCK

REGION Parawa igh Plain

Ridge & Vaie Section | South Coast Valley Region

Davis Pereplain

Palaeozoic - Early

Tertiary

Penck

Palagozoic - Early

Present

Preomarrumpt

Tertiary

Early Tartiary (Eocene 7) -

Piedmorttrgpgen T

carly Tertiary - Present

Ep cyclic Landscape

Late Mictene- Aresent

PFieamanltrepper @

Late Miocene- Present

Kennedy Morphology Furction of Relative Rates of Upl.ft, Erosion & Benudation

Palagogolc - Present

Early Tertiary - Present

Late Mincene-Present

SOILS

Laterite

“Weatheree Beorock

“nahey

Ngadvaters

*. ?

Tertiary Orogsi—

Yhase latter Wobb!

Intiating Wiens

Kegressio- Kelsta

to Davis & Ket

Truncated Lateriigz

eyodie Heacne=

Skeletal

to Site of Oligo-

Shoreline 305

Lower kegehes

5 a 4

MWio=PiaeSheee et ot

Fig. 4. Tabular summary of geomorphic history, Fleuri@u Peninsula, according to the concepts of

Davis, Penck & Kennedy.

where the water table ts at or near the surfuce.

Downstream, the valley has. an open V-shaped

transverse profile (Fig, 3), and the stream

channel is weakly incised in sands and clays

of weathered bedrock und slope wash debris.

The middle reaches of the stream are s¢epa-

rated from the headwaters by a nickpoint (1

on Fig. 4) on unweathered bedrock. Down-

stream from the nickpoint the valley fluor

widens, the stream gradicnt is gentle with an

average fall of 5.9 m per kilometre, and the

relief amplitude is of the order of 76 to 92 m

(see Fig. 4). In these reaches the stream

course is adjusted to the strike of the bedrock.

The lower reaches of the stream are sepa-

rated from the middle reaches by another

nickpuint (If on Fig. 4) uccompanied by

marked basal slope stecpening. Below the

nickpoint the stream is confined between sieep

rectilin¢ar valley sides, the channel gradient

steepens wilb an average fall of 39 m per

kilometre, while the relicf amplitude attains a

muximum of about 100 m. The steep valley

side facets grade into the broad summit con-

vexity of the interfluves by way of a convex

break of slope, which is genetically associated

with the nickpoint [lL to which it can he

traced. Three additional nickpoinis oecur

(iy, IV, & V in Fig. 4), below the las\ of

which the graded channel is cut imto the sur-

face of 4 fill terrace underlain by prey, silty

alluvium containing abundant charcoal.

The occurrence uf several breaks of channel

slope (nickpoints) is a characteristic feature

of the streams draining to the Southern Ozeun.

Lewis (1945) cites four factors for the de-

Fig. 2. Parawa High Plain in foreground. Etch surface in Ridge and Vale Section in middle distance.

View northwest from 35° 34°S, 138° 22'E.

Fiz. 3. Headwater reaches of Tunkalilla Creek. View south,

Fie. 5. Marine abraded houlders at cliff-top site (MR 6148-6224, Cape Jervis, Sheet 6526-TV, Aus-

tralia 1:50,000) at between 61 and 67 m ASL. Boulders derived from Permian till,

Fig, 6. Surface of partial peneplanatian in Finniss Vale Region (see Fig. 1) in middle diytance, graded

to 61 m general base level. Quarizite ridge in foreground. View landward of site of Fis. 6,

DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF FLEURIFU PENINSULA

See

AOE FL ek.

2 Sapa

cope tists

oe ant

ry) 4,

—

he.

90 ky J BROCK

velopment af nickpoints, namely, rejuvenation:

the presence of rock bars; the confluence of

streams; and a change in the transport-erosion

relations resulting from u change in the nature

of the bed materia}, To these may be added

the influence of climatic change, and inter-

miltent shoreline reltrogradation (Cotton 1940).

Rejuvenation caused by the relative lower-

ing of the general base level by uplift is con-

sidered to be the greatest single fuctor in the

development of the nickpoints in the study

region. Geological evidence adduced above

demonstrates that the Peninsula, acting as a

single unit, has been subjected to uplift since

early Tertiary lime. at least into the Quater-

nury, und possibly to the present (Kerr Grant

1955), The valleys commonly display basal

slope sleepening al und dlown slream from the

nickpoints, a teature orost marked in associa-

tion with niekpuinis IH, and I, and in the

absence of alluvial deposits and paired ter-

Tuces the best evidence of rejuvenation (Bau-

lig 1940). Below the Jevel of nickpoint I the

Streams have irregular grides associated with

steep valley walls and stranded high level slip-

off slope terraces, Those nickpoints thought to

he caused by rock bars and increase of dis-

charge ut the confluence of a tributary with

the trunk stream have been disregarded,

Of the other faciors ciled above. the in-

Huenee of shoreline retrogradation deserves

consideration, That the south coust is retreat-

ing is indicated by the presence of coastal

hanging valleys, the development of a narrow

marine abrasion platlorm, and the occurrence

of a small stack formed of dune limestone on

Tunkalilla Beach, lying some 15 m seaward

of the retreating low cliff line cut in alluvium,

The significance of shoreline movement as

au causative fuctor is difficult to appraise since

jhe rate and magnitude of uplift together with

the rate of siream incision also must be taken

into account, However, rapid intermittent ad-

vances of the sea of considerable magnitude,

beyond that for which evidence exists, would

he necessary to account for the observed suc-

cession of nickpoints. Therefore it is con-

cluded that uplift is the primary factor with

shoreline movement playing u relatively insig-

nificant role,

Even if they did oceur (Castany & Ottmann

1957, Twidale 1968) the Pleistocene high sea

levels (Zeuner 1950) are not considered rele-

vant to the question for the following reasons,

The Fleuricu Peninsula was uplifted at least

230 m (the level of outcrop of Oligo-Miocene

marine limestone near Myponga), and possibly

some 460 m (the figure for the nel vertical

displacement during the Tertiary uplift in. the

Myponga urea given by Campana & Wilson

1953), prior to the onset of the Pleistocene

gliciation. Hence vertical movements are held

6526-1V_ Australia 1:50,000).

. Beach shingle buried by colluvial debris and resting on marine abrasion platform related to 8

m ASL general base level, Coastal site at Rapid Cove (MR 6116-6137, Cape Jervis, Sheet

Fig. 8. Marine abrasion platferm on acolianite related ta % m ASL base level. Cupe Jervis (MR

5996-6089, Cupe Jervis. Sheet 6S26-1V, Australia 1:50.000). View northwest.

DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF PLEURTEL PENINSULA 9]

responsible for the hase level lowering which

initiated most of the nickpoints, with the

effects of glacioeustatic oscillalions and shore-

ling movements being superimposed but

assuming minor roles.

Brock (thesis) doouments other evidence,

hoth morphological and depositional, for

stands of the sea higher than at present [see

Figs. 5-3). Respecting their ages, no more

can be said of the levels cited at 201-207,

183-192, 119-125, and 58-64 m ASL than

that they are post Permian because marine

abraded boulders that nceur at these levels

have been derived from Permian glaciyenes,

These high levels ure attributed to Tertiary

tectonism, Levels at 40-44 and & m ASI.

post date the deposition of acolianiye in which

they are cut near Cape Jervis, Accepting that

{he oeolianite is of Pleistocene age (Crocker

1946; Sprigg 1952; Bauer 1961) then a ts

Teasonable to suppose that these Jower levels

are related to the glacioeustisism of the Pleis-

focene or Holocene. Brock assigns a lower

Recent age to the 8 m level,

Crocker, Sprizg, and Baucr suggest that

the seolianite deposition occurred during the

Meistocene in periods of glacioeustatic lower-

ing of the sea and consequent exposure of the

continental shelf, which then became the

source region of the acolianite deposits,

Erosional Chronologices of Tunkalilla Creek

The morphology of Tunkalilla Creek is

open to at least two interpretations hased on

the presumption of phased, internsittent, uplift

of the Peninsula,

Arguing from morphological evidence only,

a four-phased uplift is indicated assyming that

nickpoints I, 1, and Hl all originated by

rejuvenation. Accordingly, the Incision of the

headwater segment began with phase 1, the

middle reaches with phase 2, and the two

segments between nickpoints Il and UI, and

between IL and present sea level, with phases

3 and 4 respectively,

Allernalively, accepting thal the Tertiary

uplift Was three-phased, and assuming that

nickpainis Wand Wi are the principal erosion

heads. and explaining nickpoint 1 in Jitho-

hogieul terms, occurring as it does on essen-

tially uaweathered hedrock at the base of the

deep soil manile, then the following hypothesis

is feasible.

Phase 1 in pre Oliga-Miocene time initiates

the incision of Tunkalilla Creek, Incision con-

tinues in Oligo-Miocene time when marine

limestone is deposiled in the Myponga Basin,

Tunkalilla Creek may have been gradiag io

a shoreline fear the site of coastal benches

at 187 m ASL (see Fig. 4). Nickpoimt IL is

initiated hy the Jate Miocene uplift which

brought sedimentation to a close mm the

Myponga Basin, Phase 3, of proposed Plio-

Pleistocene age lyler initiates nickpoint ULI,

Denudation Chronology: Evotution of the

Region

Viewed from the perspective of a Davisian

model of landscape evolution the evidence

ahove may he interpreted in the following

way.

The Parawa Peneplain, of which the Parawa

High Plain is the dissected remnant, wus the

end-product of an earlier cycle of erosion

which began in, the Palaeozoic, The actual

age of the Peneplaia is probably Mesozoic,

since, as nated above, some of its remnants

cul across Permian glacigenes. A feconstruc-

tion based on the High Plain remnants pro-

duces a surface which has the features af ap

ideal peneplain; a surface of low relief of

bread convexity, mantled by a deeply wea-

thered zone, and featuring a monadnnck, Mt,

Arthur, formed on a resistant band of ferru-

ginous quartzite.

The commencement of the Tertiary uplift

initiated a new cycle that continues to the

present. The southeast ult of the uplifled

surface is in harmony with the southeast tilt

of the Tault blocks further nurth in the Mt

Lofty Ranges, and of the peneplain surface

of Kangaroo Island (Bauer 1941). Accepting

a three-phased wplift, this cycle has been

inlterrupled by Iwo laler phases (late Miocene

and Plio-Pleistocenc) producing a multicyclic

anc epicyche landscupe (see Fig. 9), Nick-

points IL and LIL were initiated by these latter

twe phases. An alternative mlerpretation based

on a four-phased uplift adduced from morpho-

logical evidence us vutlined above is not

favoured because it is pot supported by geo-

logical evidence. In addition, providing that

the rate of headward erosion is greater than

that of nickpoin. 1 regression, the headwuler

reaches will be lengthened, and nickpoint I

lying as it dues at the hase of the mantle of

decply weathered bedrock, can be explained in

lithulogicul jernws rather than by invoking

rejuvenation.

Accordingly, therefore. nickpoints IL and

Tit separate Tunkalilla Creek into segments

which are progressively younger downstreatn.

Applying the Davisian concept of stage, the

middle and headwater reaches of the streain’s

52 EL J,

Fig. 9. Tunkalilla Creek and environs. Map based

on Torrens Vale Shect, Ausiralia 1:50,000,

und yerial photograph analysis.

chanel are mature. and the lower reaches

youthful, On the other hand, the terrain of

the Ridge und Vale Section and South Coust

Valley Region is youthful in that valley sides

have not inerged lo produce a condition of all

slopes,

An alternative interpretation based on the

Hrodel of Penek (1953) rests on the assump-

lion that uplifting of a fault block can be

equated with Penek’s “structurally expanding

dome”. Accepling this equiytion, the pre-

existing surface of which the Parawa bligh

Plain remnants arc the present vestiges. is

ao pelnidreump/, Subsequently, the region

expenencing accelerated uplift (anfsteipende

entwickhing), two sequences of picdmenttirep-

pen tuve developed, These are now repre-

sented by the interflave surfaces of the Ridge

and Yale Section and ‘South Coast Valley

Region.

Within the framework of this model, nick-

points Uevelop along the sireym channels

which scparate valley forms that are pro-

gressively more mature (in Davisian terms)

upstream, « condition that does exist in ‘Tunka-

Jilla Creek.

The principal objection to this interpretation

BROCK

lies not so much in the lack of cvidence to

support il, nor in the need to Oversirain the

evidence Io fit the model, as in the problems

inherent in the model itself particularly with

reference to the mode of development of

nickpoints (see Thornbury 1954). As Thorn-

bury pointed out, Penck used geomorpho-

logical analysis as a tool for the interpretation

of diastrophic history. Viewed as such the

evidence in the study area is indicative of

accelerated uplift, a notion that gains a

modicum of support from the fact that the

difference in elevation between nickpoinis IL

and IM is 79 mm, while that between I] und

the present sea Jevel ts 13) m. In addition,

channel gradients become, in general, pro-

gressively sleeper downstream.

Whereas the models proposed by Davis and

Penek require that a succession of landform

assemblages develop from un initial sucface of

low relief, Kennedy's ideas, in application to

the study area, require no such initial surface.

Specificully, the Parawa High Plain nesd not

have existed prior to uplift, and the Plain

could have continued to form during uplift

and pt the same time that peripheral

arcas suffered rejuvenation by haselevel

lowering, Furthermore, only those areas whose

streams were in direct contact with the general

buse level (the lower reaches of Tunkalilla

Creck for cxample) would he directly affected

by uplift in so far as stream incision would be

controlled, in part, by such movement. Up-

steain, nickpoints. would serve as local base

levels, and valley form would be dependent

upon the relulive rates of stream incision and

slope dowawasting in those arcas, which here

would include the Ridge and Vale Section and

Parawa High Plain, A comparable interpre-

tation is applicd by Twidale (1968) tw the

laterilized summit surface of the Mt, Lofty

Kunges east of Adelaide,

The genesis of the laterite that surmounts

the High Plain is critical to an appraisal of

the Kennedy hypothesis as it applies ta the

study area. There is no general agreement as

to the details of lateritization (see Reiche

1950), However, many hypotheses involve

processes of mohilization und accumularian

associaled with a fluctujting water table be-

neath a surface of low relief (D'Hoore 1954;

Alexander & Cady 1962), I) Moore further

postulates that both “absolute” and “relative”

accumulation form preferentially in. the hori-

zontal plane, and that lowering of the erosion

base brings absolute accumulation to a halt,

although relative accumulation may continue

DENUDATION CHRONOLOGY OF FLEURIEU PENINSULA 93

at depth. 1) scems unlikely, therefore, that 4

zone of iron enrichment high in the laterite

profile, and now capping a planate summit

surtace, would proceed during active dissec.

tion of the landmass initiated by the lowering

of the erosion base and consequent lowering

of the walter lable, Clearly, acceptance of the

above argument brings with it rejection of a

Kennedy-type interpretation of the study area

in so far as the summit High Plain surface ts

concerned,

Conclusion

From the standpoint of the models of Davis

and Penck it is necessary to consider the eyo-

lution af the study area in two parts; the

Parawa High Plain, which must he considered

4s au remnant of a surface of low relief pre-

dating the Tertiary aplift, and the peripheral

areas formed by dissection of this former sur-

face during the Tertiary and continuing to the

present. On the other hand, from the stand-

point of the Kennedy hypothesis no such dis-

tinction need be made.

The evidence. however, favours the first case

above; the former continuity ef the High

Plain yremmants can scarcely he doubted on

pedologic and morphologic grounds; nor can

uplift through sume 300 m or more be ques-

tioned, Together, this evidence points fo the

existence of a quite extensive surface de-

veloped during a period that hegan in the

Palaeozoic and ended in the early Tertiary.

It must be supposed that during at least the

latter part of this period the landmass was

essentially stable ta allow for the deyelop-

ment of the summit laterite. Whether this

surface js galled a peneplam. endrunipf. or

otherwise is a matter of choice depending on

wha! mode of evolution is preferred: but since

the reconstructed pluin has the featuees of an

ideal peneplain, then it should be so desig.

trated.

As ip the areas peripheral ta the High

Plain, of the competing models that of Ken-

nedy seems must appropriate, The model itself

contains an inherent flexibility suited to the

consideration of eomplex natural systems,

involving as it dovy the interplay of erosion,

denudation and uplift, On the other hand, the

evidence adduced above throws no light in a

quantitative sense on the relative rates of

these factors, with the exception of the lower

reaches of Tunkalilla Creck; high relief ampli-

tude, sleep rectilinear slopes, and sleep chan-

nel gradient result from a condition in which

uplift has outpaced erosion (stream incision),

But above nickpoint HI it is not known

whether the relief is increasing, is stable. or

decreasing hecause there is no evidence from

the study area concerning rates ot erosion

and denudation upon which relief form de-

pends,

The application of Dyvisian stage termi-

nology to the area sheds no light on its eyo-

lution. Indeed, the fact that ao “youthful”

terrain in the South Coast Valley Region

surrounds an inland “mature” one contradicts

the Davisian model. But then it may be argued

that the ideal cycle does not apply to the

peripheral areas because the region has long

been unstable.

At this time, therefore, although the evolu-

tron of the Parawa High Plain must be con-

sidered somewhat cnigmatic, it seems masi

appropriate to apply the term peneplain to it

for dascriplive purposes, But a synthesis based

on the ideas of Kennedy and Penck coupled

with the traditional view of rejuvenation by

hasclevel lowering provides the best framework

of thought from which to yiew the evolution

of the regions peripheral to the High Plain.

Acknowledgements

The author gratefully acknowledges the

helpful criticism and advice given by Dr

C. R. Twidale of the Department of Geo-

graphy, University of Adelaide. in the pre-

parathion of this paper. Thanks are due also

to Me. M, Pitesiro for his photographic work

in preparing the Figures for publication

References

Avexanper, Lo Tu. and Capy, J. G, (1962).—

Genesis and hardening of laterite in soils.

Tech, Bull, U.S. Dep. Agric. 1282, 1-90

Baver. F. H. (196t)—Chronic problems of

lerrace study jm Southern Australia. Z, Ceo-

morph. Suppl. 3, 57-72,

Batliag, Hy, 44940) —Reeonsiruction ef streim

profiles: J. Geanmorph, 3, 3-15,

Campana, B. (1954),—The Structure of the

Eastern South Australian Ranges; The MI.

Eaily-Olary arc, J, geel Soe Aven 2,

47-A2,

CAMPANA, H., and Winson, R. B: (1953),—The

Geology of the Jervia and Yankalilla Military

SNE CH, Rep. dnvest. Bop, Mines $8) Aust.

No, 3.

94 E, J, BROCK

Campana, B., and Witson, R. B. (1955).—Tillites

and related glacial topography of South

Australia, Eelog, geol. Hely. 48, 1-30.

Castany, G., and OTtrmany, F, (1957)—Le

Quaternaire marin de la Médilerranée occi-

dentale. Revne Geogr. phys. et Géol, dyn.

Sér. 2, 1, 46-55.

Cotton, C. A. (1940).—Classification and corre-

Jation of river terraces. J, Geomorph, 3,

27-37.

Crocker, R, L, (1946).—Post Miocene climate

and gdlogica) history. Bull. Cown, Seient.

ind. Res,, . No. 193,

Davis, W_M. (i9say: —"Geogtaphical Essays.” 2nd

ed, (Dever).

D'HooreE, J. (1954).—The accumulation of free

sesquioxides in tropical scils. Puhls Inst.

mate Etude agron. Congo helge, Ser, Sei, 62,

1-132.

Giaessnar, M. FP. (1953).—Conditions of Ter-

tiary sscdimentation in Southem Australia.

Trans. R. Sac. &. Aust. 16, 144-146.

Horwirz, R. C, (1960).—Geologie de Ja regional

de Mt. Compass (feuille Milang), Australie

Meridionale. Eclog. geol. Helv. 53, 211-263.

Jutson, J. T. (1934) —The Physiography (Geo-

marphology ) of Western Australia. Bull.

veal. Surv. Wesi Aust, 95,1-366.

Kemnepy, W. Q. (1962).—Some theoretical fac-

tors in geomorphological analysis. Geal. Mag.

99. 304-312.

Kerr Grant, C. (1955) —The Adelaide earth-

quake of Ist May, 1954. Trans. R. Soc, §

Aust. 79, 177-185,

Lewis, W. Y. (1945).—Nickpoints and the curve

of Water erosion. Geol. Mug. 82, 256-265.

Lunton, D. 1. (1951)—The delimitation of mor-

phological regions, /m London Essays in

Geography, pp. 199-218 (Longmans).

Muccany, M. J. (1960).—Laterites and. laterilic

soil in southwestern Australia. J. Soil Se7- 11,

706-225.

Mutcaky, M. J., and Hineston, J. J. (196f).—

The deyclopment and distribution of the

York-Qnairading area, West Australia, in

relation to Tandscape evolution. Soil Publ.

C.S.LR.O. Aust. 17, 1-43.

Nortucore, K. H. (1946)—A fossil soil from

Kangaroo Island, South Australia. Trans. R.

Sac. §. Aust, 70, 294-296,

Prnek, W. { 1953) —"Morphological Analysis of

Land Forms”, (Macmillan, London).

Prescoir, J. A., and Penp_iton, R. L. (1952).

—Laterite and lateritic soils. Tech. Commun,

Conmmonw. Bur, Sail Sei. 47, 1-51,

Rricur, P. (1950)—A Survey of Weathering

Processes and Products. Univ. New Mex.

Puhls Geol. (3), 1-95.

Spriac, R. C, (1942)—The Geology of the Fden

Moana fault block. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust,

66, 185-214,

Sprics, R. C. (1952) —The Geology af the South

East province of South Australia, with special

reference to Quaternary coastline migrations

and modern beach development. Bull. gel,

Surv. S. Aust, 29, 1-120.

STEPHENS, C. G. (1946), —Pedogenesis following

the dissection of lataritic regions of southern

Australia. Bull. Coun. scient. ind. Res. 206,

1-21.

Sutton, DB. J., and Winter, R. B. (1968),—The

Seismicity of South Australia. J. geol. Soc.

Aust. 18, 25-32.

Tuoxngeory, W. D. (1954) —“Principles of Geo-

morphology,” (Wiley).

Twipate, C. R. (1968).—“Geomorphology."

(Nelson).

Wactner, J. (1915)—Laterit in West Australien.

Z, dt, geo). Ges. 67B, 113-140.

Wrens, B. P. (1958).—“Summary of tectonics”.

Ch. XI in Giansswer, M. V. & Parkin,

L. W. (Eds.) “The Geology of South Aus-

tralia.” (Melbourne Univ. Press).

WriGHT, R. L, (1963)—Deep Weathering and

Erosion Surfaces in ihe Daly River Basin,

Northern Territory. J, veol, Soc. Aust, 10,

151-164.

Zeuner, F. E, (1950).—“Dating the Past.” 2nd

ed. (Methuen.)

WHALES FROM THE COAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY P. F. AITKEN

Summary

The past occurrence of 18 species of whales in waters off the coast of South Australia is confirmed

by material preserved in the South Australian Museum. Such material is listed with acquisition data

and registration numbers.

The species are: Eubalaena glacialis australis, Caperea marginata, Balaenoptera musculus,

Balaenoptera physalus, Balaenoptera edeni, Megaptera novaeangliae, Plzy.~eter catodon, Kogia

breviceps, Kogia simus, Berardius arnouxi, Ziphius cavirostris, Hyperoodon planifrons,

Mesoplodon grayi, Mesoplodon layardi, Pseudorca crassidens, Globicephala melaena melaena,

Tursiops truncatus, Delphinus delphis. Orcinus orca is suspected to occur.

Balaenoptera edeni is recorded for the first time from South Australia and a South Australian

specimen of Ziphius cavirostris is described for the first time. Previous South Australian records of

5 whale species are shown to have been based on incorrect identifications and the previous record

of Grampus griseus is considered to be of doubtful validity.

WHALES FROM TRE COAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by P. FL Arrxen*

Summary

“The pust occurrence of 18 Species of whales in waters off the coast of Sonth Australia is confirmed

hy material preserved in the South Australian Museum. Such material is listed with acquisition data

and registralion numbers,

The species are: Eubalaena pglacialis australis, Caperea marginata, Balaenoptera musculus,

Bulaenoptera pliysalus, Balaenoptera .ecdeni, Meyaptera novacangliae, Physeter catadon, Kagia

hreviccps, Kogia sinus, Berardius arnouni, Ziphius cavirostris, Hyperooden plavifrans, Mesoplodarn grayi,

Mesopltodom layardi, Prevdorca crassidens, Globicephala melaena melacna, Tursiops truncalis, Delphinns

delphis. Orcinus erca is suspected to occur.

Balaenopiera edeni is recorded for the first thme from South Australia and a South Australian

specimen of Ziphius cavirestris is described for the first time. Previous South Australian records of 5

whale species are shown fo have been based on incorrect identifications and the previous record of

Grampus griseus is considered to be of doubtful validity.

Introduction

In 1837, shortly after the foundation of

South Australia. the first industry of the new

colony was commenced when a party from

Sydney under Cuaptain Blenkinsop in the

“Hind” and a double party from the South

Australian Company established rival shore-

whaling stations at Encounter Bay. Jt was nat

until 1489, however, that Amandus Zictz. then

Assistant Director of the Public Museum in

Adelaide, published the first Hst of whales

from the South Australian coast. Zietz’s list

comprised 7 species and in subsequent years

this umber has risen gradually to 17 through

contributions fram Waite (1919 and 1922},

Wood Jones (1925), Hale (1931, 1945, 1959

and 19626}, Handley (1966) and Aitken

C1970).

A Tecent examination of whale remains in

the collections of the South Australian Museum

revenled that 18 species were represented by

specimens from the South Australian coast,

and that some previous South Australian

species records had been based on incorrect

identifications,

An annotated fist of whales from the South

Australian coast is appended below, compiled

from skeletal, cast and photographic material

stared in the South Australian Museum, ‘The

only specimens used have been those which

can he identified accurately la species and for

which positive Jocality data is recorded, The

Museum also bolds a large collechion of ceta-

ecan jetsam such as odd vertebrae, broken

* South Ausiralian Museum, North Terrace. Adelaide,

pieces of mandibles, etc., which are most diffi-

cult lo identify. with certainty, Such material

has been disregarded together with numerous

identifiable specimens for which no locality is

Known.

The nomenclatyte useil follows that of

Hershkoyitz (1966) with the exceptian of the

mime Kogia sirmus, a species that Hershkovitz

did not recognise.

MYSTACOCETI—WHALEBONE WHALES

BALAENIDAE—Right Whales

Evbalaeoa glacialis australis {Dcsmoulins,

1822)—the Southern Right Whale.

Southem right whales, or black whales as

they were called by carly whalers, provided the

mainstay fot shore-whaling operations in

South Australia from 1837 until the mid

1850's, When such ventures became unprofit-

able through the over-exploitution and subse-

quent rarity of the whales. In spite of this

fiourishing carly industry in South Australia,

nol one specimen of a southern right whale,

or part thercof, was preserved in the State

Museum and, since no authenticated sighting

of this whale was made in South Australia

during the first half of the present century, the

species was presumed to have vanished from

the waters around the State. However, on

October 9, 1968, photographs were taken of a

large whale and cal£ swimming close imshore

at the entrance to Port Lincoln Proper. From

these photographs, now Jodged with the South

Australian Museum, it was possible to identify

S. Aust. 3001)

Trans, R. Soc. S, Aust. VoL 95, Part 2, 11th August 1971.

56 P. FF. AITKEN

these whales as southern right whales by the

bonnet, strongly arched mouth and length of

the adult (approx, 15 m) and the lack af a

dorsal fin on ether the adult or the calf.

The whale and calf were not seen again and

1s Was assumed that they had either moved

westwards into the Great Australian Bight or

commenced w southerly migration towards

their summer feeding grounds amongst the

antarctic pack ice. Evidence for these assump-

lions is provided by an early record of the

coastal migrations of southern right whales

that appeared in a “Report on Whaling in

South Australia”, published in the “Southern

Australian” on January 4, 1842. John Bart.

Jacob Hagen und John Barker, the authors of

the report, slate thau: “The gencral course of

the Black Whale in these Seas, as winter

approaches, uppears to be from the south-east,

consequently the southern shore of Van WDie-

men’s Land is first visited by them, which may

be about the beginning of April. These move

towards Portland Bay; others continue through

ibe winter to arrive and pass forward. OF those

which enter Encounier Bay some have prob-

ably coasted along from Portland Bay, while

others, it Would appear, atrike the coast there

for the first time. In like manner the whole

southern cast of ihis continent is visited by

them, some having come along the land, whilst

others are more direct from the great Southern

Ocean. At Cape Lewin [sie,] the great body of

whales seem to strike olf Southward, for in

Qctober and November they ate again wark-

ing towards the south-east, by keeping two or

thre? hundred miles from the land, where they

are again pursued by vessels engaged in the

‘Ott-shore Fishery’. Tt is a curious fact that

some lime after (heir disappearance from the

southern bays of Van Diemen’s Land they

re-appear suddenly, and in large numbers, in

the eastern bays of that island, where they

remain only three ov four weeks ...”

Caperea marginata (Gray, 1846) «the Pygmy

Right Whale,

Seven pygmy right whales have been re-

corded from the South Australian coast (Hale,

1964) (Table £). All known strandings have

occurred between early spring and mid sum-

mer, in bays with shoaling waters where

extensive mud flats or sand spits are exposed

at low tide.

BALAENOPTERIDAE—Rorguals

Balaenoptera musculus (Linnaeus, 1758)—

the Blue Whake.

TABLE |

Matevial df Caperes marginata inthe South Australian

Mitseurn,

No, Date Sex Lareulity: Muterial

MIS9A RLS BRAY Nrownlow,,

Kungare t. Skeleton

Mass (1X ,1887) > Viclur Harbour, Skeleion

Lnacounter Bay

(snared in fishing

wel)

MOT 21.5 KG oF Poiny Marsden, Plaster cust

Kangaroo f, al head

W373) before WB HVE Part Lingotn Part

Proper Skeleton

M6ING =—-.26.X)), 1955. Port §.ingaln Sheleton

Proper

MOINI whour Lota! Colin Bay Skeleton

- LOST EG, Port Linculn Photographs

Vroper

Two blue whales are known to have heen

stranded on the South Australian coast. The

first, at Corvisart Ray, western Eyre Peninsula

on September 9, 1918, was an adult female

with a total length of 26/61 metres (Waite,

1919). The skeleton was preserved and stored

for many years at the South Australian

Museum, hut as a result of inadequate storage

facilities, vandalism and rat damage most of

the bones hacl either disappeared of heen

broken beyond repair by 1950. AIL that re-

mains loday are u few caudal vertebrae and

one mandible (M793), The second example,

represented by 2 ‘baleen plates (M3258), was

siranded at Kingston in Loacepede Bay during

June, 1932.

Balaenoptera physalus (Linnaeus, 1958)—the

Finback Whale.

In tate July or early August, 1925, a very

young male rorqual of total length 7-4!

metres was stranded on the extensive mud

flats at the head of St, Vincent Gulf. Apprexi-

mately & weeks later on September 16, 1925,

the skeleton was collected for preservation in

the South Australian Museum (M2179).

Waite (1926) descrihed this rarqual us a

young blue whale, but a subsequent exami-

nation of the specimen has convinced me that

it iy a juvenile finback whale.

The rostrum of fhe craniuny is triangular

when viewed from above, as opposed to the

ovate outline typical of BA. musculus (Adlen,

1916). The premaxillae extend backwards to

' 4 point mid-way along the sides of the nasals.

as Opposed to the condition in B, musculus

and &, Aerealiv—the Sei Whale, where the

preniaxillae terminate at or behind the pos-

WHALES FROM THE COAST OF SOLITH AUSTRALIA 97

terior dorsal margin of the nasals (Allen,

1916}, The total number of vertebrae is 61,

hut according to Waite one or two of the

lerminal elements may have heen lost. This

number canforms with that of B, physales

(63) (Allen, 1916). but not with &. borealis

(57) (Andrews, 1916) or B, edeni—Bryde’s

Whale (54-55) {Onmra. 1966). According 10

Waite the number of major baleen plates in

each sevies Was about 374, which is within

the limits for 8. physalae (350-400) (Hall

and Kelson, 1959), hut not tor &. borealis

(320-340) (Hall and Kelson, 1959) or B,

eden? (230-280) (Olsen, 1913). The colotur

of the baleen, as described by Waite, was;

“hom coloured, darkening fo the outer edges,

so that, viewed externally, the series appears

to be black in its upper hall, lading downs

wards, the lower third of each plate being

yellowish-while, which is also the hue of the

bristles developed on the whole inner surface

of the series”. Such w calouwr pattern is within

the range for 8B, physalus baleen (Alien,

1916). hut does nor compare with the all)

black haleen and black bristles of B. yrueserilus

(Gaskin, 1868) of the black baleen with

white hair fringes of 8 borealis (Gaskin,

1968).

Balaenoplera edieni Anderson, 1878—Rryde's

Whale.

In 1883, a medium sized rorqual was

stranded at Corny Point and its skeleton,

Jacking only the sternum and tongue bones.

was mounted for display in the South Aus-

tralian Museum (M5584). Zietz (1889) ten-

tatively identified this rorqual as a hurapback

whale (Megupiert mnevaedneliac), an erro-

neous conclusion perpetuated by Wood Jones

(1925). ‘The presence of well developed acro-

Mion and coracoid processes on the scapulae

show that the skeleton could not he that of

M. nevaeangeiiae (Truc, 1904), but musr be

thut of anuther halaenopterid rarqual, Com

pictc coalescence of all vertebral epiphyses

indicate that the skeleton ix that of an adult in

which the total length from the anterior tip

uf the upper jaw to the posterior tip of the

last cavdal vertebra jis 12-56 m and the

vertebrae number 34. This combination ex-

eludes A. acnieroxtreta—the Minke Whale in

which the total length in adults very seldom

exceeds 9° IS m (Gaskin, 1968) with SO verte-

brac (Allen, 1916), also BL maseudue in which

the Jola) length in adults exceeds 20) m with

64 vertebrac (Allen, L916) and B. physalies

in which the folal length in catiults exceeds

16 m with 63 yertebrae (Allen, 1916), The

skeleton could possibly be that of B, Aorzulis

in which the total length in adulis mages from

12-15 m (approx,) with 57 vertebrae (An-

drews, 1916), but is more likely to be that of

B. edeni in which the average total length in

adults is 13 m (Olsen, 1913) with 34-55

vertebrae (Omura, 1966).

Comparison of the skeleton with descrip

tions and figures ol the skeletal anatemy of

B, edeni (Omura, 1959 and 1966) and B-

borealis (Andrews, 1916) shows jt to be that

of 8. edemi because: the dorsal surface of the

rostrum is relatively straight and ffal with the

anterior tips of the premuxillac sunk between

the maxillue (2, borealis has a curved rostrum

with mesially clevuted premaaillac); the

anterior margin ot the nasals is bent forward

on the outer sides (in B. borealis the antertor

margin of the nasals is straight); the anterior

margin of the nasale falls well behind the

anterior borders of the maxillary concavities

tin 8, borealis these two festures are al the

same level); there are no grooves between the

squamosal and articular parts of the temporuls

(8: boreclis has deep grooves); the angulac

shafts of the mandibles extend behind the

articular condyles (in &, Sorgelis they termi-

minaté ia front of the conilyles); and the

spinous processes of the last @ dorsal ond the

first 4 lumbar vertebrae ure inclined so far to

the rear that their anterior tips are Behind the

posterior yertical planes of ther centra (in

f, borealis the spingus processes sre mot so

hackwardly inclined).

The Corny Point skeleton differs fron the

description of B, edéeniviven by Omiira (1959)

in that it has a pair of rudimentary fourteenth

ribs, 13 chevrons and w vertebral column of 7

cervical, 14 dorsal, 12 lumber and 2! caudal

verlebrac. Olnura considered B. edeni to pos-

sess 13 pairs of ribs, 12 chevruns and have a

vertebral formula of 7:)3-213:231-.

Megaptera novacangliae (Borowski, 1731 })—

the Humpback Whale,

Humpback whales migrate annually between

then summer feeding grounds in the Antarctic

aad their winter breeding areas in sub-tropical

waters. On these migrations many individuals

congregate along the castern and western

coasts of Ausivalia swirnming nerihward in

audmn and southward in spring, during

which seasons they have been commercially

exploited by whaling statians in Western Aus-

tralia and Queensland sinee the midile of the

Ninetventh cCenury, HW fs apparent, however,

98 PL F ATIKEN

thal their migratory routes seldom pass

through the Great Australian Bight (Dawhin,

1966) and, in consequence, stranded hump-

back whales are rare on the South Australian

coast,

Chitdeborough (1965) records two sight-

ings of humpback whales swimming off the

coast of South Australia, a single indi-

vidual in 1952. at the head of the Great Aus-

tralian Bight and a female with new-born calf

in St. Vincent Gulf during the winter af 1961,

Only one example is. known to have been

stranded, however. represented by a scapula

and humerus in the South Australian Museum

(M5120). All that is known of the history of

this specimen is that it was collected prior to

November 1943 (date of registration) on the

west coast of South Australia.

QDONTOCETI—TOOTHED WHALES

PHYSETERIDAE—Sperm Whales

Physeter catodon Linnaeus, 1753—the Sperm

Whale.

Although sperm whaits were hunted occa-

sionally by the early bay whalers of South

Australia, reports indicate that very few were

captured, Newland (1921) in an account of

whaling activilies at Encounter Bay stated

that: “to obtain [sperm whale] in the forties

properly equipped vessels were fequired as the

gnimal resorted to very deep waters when

scenting danger”, In fact, most sperm whaling

around Australia at that time was carried out

by pelagic whalers from other countries, par-

ticularly North America.

Trementious numbers of sperm whales were

slaughtered by the nineteenth century whalers

and the slaughter has continued with increas.

ing efficiency throughout the present century.

But in spite of this relentless attack sperm

Whales are still observed off the coast of South

Australia, as reported to me by cray fishermen

from the south-east of the State and aerial

tuna spotiers from Port Lincoln, and material

evidence of 3 stranded specimens is preserved

in the South Australian Museum (‘Vahle 2).

Single teeth of (his species have been collected

also from Kingston, Beachport and Sleaford

Bay,

Kogia breviceps (Biainville, 1838)--the Pygmy

Sperm Whale.

The first record of a pygmy sperm whale

from South Australia was made hy Zicte

(1889), who stated that:—"A lower jaw of

this very small Species was recently obtained

‘TABLE 2

Material of Physeter catodon in the South Ausivatian

Museurt,

No: Dale Ses Loaality Material

M5585 AE 1381 2 Point Bolingbroke, Skelewwn

Lanmh Bay

M7194 D6.VLI985 =) Vietor Harbour, Skull

Encounter Ray

_ V.1956 » Coffin Bay Phoiographs.

by Mr, Adcock at Middieton. Encounter Bay,

and by him presented to the South Australian

Museum, The dental formula is 3 %s". Fhe

lower jaw referred (o by Zigtz has. not been

located wilh certainty, since the only Kogia

jaw of unknown origin in the collections af

the South Australian Muscum has 14 teeth is

each ramus, However, 9 other pygmy sperm

whales are known toa have been stranded on

the Seuth Australian cowst (Hale, 1962 and

1963} (Table 3), Hale reported that most of

these strandings occurred during calor weather

and all have ovcurred from late autumn to

carly spring.

TABLE 35

Material of Kugia breviceps i the South Australian

Museuri.

Na. Pate Sex Looaliy Material

NAS009 25.1V.1937 Part Victaria, Cast and

Spencer Guilt skeleron

M5010 BAVANIT Sia Port Vietoria, Cast and

Spencer Gull’ skelecgn

MAL = 25AV_1937 (f (foerus § Port Victoria, = Spirit

OF M5009) Spencer Gulf

M3197 VIIL(94a Sleaford Bay Port

skeleton

Mé6ls6 TVUL IST Sleatord Bay Teeth

M6156 TNUIL ASST Vijue,y Sleaford Bay Skull

M6156 DBVLIIS9 8 En¢ounter Bay Skeleton

MG@2S7 = OAVEN9S9) OC) =~ Encounter Bav = ‘Skeleton

M6266 2491959 | f Glenelg. Skeleton

St. Vineent Gale

MaéaiO = FRAN A9ET Oud Granve, Skelewr

St, Vineent Gulf

Kogia simus (Owen, 1866)—the Dwarf Sperm

Whale.

On July 12, 1958, two small whales were

stranded at Largs Bay, on the eastern shore

of St. Vincent Gulf, Qne of these whales, 4

male, was secured for the South Australian

Museum and prepared as a skeleton (M6186),

‘The skull of the other whale was smashed

and ils body was hacked to pieces by sovvenir

hunters as soon as it reached the beach, but

before this, two excellent coloured photographs

WHALES FROM THE COAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 99

of (he whale were taken whilst it was thrash-

ing about in shalluw water, and these photo-

graphs also were lodged with the Museum,

Hale (1959) descrebed both specimens as K.

breviceps, but a recent examination of the

skeleton from the fitst whale and the photo-

graphs of the second whale indicated, on the

evidence supphled hy Handley (1966), that

both ure examples of A. simus, The first

whale (M6186) muy be recognised as K.

simuts from the skull, which hus a single pair

of maxillary teeth (K, brevicepy has none); a

ventrally plane, short mandibular symphysis,

approximately one tenth of the ramus length

(in K. frevicepy this symphysis is ventrally

keeled und approxiniately one quarter of the

ramus length); posteriorly cupped, sub-

symmotricy! dorsal crasial fossae (in K. brevi-

eepy (these fossue fre not cupped posteriorly

and the left fossa is conspicuously longer and

narrower than the right fossa); and a dorsal

sagittal septum pinched near the vertex (in A.

breviceps this septum 1s broadly expanded near

the vertex), The second whale may be recog-

nised as K. sinus from the photographs, both

of which depict a high dorsal fin placed near

the centre of the back (K, breviceps has a low

dorsal fin placed some distance hehind the

centre of the back).

ZIPHUDAE—Beagked Whales

Berardius arnouxi Duvernoy, 1&851—the Large

Beaked Whale.

On December 27, 1935, & pregnant female

large beaked whale was. stranded on a wide,

tidal flat south of Pert Lorne near the head

of St. Vincent Gulf. ‘The skeleton of this

whale, minus caudal vertebrae 4-19, was

collected for preservation in the South Aus-

tralian Museum (M5012). Hale [(1982h)

provided a full description.

Ziphus eavirostris Cuvier, 1823—Cuvier’s

Beaked Whale,

One cuvier’s beaked whale is known to have

been stranded on the South Australian const

at Maslins Beach, south of Noarlunga, on the

eastern side of St. Vincent Gulf. The whale.

Young male, came ashore on a particularly

high tide during, the night of April 22, 1966

On the following day the carease was buried

hy local council employees in a nearby sind

quarry, from where it wag disinterred by me

on April 27, 1966, Flesh measurements were

taken and the complete skeleton was flensed

for preservation in the South Australian

Museum (M8400). Positive identification of

the specimen Was made by comparing the

nasal and pre-maxillary bones wt the synvertex

of the skull with those figured for Z. caviras-

tris by Moore (1968).

Flesh dimensions ure presented inv Table 4

and skull measurements in Table 5, Other

details of the. external ind skeletal anatomy

appear below.

TABLE 4

Flesh dimensions of Ziphius cavirostris fram Maslurs

Beaeh,

Tip of atinut to posterior margin of tail (curvilineat) 4000 mm

Tip of snoul to anterior margin of dorsal fin 3790

Rasal length of dorsal fin w45

Tip of stout to eye 710

Tip of snoul to axils 1500

Tip of snout to blawhole nae

Tip of snout 16 angie of mduth 304

Angle of mouth jo eye 430

Hreadth across tail fiukes 1360

Tip of mandible to anus (curvilinear) 386n

Tip of mandible to tip of snout 20

Length of pectoral fin from axilla 430

Grearest breadth of pectoral lm 150

Gredtest girth a2)

External characters; purple-black on the dorsal

half of the bady and around the head, tai! and

pectoral fins, grading through dark grey-

brown aon the lower sides lu pale grey-

brown on the belly. A smoothly curved fore-

head with na pronounced bulge, 2 conspicuous

throat grooves on the posterior third of the

lower jaw extending backwards to the Jevel af

a point midway between the angle of the

mouth and the eye; and no central natch he-

tween thei tail Hukes..

Teeth: two conical, open rooted teeth pra-

truding above the guims, ane from the anterior

lip of each mandible and approximately 30

vestigial tecth buricd in the gum of each

mundible.

TABLE 5

Skull Measurements of Ziphius cavirostris fren

Maslies Beach.

Condyto basal fengih OM om

Rreactth across port-orbital processes S05

Height from synvertex to infériur border of prerygoids 480

Cireutest length of nasals 145

Greatest breadth of nasuts «2

Length of rastrwm 51D

Breadth of rostrum at buse 215

Leugeht of imundible (cul, tip broken) 790

Length of mandibular wymptyyis (eal.) 155

Fieight of right toorh $25

Greatest diameter of right Looth (a7

Height of left tooth 53:2

Grearest diameter ot Juhi tooth wes

Height of typical vestigial tooth 4-7

Greatest diameter of typical vestigial tooth 1-=

100

Age; Ossification of the erunial sutures, but

lack of anchylosis of all vertebral epiphyses

other than the fused Ist-4th und 6th-7th

cervical vertcbrac, suggests a young adull.

Vertebrae, riby and cheyrons: the vertebral

column consists of 7 cervical, 10 dorsal, 10

lumbur and 19 caudal vertehrae, Ten ribs are

present on cach side, but the tenth sib on the

left is a demi-rib; half the size of its counter-

parton the right, Ten chevrons are present, wll

joined, the third being the deepest,

Pelvic bones: subcqual, the teft element being

of equal depth but & mm shorter than the

right element. which has a toty] length of 89

mm and a greatest depth of 12 mm.

Hyperoodon = planifrans Flower,

Southern Bottlenosed Whale.

On Noyember 22, 1929. an adult male

soutbern boitlenosed whale was stranded near

Port Rickaby on the eastern shore of Spencer

Gulf. A full descnption of this whale was

provided by Hale (L931) and its complete

skeleton is preserved in the South Australian

Museum (M2852).

Mesoplodon grayi von Haasi, 1876—Gray’s

Beaked Whale.

The first record of a gray’s beaked whale

in South Australian waters was that of Waile

(1922), based on the right mandible from a

specimen stranded at Kingscote, Kangarou

Island in 1910, Since that date, 2 further

exumples are known fo have been stranced

on the South Australian coast (Table 6).

| §82—the

TABLE 6

Muterial af Mesoplodon grayt i the South Austretian

Museum.

No. Date Bea Locality Material

™M Hay TV 1910 2 Kangscote, Right mandible

Kunguron I,

MWS inioat 7 Younghusband Part skeleton

Peninsula and. skin of jaw

M7476 14,0.1964 T Aldinga, Skull

Sl. Vincent Cait

Mesoplodon Jayardi (Gray, 1865)—the Suap-

ioothed Whale.

Thirteen strap-toothed whales are known to

have been stranded on the South Australian

coast, The first of these was recorded by Waite

(1922) with a specimen collected in 1919

from Kangaroo Island and three of the remain-

ing examples huve been described by Hale

(1931). Details of the acquisition of 12 of

these whules are summarised in WVable 7. The

PF, AITKEN

thirteenth example, for which no specimen is

available in the South Australian Museum,

was recorded by Hale (1931) after he had

exumined privately owned photographs and

tecth from a male strap-toothed whale stranded

on Collin Bay Peninsula in February 1933,

All strandings have occurred in mid-summer,

TABLE 7

Material of Mesoplodon layardi inthe South Australian

ATuyeurn

No. Dale Sew Louality: Material

M 794 Wfay9 Y Kangaroo Is, Skeleton

M2853 SUN(029 7) Hort Rickaby, = Skil

Srencer Gulf

M2969 3Ffh 13 &§ Victor Harbour, Skull

Fncounter Bay

M4564. (44,1934 ? Streaky Bay Skull

M5006 feb aa ' Vietur Harbour, Skelétos

Encounter Bay

M5007 12.1,)939 Victor Harbour, Skull

Encoumer Bay

M5008 (21,1939 = Vietor Harbour, Skull

Encounter Bay

Meo209 13.1b 1946 Rocky Point, Skeleton

Kangarop J.

Mado then g Cape Elizabeth, Part skeleton

Spencuw' Gulf

AIM eR Mictor Harbour, Photographs

Encounter Bay

= 2H T9398 Y Wharffs Point, Photographs

Streaky Bay

Wharils Peint,

Streaky Bay

- Albay ? Photographs

GLOBICEPIIALIDAE—Great Do'phins

Psevdorca crassidens (Qwen, 1846)— the False

Killer Whale

On October 5, 1944, there was a mass

stranding of false killer whales on Lhe eastern

side of St. Vincent Gulf, The main body of

about 200 whales came ashore at Port Prime,

buba smaller concentration of about 50 whales

landed approximately 24 kilometres further

north and isolated individuals were found over

a 30 kilometre front between Port Purham and

Pol Gawler, Hale (1945) initially identified

these whales. as pilot whales (Globicephala

meluena) but correcied his error in a later

paper (1959), No examples were secured for

the South Australian Museum at the time: of

the stranding in 1944, but skeletal material

can still be found scuttered amongst the duncs

along the beach near Port Prime and a well

preserved cranium with 2 teeth in sith was

collected recently to provide specimen evidence

of ihe event (M&384)

WHALES FROM THE COAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 1h

Globicephala melaena melaena (‘Traill, 1809)

—the Pilot Whale,

Five pilot whales are represented in the

collections of the South Australian Muscum

(Table 8). No other examples are known to

have been stranded in South Australia-

TABLE 8

Material of Globicepbala melaena melaena én she

South Australian Museum

No. Date sex Loeality Maitelial

M1592 before 1922 2 St Vincent Galt Skeleton

M5645 SIK1903 = Glenelg, Skeleton

St. Vincent Calf

M3046 SUX, 19y3 Cheney, Skeleton

St, Vincent Gull

M5647 Six, 1903 f Glenelg, Skeleton

St. Vincent Gulf

NIS648 5.0K 1400 3) Glenelg, Skeleton

SL Vincent Gulf

DELPHINIDAE—Lesser Dolphins

Tursiops truncatus (Montagu, 1821)—the

Bottlenosed Dolphin.

‘The first record of bottlenosed dolphins in

South Australian waters was mude by Wood

Jones (1925) who considered the species to

be: “evidently not uncommon around our

(South Australian] coast’, Wood Jones cited

examples of skulls he had examined from Port

Lincoln, Port Noarlunga and Cowell. Never-

theless, the first actual record of the species

for South Australia was almost certainly that

of Ziectz (1889) under the name of Steno

rostrams, because in his description of S.

rosfratus Zietz stated: “This species, as in the

case of the Common Dolphin [Delphinus

defphis|. is incorrectly called a porpoise. It ts

casily distinguished from the porpoise by hay-

ing a much larger and thicker head, und the

snout more tapering, and not so abruptly

narrowed: the tail and breast fins are also

much broader, and the body narrowed behind.

It is not so neatly shaped as. Delphinus delphis,

and the teeth are much stronger and less

numerous ... tis presence in the Australian

Seas has hitherto not been noted, though it is

not uncommon on our [South Australian]

coast.”

Now, since 8. rosfratis [presently classed as

a synonym of Steno bradanensis Lesson, 1828)

is neatly shaped and does resemble D. delphis

(Gaskin, 1968) and since Zietz compiled his

account from material in the South Australian

Museum where no specimens of Steno are

held in fhe collection, it is reasonable ta

assume that “Zietz was mistaken in his idente

fication. However, Zietz’s description is well

suited to another dolphin, which is abundant

around the South Australian coast and which

is well represented by specimens in the South

Australian Museum, namely Tursiaps tran.

Cats,

Bottlenosed dolphins are abundant through-

out the year off South Australia and may fre-

quently be observed swimming close inshore,

Few hecome stranded, however, and when

feluted to their obvious abundance there is a

relatively small number of examples preserved

in the South Australian Museum (Table 9),

TABLE 9

Material of Vursiops truncatus in the Seth Avstrivdian

Museum,

Ne. Date Sex Locality Mattrivl

M1384 befinre 1922 * South Australia Skull

M1597 hefare 1922 ? South Australia Cast

M2130 TY 1925 9 Franklin Harbour Stull

M2666 V.1929 % Sellicks Beach, Skull

Encounter Bay

M45t9 1935 ? Henley Beuch, Part hull

St. Vincent Gulf

M5073 3.194) ao Port Lincoln Skelejun

Proper

ms009 hefore £944 a Glenete, Part skull

St Vincent Gulr

M5795 hefare 1950 2 Pape dervis, Part skull

Investigator

Steaight

M5902 = 39.N1.1950 2 Woods Well, Shull

Lacepede Ray.

Ménir TV.1955 ? Mucray Mouth, Skull

7 Encounter Bay

M7479 24,0, 1968 7 West hy Mandible

Encounter Bay

M3 AR3 Vit tye J Port Stanvac, Skall

Encounter Bay

Deiphinus delphis Linnaeus, 1758—the

Common Dolphin.

Common dolphins, first recorded for South

Australia by Zietz (1889), are abundant in all

seasons throughout the waters around the

State. They are sometimes observed close

inshore, but appexr tu be most numerous

some distance from land, where they are 4

familiar sight to fishermen and other seafavers

due to their habit of ship pacing. These dol-

phins seldom hecome stranded and are not

well represented in the collections of the South

Australian Museum (Table 10).

DOUBTFUL RECORDS

GLOBICEPHALIDAE—Great Dolphins

Orcinus orca {Linnaeus, 1758+—the Killer

Whale.

12 P, Py ATTKEN

TABLE 10

Material of Delphinus delphis in fhe South Australian

Museunt,

No, Date Sex Lacality Materiul

MI389) = before 1922 7 South Australia Part skull

M2207 GALL.1927 ? Yorke Peninsula = Skull

MjGsT Na9ar oY Younghusband Par skull

Peninsula

M43is PRI OF Brighton, Skelceinan

Su Vineent Gulf and cast

M4847 before 1940. P(juv.) Victor Harbour, = Skuil

Poscounter Bay

M4975 1LN 1892 Port Adelaide, Skeleton

Si. Vincent Gulf

M7aR0 bufere 1969) Ytjpv,) Port Lincoln Proper Skull

Wood Jones (1925) recorded killer whales

For South Australia on the basis of an Orcinus

skull in the South Australian Museum

(M5649), Wood Jones stated that this skull:

“prababiy came from ihe shores of this [South

Austcalia] State”. But, in fact, there is no evi-

dence to support such a View. Lhe skull ix

labelled’ “Old Collection—no data’ and could

have come from anywhere jn Australia ot

have been purchased from overseas, It is

probable, however, that killer whales do o¢cur

olf the coast of South Australia since the South

Australian’ Museum also possesses a mandible

of this species. (M5345), from Portland in

Victoria, only 80 kilometres east of the Sourh

Australian border,

Granipus griseus (Cuvier, 18) 2)—Risso's

Dolphin (tormerly—the Grampus),

Zietz (1889) reported that: “A skeleton of

a grampus eleven feet long, was found on the

beach between Glenelg und Brighton, the skull

of which is in the (South Australian] Museum".

A careful search of all cetacean material in

the South Australian Museum has failed to

reveal cither this specimen or any skulls of

G. #riseus, Either the skull has been lest tir

Zivtz was mistaken in his identification.

References

Aten, PT (1970).— Mammals, far “South

Australian Year Book, 1970", pp. 42-49.

(Commonwealth Bureau of Census and

Scatestics! Adeluide)

Arlen. G. M. (1916).—The Whalebone Whales

of New England, Mem, Boston Suc. nai, Hist.

8 (2), 106-322,

Anprews, R. C, (1916)—The Sci Whale. Mert.

Am. Muy. nat. Hist. (rs) 1 16), 289-388.

CHiITTLEBOROUGH, R. G. (1965),—Dynamics of

two populations of the Hurnpback Whale.

Aust. J, Mar. Freshw. Res. 16 (1), 33-128,

Rawnrtn, W: H. (1966).—The Seasonal Migratory

Cycle of Humpback Whales. Jn K, S. Norfis,

“Whales, Dolphins and Porpoises”, pp, 145-

169, (University of California Press; Los

Angeles, )

Gaskin, D. &. (1968)—The New Zealand Ccta-

cea. fish. Res. Bull. No, 1 (ins.). (New

Zealand Marine Department: Wellington.)

Haia, HOM, (1931)—Reaked Whales—Ayperrr

edan planifrons and Mesoploden layardi—

fram South Australia, Ree 8. Aust. Mas. 4

(3), 291-311.

Hate, H. M. (1945).-A Stranded School af

Whales, 5, Ayist, Nut, 23 (1), 15-17.

Hare, H. M, (1959) —The Pygmy Sperm Whale

af Sowh Australian Coasts, Part Ul. Rec. S-

Aast. Mus. 13 (3), 333-338

Hace, H, M. (1962a),—The Pyemy Sperm Whale

(Kogiu uPeviceys) on South Australian

Cousts, Part WT. Ree, S) Anse Mus, 14 (2),

197-230,

Hace, H. M. (1962b). Uccurrence of the Whale

Hevardins arnouxé in Southern Australia, Rec

S. Avest, Mus, A (2), 231-244.

Hate. H, M, (1963)—Yoong Female Piemy

Sperm Whales (Xapin brevicens) fram

Western and South Australia, Ree, §, Anse,

Afus. 14 (3), 561-577,

Hace. H. M. (1964).—The Pigmy Right Whale

(Capera omarginata) in Sowh Australian

Waters, Part IL, Ree. 8S. Agsi. Mus, 14 (4),

679-694

Halt, BE. R., and Kenson, K. R. (1959).—“The

Mammals. Of North America”. Vol. 2, pp.

834-838, (Ronakl Press; New York.)

Hanorey, ©. O. (1966).—A synopsis of the

Genus Koala (Pygmy Sperm Whales), In

K. S. Norris, “Whales, Dolphins and Por-

poises”, pp, 62-69, (University of Cahforma

Press: Los Angeles.)

HersHaovitz, P, (1966)—Catalog of Living

Whales, Ball, UL8, natn, Muy, no. 246, 1-259.

NEWLaND, S. (1920-21).—Whaling at Encounter

Bay, Proe, 8, Aust. Breh R. geag, Soc, Aust.

22. 15-40,

Moose, J. C. (1968).—Relationships among the

Living Genera of Beaked Whales. Fieldiana,

Zool, $3 (4), 209-298,

Onsen, ©, (1913)—On the External Characters

and Biology of Bryde's Whale (Bulaeropiera

beydet) a New Rorqual from the Coast of

South Africa, Prac. goal. Soc, Lond. (1913),

1073-1090, pls. CIX-CXH1.

Ossurs, H. (1959).—Rryde's Whales From the

Coast of Japan, Scient, Rep. Whaley Res.

Inst, Tokyo, V4, 1-33.

Omura, H. (1966),—Bryde’s Whale in the North

West Pacific, In K. S, Nortis, “Whales,

Polphins and Porpoises”, pp. 70-78. {Uni-

versity of California Press: Los Angeles.)

Tune, F. W-. (1904),—The Whalebone Whales

at the Western North Atlantic. Sniithson-

Contr. Knowl, 33, 1332, pls. & 50.

WHALES FROM THE COAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA 103

Woop JonrEs, F. (1925).—“The Mammals of

Waite, E. R. (1919).—Two Australian Blue

Whales. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 1 (2), 157-168, South Australia”. Part HI, pp. 273-285.

pls. XXI-XXVI. (Government Printer: Adelaide.)

Waite, E. R. (1922).—Two Ziphioid Whales, not ZreETz, A. (1889)—A List of the Whales and

previously recorded from South Australia. Dolphins of the South Australian Coast in

Rec. 8, Aust. Mus. 2 (2), 209-214, pls. U-IIL. the Public Museum, Adelaide. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust. 13, 8-9.

Waite, E. R. (1926).—A Young Blue Whale.

Rec, S. Aust. Mus. 3 (2), 135-144.

PACHYTREMA CALCULUS LOOSS, 1907 (TREMATODA:

OPISTHORCHIIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA

BY L. MADELINE ANGEL

Summary

Pachytrema calculus Looss, 1907 is recorded from South Australia from Larus novaehollandiae

Stephens and Chlidonias hybrida Pallas, and from New South Wales from Larus novaehollandiae.

This is the first record of a species of Pachytrema from the Southern Hemisphere. The Australian

specimens differ from those described from Europe and Asia in the size of the eggs, the largest eggs

from L. novaehollandiae measuring 103 by 41 um, and from C. hybrida 93 by 43 um. However, it

is not considered desirable to assign the Australian forms to another species solely on the size of the

eggs.

PACHYTREMA CALCULUS LOOSS, 1907 (TREMATODA:

OPISTHORCHIIDAE) FROM AUSTRALIA

by L. MADELINE ANGEL®

Summary

Pachytrema calculus Looss, 1907 is recorded from South Australia from Larus novaechellandiuc

Stephens und Chlidontas Aybrida Pallas, and from New South Wales from Laras navaehollandiac.

This is the first record of a species of Pachytrema trom the Southern Hemisphere. The Australian

spscimens difter from those described from Europe and Asia in the size of the eggs, the largest eggs

from L. novachollandiae measuring 103 by 41 jam, and from C. Jiybrida 93 by 43 um, However, it is

not consitlered desirable to assign the Australian forms ta another species solely on the size of the

eggs.

Introduction

Pachytrema calculus Looss, 1907 was

described from the pall bladder of Larus rids.

bundus and L. argentdtus in Trieste. Since

then it has been recorded by nine authors}

from Europe and Asia. Including Looss’ re-

cords. ir has been described from five species

of Larus, several charadrijform birds and a

teal (Querquedula falcata (Georgi)), Bight

other species of Pachytrenta have been de-

scribed, but it seems likely that there is some

synonymy among these, Purvis (1937) thouglit

that many of the apparent differences between

the species may be due to differences of pres-

sure when the wornt is mounted; and that to

determine the validity of the species, it would

he necessary to study all the specimens hy

sectioning. Brinkmann (1942) agreed with

Purvis that one Worker should investigate all

species, though he thought that this would be

dificult, as Pachytrema spp. were “excced-

ingly rare’. MacInnis (1966) discussed the

genus and thought it highly probable that four

of the cight species (he did aor mention P.

skrjabini Kadenatsii, 1960) were synonymous.

Pachytrema calculus Louss, 1907.

Host, Larus noyaehollandiae Stephens, 1826

(Silver gull). Location in host—Gall bladder,

Locatities, West Island. Encounter Bay,

South Australia, 14.vi.1968, (Coll. Mrs.

P. M. Thomas). (2. slides).

Sydney district, New South Wales.

14.xi1.1957. (Coll. A. J. Bearup), Schoo!

of Public Heulth and Tropical Medicine

Museum No. 1469. (2 slides),

Bateman's Bay, New South Wales,

28.11.1963. (Coll. W. H. Ewers). (4 speci-

mens in spirit),

Host. Chlidonias hybrida Pallas, 1826

(Marsh tern). Location in host—Gall blad-

der,

Locality, Tailem Bend, South Australia.

Oct. 1948 (Coll, T. H. Johnston),

Measurements of stx mounted and one spirit

specimen are given in Table 1. The other

spirit specimens measured 9-5 hy 6-5 mm,

674 by 5-0 mm and 6-0 by 5-0 mm.

Pachyirema has been found only twice

among many hundreds of birds examined for

helminths in this department, including 143

in the Charadriiformes, 79 in the Lariformes

(including 40 Larus novaehollandiae) and 15

QOuerquedula spp. (the only genus im _ the

Anseriformes in which P. caleulus has been

recorded). By the courtesy of Dr. B. McMil«

lan, of the School of Public Health and

Tropical Medicine, Sydney, I have also been

able to study two collections from L, nevae-

hollandiae from New South Wales. All speci-

menos from the two Australian hosts are

assigned to Pachytrema calculus Looss.

ft. the specimens from Larus novaehollan-

diae the measurements of the body and of the

organs fall within the range of measurements

given by Looss, Yamaguti. Timon-David and

* Zoology Department, University of Adelaide, Sonth Aust. 5000.

T Kotlan (1922), Isaichikov (1927), Odhnmer (1928), Yamaguti (1939), Belopol’skaia (1954),

Bykbovskaia (1954), Timon-David (1955), Mamaev (19591 and Macko (1964). 1 have been able

to stud

the works of Odhner, Yamaguti, Timon-David ani Macko. References to the other suthory

are to be found in the Index Catalogue of Medical and Veterinary Zoology, Trematoda and trematode

diseases, Pam 6,

Trans. R. Soc, S. Aust. Vol. 95, Part 2, 11th August 1971.

106

Macko for P, calculus. The reproductive sys-

lem is not clear in some of the specimens (due

to the abundance of eggs) and it has not been

possible in any to determine whether a recep-

tacuilum seminis: and Laurer’s canal are. or

ure not, present. MacInnis (1966). describing

two specimess of Pachytrema (trom the Royal

Tern, Thulasseus mmaxiniuis praximus) which

he attributed to P. samguineum (Linton, 1928),

did not observe Laurer’s canal and seminal

receptacle (even in irontal sections of one

specimen) and stated that their absence differ-

entiates P. sanguineum trom P, calenulus, in

which they are present. However. Looss

(1907) said that there was no receptaculum

seminis in P. calculus, and Brinkmann (1942)

agreed with this. Laurer’s canal is not always

easy to identify, and I would sugyest that

Odhner (1928, p. 6 (footnote)) and Skrjabin

and Petrov (1950, p. 285) were tight in mak-

ing Minutharchis sanguineus Linton, 1928 a

synonym of P. calculus. Tf this is so, Larus

atricilla makes a sixth species of Larus in

which P, calctulis is found.

L. MADELINE ANGEL

The specimens in the present study appear

to differ from P. calculus only in the size of

the eggs. Looss (1907) gave the average size

as 110 % 44 um. Measurements given hy

other authors ure:—Yamaguti (1939), 99-112

um by 42-51 um (in life): Timon-David

(1955), 114-116 em by 52 wm: Macko (1964),

115-120 wm by 46-50 um. In the species from

Larus aavachollandiav, the largest eggs in

mounted specimens are 103 by 41 um. Linton

(1928) gave the measurements in the living

worm as about 110 by 40 um, and in balsam

two uncollapsed eggs measured 8&8 by 47 wm

and 90 by 43 um, It seems that the cggs in

the Australian specimens from Larus novae-

hollandiae are definitely smaller than in

European and Asian forms, but it appears

undesirable to separate the species from

Pachytrema calculus on this character only.

The specimens from Ciilidenias hybrida are

smaller than those from £. navaehollandiae

(Table |), but the measurements of the organs

are very similur in the trematodes from the

two hosts, C. hybrida is a smaller bird than

YABLE 1

Meastremeits vf Pachytrema calculus Leoss, 1907.

LOOoss New material

(1907)

Larus noyaehallandiae Chiidonias

hybrida

S. Australia. New South Wales S. Australia

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Body l. 5-3 mm 70 6:75 7-2 80 9-0 3°75 3-9

wW, 4-0 3-0 5-75 4-7 4-7 6-0 3-0 3-4

Oral sucker I. 280—290) 258 282 153 329 247 247 359

w, (? 1 or w) 365 353 388 365 423 294 350

Acetabulum 1, 300. 353 341 340 435 456 353 465

Ww. (2 1 .or w) 423 447 447 470 514 435 400

Pharynx }. 170 174 165 192 198 176 Id! 174

We 160 t67 176 174 180 17& 176 191

Ovary I. — 153 = —_ 247 — = --

Ww. — 223 — 259 165 — = 118

Testis (R) 1, — 270 — — 270 — — 118

Ww, — 176 - = 188 = 200)

Testis (L) I. = 247 282 270 235 — — —

Ww; — 141 223 223 188 — — —

Fees 1. 11 ton 103 97 88 105 93 Ro

We 44 4h 4 42 44 42 43 39

Specimens |—4, 6, 7 are balsam) mounts; 5 a spirit specimen (measurements of internal structures when

examined in glycerine).

Body measurements in mim., all other measurements in ym,

PACHYTREMA CALCULUS LOOSS,

L. nevachollandiae, and the size of its gall

bladder could well limit the size of the trema-

todes. In the two specimens from C, /iybrida

the reproductive system is obscured by the

eges in the uterus: however, in one specimen

u testis is clearly visible. and the ovary is

visible, though not clearly outlined. There is

nothing in these, or in the other organs. to

suggest that the species is other than P. cal-

eulus. In fact, the only difference (other than

size of body) between the trematodes from

L. nevaehollandiae and C, Iyhrida is in the

size of the ewgs. which are slightly smaller in

the specimens from C. /ivhrida, the largest egg

being 93 ky 43 um.

No life history has yet been described for

a species of Pachytrema. Pood found in the

gut of Larus nevaehollandive examined in this

department includes insect, crustacean, gastro-

1907 FROM AUSTRALIA 107

pod, and fish remains. Food of Chlidonias

hyhrida includes water insects, shrimps, yab-

bies (Cherax destructor), tiny fish and frogs.

The marsh tern frequents lakes and swamps,

chiefly of inland regions. The silver gull is

commonly found in these areas, as well us on

coastal shores. The occurrence of P. calenlus

in the marsh tern thus suggests that the inter-

mediate hosts will be freshwater organisms, at

least in Australia, The second intermediate host

might be a fish or a crustacean,

Acknowledgements

I wish to thank Dr. B, McMillan, of the

School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine

(Commonwea!th Department of Health and

the University of Sydney) for lending me

material collected for his School and allowing

me to study it,

References

BRINKMANN, A. Jr. (1942).—A new trematode,

Pachytrema panicenm n. sp., from the gall

bladder of the lesser black-backed gull (Lariy

fuscus L.) Gétehorgs K. Vetensk.—o Vitterh.

Santh. Handl. 6F., 8.B., 2 (2), 1-19,

Linton, E. (1928).—WNotes on trematode parasites

of birds. Prac, US. Nata. Mus. (no, 2722),

73, 1-36, pls. I-11.

Looss, A. (1907).—Ueber einige zum Teil neue

Distomen der europiischen Fauna, CentralAl.

Bakt. ParasitKde, \ Abt., Orig., 43 (6), 604-

613.

Macinnis, A. J. (1966).—Trematodes from

marine shorebirds from the Nerthwest Gulf

coast of Florida. Zool, Anz. 176. 52-68.

Macro, J, K. (1964).—On the trematede fauna

of Laridae from the Migration Roads of

Slovakia (CSSR). (In German), /eliin-

thalogia 3, 85-106.

Opuner, T. (1928)—Weirtere Trematoden mit

Anus. 4rk. Zool. 20 B (2), I-6.

Purvis, G. B, (1937),—The synonyms of the tre-

matode genus Pachytremu Looss, 1907. Ann.

trop. Med. Parasit. 31 (4), 457-460.

SkrogABiN, K. J. and Petrov, A. M. (1950).—

Superfamily Opisthorchoidea Faust, 1929. (In

Russian). (In Skrjabin, K. 1. Trematodes otf

animals and man, Moskya, Leningrad 4, &1-

328).

Timon-Davip. J, (1955). Trématodes des goélands

de Vile de Riou. Annis. Parasit. lium. comp.

3 (5-6). 446-476.

Yamacuti, 8. (1939)—Studies on the helminth

fauna of Japan. Part 25. Trematodes of birds

WW. Jan. J. Zoal, B&B (2), 129-210, pls. XI

XXVIII,

THYSANOTOUS FRACTIFLEXUS SP. NOV. (LILIACEAE), ENDEMIC TO

KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY N. H. BRITTAN

Summary

Thysanotus fractiflexus sp. Nov. (Liliaceae), a distinctively zigzag branched perennial herb,

endemic to Kangaroo Island, South Australia, is described and illustrated.

THYSANOTUS FRACTIFLEXUS SP, NOV, (LILIACEAE), ENDEMIC TO

KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by N. H, Brrrran*

Communicated by Hj Fichler

Summary

Thysanoriy fructiflexus sp. nov. (Liliaceae). a distinetively Zigzag branched perenniil herb, ene

demic ta Kangaroo Island, South Australia. is described and illustrated,

Specimens of this distinctive species of Thy-

sano: R.Br. the present knows distribution

of which shows that it is endemic to Kangaroo

Island, have previously in the State Herbarium

of South Australia (AD) been referred to T.

dichoiomus (Labill.) R.Br. a Western Aus-

tralian endemic, although Cleland in ms. (AD,

96021054) hus questioned whether it should

not be distinguished as a distinet taxon. Its

distinctive zigzag branching habit and hirsute

ridged stem (which have been found to be

retiiined in cultivation in Perth), taken in con-

junction with floral characteristics, justify. the

erection of a new species. It ts most closely

related to a new New South Wales species 7.

virgarus Brittan (1971), from which it differs

in that the outer perianth parts are 2-2°5 mm

wide und 5-nerved, whereas in 7. virgatus they

are 3-4 mm wide and usually 7 (occasionally

6) fterved. The internodes are also longer in

7. vireamns, and it lacks {he zigzag appearance

of 7_ /ractiflexus.

Thysanotus tractifiexus sp. nov,

Herbu perennis, chizoma horizontale, radices

rigidac, haud tuberosae, Folia radicalia, pauca,

cto marceseentia. Caules oumerosi, rigida. ad

30, em longi, poreati, porcis. dense brevissime

hirsutis, fractiflext. internodiis 8-10 mm longis.

Umbellae ierminales 2-3) florae. Bructeae

extimue. 1-2, herbaceae, 2 mm longae, pler-

umque hirsutae Supra nervos. Bractedte intimae,

membranaceye, circa 2-5 mm longae, L-3 ner-

vatue, Pedicelh 7 mm longi, basin” versus

armeulad. Tepula exteriora, angusti-lanceolata,

anguste membranaceo-marginata, lO-11 mm

longa, 2-2-5 mm fata, extus S-neryata: tepala

interiora clliptica, cirea 5 mm tata. fimbriis

3-3-5 min longis timbriata., Stamina 6; antherae

tortae, 3 exteriores ereetae 4 mm longae, 3

interiores curyatuae & mm longue; poris termi-

nalibus dehiscentes. Filamenta 2-2-5 mm longi.

Ovarium sessile, plusiminusve glabosum, tn-

foculare. utroque Joculo oyulis 2. Stylus

terminalis, curvatus. stamina longiora aequans.

Capsula cylindrica, ab perianthio persistent

inclusa,

Hloloiypus: Near the junction of Sact.

500, Hundred of Dunean, and Seer. 97,

Hundred of Newland, Kangaroo Island,

N, A. Brittan 60/15-1, 201.1960 (AD

97116005). Pig. 1.

Ivetypus. Ibid, 60/ 15-2 (RK).

Perennial with + horizontal rhizomes ca &-

10 mm dia. with stil roots without tubers,

Radical leaves produced with new shoots,

usually absent at flowering time. Stems rigid.

terete, striate, up to 30 cm with short sulf

hairs on ridges, branching monoapodial with

short cu 8-10 mm internodes giving a distinc-

live zigzag appearance, older stems Straight

with internodes ca 5 cm long; some sterile

bracts in upper part of stem, Urobels terminal

2-3-Nowered, J-2 outer bracts Similar to stem

bracts, usually with hirsute veins, inner bracts

ca 2-5 mm long mostly membranous with |-3

dark veins. Pedicels 7 mnt long, articulated

near buse. Outer tepals 10-11 mm long, narrow-

lanceolate. 2-2-5 mm wide, usually with 5

distinct veins on hack; inner tepals + circular

including fimbriue, inner entire portion ellip-

tical, 5 mm wide with tapering 3-nerved mid-

rih, fimbriae reaching maximum length of 3-5

mm towards upper portion of tepal, Stamens

6: 3 outer stamens with 4 mm long anthers.

struight and twisted, 3 inner stamens with 6

mm long anthers, curved and twisted. Ovary

sessile. + globular, style terminal © as long as

longer anthers, Capsule cylindrical, ereet, en-

closed within persistent perianth.

Omer specimens (ull from Kangaroo Island).

—Kingscote, Jackson 396, 30.x.1964 (AD

* Department of Botany, University of Western Australia, Nedlands, W. Aust. 6009.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. Vol, 95, Part 2. | lih August 1971

N. H. BRITTAN

110

THE UNIVERSTDY OF WRTTE RN SESTRALEA

Norn Ay tone bus

Ss [oa Kexgareo Filamd, SA,

. Halk mam Chae,

sy oo form, ni By Aube

we, T peed, Sat, Seo Bimewm , san, 17

: Naas Povead

| pitee re de

oy AWA bo jis 4 abe

Fig. 1. Thysanotus fractiflexus Brittan. Habit of Brittan 60/15-1 (holotype, AD) (* 0+5); on

right, flower of Brittan 60/26-2 (AD) ( 1-5).

THYSANOTUS FRACTIFLEXUS ON KANGAROO ISLAND 11

9669063); nr. Western River homestead,

Eichler 15355 bis, 10.xi1.1958 (AD 96407048):

Harriet R.-Vivonne Bay, Eichler 18471,

24.xi1.1965 (AD 96650163); Breakneck R.,

Cleland s.n., 25.xi.1945 (AD 96021144);

Karratta, Tepper 74, 13.xii.1886 (AD

96021163); Flinders Chase, Cleland s.n.,

8.1.1946 (AD 96021060); Ravine des Casoars,

Cleland s.n,, 2.11.1948 (AD 96021054); Cape

Borda rd., Symon s.n., Mar.1954 (ADW

10532); Hundred of Duncan, Cashmore s.n.,

15.x1.1933 (ADW 742); 2 miles (3 km) W.

(UWA); Junct. sects. 80/83, Hundred of New-

land, Brittan 60/26-1 (K), 60/26-2 (AD

97116019), Fig. 1.

Acknowledgments

The author acknowledges with gratitude the

assistance rendered by the South Australian

Department of Agriculture in providing a

driver, transport and accommodation during

the 1960 collecting trip, and a driver and trans-

port on a return visit in 1967. The provision

of an interstate travel grant in 1960 by the

Vivonne Bay, Brittan 60/21, 20.1.1960 (UWA): University of Western Australia is also

Parndana township, Brittan 60/30, 22.1.1960 acknowledged.

Reference

Brittan, N. H. (1971).—Thysanotus virgatus sp. nov. (Liliaceae) from National Park, New South

Wales. Contr. N.S.W. Herb. 4 (5): in press.

NEW RECORDS AND TAXA OF MARINE CHLOROPHYTA IN

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

BY H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Distribution and depth records are given for ten species of marine Chlorophyta. Two species of

Ulvaria (U. oxysperma and U. shepherdii sp. nov.) are the first representatives of this genus known

from southern Australia; records are given of three little known deep water species of Caulerpa (C.

alternans, C. ellistoniae and C. hedleyi); the ranges of Callipsygma wilsonii, Avrainvillea

clavatiramea and Rhipiliopsis peltata are extended considerably, and a second species of

Rhipiliopsis (R. robusta) is described; and the subtropical species Acetabularia calyculus is

recorded from St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia.

NEW RECORDS AND TAXA OF MARINE CHLOROPHYTA

IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

by H. B.S. Womers7ty*

Summary

Distribution and depth records wre given for ten species of marine Chlorophyta. Two species of

Ulva (UL, oxysperma and U. shepherdit sp. nov.) are the first representatives of ihis genus known

from southern Australia; records are given of three lithe known deep water species of Canlerpa (C.

allernans, C. ellistoniae and C. hedleyi). the ranges of Callipsyenta wilsonii, Ayvrainvillea clavatirantea

and Rhipiliopsiy pellata are extended considerably, and a second species of Riipiliopsly (R. rabusra)

is described; and the subtropical species Acefebalarin calveuliy is recorded From St. Vineent Gulf,

South Atrstralii.

Introduction

Since publication of a critical survey of the

Chlorophyta of southern Australia (Womers-

ley 1956). several species have become better

Known, especially from callections made by

SCUBA divers, The more interesting of these

records. tovether with two new species, are

deserihed helow. Must of the species are from

deeper water and rarely if ever are found in

the drift,

A further deep walter species, Palmoclathrus

wipitetus, fram deep water off Waldegrave

Island. Eyre Peninsula, hus been deseribed

separately (Womersley 1971),

ULVALES

No species of monostromatic ulvacean algae

has previously been recorded from southern

Australia, although Monostrama and allied

veneru are present on most temperate and cold

water coasts. Several species of Monostrome

have been deseribed from New Zealand by

Chapman (1956),

Recognition of the genera of these mono-

stromutic algae depends upon which species is

accepted as lectotype of Monostroma Thuret,

Following Kornmann (1964) and Bliding

(1968). M. hbullesum (Roth) Thuret is here

accepted as the lectotype species, rather than

M, oxyspermun (Kuetz.) Doty which Pupen-

fuss (1960, p. 315) and Gayral (1965S, p. 627)

regarded as lectotype. Kornamann and Bliding

point out that M. bullosiwin agrees beter with

Thuret’s type deseription of Manostromd than

does ML exvyeacewm (Ktietz.) Thuret (—=!,

oxyspermiun).

Ulvaria Ruprecht is based on UW. ehsenra

(Kuetz.) Gayral, and differs from Mono-

srrame in having an alternation of isomorphic

=Dept of Botany, University of Adelaide. Adelaide, S Aust. S000.

vencrations, a uniseriate germling which

becomes tubular und opens to a monostramatic

sheet, und distinct rhizoids at the base of the

thallus. Ulvaria includes U. oxyspermea Uxuctz.)

Bliding when Monostrrome is based on AZ.

bullasum.

Ulvaria oxysperma (Kuetz.) Bliding [968s 585,

figs, 31234,

Fic. |

U. oxyyperma was first pesogaised in South

Australia in Proper Bay, Port Lincoln, during

a field trip in August 1967 wilh Dr ©. den

Hartog who was familiar with this species on

European coasts, The South Australian plants

agree well wilh Bliding’s (1968, p. 585, figs.

31-34) deseription. They form light to medium

green thalli (Fig. 1) up to & em high und as

much across, delicate but fairly firm, and with

a smooth to conyolute margin, The thallus: is

attached by rhizoids from the basal calls while

the upper cells are irregularly polygonal to

rounded in shape, 7-15 um across. with

gelatinous walls of variable thickness, und

arranged mostly irregularly though sometimes

in groups or in Jinear rows, The thallus Umek-

ness is LO-15(—20) iim and each cell contains

{(—2) small pyrenoids.

Most of these measurements are towards the

lower end of (he ranges given by Bliding.

UW. oxysperma (otlen recorded us Mare-

yiroma) is a widespread species in the tem-

perate northern Hemisphere und has ulso been

recorded from subtropical regions (e.g from

Hawaii [Gilbert 1965. p. 483)). I is known

from the following localities, but is probably

widespread in suitable habitats during winter

along the southern) Australian coust. Ib is

apparently a winter species and occurs at a

Trans. Ru Sov. S. Aust. Val. 95, Part 2. 11th Auguste }971.

H, B. S. WOMERSLI

114

“po ] OS8l

—E “SITY “WOYS BAGAJOjOH CN pPyeYdeayy VMI ]Y—T “BIA (TISTEVY NAV) NV ¢S “ujosury] Mog “Aeg Jadoig ‘Pittadsaxo DLIDAL)— |

cel ene aC 1S

yes SS 5

Ls)

SSAND et aydey ‘ey GES,

as ag) GE Ayagminy Who

biwrnoa SSE Stes

me vr wey eay RANE

te ” popeys (pee ve I whe

F oe ee ot ‘

= hs on i ‘ jinw's mre 48 Beg prteny

aad ya tena) Surdihna “ee Ti)

saw whey fey wasn de ot), wis

MARINE CHLOROPIIYTA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

mid ta lower eulittoral Jevel in calm water

bavs and. inlets.

Localittes—Kellidic Bay, Coffin Bay, S.

Aust., mid éwlittoral (MW omersley, 22 vii L967;

ADU, A31874); Proper Bay, Port Lincoln, S.

Aust.. mid eulittoral, partly shaded (Méoriers-

ley. 20.1967; ADU, A31812); Goolwa

Rarruge, 5. Aust,, mid culittoral on stone bank,

seaward side (Wornersley, 13.iv.1970; ADU,

A35820, Parsony, Swit.1969; ADU, A3$746):

Nelson Lagoon, Vic., on rocks (Beeglehole.

iOv.1959; ADU, A2d674): Louisville, Tus,,

on Heterezestera (Olsen, 6ix.t967. ADU,

A31965); Port Arthur, Tas. (Cribh, Is.x,19513

ADU, A20434),

Ulvaria shepherdii sp, nov.

FIGS. 2, 5-7

Thallus (Fig, 2) to 12 cm high, deeply

lacerate into numerous linear to narrowly

funeale, straight to slightly curved, segmeais

with rounded to truncate ends, 2-15{—2i))

nun broud, arising from a small, semi-prostrate

region attached on the lower side by numerous

slender rhizoids (Figs. 6, 7) about 10 um

diam, und ahout + mm long, often with lobed

ends. Thallus monostcomatic, 50-75 um thick

heluw, decreasing to 30-40 um thick above,

cells in section slightly to 14 times as high as

broad,

Cells polygonal (Fig. 5). with rounded to

narrowly angular ends tending to form

lengthwise tows, with walls 43 pm thick;

Splits in thallus originating hy separation of

the walls hetween cells (Fig. 5). Cells 25-50

(—85) um long by 10-25(-—-35) um hroad

(occasionally larger in some rows or patches),

with the chloroplast filling most of the cell and

containing usually 3-5 pyrenoids (Fig. 5).

Diagnosis—Thallus ad 12 cm altus, lacersatus,

segmentis linearibus vel anguste cuneatis 2-15

(—20) mm latis, per rhizoidea affixis, Mono-

stromaticus inferne 50-75 tim crassus, super-

neque 30-4) um crassus. Cellulae polygoniac

plerumque 25-50(—85) wm longne et 10-25

{—35) win fale, el chloroplasius cum 3-5

pyrenoidihus.

Type Loecality—About 12 km {8 miles)

south of Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island,

S, Aust. from a craypot in 50-70 m

depth (Lartz, 24.1. 1968).

Holatype—ADU, A33006, holotype on left

(Fig. 2).

Il}

Distriturion—Only known from the type

and from Pearson fs., 5. Aust, on the

rough water coast in 22-3 m depth

(Shepherd, 7 to 12.44.1969; ADLI AS33664,

AX3713, A33735, A33873, A34006.

A34024, A34082, A34058, AS54107).

U, shepherdii is named after Mr. Scoresby

A. Shepherd whose subtidal ecological studies

Nave contributed greatly to our knowledge of

southern Australian marine algac,

UW. shepherdti is placed in Ulvaria on the

presence of distinc! rhizoids developed from

cells of & monostromatic thallus. The life

history and development of the thallus is un-

known. Jt appears most closely related to

Monoastroma alittaralis Tanaka & Nozawa ex

Tannka (1964, p. 75) from Japan. The latter

is one of the few deep water species (from

60 mm) of this group of algae and should prob-

ably also be referred to Ulyaria, Ut is similar

in cell arrangement and rhizoids lo 0 shep-

herdit but differs markedly in form.

CAULERPALES

Caulerpa alternans Womersley 19356: 364,

FIG. 3

This species was previously knowin only

from the type locality (Port Phillip Heads,

Vie.) and from “St. Vincent's Gulf, S. Aust.

dredged in 20 fathoms” (ADU. ALSh2).

On 4 February 1969 is was collected by Mr.

S, A. Shepherd near Trowbridge Light (ADU,

A33416) and Tapley Shoal (ADU, A33751)

in the south west part of St. Vincent Gulf, in

17 and 13 m respectively, growing on a sandy

botlom in an area subject to fairly strong tical

currents. The previous St. Vincent Gulf col-

lection very likely comes from this areca also,

and the species. appears to he confined to

deeper water.

C€. alternans is ia s'ender species (Fig. 3)

up to 8 cm high, with stolon and axes about

4 mor broad, the axes simple or with a few

brunches and bearing usually two rows of

alternating, simple, slender linear ramuli up

10 3 mm long and 200-300 iim. broud, with a

pointed apex, Occasional axes bear ramuli

in 3 rows or irregularly for part of their

length,

Canlerpa ellistoniae Womersley 1955: 387,

fig, 2.

Previously known only from the type collec

lion, C. ellistoniae is now recoded from the

following localities; Rottnest Is., W. Aust, 10

116

km south-west 62 m deep on rubble (Wilson,

Feb.1960; ADU. A243584); Pearson Is., S,

Aust, 36 m deep on rough-water coast (Shep-

feed 101.1969; ADU, A35153), Biliston, S.

Aust., 7 m deep (Sheplierd, 21.x,1970; ADU,

A37537); 12 km §. of Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo

Is. S. Aust. to 50-76 m fram cruypots (Latz,

24,%1,1968; ADU, A32992),

C. ellistoniae appears to be confined lo deep

waler On rough water coasts, but with a wide

distribution from Rotthest Island in Western

Australia to Kangaroo Islan! in South Aus-

tralia,

Caolerpa hedleyi W.v. Busse, Womersley 1956:

367.

FIGS, 4, 8, 14

©. heidleyt was previously known only from

the type specimen dredged in 15 m (8 fath.)

off Kangaroo Island. It has now been collvgted

from the following localities—Pearson Is., S.

Aust., 22-30 m deep on sheltered coast (Shep-

herd, 8i.1969; ADU, A3374L and 9.i.1969:

ADU, A33998, A34054): St. Francis Is., Isles

of Sr. Frances, S. Aust, 55 m deep (Shepherd,

911971; ADU, A38069)~ Key Is., Isles of St.

Francis, 32-38 m deep (Shepherd, 11.1.1971;

ADU, A38084).

C. hedleyi appears ta he restricted to deep

water, off either rough water or purtly shel-

tered cousts, but at depths where water move-

ment is only slight and light intensity fairly

low. C. hedleyi, C. ellistoniue and C.calternans

are the only southern Australian species of

Caulerpa known to be confined to deep water,

though some other species penetrate from

shallower into deeper water.

C. hedleyé is wv distinctive spectes, The axes

reach 10 ¢m in height from a long stolon (Fig.

4) and bear closely arranged distichous

laterals (Fig. 14) which are densely covered

with dichotomous ramuli with aente ends

(Fig. 8). ‘The lower axes are usually denuded

of laterals but covered with ramuli.

Avrainvillea cluvatiramties Gepp & Gepp-.

Womersley 1956; 372.

FIG, 10

This is the only species of the rtropical-

sublropical genus Averuinvillea koown trom

southern Australia, and previously recorded

only from the type locality, Corio Bay, Port

Phillip, Victoria,

A, clavatirarnea is now known from Eucla,

W. Aust, shatt (farseny, 5.811968; ADL,

H. B. 8S. WOMERSLEY

A33962); Waldegrave Is.. Eyre Pen,, S, Aust,

22 m deep (Shepherd, 23.x%.1970. ADU,

A37363) and Investigator Strait, S, Aust.. 27

m dgep, Lat. 35°13’S, long. 137°S Rf War-

son, 9i1971; ADU, A38441), Tt thus appears

tg be a deep water species, rarely found in

the drift.

A. clavatlramea reaches a height of 25 cm

(fig. 10), with long, terete stipes (fo L3 em),

thea expanding fairly evenly to a broadly

Nabellate lamina up to 10 em Jong and 10 em

aeross ut its flattened to convex apex. In old

plants op to 10 stipes with blades may srise

from an old matted holdfast (Fig, 10).

Callipsygma_ wilsonii

1956: 372.

J-Agardh. Wormersiey

FIG. Il

Callipsygma was known only from the type

specimen from Port Phillip Heads, Vic. until

recorded by Cribb (1958, p. 207) from Cupe

Barren Jy,, Tasmania (Olven, 14,x,1950).

C. wilserti is now Known from numerous

specimens in ADU, with records [rom Vivonne

Bay, Kangaroo Island and from Port Elliot.

S. Aust, to Sorrento, Vic, and King Is,., Bass

Strait (MELU—S,. C, Ducker, pers. connit.}.

Jt appears to be a plant of deeper waler un

rough coasts, though it is common in 1-2 m

depth in a heavily shaded cave at Nora Creina,

south of Robe, S. Aust,

Vhe thallus (Pig. 11) reaches 35 em in

height in old plants, with numerous branches,

flabellate above and denuded below where

the lower stipe may be 1-2 cm thick and the

holdfast up to 3 em acrosg,

Rhipiliopsis peltatn (J,Agardh) Gepp & Gepp.

Womersley 1956: 376.

FIG. 12

R. peliata was previously recorded Frum Port

Phillip Heads, Vic. and Pennington Bay,

Kungaroo ds, S. Aust. und is now known as

far west as Waldegraye Is: (near Elliston),

Fyre Pen, S. Aust, 22 m deep (Shepherd,

23.4,1970; ADU, A37368), I is often com-

mun inwhaded pools and at just subtidal levels

on rough water enasts, and is probably to he

found in such habitats anywhere between Port

Phillip Heads und Wuldegrave Island or lur-

ther west.

The thallus is distinctive, reaching 4 em in

height and 3(—4) em across. the Nat lamina

being borne on a slender stipe up to | cm long

(Fig. T2)-

MARINE CHLOROPHYTA IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 117

FIGS, 5-7

Figs. 5-7, Ulvaria shepherdii Fig. 3.—Cells

(with pyrenaids)

in median part of thallus; splits

developing between walls of some cells. Fig. 6—Cells and rhizoids at base of thallus. Pig. 7.

—Cross section of basal cells with rhizoids.

Fig. & Canlerpa hedleyi, Cross section of Jateral with ramuli.

Fig. ¥. Rhipiliopsis robusta, Filaments of lamina showing lateral attachments.

Rhipiliopsis robusta sp. nov.

FIGS, 9, 13

Thallus (Fig. 13) to 9 cm high, dark green,

not. calcified; holdfast to. | cm across, stipe to

4 cm long and 2-3 mm diam.. lamina to 4

em high and 34 cm across, undivided but

often lacerate or slightly lobed, about | mm

ahd several filaments thick. with a faintly

zoned appearance, spongy but moderately

dense and firm; surface of lamina without

cortical development but the ends of some

filaments lying at the surface. Filaments (Fig.

9) of lamina robust, mostly 150-200) um

diam., dichotamously branched, markedly

moniliform with ovoid segments 14-2 times

as long as broad (apical segments 2-3{—4)

118 H. B. S. WOMERSLEY

Per

Pabeda) A WO oa bay WA LO

7 2 3 a % § ? e J 10

Fig. 10. Avrainvillea clavatiramea. Eucla, W. Aust. (ADU, A33962).

Fig. 11. Callipsyema wilsonii. Robe, S. Aust. drift (Bailey, 18.xi.1967; ADU, A32028).

Fig. 12. Rhipiliopsis peltata. Nora Creina (S. of Robe), S. Aust., in heavily shaded pool (Womersley,

174.1971; ADU A37817).

Fig. 13. Rhipiliopsis robusta, Holotype sheet.

Fig. 14. Caulerpa hedleyi. Axis with laterals and ramuli (A33741).

MARINE CHLOROPHYTA IN

limes as long as broad), with thickened wall

plugs ingrowing from the periphery of the

constrictions: filaments attached laterally by

circular areas (Fig. 9) without projections

from the filaments. Chloroplasts round to

ovoid, 2-3 #m long, without pyrenoids; amylo-

plasts ovoid, 3-5 ttm long,

Diagnosis—Thallus ad 9 em altus, atro-viridis

non culcareus: basali disco ad 1 cm _ lato,

stipite ad 4 cm longo et 2-3 cm diam,, lamina

ad 4 cm alta et 34 cm lata, indivisa vel

lacerata circa | mm crassa. Filamentis robus-

tis, 150-200 um diam,, dichotomis, monili-

formibus et segmentis 14 vel duplo longioribus

quam latis, ad constrictiones incrassatis; fila-

menta lateribus per poros circulares conjuncta.

Chloroplasti rotundi vel ovoidei 2-3 bm longi

sine pyrenoidibus; amyloplasti ovoidei et 3-5

um longi.

Type Locality—Tipara Reef, Spencer Gulf,

S. Aust., [1 m deep on rock (Shepherd,

24.11.1971).

Holotype sheet-—ADU, A38130,

on left (Fig. 13).

Distriburion—Only known from the type

locality and from Pearson Is., S. Aust..

holotype

SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 119

30 m deep on rough water coast (Shep-

herd, 10.13.1969; ADU, A34049).

R. robusta appears to prefer moderate water

movement in fairly deep water. The two

known localities are distant and other records

are to be expected from SCUBA collections

in similar habitats.

Rhipiliopsiy robusta agrees well with the

type species (R. pelteafa) in form and structure,

and has similar lateral unions between the

filaments by means of circular perforations.

This Jatter character was used by Gepp &

Gepp (1911, p. 46) to distinguish Rhipiliopsis

from Avrainvillea. R. robusta differs from R.

peltata in size and in its much broader and

more strongly moniliform filaments, these

being only 18-25 um broad in the latter. The

only other species of Rhipiliopsis described

appears to be R. aegyptiaca Nasr (1939, p, 53,

figs. 3, 4) from the Red Sea, but this species

is described as being monostromatic and is

doubtfully a species of Rhipiliopsis.

DASYCLADALES

Acetabularia calyculus Quoy & Gaimard 1824:

621, pl. 90. figs. 6, 7. J.Agardh 1887; 171.

Fig. 15. Acetabularia calyeulus. Living specimen from ‘Tapley Shoal (Edithburgh), S. Aust. (corres-

ponding to ADU, A33400).

120 H. B.

Boergesen 1914: 75. figs. 61-65. De Toni

[ S89: 418. Harvey 1863: pl. 249. May 1938:

213. Nasr 1947: 40, figs. 10-11. Solms-

Laubach 1895; 26, pl, 3, figs, 6-8. 10,

HIG. 15

Acetabularia ealyculus is a widespread sub-

tropical species, Known previously in Australi

from Fremantle oorthwards on the west coust

und trom about Neweastle northwards on the

east coust, The type locality ts Shark Bay,

Western Australia. The orginal illustrahon of

Quoy & Gaimurd shows a fairly typical plant

with uw distinct cup af unired rays, aud as noted

by Boergesen (1913, p. 77), Solms-Laubuch's

(1895, p. 26) reference of 4, ca/yenlis toa

group with sepurale rays ts ool correct. After

deealcifieation however, the rays readily

separate.

A. calyen his is now knawa (rom the follow-

ing records in South Australia: Tapley Shoal,

off Edithburg, So Aust,. 13-15 0 deep in strong

current (Shepherd, 5.11969: ADU. A33400—

Fig. 15); Glenelg, S Aust., in 20 m depth, +4

. WOMERSLEY

km oallshore (Shepherd, (5ai1969; ADL,

A33450). Jn both cuses. the alga was grow-

ing on deud shells on a sandy bottom, usually

in current channels in Posidonia beds; current

slight to strong. Tt appears fo be contined bo

deeper water. and js recorded mainly from

deep water elsewhere ia the world,

The oecurrence of a further subtropical

Species in southern Australia is noteworthy,

since a small grotip ol such species is now

known from the Gulf region of South Aus-

tralia. Other species include /lormophysa

trigihetra (L.) Kuetving and Sargassum de-

currens (R.Br) ©.Agardh. The Gulf waters

are warmer im summer tham (he rougher more

southern waters, aod it js possible that these

may he “relicl species” fron. a period af

warmer Conditions long southern Australia.

Acknowledgements

Gratitude is expressed to Mr. Scareshy

Shepherd, whose SCUBA diving resulted in

many of the records in this paper, and to the

Australian Research Grants Committee tor

technical assistance.

References

Agwron, J, G. (18871.—Till algernes systematik.

Nya bidrag. WL Siphaneae tera Unive leaned.

23, 1-180, Plates 1-5.

Bitpina, C, (196R).—A erifiea! survey of Puta.

pean taxa in Ulyales, Ul. Ulva, Ulvaria,

Monoxtrama, Korninantitia, Bot. Notiser W221.

SAS-H2Y.

Boeroesen, F. (1919) —The marine alpae of rhe

Danish West Indies, Vol. |, Part tl. Chloro-

phyceue. Dansk. Bor Ark. 1 (4), 1-160, map.

Cuvpman, V. J. 41956)—The marine algae of

New Zealand Part tT. Myxophyceae and

Chlorophyceae. J. Linn, Soc, Bol, 55 (360),

333-301 pls. 24-50.

Crimea, A. B. 11958).—A note on the structure of

the green ales —Cullipsygnra wilvonis J, Ag

Pap. Dep. Bot. Univ. Od 3 (22), 207-208,

De Town J, Bo {1889),—“Sylloge Algarum

oamnium hucusque Cognitarium’., Vol. t.

Chiorophyceae (Pudua)-

Gavrat, BP. (1965),—Monosvrome Mhuret, Ci lieria

Rupe. emend Gayral, Ulvepsiy Gayrale

(Chlorophycees, Ulotrichwles)> structure,

reproduction, cycles, position systémalique.

Revie gen. Bot. 72, 627-638, pla, t-3.

Gere, A, & Gore, ES. C1911). —The Codiaceue

of the Sibogi Bieeattont inchiding @ monn

waph of Flabellaricac and Udoleue, Monugr.

Rispge- Fxped. $2, 1-|S0. pis. 1-22,

Giiperr, Wo J (1988) —Contribution to the

marine Chigpophyla of Hawait i, Additions!

coeords, Pacif, Sci, (9, 482-492,

Tlarvey. W. He 1 1863)—"‘Phycologin Australicu.”

Vol. S, Plates 241-300. synop., pp, 1-73,

KORNMANN, P. 01964),—Dher Monostroma hulle

sum (Roth) Thuret und Mo a@eyypermium

Doty, FTelvol Wiss Meeresunters,

Mas, ¥. (1938). —A key to the marine ulgae of

New South Wales. Part | Chlorophyeeac

Prac, Linn, Sow NUS MW. 63, 207-218.

Nase, AJ He (1939 ).—Reports of the preliminary

expedition for the exploration af the Red

Sea in the RRS. Malahith. Algae. Puls.

Mar, bial. Sin, Glrardugu L, 47-76, plot

Nasa, AH. (194712 i i

of the Egyptian Red Sea coast. Bull. bac.

Set. Parad T Univ. No. 26, 1-155, Plates 1-14-

Pareneuss, G. Fo (1960).—On the genera of the

Ulvales and the status of the order, J, Linn.

Spe, Bor. 56, 303-318, pls. lo.

Quey, I, RL CL & GalMARrD, P. (1824)—Zoolagie,

in L. de Freycinel, “Voyage autour du Monde

alge

Fxéeuté sur tes corvettes de SM

L'Uranie ct ta Physiciunne” (Pars)

Sormis-Lausacn, TW, Grar au (IS9S),—Mono-

eraph of the Avcetabulavieae. Trans. Linn

Soe. Londen (Bot. ser. 2) 3.

Tanaka, Ty (1964),—Studies on some marine

algae from Southern Japun. Vo Mem. Puc

Fish, Kagoshima Univ. t2, 75-9).

Womerscer, H B S. (1955)—New marine

Chiorophyti from southern Austrulia.. Paei/

Sej, 9, JB7-39S.

Womersiry, H. BS. (1956).—A erticul Soivey

of the murine vluae of sourber Adsttalia,

(; Chlorephyta, dusd J, mar. fresh, Rex, 7,

1-39. pls. L.

344-384,

Womrestny, H. B.S. (1971 1,—Palmeclatlorns, a

new (deep water genus of Chlorophyta,

Phycalowa Ub (in press)

VOL. 95, PART 3 15th OCTOBER, 1971

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

CONTENTS

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION, 1969

Shepherd, S. A., & Thomas, I. M. 1. Narrative - - - - - - 121

Twidale, C. R. 2. Geomorphology - - - - - - - - 123

Symon, D. E. 3. Contributions to the Land Flora - - - - ~ - 131

Thomas, I. M., & Delroy, L. B. 4. The Pearson Island Wallaby - - - 143

Smyth, M. 5. Reptiles - - - - - - - - - - 147

Paton, Joan B. 6. Birds - - - - - - - - - - 149

Shepherd, S. A., & Womersley, H. B. S. 7. The Sub-tidal Ecology of Benthic

Algae - - - - - - - - - - - 155

Mawson, Patricia M. 8. Helminths - - - - - - - - 169

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING

NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 1. NARRATIVE

BY S. A. SHEPHERD AND I. M. THOMAS

Summary

The Pearson Islands, which are in the Investigator Group in the eastern part of the Great Australian

Bight, were first investigated scientifically (apart from brief visits by E. Waite in 1914 and by F.

Wood-Jones about 1920) by a party led by Professor F. Wood-Jones in 1923, and the results of that

expedition were published in the Transactions of this Society in 1923 and 1924.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. — L NARRATIVE

by S. A, SHEPHERD®

Introduction

The Pearson Islands, which ure in the Inves-

tigutor Group in the eastern part of the Great

Australian Bight, were first investigated scien-

tifically (apart from brief visits by BE. Waite in

1914 nnd by F. Wood-Jones about 1920) by a

party led by Professor F, Wood-Jones in 1923,

and the results of that expedition were pub-

lished in the Transactions of this Society in

1923 and 1924,

The next expedition occurred in 1960 under

the leadership of Professar T. O. Campbell-and

the botanical results of that expedition were

published by Specht (1969),

The 1969 expedition was organised by the

present authors unler the wuspices of the Reyal

Society of South Australia and the Department

of Fisheries and Fauna Conservation. The

party included Messrs. I. M. Thomas and L. B.

Delroy (Mammals); Dr. M, Smyth (Reptiles);

Mr, D. E. Symon (Land Flora); Dr. ©. R.

Twidale (Geomorphology); Mrs. J. Paton

(Birds); Me. G. P. Gross (Insects); Mr. 8. A.

Shepherd and Mrs. J. E. Watson (Marine

Ecology). Messra. M, Dredge, H. A, Fuir-

bank, P, Macrow, J. Ottaway and A. Thomas

alsa. accompanied the expedition and gave

wssislance In various ways

The expedition left Coffin Bay on Sth Janu-

ary, 1969 and spent from 6th to 13th January

ou Pearson. Island, operating from a base camp

on the northern slopes above Eastern Cove,

One of the purposes of the expedilion was to

collect numbers of the Pearson Island Wallaby

(Petrozgale penicillata) and transport them to

to the mainland with 2 view to establishing

4 breeding colony, The Wallaby is common

on the main islind wnd daily hunts were held

on the higher slopes of East Hill and Hill 781.

Twenty-four wallabies were trans-shipped to

Flinders Isfand, same 32 km distant. and from

here they were flown to the Department ol

Fisheries and Fauna Conservation’s station at

Bool Lagoon. Fifteen more wallibies and

some tative rats (Rarws fuseipey) were

brought to Adeluide when the expedition

returned on 13th January.

and 1. M, THoMaAst

A number of geographic fentunes were

named by the 1969 expedition. The two

anchorages off Pearson Island were named

Anchotage Cave and Eastern Cove rtespec-

tively. as these are the names by which they

are known to local fishermen. ‘The three isles

to the south of the main Pearson Island were:

named Veteran Isles and Dorothce respectively,

these being the numes given by Bauuin in 1801

to islunds in the eastern Great Australian Bight,

but which were either named earlier by Flin-

ders or cunnot be identified, These names were

approved by the Nomenclature Committee of

the Department of Lands on 14th August,

L969. Maps of the islands showing the named

features are given by Twidale (1971) and

Shepherd & Womersley (1971) in this volume

of the Transactions.

Two groups Of islands off the southern coast

of Australia are named Pearson Islands. One

of these is in the Archipelago of the Recherche

of Western Australia, lying 13 km (7 watttical

miles) southeast of Mondrain Island, The

position of these islands is noted on Flinders’

Chart of 1814 but they are not numed, ‘The

other islunds of the same name are in the laves-

tigator Group. These are mentioned and

given code letters in Flinders’ log (1802-03),

i photostat copy of which is held jn the S,A,

Archives, and the name Pearson's Isles appears

on the chart and in the narrative of Flinders’

uccount of his voyage to Terra Australis

(1814): however, the source of the nume is

not given,

In the “Nomenclature of South Austeutia

Data Slips” compiled by the Department of

lands, South Australia, and held by the South

Australian Archives, it is nated that the islands

were sighted by Flinders on 13th February,

1802, “and subsequently named by hing after

his brother-in-law”. Flinders’ sister did marry

a Mr. Pearson but not until 1806, which sug-

gests that the name was not given until after

Flinders’ return io England after his enforced

stay on Mauritius. However. no suthority is

given on the data slips.

~ Dept, of Fisteries aml Fauna Conservation, 183 Gawler Place, Adelaide. S. Aust Snot.

+ Dept of Zoulegy. University of Adelaide. Adelaide, S. Aust. Sd00

Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, Vol, 95, Part 3, 15th Octeber 1971,

122 S. A, SHEPHERD AND I. M. THOMAS

Another suggestion as to the origin of the

name is given by Caroline Pilgrim in the Sep-

tember 1949 issue of “Homes and Gardens”.

Here it says that when the islands were first

sighted, Flinders was on deck with one of his

officers, Lt. Robert Fowler (after whom

Fowlers Buy wus named), He asked Fowler

to suggest a name for the newly sighted islands

and Fowler suggested his mother’s maiden

name which was Pearson. This version is

accepted substantially by Praite & ‘Taylor

(1970) but no authority is cited in either case.

Still another suggestion is that the islands

were so named to honour Sir Richard Pearson.

O'Byrne (1859-62, p. 266) records that “Sir

Rich. Pearson Kt, in Sept. 1779, beat off an

American Squadron of twice his own force,

under the notorious Paul Jones by which

achievement a convoy, valued at 600,000 /. was

saved to the country, and who died Lieut.

Governor of Greenwich Hospital in Jan.

1806.” There can be little doubt that Flin-

ders would have known of the exploits of Sir

Richard Pearson, but there can be no cer-

tainty that he is the person who was honoured.

Acknowledgements

In addition to those referred to above,

particular thanks are due to Mr. A. M. Olsen.

Director of Fisherics and Fauna Conservation,

for his enthusiastic encouragement of the Expe-

dition. Our thanks are also due to Mr. Robert

Jenkin who supplied some of the information

concerning the naming of Pearson Islands.

Grants in support of the Expedition were made

by the Department of Fisheries and Fauna

Conservation and the Royal Society of South

Australia,

References

Fuinpers, M. (1814).—“A_ voyage

Australis.” (Nicol: London).

O'Byrne, W. R. (1859-62)—"A naval bio-

graphical dictionary; new and revised eédi-

tion.” (London).

PRaAlte, R., & Taytor, J. C. (1970.)— “Place

names of South Australia.” (Rigby; Adelaide),

SHEPHERD, 5S. A., & WomMeERSLEY, H. B. S. (1971).

—Pearson Island Expedition 1969, 7. The

to Terra

subtidal ecology of benthic algae. Trans, R.

Soc, §. Aust. 95, 155-167.

Srecut, R. L. (1969).—The vegetation of Pearson

Islands: A re-examination—February 1960,

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 93, 143-152,

Twipace. C. R. (1971).—Pearson Island Fxpedi-

tion 1969. 2. Geomorphology. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust. 95, 123-130.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 2. GEOMORPHOLOGY

BY C. R. TWIDALE

Summary

The islands of the Investigator Group (Pearson Islands) are true inselbergs. Their major landforms

are expressions of jointing in the granite bedrock. Massive curvilinear sheets of rock dominate

lower levels, and boulders, probably derived from the breakdown of the sheets, dominate the upper

slopes of the topographic domes. Flared slopes and tafoni are well developed.

Other important landforms are of marine origin. The western shores, which face the Great

Australian Bight and the dominant westerlies, are strongly cliffed, but on the more sheltered east-

facing coasts sheet structure and boulder strewn slopes are prominent. Here also remnants of

aeolianite-old coastal foredune deposits-are preserved. They date from a time of lower sealevel.

There is also suggestion in the form of benches and deposits of a stand of the sea higher than the

present, though it is not possible to say how much higher.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969, — 2, GEOMORPHOLOGY

by ©. R, Twipate*

Summary

The islands of the Investigator Group (Pearson [slands) are (rie inselbergs, Their major land-

forms aré expressions of jointing in the granite bedrock, Massive curvilinear sheets of rock dominate

lower levels, und boulders, probably derived from the breakdown of the sheets, dominate the upper

slopes of the lopographic domes, Flared slopes and lafoni are well developed.

Other important Kindlorms are of marine origin, The western shores, which face the Great

Australian Bight und the dominant westerlies, are strongly cliffed, but on the more sheltered east-

faving coasts sheet structure and boulder sirewa slopes are prominent. Here also remnants of

ucoliinite—old coastal foredune deposits—are preserved. They date from u time of lower sealeyel

Phere is also suggestion in the form of benches ond deposits of a stand of the sew higher than the

present, though if is not possible to say how much higher,

Introduction

The German word inselberg is usually

upplied lo residual hills and ranges which rise

abruptly ind drimatically from the surround-

ing plains. its use in this continental context

is apt but, af course. metaphoric. The Pear-

son Ishinds are. however, true “island-maun-

tains”. for they rise steeply from the waters of

the ewstern margin af the Creat Australian

Biehl. This apart. however. the ishinds are

morphologically similar to the granite insel-

hergs of adjucent northwestern Eyre Peninsula.

and of the southwest of Australia (Twidale

1962, 1964, 1968a, 1968h),

The ishinds (see Figs. 1. 2) whieh. in

Pearson Island itself rise to almost 240 m

(800 th.) above sea level, take the form of

domes which are rounded and boulder strewn,

especiully on the upper slopes. th some few

areas Of Pearsan Ishind the generally irrezular

profiles of the hills are broken by smooth

gentle slopes associated with deposits of linte-

stone (Fig. 1). With the exception of the

southern member of Veteran Isles, and the

small unnamed istind off the SW coast of south

section (Fig, 1), the domes stand high yhove

the waves. But, whether high or low. the

domes ure asvnimetric, the expased western

purts of the structures having suffered marked

erosion Through wave allack

OUTLINE IN PLAN

The [nvestigator Group is geologically part

uf the granite Gawler Block, The islands are

focuted close to a major structucal line (Fig. L.

inset), believed to be a Fuule zone. which essen-

tially delineates the west coast of Eyre Penin-

sula und which ts still aetive (Sulton & White

L964: Doyle, Everington & Sutton L968). This

submarine extension of the Gawler Block is

delimited to the north by the Polda Basin. a

sedimentary trough some 1500 m in depth, and

to the south by the Duntroon Basin (Smith &

Kammerling 1969; Woptner 1969), though the

luull zone evidently continues beyond these

both to the northwest und to the southeast. Por

instunce earthquake epieentres have been

recorded to the southeast beyond the Duntroon

Basin (Sutton & White 1948). To the north-

west the structural line continues in the june-

tion of the Eucla Basin and Gawler Block,

though it is noteworthy that earthquake epi-

centres have not so far been recorded between

the Investigator Group und the coust te the

natthwest (Sutton & White 1968)

This NW-SE structural (rend is also reflected

in the oullines of Pearson and other ishiuids of

the Investigator Group. In addition. u set of

fractures it right angles to this is prominent

(Fig. 1), Whether these two sets of fractures

are Taults. and part of a primary shear pattern,

or secandary shears related to the nearby fault

zone, or merely major joints the pattern of

Which is determined by the same stresses which

ire responsible for the regional tectonic frame-

work, is not known.

DitAILED Morr roiwoay

The detailed morphology of each of the

islands is related principally to joipt patterns,

of which two may be distinguished.

1. Sheer sirrverures The first and most sip

fleant systems of joints comprise numerous

Nat-lying or gently curvilinear fraetures which

subdivide the rock into massive sheeis (Fig. 3)

= Department of Geography. University of Adelaide. Adehuide. S. Aust, 3000,

Trans, Roy, Soc, S, Aust, Vol. 95, Part 3, 15th October 197]

124 C. R. TWIDALE

INVESTIGATOR GROUP

x /

\ he

North Hill-\

(200 m.) NO

Hill 781

(240 m.)

~ East Hill ( 200m.)

NORTH SECTION

PEARSON ISLAND

floodway —

MIDDLE

SECTION

\ SOUTH SECTION

VETERAN ISLES

limestone nN

_____ _— major fractures

INVESTIGATOR

GROUP

DUNTROON

DOROTHEE BASIN

eel

\uy

Fig. 1. Pearson Archipelago, showing (inset) location and (main map) suggested major joints, minor

joint patterns, and depositional features.

GFOMORPHOLOGY

PEARSON ISLAND

VETERAN

ISLES DOROTHEE

NORTH SOUTH

—

MIDDLE SECTION

ia sheet structure

. Sie

platform

alveolar & cavernous weathering

NORTH SECTION

Fig. 2.

Phillips.)

Sheet structures dominate Pearson Island, espe-

cially the northern section, and are particularly

well exposed in the coastal sections between

Hill 78! and middle section, where the struc-

tures clearly dip toward the NW-SE trending

major fractures postulated earlier.

Sheet structures can be regarded as having

developed in one of two ways, Some would

maintain that the dome-like character of Pear-

son and other adjacent islands is due to the

joint pattern in the underlying granite (Harris

Fig. 3

discontinuous debris cover on middle slopes.

Fig. 4

North Creek. (Photo C. R, Twidale.)

Fig. 4. Cavernous forms (tafeni) on underside

(Photo C, R. Twidale.)

Fig. 7

them; southeast coast of north section.

ders, South section in the distance.

View of Pearson Archipelago from upper slopes of Hill 781, looking south. (Photo Keith P.

1888; Merrill 1897; Twidale 1964, 1971), but

others would ayer that it is the domed form of

the residuals which causes the arched fractures

to develop (see e.g. Gilbert 1904; Soen 1965).

Protagonists of the latter viewpoint, known as

the offloading or pressure-release hypothesis,

point out that the mere appearance of granite

ut the Jand surface argues massive erosion, and

hence unloading and release of pressure. They

interpret the curvilinear joints associated with

sheet structure as tangential fractures deve-

Hill 781, north section, showing massive sheet structure, bouldery outcrops. and thin and

(Photo C, R. Twidale.)

Slightly flared slopes and wedges of rock exposed on sheeting plane, headwater region of

of flatlying joints, north end of middle section.

Gently curved sheet structures in granite. with calcareous deposits resting unconformably on

Note the trickle of water at the unconformity boul-

(Phato C, R. Twidale.)

GEOMORPHOLOGY 127

loped purullel to the lund surface in response

tu radial release of stress. In these terms the

geometry of the joints is determined by the

shape of the land surface.

In respect of the very similar features dis-

played hy the insetbergs of northwestern Fyre

Peninsula, it has been suggested that it is struc-

ture which is the first develaped and which

guides the shaping of the land surface ( Twidale

1$64, 1971), This argument rests on various

lines of evidence Which indicate that the rocks

which form the inselbergs are in compressivan

Thus. survival of the residuals. and the deve-

lopment of sheet structures, are both regarded

as manifestations of the same stresses, Fea-

hires such as A-tents, though their precise

ecnesis is obscure, surely result from com-

pression and subsequent release of pressure

within the rack muss [Tennings & Twidale

1971),

Two of the several Features observed else-

where antl regarded is indicating that the

sheeting is due to compressive stress occur on

Pearson Island. The dip of the sheet struc-

tures stespens quite. abruptly as they approach

major vertical joints (Fig, 3). Also, on the

underside of the exposed edges of sheets are

displayed wedges which are (riangular in crass

secon and which ate believed to be duc to

differential movement along the fracture planes

in response to arching (Fig. 4).

2. Orthogenal jointx; The second set of

joints, of subsidiary importance, comprises

\hree sets of planar fractures disposed more-

or-less at right angles to each other, thus effec

lively subdividing the tock into cubic, quac-

Tangular wr trhomboidal blocks. This is the

arthogonal joint system, The orientation of

the vertical joints varies markedly within the

archipelago (Fig. 1). In some areas, as. for

example, on the west side of North Hill on

Pearson Island, these minor joints run parallel

to segments of the major fracture ‘pattern: but

elsewhere they are aligned nblique to the

framework. and in some focalities thew are

curved in plan, as on the southern extremity

of the north section of Péarsan Island. These

joints have been exploited by weathering and

the joint blocks are mere or less rounded,

There is on the Investigator Group evidence

that some of these boulders originited ox core-

stones beneuth the land surface {sce Twidule

1971, pp. 20-25). On lower slopes same

rather irregular masses of cohesive vock are

set im eruss bul many of the boulders umd

sets.

blocks on the upper slopes cauld hive deve-

loped in another way, for not all blocks and

boulders on the islands derive from the systeni

of orthogonal joint blocks. On exposure the

massive sheets of granite, 23 m thick, break

dewn into blocks morphologically {dentical

with those of the orthogonal systens, But they

can be distinguished from the Jutter by the

inclination of the neur vertical joints; they are

formed by the development of fractures normal

ta the gently dipping joint planes which deli-

neste the sheet structure and hence are out of

vertical, Such blocks derived from the dis-

integration of shect structure are especially

common in the coustal areas of the Investigator

Group. They are comparable to the grouped

blocks related to sheet structure noted on the

Everard Ranges of northern South Australia

(Twidale 1971. p. 40).

The blocks exposed near the coast, and being

quarried out by Wave attack, are angular, but

those on the middle and upper slopes of the

inselbergs. ag an East atid North Hills, having

heen long exposed to the elements, are essen-

tally rounded.

But whether derived fram sheets or from

orthogonal joint blocks, the form of the latter

is directly related ta the geometry of the joint

In particular, turrets are developed, as on

East Hill, where the joint blocks are elongated

in a veetical sense,

Other minor forms of interest are displayed

on the granite bedrock, In several localities

fiared slopes huve developed. Good examples

are displayed af an elevation of 260-300 m on

Hill 781, in the headwater region of Nonh

Creek; on the southeastern lower slopes af

middle section. just northwest af the largest

and on the

beach on the islands (Fig. 3):

¢, ee REM |

Cie 2 NN \

Thi ey N\

ay ie Ke

Fig. 4

Fleld aketch of flared slope marginal to

mayer joint-controlled cleft, middle sec-

lion

southeastern slopes of north section. These

occur where the bedrock is. especially massive,

and as a result of strong subsurface weathering

by moisture and subsequent exposure of the

weathering front (see Twidale 1962). They

occur where soil or rock debris, which retains

moisture, has previously accumulated but has

now been evacuated, On some of the flares

und other sleep granite slopes, shallow grooves

(Granitrillen, see Twidyle 1971, pp, 89-90) ire

incipiently developed.

The undersides of the margins of tock sheets

and many boulders, particularly those at higher

elevations, display tafon? or cavernous hollows

(Figs, 2. 6). The origin of these features is

obscure but probably involves two contributory

processes, First, granite which is exposed to the

atmosphere is in dry climates less susceptible

to weathering than that which is exposed ta

moisture (twidale 1962, Wabrhaftig 1965),

Moreover, in several climatic environments,

though particularly in wrid regions, a thin but

resistant laver of complex character, rich in

oxides of Fe, Mn. Si und Al, forms a resistant

cnerustation on exposed bedrock surfaces

(Hooke, Houng-¥i Yang & Weiblen 1969).

This. is the so-called desert varnish, or case

hardening. On Pearson Island this is present

though not well developed. Second. moisture

retained along joint planes, or in soil or debris

accumuUlotiuns, causes pronounced disintegra-

tion of the lower sides of joint blocks and sheet

structure, The hollow so formed expands in

ways Lot yet understood, though flaking and

granwar disintegration of the rock are involved

(sce Twitale 1971, pp. 43-44). But the tough

Cc. R. TWIDALE

Oulercuse is weathered less rapidly and so

tefoni yre formed,

Thus, the major and most common sand

lorms. observed on Pearson Island are related

to the nature, structure and weuthering of the

granite bedrock, The other landlorms dis.

pluyed are associated with the oceanic setting

of the inselbergs.

Coastal Features

The coastal landforms of Pearson Island and

other members of the Investigator Group are

largely determined by the structure of the pra-

nite exposed pt the shore. On the west-facing

Cousts, Mhussive erosion has heen so pronounced

that the lower, inclined sheet structures have

been worn away, and the dominant hedding

planes exposed in high precipitous cliffs arc

horizontal (Fig, 4), In sheltered coves and

on. the evst coast however, dipping curvilinear

sheets dominate many stretches of the shore

(Fig. 7).

Joints are exploited by wave attack. and

major joint zones have been eroded to form

decp clefts or geos, as for instance on Dorothee

(Fig. 1),

Shore platforms in the intertidal zone are

few and narrow, and are found on the western

shores where mitjor joints uré horizontal and

exploitable by wave attack, But deep quarry-

ing by hig waves is also active here, and such

intertidal features are worn back at the expense

of the deeper submarme ultimate platform. On

the east coust, sheet structure determines the

coustal morphology and mitigates against the

formation of horizontal of near-horizontal plat-

forms.

lerrace of lime indurated sands

had

. a ee SE e—=—=

ee ot a Oe oe ~ gon

eS ——— ——— —~_ a a — — iw as =

geo NSS SA cae NS pe es Se

wep oO AS Bes Se oe Re EE.

. a

yes

Tig. 6.

Tield sketch of lime-indurated Bape ai southem extremity of north section.

in granite and rudimentary strati

Note boulders

cation due ta development of layers of calerete.

GEOMORPHOLOGY 129

Other coagsty! features on Pearson Istund

were developed in relation to different stands

of the sea, Over considerable areas of the

eastemm slopes On the isiund the granite bed.

rock is covered with limestone (Fig. 1), Cross-

bedding indicates its acolian origin though cal-

crete is devcloped at. and indeed forms the

upper sucfuce of, the outcrops. The height of

the base of the limestone in which granite

rubble is common yanes [rom site to site, In

addition colluvial deposits, possibly washed

downslope during Winter rains, merge with the

aeolian sediments and tongue up valleys as for

instance on middle section. Minor karst feu-

tures—solution cups, fretting, lapiés—are deve-

lope on these limestone outcrops,

Aeolianite is widespread om and behind the

coasts of southern Australia, It consists of

sand blown From beaches and the emerged sea

floor into coastal Joredunes. Most of the sand

is Of quartz but calcareous shell fragments were

included and these pounded to lime which

subsequently indurated the sands, In several

places along the South Australium coast aeolia-

nite extends below sealevel, and according to

Sprge (1965) it has been found at depths of

50 m below sealevel nenr the mouth of St.

Vincent Gulf, indicating « sealevel at least that

much lower at the time of ils deposition All

the available evidence indicates that aeclianive

formed during slicig? phases of the Pleisto-

cene, when sealevel was lower than it is at pre-

seat.

Coastal foredunes must have accumulated

all around the lower slopes of Pearson Island,

just as they id around and over similar crys-

talline residuals at the southwestern extremity

of Yorke Peninsula. However, remnants of

the outcrops of acolinite are preserved only in

cust cast sttuations, It may be that it was

farmed on the western side of the islands and

has heen completely eroded by strong wave

attack, Alternatively, the emerged seabed

hewten the islands and Eyre Peninsula pro-

bably provided a richer source of debris than

the ured to the west, which, depending on the

Uceree of emergence, probably remained sub-

merged in lurge meusure,

Although the winds of the glactal periods

were, le judge [rom the distribution of acolian-

ite dunes on the coast of southern Australia as

a whole, dominantly westerly, sante. smaller.

foredunes accumulated tn eust coasl. situations

under the influence of the occasional easterlies

(sce 6.2. Jennings 1957).

The acotianite deposits have been jnmcated

so (hat dune forms ure no longer visible. The

dunes have been etoded and gently Soping ter-

races capped by calerete formed an them (Fig.

7). The outer or lower limit of the terraces

stands some 6-9 m above preset high tide

level. These ferraces are not ceniparuble co

shore platforms, for they lack the horizontality

of such features. They could have been eroded

by wash grading to a higher sevlevel, though

A stent sept a b

Seairyel

i shove opi! secieval

a Tjynore ar't!

Fig. & Diagram illustrating how coastal reces-

sion aifects projected elevation of top and

base of alluvial deposits and interpreta-

tion of former sealevels.

(Fig. 9) Beeause the sunface is inclined, the

evel of the sca to which the aggradation can

be rebulecd depends with the amount of coastal

erosion that has taken place. However, on the

sheltered eastern shores, where the deposits are

preserved, coastal recession has probably not

been matked and the figures cited may be

taken as significant.

An alternative explunutiun rs that the ter-

riuces were Originally horizontal platforms

eroded by marine jgencies (waves plus

weathering), that after emergence calcrete

formed below the (terrace surface coincident

with a sloping water table, and that subse-

quently the Joose friable sands above the pedo-

genic lime have been removed, stabilising the

surfice at the upper limit of the calcrete. If

this is so a slightly higher stand of the sea is

indicated (possibly 7-L0 m above present), for

the upper, rather than the lower, elevation of

ihe terrace remnants is diagnostic

Comparison with adjacent areas is not

rewarding. In view of the regional setting of

the Investigator Group, verticul movements of

the crust are possible, though in the short time

period under consideration they are unlikely to

exceed the vertical range of activity of marine

processes. This last cs the real difficulty. On

southwestetn Yorke Peninsuis the sea is at pre-

sent active through a vertical range of perhaps

12-13 m, and platforms haye developed at

various elevations within this range, Even if it

fs taken that the terraces on Pearson Island are

basically of marine origin, there is vo means of

130 C, R. TWIDALE

determining where they stund in relation to

high tide, low tide or mean scalevel. If how-

ever they are taken us grading to a specific and

higher sealevel, then they are evidence of 2

stand of the sea 6-9 m above present.

Acknowledgements

Grants in support of the Expedition were

kindly made by the Department of Fisheries

and Fauna Conservation and the Royil Society

of South Australia.

References

Dorce, H. A., EvertincHam, L B.. & Sutton, D, J.

(1968),.—Seismicity of the Australian contin-

ent. Journ. geol. Sac. Aust?, 15, 295-312.

Gitparr, GK. (1904).—Domes and dome struc-

ture of the High Sierra. Bull. geal Soc. Amer.

15, 29-36,

Harris, G. F. (1888)——"Granite and our granite

industries.” (Crosby Lockwood: London).

Hooke, R,. LEB... HounGc-¥r Yano, & WEIRLEN,

P. W. (1969),—Desert varnish: an electron

probe study. Jour. Geol, 77, 275-288.

Jennincs, J. N. (1957).—On the orientation of

parabolic or U-dunes. Geagr. J. 123, 474-480.

Jenninas, 1. N., & Twipate, C. R. (1971 ).—Ori-

gin and implications of the Atent, a minor

granite landform. Aust. Geogr, Studies. %

41-53,

Merete, G. P, (1897).—'Treatise on Rocks,

Weathering. and Soils.” (Maemillan: London).

SmerH, R., & KAMMERLING, P. (1969).—Geo-

logical framework of the Great Australian

Bight. Jowr, Aust. Petroleum Explor. Assoc.

9, 60-66.

SoEN, Oew ING (1965). Sheeting and exfoliation

in the granites of Sermasoq. South Green-

land, Med. Groin. 179 (6). .

Sprics, R. C, (1965).—-Sea floar sedimentation in

St. Vincents Gulf and its approaches. Abs.

Sec, VY. ANZAAS. 38th Congress (Hobart).

Surrom, D. J.. & Wire, R. E. (1968)—tThe

seismicity of South Australia. Jour, geol. Soe.

Austr, 18, 25-32,

Twipace. C. R. (1962).—Steepened margins of

inselbergs fram northwestern Lyre Peninsula,

South Australia. Zedtschr. f. Geomorph. (N.S.)

6, 51-69,

Twipa.e, C. R. (1964).—Contribution to the

general theory of domed. inselbergs. Con-

clusions derived from observations in South

Australia, Tras, & Papers Inyt. Brit, Geogr.

34, 91-113.

Twipace, C, R. (1968a).—"“Geomorphology, with

special reference lo Australia.” (Nelson:

Melbourne. )

Twibae, C. R. (1968b).—Origin of Wave Rock,

Hyden, Western Australia. Trans. R. Soc. S,

Austr. 92, 115-123.

TwipaLe, C. R. (1971 ).—*Struetural Landforms.”

(A.N.U. Press: Canberra. )

WanrRiArTiGc, C. (1965).—Stepped topography of

the Southern Sicrra Nevada. Bull geal. Soc.

Amer. 76, 1165-1190.

Worrner, H. (1969) —Deposilional history and

tectonics of South Australia Sedimentary

basins. Sympos. Devel. Petroleum Resources

Asia.and Far East, Canberra 1969. 6.C\A.ELE.

Paper Doc Land NR/PR 4/57, 28 p.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 3. CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE

LAND FLORA

BY D. E. SYMON

Summary

Further additions to the Fungal, Moss and Angiosperm flora of Pearson Islands are presented,

including a first list of plants from Dorothee Island. A brief account is given of the sex ratios of

Casuarina stricta Ait. Comparisons of photographs taken after an interval of 46 years are made for

8 sites on Pearson Island.

PEARSON [ISLAND EXPEDITION 19 69, — 3, CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE

LAND FLORA

by D. EB. Symon*

Summary

further additions to the Fungal, Moss and Angiosperm flora of Pearson Islands are presented,

inetuding a first fisc of plants from Dorothee Island,

Comparisons of pholographs taken after an interval of 46 years are made for

Cusuarinag stricta Ait.

Sosites. on Pearson Island.

Introduction

The first expedition to the Pearson Jslands

wis from the Sth to 12th January 1923. During

this time a collection of 52 species of vascular

plants wus made (Oshorn 1923), The author

noted that it was probably incomplete as far

as herbaceous plunis ure concerned.

The second major collection (Specht 1969)

was made hy Specht between 10th and 23rd

February 1960, Every effort was. made to

obtain a camplete collection of ypecics so that

this could be compared with the original 1923

list, He presented a comparison of the two

collections in his Appendix I and brought the

nomenclature up to date, Specht was able to

aud 9 species not collected by Osborn hut was

unable to collect 10 species previously found,

These omissions are nearly all annuals such ws

Triglochin muelleri, Bulbinopsis semibarhata,

Vulpia hromoides, though it did include a few

shrubs (e.g. Wentringia rigid) or perennials

(tg, Nicotiana suaveolens). Specht’s visit was

slightly later in the year than the first one and

this could account for some of these ommis-

sions,

No effort was made during the 1969 expe

dition to make a third comprehensive collection

of all plants on the island, Instead uw selec-

tive collection was made of any apparent new

records und a number of soi) scrapes were

brought back with the intention of germinating

any seeds present. It was hoped that a num-

her of small ephemerals might be grown that

would normally have died by January.

Twenty sumples of surface soil from vaned

sites Were collected into plastic bags, On

return to Adelaide, and after picking out the

coarser material the soil way spread on the

surface of sterilised soil and lightly covered

with peat moss. A second sowing of selected

samples was also made by Dr. Hj. Eichler a

A brief account is given of the sex ratios of

yeur later, who obtained all the species found

in the first sowing and added at least two more.

All the scrapes produced some plants, with

dense germination in several samples, Some

species Occurred repeatedly in the collections.

A pium prostratin i 12, Parietaria dehilis: (not

previously recorded) in 6, Plerttago varia in 7,

Wulpia bromoides in 6, Agrastixs avenacea in 7,

Hydrecotyle camacurpa (not previously

recorded) in 4, and these species are obviously

widespread. It is possible that if the soil

sumples were given more yaried conditions for

the germination of the seeds they contain, e.g.

flooding or a tange of temperatures, that yet

more species may be grown, as some annuals

known to be present, eg. Cenrrolipsiy spp.

Sonchus sp. have not been germinated to date,

All specimens af Angiosperms have been

deposited in Herbarium ADW.

Additions to the Flora of Pearson Island

Fungi. During the 1949 Expedition the fol-

lowing Fungi were collected. All have been

identified by Dr. P. H. B. Talbot and deposited

at the Waite Agricultural Research Institute,

Bavista brunnea Berk,

Geuastrum fenestriatum (Pers.) Fischer

Geasrrum velutinuin (Morgan) Fischer

Mycenastrum coriun {Cuers.) Desv

Fames sp.

Musci, The following mosses were collected

and have all been identified by Mr. L. D-

Williains of Meningie; specimens are depostled

in the State Herbarium (AD),

Barbula australasiae (Hook, & Grey.) Bria.

(Symon 183),

Bryum caumpylothecium Tayl, (Symon 170,

174, 177, 180, 184),

Bryan pachyrheca CM. (Synion 172, 175).

Campylopus introflexus (Hedw,) Mitt.

(Symon (70, 173, 179),

"Waite Agricultural Research Tnstiiute. Glen Osmond. 8, Aust. 3064.

Trans. Ruy, Soc. S, Avst, Vol. 95. Parf 3. 151th October 1971.

R. Br. Rhagedia buceata (Lubill.) Mog,

{32 hb, FB. SYMON

Fabronia depiura (Tayl.) Broth (Syvren

178, 182).

Grimuinia ldevivata (Brid.) Brid. (Syren

181).

Sematophyllum hemomattunte (Ape) Broth.

(Symon 177),

fortella calycine (Schwuegt.) Dix. (Synion

17t,)

Triquetrella papillata CH. J. & W.) Broth.

(Synion 176).

Anviospermy.

Zosterucene. Aerterozostera fasmanica (Mar-

tens) Wen Hartog, collected by Mrs. J.

Watson at North Bay at 26-27 m (85-90 ft.)

deep.

Posidoniuceac, Posidonre australis Hooker f.,

collected by Mrs, J, Watson at North Bay

ut 15 m (450 ft. deep).

Euphorbiaceae, Beveria levchenaultit. (DC,)

Buill,

Primuloceae, Samolus repens {Forst,) Pers.

Gentianacese. Erythraee australis R. Br.

Solanaceae. Solar aigeun L.

Records fran germinations from soil.

Urticaccue, Parietaria dedbilis G. Forst.

Caryophyltucene. Minwartia sp. (not yet iden-

tified). Sagina apetale Ard. Sagina mari-

dina Don ex Sm. & Sow. Spergularia sp.

(not yet identified),

Brassicaceae, Hyrmenolahuy procunbens (1...)

Nuttall ex Shinz, & Thell,

Apiaceve (Umbelliferae). [/yelroceryle como-

carpa F. Muell, Daueus gloelidiatus

(Labill,) Fisch, Mey, et Avé-Lall,

Rubiacewe. Gali mnurale (L.) Ald.

Asteraceac (Compositac), Brachysconre ibert-

difalia Benth. Cetula vulgaris Levins. Gne-

phatinn dwolucratum Forst. £. Senecio mini-

muy var. picridivides (Turee.) Belcher.

Serertina mueller? Sond.

Records from Dorethee.

The following plants were collected from

the southern island of Dorothce and constitute

the first list of plants from that isfand.

Poaceae (Gramineac). Agropyron ycabruu

(Labill.) Benuy. Agrostiv avenucer Gmelin.

“Distichlis diytichephvila CLabill,) Fassett,

Liliaceae. Buylhinopsiv semiberbain (KR. Bre)

Borzi. Dianella revoluta R. Be.

Urticaceae. Parieraria debitis G, Forst,

Chenopodiaceae, Atriplex cinerea Poly, Atrl-

plex palndave Ro Ae Enchylaera tomeriova

Rhagodia crassifolia RK, Bro Threlkeldia

diffusa R. Br.

Aivoucese. Carpobrorus aequilarerus (Haw.)

N. E. Brown.

N. E.. Brown,

(Miq.) Hook. |.

Portulacaceac, Calandrinia calyptrata Hook. f-

Caryophyllaceue. Sagine maritima Bon ex

Sm, & Sow. Seleratthus pungens R- Br.

Spergularia sp, (not yet identified)

Brassicaceae (Cruciferae). Aymenolvbus prv-

cumbeny (L.) Nuttall ex Sching, & Thell,

Lepidium foliosum Desv,

Displeyme australe CA)

Terragonia amplexicoma

Mimosaceae, “Albizzia laphanthau (Willd,)

Benth.

Geraniaceae, Pelargonium fitterdle Hucgel.

“yeophyllaceae. Nitraria schoberi 1,

Rutaceae, Correa reflexa var. corlacea Wilson.

Supindacewe. Dodonaea viseosa Jucg,

Malvaceae, Luvatera plebela val. lomentosa

Hook. f.

Prankeniaceac. Frankenia pauciflora DC.

Apiaceae (Umbelliferac). Aplin prosiranun

Labill, ex Vent. Hydrocotyle comocarpu F,

Muell,

Epacriducege, Leacopogzon parviflorus ( Andr.)

Lindl.

Solanaceae. Lyciumt australe F. Muell. Nicro-

rune maritime Wheeler.

Plantaginaceac, Plantago varia R. Br. sens.

lat,

Asteraceae (Compositue).

hrawnii (Cass.) F. Muell.

FL Muell.

ex Benth,

Calocephalus

Ixlolaena supina

Olearia axillaris (DC) B. Muell,

Senecio lautis Forst. £. ex Willd.

Disrichlis distichophyvia and Albizzia lophan-

tha have not Yel been found an Pearson Island

and are new records for the group of islands.

Vhe vecurrence of A/bizzia wos ol particular

interest as nowhere is it now conimon on the

mainland and the dense stand here in a ravine

like gully may be a reflection of the freedom

from grazing chat the island stall enjoys.

Although no quantitative measurements. were

made, several species were obviously wide-

spread (e.g. Nicotiana muaritinia, Triolaena

supine), and these too may reflect the [reedorn

fram grazing. Tt is suggested that detailed cco-

logical studies of comparable areas on the two

islands (Pearson and Dorothee) would be inte-

resting and may reflect the influence of the

wallabies on the vegetation

CONTRIBUTIONS TO

Sex Ratios of Caynarina stricta Ait

This species of Casuarina is dioecious ond

reprodices mainly if not entirely trom seeds:

rool suckers common in some spectes of

Cayuaring are rarely seen. It is considered to

be sexually norntal und not to produce apo-

mictic seeds (B.A. Barlow. personal comouni-

cation). Sex ratios have not previously been

reported. The species is Common and well

developed on Hill 781 forming a woodland of

trees 6-8 mm (20-25 feet) high. An example may

be seen in Fig. S though not taken on Hill

781. The male trees never bear cones though

some lurve gulls can be mistaken for cones hy

the ineXperienced observer. ‘The Female trees

retain muny relatively large cones (about 3 x 3

em) which are reacily seen. Tt was such trees

that were counted and it should be mored that

a tree without cones world have been counted

as mule.

A count was mide of the cone hearing trees

growing slong the slope from the shoulder

ybove North Bay to the summit of Hill 781.

The method was lo inspect all the trees close

lo a point on the transect.

Site Trees Trees

hearing without

cones cones

I. Neu the lowest point on the

shoulder ia 13

» One third up the slope 1 12

4) About bulfway up the slope 4 ad

4. Towards lop of the slope 16 3

S, Jusp below and about the

Upper boulder masses, near

the sunnit P| 12

6. Uppermost trees 3 15

The fizures show ain overall sex ratio of 79

female trees to 109 male trees und they suggest

an inercase in the punmber of male trees with

increusine height above sea level und exposure

to the elements, If exposure is stunifiewnt in

uffecine the survival or fertiity of the female

frees it May uceount for the rather high count

of teniule trees at site 5 which was at the base

of, and to some esteor in. the lee of the massive

wranite Outerop and therefore in a more pro-

tected site

Changes in the Vepetalion 1423-1969

During the 1923 expedition T..G. B. Osborn

took f number of phatogriphs of various parts

of Pearson Island and made notes on the vexe-

talion of each site. The negatives. prints and

notes have all been preserved. 1fforts. were

made in 1969 to réephotograph as many at

THE LAND FLORA 133

these sites as precisely as possible and to exi-

mine them for signs of vegetational change in

the intervening 46 vears. Sixteen sites were

rephotographed und a selection of 8 pairs af

comparisons is presented here, Reference cin

be made to Twidale (1971) for «w description

und map of Pearson Island.

Discussion

Some of the most obvious changes on the

Island. occurring in the absence of rabbits.

sheep and permanent occupilion by man, have

been:

I. The great

dying trees.

2, Considerable

yiricla (ees.

3. The widespread advance of dense Atriplex

stunds ait i muimber of sites.

4. The reduction ta bare ground and in annul

and short lived species like Semecra fates

ond 4 pire prosmraran.

The reduction in medium sized shrubs such

as Qlearid, Levcopogan, and Rihapedict.

The great increase in Afriplen al a number

of sites can hardly be due to such biotic factors

is the trampling of seals or the effect of pen-

wuin rookeries as suggested by Specht (1969).

The changes may perhaps be due to slow, long

term succession probably triggered by a cutis-

trophe such as fire or drought. Some signs of

old tires in the form of chareoal or burnt

stumps were Visible on the Tshind. Substantial

changes in grazing pressure could oceur if the

Wallaby population changed very much but as

the inerease in Arriplex in particular has also

ocewrred On South section as well as north sec-

Lion and the former has been free of Wallabies.

this seems un unlikely explanatioir,

After a fire one could expect much bare

eround, perhaps scorched and deudl trees. fal-

lowed by subsequent invasions by annuals and

short dived shrubs whieh gradually give phice

to longer lived shrubs, and ihe accumulation

of dry matter finully precipitating further fire

hazards. Such eveles can be seen on the main-

land even in relatively aril wreas wid seem a

possible explanation af the very greal changes

that have occurred on this virgin site. The

effeets. of seasonal or eyelic climatic change

or the effects of varying number of wallables.

penguins and seals ure not known.

The original negatives und annotated prints

hy Professor T. G. B, Oshorp are deposited in

the Botany Department of the University of

Adeliide aud were kindly made available by

Professor Osborn, The 1969 photogruphs will

reduction im dead wood and

changes in the C'esterisra

134 Db. BE. SYMON

rae ~&

“Sas Ae

Fig. |. Ain 1923, Bin 1969, Middle section from the sandy landing place, looking

northwest to the summit. The Asriplex cinerea in the foreground has

obviously become denser and the shrubberies at the base of the granite

outcrops have been greatly reduced.

Fig.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LAND FLORA

[ Cee

>. A in 1923, B in 1969. North Bay on north section. from near the summit

of East Hill.

There appears to be a reduction in dead timber, and this was also

evident by inspection at other pluces on the Islands, There bas been ulmos!

complete removal of the dead and dying Melalenca along the small creek-

line in the centre valley. There has been an increase in the Afriplex

paliudosa (pale) and a reduction in Rhagodia crassifolia (dark), Compare

these also with the next pair of photographs.

135

136 O. F SYMON

Fig. 3. A in 1923, B in 1969. From the slope aboye North Bay, looking east to

the base of East Hill.

The Melaleuca to be seen in the earlier photograph has now almost

completely disappeared except for a litthe dead wood. The great reduction

in Rhagodia crassifolia (dark hummocks) and the filling of open ground

hy Aviplex paludosa is evident. The more erect dark shrubs in the fore-

ground of 3B are Arthrocnemum halognemoides,

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LAND FLORA

A in 1923. B in 1969. From the slope above Eastern Cove looking up the

slope to the col joining East Hill with Hill 781, Professor T. G. B. Osborn

comments that the site has rapid drainage and much bare ground. See

also the two previous photographs. Owing to different camera fields, the

right hand edge of the 1923 photograph could not be included in the

1969 photograph. Note the almost complete replacement of the sprawling

Rhagodia crassifolia (dark mounds) by the now dense Arthrosvnemum

hilocnemoides, the great reduction of open ground, the increase in Atriplex

paludosa on the right and the reduction in number of Casuarina stricta

trees on the skyline.

137

(aK

D, EL SYMON

A in 1923. B in 1969. North section looking towards the summit of East

Hill from the col joining East Hill and Hill 781. The marked reduction in

dead wood is evident in the foreground and the middle distance, There

has been a loss of the larger shrubs, e.g. the one (Melalenca lanceoluta? )

growing on the large rounded boulder in the middle distance. though the

Correa rubra, a little to the right. survives. There has been considerable

advance in the Atriplex paluciosa which is not visible in the earlier photo-

graph and which has largely replaced the Rhagodia crassifolia in the fore-

ground. There has been a considerable change in the tree population of

Casuarina stricta though some individuals can he recognised. e.g, the tree

in front of the central split tor, and the tree to the left of the middle tor

now leaning and partly hidden in the 1969 photograph),

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LAND FLORA

Fiz. 6 A im 1923, B in 1969, Middle section, looking northwest lo the summit

up from the calearenite plateau, From the foreground Professor T. G. B.

Osborn lists Senecio lnurus, Apiim prostatum, Enchyvlaena tomentosa and

Lepidium follosym, and the bare ground is also evident. These shrubs

have been almost completely replaced by dense 4 triplex cinerea, This was

one of the most striking examples of the increase in 4/riplex on the Island.

139

10 DB. F. SYMON

Fig. 7, A in 1923, B in 1969. Middle section, northeast edge of the calcurenite

plateau looking W to the summit. The changes listed under Fig. 6 are all

evident here. In addition, the Olearia ramulosa growing at the junction

of the calcarenite and the granite has largely disappeared and there has

been a general reduction in shrubs. The lichen patterns seen on the main

granite masses have possibly increased in the foreground. Where did the

large rock present on the middle left skyline in 1969 come from?

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LAND FLORA

Fig. & A in 1923, B in 1969. North section, lower slopes of East Hill from the

south. The rather open stand of Atriplex palidosa in the foreground is

now very dense, The QOlearia, Leucopogen and Correa shrubs on the

slope have beeq reduced and invaded by Afriplex, The Casuarina trees

on the skyline have been reduced though same (such as the large dense

tree lo the right in 1923) may persist as a spurse relic in 1969. Almost

all the trees at the base of the large low rocks in the centre have gone.

142 D, F. SYMON

be added to the collection. The availability of

these relatively early, well annotated photo-

graphs, and the island’s freedom from sheep,

rabbits and stock make Pearson Island an

almost unique site in South Australia for the

study of long term natural changes in the flora,

and every effort should be made to keep inter-

ference by man in the islands to a minimum.

Acknowledgements

I am most grateful for the assistance of the

Department of Fisheries and Fauna Conserva-

tion and the Council of the Royal Society of

South Australia in enabling me to take part in

this Expedition. and also to Professor T. G. B.

Osborn for letting me have access to his film

negatives and original notes from the 1923

Expedition.

References

Osporn, IT. G. B. (1923).—The flora and fauna

of Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator

Group, No. 8. The ecology of Pearson

Islands. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 47, 97-118.

Specut, R. L. (1969).—The Vegetation of the

Pearson Islands. South Australia; a re-

examination, February, 1960. Trans. R. Soc.

S. Aust. 93, 143-152.

Twinace, C. R. (1971).—Pearson Island Expedi-

tion 1969.—2. Geomorphology. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust, 95, 123-130.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 4. THE PEARSON ISLAND

WALLABY

BY I. M. THOMAS AND L. B. DELROY

Summary

A brief account is given of some aspects of the habits and population structure of the Pearson Island

Wallaby, derived from observations made during visits to the islands in 1920, 1960, 1968 and 1969,

and also from observations made on groups of captive animals on the mainland of South Australia.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPRDITION 19469,— 4, THE PEARSON ISLAND WALLABY

hy T M. THomas* and L. B, Detrovt

Summary

A brief xuccount is given of some aspects of the habits and population structure of the Pearson

Island Wallaby, derived from observations made during visits to the islands in 1920, 1960, 1968 and

1969, and slso trom observations made on groups of cuptive animals on the munland of South

Australia

Introduction

It has been known from the earliest duvs. of

colonisation of South Australia that there were

wallabies on Pearson Island. This 7s because,

uirlike their maintand caunterparts, they are not

crepuscular in habit but spend a considerable

part of the daylight hours out in the open, with

individuals often perched on the tops af rocky

eminences where they could he observed. from

passing ships. It is, then, perhaps surprising

that it was not until 1922 that they were first

described and named. The islands are indeed

somewhat inhospitable, as they have no per-

manent fresh water and are not easy to land

on. They are unsuitable for grazing sheep.

and, since several other islands off the western

shores of South Australia have satisfactory pas-

ture, the Pearson Islands have been left largely

undisturbed

Taxonomy

In November, 1920, some specimens were

collected by Professor F. Wool Jones. Of

these, a pelt and a skull were sent to Mr. Old-

fiek! Thomas at the British Museum, He

(Thomas 1922) described them as u new spe-

cies. Peirosule pearson’. He considered it to

be clase to P. hacketti Thomas, 1905 fram

Mondrain sand Coombe Islands of the

Recherche Archipelago and P. /aterulis Gould.

1842 from the western coastline of Australin.

the Northern Territery and the McDonnell

Runges, The specific status of P. pearsant was

maintained by Wood Jones (1923 and 1924),

by Burrell & Le Soueff (1926), by Troughton

(1967) and others.

Marlow (1962) noted three subspecics of

P. lateralis, namely P. |. lateralis, P. 1, hacketti

and P, /, pearyoni. Th a letter to the senidr

author he said. “Tt is obvious that all these

three taxa are very closely related and at pre-

sent, to prevent unnecessary splitting, T felt 1

necessary to consider hoth hacker? and peur-

soni as insular subspecies of the mainland

lateralis." Yate (1948) merged P. lateralis

with P. penieiliata Griffith on the grounds, of

their very close cranial and dental resem-

blances. He listed P. p. penicillata Griffith, P

p. ferberti Thomas, P. p. lateralis Gould and

P. p. hackeiti Thomas. Presumably. lacking

material of pearseni for comparison, he did

not consider ity stutus, but Shurmun (L961) in

discussing the chromosomes of a range of mur-

supials, described those of PF. p. pearsant

Thomus. Aitken (1970) agrees with thts,

Ride (1970), discussing the nutive mammals

of Australia, is not concerned with them below

specific level, He distinguishes six species of

rock wallabies and in P. pericillata—the brush-

tailed rock wallabies—includes hackerti, her-

herti, inornata, lateralis, longmant, pearseni.

and wilkinsi. Of these he says. “although

recognisably different irom each other by

colour, probably represent no more than differ-

ent populations of a single species... which

occurs widely over much of Australia.”

It is clear from this that the detailed reli-

tionships of the rock wallabies is badly in need

of close study, particularly in the case of the

insular forms.

Kiology

Wood Jones (1923) noted, in more than one

visit to the islunds, tbat the wallabies occurred

only on the northernmost of the three sections

of Pearson Island, It is possible, at low

spring tides, to pass from the narth to the

middle section dry-shod with a littl “rock

hopping’. One can puss from the middle to

the south section dry-shod at any state of the

“Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000.

+Fisheries an! Fauna Conservation Department, Adelaide. S, Aust, S000

Trans. Koy. Soc. S. Aust, Vol. 95, Part 3, 15th October 1971,

ida

tide cxcept possibly in the roughest weather,

The 1960 expedition, led by the late Professor

T, Draper Campbell, of which the senior

author was « member, also noted the absence

of wallabies on the middle and south sections

and further that there were no traces of skele-

tual remains ner ol occupation of the several

caves on the south section by wallabies. It was

therefore concluded that the wallabies had

never inhabited the middle or south sections or,

at least, they had not done so for a very long

ume. This could not be because the middle

and south sections lacked the proper habitat or

food for the animals. The wallabies have heen

ebserved to feed frecly on several plants on

the north section, especially Lepiainnr feliosam

Desv,, Afriplex cinerea Poi. A. paludosa R.

Br. Rhagedia heecata (lahill.) Mog. und

Olewrin axtlaria (BC) P.v.M_ ex Benth. These

Plants offen 2raw toveyher in the same com-

munitics and are plentiful on the middle and

south sections (Specht 1969).

On the 1960 expedition, several wallabies

were catight on the north section and brought

back to the camp on the middle section. Were

they were kept in a wire netting coclosure

rowly for transport lo dhe mainland. The first

group coriprising four docs and one buck

escaped and Jater. one of unknown sea

escuped. In May 1968 one of us (1..B.D.)

visited the island for three days and estimated

that there were belween 50) and 1Stb wallabies

on the middle and south sections while on the

north section their numbers were in excess of

500. The senior author made an estimate of

500 to 600 on the north section in 1960.

The rough terrain and the tendency of many

of the wallabies to dispppenr inte crevices

when disturbed, together with the brief times

spent on the island by different expediticns,

muke even reusonuble estimates of the populs-

tion numbers extremely difficult, Wood Jones

(1924) talks of “compuratively Jarge numbers

in a limited area”, referring to the north sec-

lion, Perhaps the most uccurute estimation

for the wallaby population of the northern sec-

lion was mide on the 1969 expedition when 4

figure of about 800 was arrived at,

Tihle 1 shows the possible increase in num-

bers on the south section between 1960) and

1968 using the following assumpliens: (a) that

all six animals were sexually mature and Fertile

When released: (b) that there were two males

and four females; (c) that females start repro-

ducing in their second years (d) that females

produce one young a yens; Ce) that life expec-

1, M. TEOMAS AND L. 2. DRELROY

TABLE i

Predicted increase in numbers af wallabies wit te

middle and south sevtians af Pearson Island fram

M960 ta 1968.

Young

Males Females produced estal

1960 2 4 — 7

1961 2 4 4 ia)

196Z 4 6 4 14

1963 4 & 6 10

1964 9 il 8 28

1965 13# i5* il 39

1966 Th \7 1§ 48

1967 23 25 17 65

1968 32 33 25 90

“It. ts presumed that the uriginal twa males and

four females died during this year,

tancy is ten years {the animals released are

allotted a. mean jge of five years); (f) that

mole and female young ate produced in

approximately equal numbers. These assump-

tions are made on what is known of the repro-

ductive capabilities of mainland rock wallabies

and from studies of caplive groups of the

Pearson Island wallaby which have been

maintained at the Adelaide Zoo, at the reserve

ef the Department of Fisheries und Fauna

Conservation at Bool Lagoon, South Australia,

and by Dr, M. E Christian, of Adelaide. 1

can be seen that the origing) six animals could

have increased to 90 between 1960 and 1963

if there were five females and one male, the

numbers could have bean 112,

The rough estimates of the numbers on the

island indjcate that the population of the north

seclion has been relatively stuble over the

period of observations. This contrists strongly

wilh the aftuation on the middie and south

section where the numbers increased from six

in possibly over a hundred in cight years.

This means that the population was increasing

at about its maximum possible rate. The

abundance of food an all three sections makes

it unlikely that Food would be w# limiting fac-

tor in any section. MW seems likely then that

living space for breeding groups and a strong

inclination to territoriality has heen the factor

of greatest importance in controlling numbers

on the north section. On the main island, the

wallabies live in groups of up to twenty or

thirty centred on a group of boulders. caves

or crevices. amongst which they hide when dis-

turbed. They are rarely seen in the tall Me/a-

lever scrub (Specht 1969) und then only

singly. They move into low saltbush only to

feed. All their resting places ure amongst

socks. They differ fram the mainland rock

‘THE PEARSON ISLAND WALLABY 145

wallabies in ihal they spend more of the day-

light hours gut in the open. Characteristically,

one of more of jv group will remain perched

on a racky eminence for an hour or more at a

time, ws though acting as “look-out” for the

eroup. However, ull retire into shaded regions

during the greatest heat of the day in the sum-

mer months,

Observations on captive groups show that

males fizht savagely and that groups are domi-

nated by one mature male, There may be, on

occasions, u sub-deminant male but no other

mature mule is tolerated in the group, There

may be several immature mules but any one

of these would, On reaching maturity, have to

defeat the dominant male in conflict, be ex-

pelled from the group, or be killed. Those

expelled from groups, it is believed, live sinely

or in small, nun-breeding groups. They are

unhealthy in appearance and often heavily

infested with ectuparasites, Animals caught by

being chased into nets on the 1969 expedition.

were predominantly males and most of these

were probably from this section of the sacial

order. Further, males seem to wander more

from the groups territorial centres and so

Might be more likely ta be caught in nets.

Capture and Treatment

[tt open country, the wallabies are not diffi-

cult to catch by running them down, but ence

they get into rocky terrain, their apility and

powers of Icaping prevent this. Oh the 1460

expedition, wooden drop-doer traps bailed with

apple or carrot were used with some seccess

On the 1969 expedition, chasing the animals

into nets was [ound to be effective. These were

of heavy hemp of about 72 cm mesh and

about 45 to 140 m Jength. They were hung

fairly loosely so that they acted as trammel nets

and animals encountering them became

thoroughly enmeshed. They suffered no

injuries. however, if released promptly. On

return to camp, they were injected with 1 ml

Cytovet 1000 to obviate the effects of shock,

They could be kept conveniently in open-

weave sacks or in plywudd ltea-chesis. As long

us the animals were Kept in darkness, they

remained quiescent. They fed quite readily on

“Kangaroo pellets” manufactured tu supply

200s. etc., bul a supplement of green feed was

HeCessaHry,

There is no permanent fresh water on Pear-

son Island and pools appearing after rain are

highly saline. Hence, the wallabies must gain

all their water from vegetation or From dew

Tn captivily, however, they will lap up water.

Canclosions

It seems that the numbers of wallabies on the

north section of the island have remained fairly

constant over a Jong time. The population

explosion resulting from ther inadvertent

introductian to the middle anc south sections,

coupled with the apparent abundance of food

on-all sections, suggests strongly that the avail-

ability of adequate territorial areas may be an

important factor in controlling population size,

This, however, fails to explain why they had

failed to spread, of their own accord, over the

very nutrow strip of water at tow tide, which

separated them from abundant living space on

the maldle section. A tentative suggestion is

that there is Jittle or no drinking water on the

island’ but a great deal of sea water which

might be distasteful to them, This mitght have

produced a strong avoidance reaction to wiler.

Observations that the animals in captivity will

tend to avoid large bodies of water, may bear

this out.

References

Alrgen, PL 11970).—"South Australian

book,” (Govt. Printer: Adelide.)

BuarReLe. H.. & Le Sountr, A. S$. £1926) —"‘The

wild animals of Australia,” (Harrap: Londan.}

hfArtow, BJ, (1962).~ “Marsupials of Austra-

lia,” (Jucaranda Press: Brisbane.)

Reo, W, 11, (1870),.—"A guide to the native

mummals of Australia.* (Oxford University

Press: Melbourne.)

SHARMAN, G. B. ¢196!),—The mitotic chromo-

somes of marsupials and heir bearing on

tuxcnumy und phylogenv. Aust J. Zol. 9.

38-60.

SeecuT, KR. L. (1969).—The vegetation of the

Pearson Tstands, South Australia: a re-

examination, February 1960. Tras. R. Sac,

S. Atest. 93, 143.152

Tie, G. WH, H (1948).—Reaults of the Archbold

Expedition Nu. 59, Stucies on the anatamy

Year

and phylogeny of the Macropodidae (Mut-

supialin). Bull, Avner, Mus. Nat. Hist, 9,

237-351,

THOMAS, O; (1905)—On some Australasian

Mammals, Aan. Mag. Nat. Mist Ser 7, 16,

422-428.

THomas, O, (1922)—A new Rock-Wallaby

(Petrogale) from the Idunds off South Aus-

tralia. tan, Mag, Nav. Hiss. Ser 9, 9, 6B1-683.

VRoucHTon, BE. Le CG. ¢8967).—"Furred animals

of Austrilia.” Sth eda, [Angus and Robert-

son; Sydacy,)

Woob Tones, F, (192345.—The fora und fauns of

the Noyts Archipelugo and Investigator

Group.—The didelphian mammals. Truns. &.

Soe, §. Aust, 47, 82-94,

Woow Jones, F, (1924)—"The mammals of

South Austratla, The bandicoots and herbi

yurous tharsupiils.” (Govt, Printer’ Adelaide.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 5. REPTILES

BY M. SMYTH

Summary

Six species of lizards but no snakes occur on the Pearson Islands; two of these are recorded from the

Pearsons for the first time.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969,— 3. REPTILES

hy M, Smyiii*

Summary

Six species of lizarcts but ao snakes occur on the Pearsan Islands; twa of these are recorded from

the Pearsens for the first time.

Introduction

Six species of reptiles, all Jizards, are now

known from the Pearson [slands, of which

four, collected during the 1923 expedition,

were listed by Proctor (1923a). All species

known trom. the Pearsons are listed below,

together with notes on theit abundance, their

occurrence on the various parts of the islands,

and the registered numbers of specimens in the

South Australian Museum.

Family GEKKONIDAE

Phyllodactylus marmoratus Gray, Very com-

mon on all parts of Pearson and on Dorothee,

This species ovcurs on all the lurger islands off

ihe west cuast of the State, (R10215; 6 speci-

mens. )

Family AGAMIDAE

Amphibolurus sp, This species was listed by

Proctor (19234) us As deeresii Duméril and

Bibron, the type specimen of which came from

Kangaroo Island, Later, Proctor (19236) des-

oribed a new apecies A. fionni, but she gave no

type locality, The Pearson Island specimens

are well fitted by her description of A, fionni;

they are also very ‘similar to others from the

Neptune I[shinds, St, Francis (sland and the

isOlated granite and quartzite outerops of cen-

tral and northern Eyre Peninsulu and the West

Const. But it has so far proved difficult to

find criteria to distinguish 4. Jivani from A.

decresi, and until their taxonomy is examined

in detail [ prefer not 1o use either name for

the Pearson tsland speciniens,

This species is always associated with rocks,

and on the Pearson Islands can be found on

both granite and limestone. It is very abun-

dant on ihe north section of Pearson Island,

but much less so on the middle and south sec-

tions and on Dorothee, Its. greater abundance

On north section is correlated with the greater

shundance there of a little ant in the genus

Iridomyrmex an which the lizards, to judge

from the contents of their lieces and stomachs,

fced almost exclusively. (R10239; 9 lizards.)

Family SCINCIDAE

Morethia linevocellata (Duméril and Bibron).

“This active, fust-moving skink was not taken in

1923 or 1960, but it is not uncommon on north

section, though very difficult to catch, It was

frequently seen foraging among the branches

and foliage of bushes is Well as on the ground,

It was not seen during the short stay on

Dorothee. (R10217, 10238.)

Lerista. tefradactyla (Lucas and Frost), This

is a secretive little skink, usually found partly

buried in loose carth under stones ar woed. 1

was not found in 1933, but several specimens

were brought back in 1960 and it is in fuct

common on all parts of Pearson Island and on

Dorothee, [e occurs on most of the islands off

the West Coust and is widespread on the main-

land. {R10233-4, £0229.)

Leiolopisma entrecasteauxii =(Duméril and

Bibron}, A single specimen was caught. in

1923; at that lime it was the only specimen

known from outside south-eastern Australia. It

Was iol seen in 1969, despite an intensive

search, | have examined the 1923 specimen

and agfee with Proctor'’s identification. This

species is common in the southeast of South

Australia, but there are very few records from

further west than that; Condon (19411 records

it for Kangaroo Island arid there are other

specimens in the South Australian Museum

from Middle Beach (about 30 miles north of

Adelaide) and South Neptune Island.

Hemiergis peronii (Fitzinger), This species is

very common under stones. wood, or foliage

on the ground an all parts of Pearson and on

Dorothee; it also occurs in coastal areas across

much of southern Australia and on most if

not all the associated offshore islands (Smyth

1968). €R10216. 10230-1.)

* Department of Zoology, University of Adelaide, Adelaide. S Aust. 3000,

Truns. Roy. Soc. S. Anst. Val 95, Part 4, i5~h October 1971.

148 M. SMYTH

Acknowledgements

I am indebted to the late Mr. F. J. Mitchell the South Australian Department of Fisheries

for his help in identifying the specimens, and and Fauna Conservation, joint sponsors of the

to the Royal Society of South Australia and expedition.

References

Connon, H. T. (1941).—Further records of Proctor, J. B. (1923b).—On new and rare rep-

lizards and frogs from Kangaroo Island. Rec. tiles and batrachians from the Australian

S. Aust. Mus. 7, 111-116. region. Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1923, 1069-

Proctor, J. B. (1923a).—The flora and fauna of 1077.

Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator group. Smytu, M. (1968).—The distribution and life his-

No. 5.—The lizards. Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. tory of the skink Hemmiergis peronii in South

47, 79-81. Australia. Trans. R. Soc. §. Aust. 92, 51-58.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. -— 6. BIRDS

BY JOAN B. PATON

Summary

An annotated list is given of the twenty-seven species of birds recorded on the Pearson Islands by

the expedition of January 1969. A tabulated list of all records of birds from the islands is also

given.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969.— 6. BIRDS

by JOAN B. Paton*

Summary

An annotated list ig given uf the twenty-seven species of birds recorded on the Pearson Islands

by the expedition of January 1969,

given.

Introduction

In the only work published hitherto on the

birds of the Pearson Islands, Cleland (1923)

has pointed out that the main interest flies in

the Jand birds and whether they are indigenous,

chance vagrants, or regular migrants. If they

ure indigenous, it is possible there are signifi-

cant differences from the corresponding main-

land species.

Thirty-three species of birds have now heen

recorded from the Pearson Islands. This list

is not likely to be complete as records are avail-

able only for five visits—by E. R. Waite (Sept.

1914), F. Wood Jones (Nov. 1920), J. B.

Cleland (Jan. 1923), in Jan. 1960, and the

1969 expeditian,

With the exception of the Raven (Corvus

corougides) which Cleland (1923) said “occu-

pied a nest”, no land birds have been found

breeding. This is not surprising because mast

visits have been short and mainly in the sum-

mer at the conclusion of the nesting season of

many species.

The geomorphology of the Pearson Islands,

including, a locality map. is described by Twi-

dale (1971) in this volume of the Transactions.

Annotated Systematic List

Eudyptula minor (Forster), Little Penguin

These were seen on all the Pearson Islands.

Some were found in burrows near the top of

East Hill, more than 150 m above seu-level.

There seems no obvious reason why thesy birds

should seek shelter involving such an arduous

climb.

On several sloping granite faces on the

Islands. there are long, nearly square-sectioned,

gutters of varying size (usually wbout 20-30

ein deep and about 50 em wide) which clearty

carry penguin excreta downhill. The chemical

auction of the excreta, aided by the wear and

A tabulated list of all records of birds from the islands is also

tear Of many penguins walking up and down

them, could be an important factor in the for-

mation of these granirillen, Similar gutters

have not yet been recorded from other granitic

islands inhabited by penguins.

Pelagodroma marina (Latham), White-faced

Storny-Petrel

Wings of at least ten of these birds were

found in front of small burrows on Dorothee

There was no sign of head, body or tegs. These

had presumably been eaten by an avian pre-

dutor such as the Sea-Eagle or by the Pearson

Island Rat (Rattus fuscipes) if present,

Though the burrows could have been nesting

holes, they did not appear to be occupied by

Storm-Petrels as would be expected in January

if the nests. were in current use. The examina-

hon, however, was superficial.

Phalacrocorax carbo (Linn). Black Cormo-

rant

One pair was secn on several occasions.

Ardea novaehollandiae Latham, White-faced

Heron

Two birds were scen feeding on wave-

washed rocks.

Cercopsis mnoyaehollandiae Latham.

Burren Goose

Six birds were seen on Dorothee and twa,

perhaps from the same group, were seen and

heard at duy-break near the camp-site at

Eustern Cove,

Cupe

Haliaetus leucogasier (Gmelin). White-breasied

Sea-Eagle

Two birds were scen circling over Dorothee.

An unoccupied nest was seen on the highest

tacks off the peak on the southern portion of

Dorothee, and another one on the southern

section of Pearson Island.

“ Department of Biochemistry, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S$. Aust. 5000,

Trans, Ray. Sov, S. Ansi. Yol, 95, Part 3, 15th October 1971,

130 JOAN @,

Falco cenchriéides Vigors and Horsfield. Nari-

keen Kesirel

Two birds were seen overhead near Hill 781

and two, possibly the sdme ones, overhead at

Dorothee.

Hacmatopus fuliginosus Gould. Soory Oyyrer-

Catcher

Four adults and possibly two more were seen

on Pearson Eslund and three adults, and a

chick still unable ta fly, on Dorothee. The

adults were unusually mid and ciulled fre-

quently, possibly because they had non-flying

chicks,

Arenaria interpres (Linn). Trrustane

Eight birds were seen feeding on wave-

washed rocks on the oerth section of Pearson

Island.

Larus novaehollandiae Stephens, Silver Gull

Seen in groups of two and three, tolalling

perhaps a dozen on Pearson (sland and a few

more on. ldorothee,

Larus: pacificus Lathan, Pacific Gull

At least two adults and two immature birds

were seen on Pearson Island and two adults,

probably another pair, an Dovothec.

Sterna bergii Lichtenstem. Crested Tern

Two birds. were seen near Pearson Ishind

and there were abowtt a hundred resting on the

rocks at the southern tip of Dorathce,

Sterna nereis (Gould). Fairy Tern

Two were seen fishing off the eastern bay of

the north section of Pearson Island,

Neophema petrophila (Gould), Rock Parras

There were a few small flocks in the vicinity

of low bushes of Atriplex, Qlearia and Rha-

odie on the north section of Pearson Isfand.

They uppedred to he enting Rhagodia berries

and were seen eating Senecio petals, There

Were a few birds on the south section and on

Dorothee.

Melopsittacos undulatus (Shaw), Budgerygah

Two birds were seen on the north section of

Pearson Island. During the spring of 1968, an

unusually large number of these nomadic birds

of inland Australia were seen in the southern

part of South Australia including the vicinity

of Adelaide. The presence of two on Pearson

Island suggests. that at least in the western patt

of the State some flocks had continued their

southerly journey over the seu where the

PATON

chance OF a landfall would he remote and num-

bers would have perished.

Apus. pacificus (Lathan), Fork-tailed Swi/t

At least twenty were seen hawking over the

north peak of Dorothee on | lth January, 1969

at 11.00 a.m. The weather wus fine with 4

nonhwesterly wind of about five knots and

there was little change in this weather pattern

during the day.

Hirundo tahiticn Gmelin, Prcific Swallaw

Next to the Silvereyes, this was. probubly the

Most common species on all the islands. Apart

from the difficulty of getting anything resem-

bling mud for nest-building, there seems no

reason why they should not nest on Lhese

islands: Eckert (1971) found swallows” nests

on Franklin [stand (S.A. made of fibrous

material with no mud apparent, the nest site

having been chosen to give natural support

from below.

Ephthianura albifrons

White-fronted Chat

A few small flocks, each of about six birds.

were seen feeding mainly in the aren of siult-

bush. Their numbers seemed small in com-

parison with the reports of previous expedi-

tions. One immature bird still with vonspi-

cuous yellow gape, indicating that the species

breeds on the island, was caught and handed,

(Jardine & Selby).

Ephthianura tricolor Gould. Crintson Chat

Five were seen on the northern slope of the

neh section oF Pearson [sland on three con-

secutive days. Some of these birds appeared

Immature and it is possible that the adults had

bred on the island. One adult male was

banded.

The spring of 1968 was noteworthy for the

presence of Crimson Chats over the whole of

the southern portion of the Stite, incliding

Kangaroo Island, This species is rarely seen

south of about latitude 30°8, and us with the

Budwerygahs, its presence on Peurson and

other islands. together with records of drawned

Chats on beaches of St. Vincent Gulf. indicates

that this southerly movement was continued

in Some cases over the seu,

Petroica gondenovii (Vigors and Horsfield).

Red-capped Robin

These were common amongst the Caxuerirte

of the north section of Pearson Island, The

hirds were mostly uncoloured hit one mule in

full plumage and one panty coloured hird were

BIRDS fal

seen. Two immature birds with conspicuous

yelleew papes were banded. The presence of

the fatter indicates local breeding. This species

wis Tat seen on the south section of Pearson

Island or on Dorothee, probably due to lack

of trees,

Pachycephala pectoralis (Latham).

Whistler

One uncoloured bird was seen umong the

Casuarina on the northern slopes of the north

section of Pearson Island, No calls were heard.

These birds are usually casy to detect and some

were seen on each of the earher expeditions.

This suggests that the number present on the

islands has dwindled,

Zomerops fateralix (Latham).

Silvereye

This was the most common bird ip all areas

including Derothee. They were seen in flocks

of about twenty, particularly in open areas of

salthush,

Tt is known from bird-banding recoveries

that Silvereyes migrate from Tasmania ta New

South Wales and, in South Australia, from

Kangaroo Island to Fleurieu Peninsula. Thus

movement ef these birds between the Pearson

Islands and the mainland would not be unex-

pected,

Twelve birds were banded, These did not

have the green back and yellow chin of the sa-

called Western Silvereye (subspecies gouldif

Bunaparie) which extends from southern

Western Australia along the coastal area e@ast-

wards to about Bucla, and did nat differ signi-

ficantly from the variety near Adelaide [sih-

species halmaturina Campbell).

Golden

Grey-backed

Meliphaga virescens (Vieillot). Singing Noney-

ealer

Only one bird was seen and no calls were

heard. This bird is common on the adjacent

maintand but has not yet heen recorded from

Flinders Island. It is widely distributed over

much of South Australia, particularly it, coastal

areas and on other coastal islands, There

seems no reason why it should tot breed on

Pearson Island as it ig known to do se on

Franklin Island, (Eckert 1971,)

Passer domesticns (Linnj. House Sparrow

Two sparrows were believed to have heen

seen in 1923 but none in 1960, However by

1969 4 flock of about fortv had established it-

self on the eastern point of the north section

of Pearson Island, and a few more were on

Dorothee. It would be interesting to know if

this were the restilt of a single or several dif-

ferent invysions. of the islands. Sparrows are

very common on Flinders Island and these

might well wel as i reservoir for the recolonisa-

tion of the Pearson Islands.

Stornus vulgaris (Linn.). European Starling

Starlings were as numerous as Sparrows and

they would probably be more difficult 10 era-

dicate. About twenly to thirty birds were seen

at one time, but they were not in flocks, Many

immature binds were present, one of which was

handed. Probahty they breed on the islands.

Artamus personatas (Gould). Masked Wood-

Swallow

Only one bird was seen. Two were seen in

1933 and some in E960, These are socinhle

birds and it would be expected that they would

appear in small flocks rather than singly, They

have been seen on Goose Island near Wardang

Island in Spencer Gulf so their presence on jin

island is not unprecedented.

Corvus coronoldes Vigor and Horsfield. Ats-

tralian Raver

These were usuully in pairs though sometimes

as many as six might be seen feeding together

on wave-washed dehris on the rocks. Four

more were seety oh Dorothee. An old nest,

probably of this species, was seen in a

Casvarina. The species was distinguished from

the Little Raven (Cervus mellori Matthews)

by its call.

Discussion

Twenty-seven species of birds were seen on

this expedition of which eight had not been

reporicd previously. Tt is of interest to com-

pare these with the birds recorded from Flin-

ders Island, the nearest fand 32 kav (twenty

miles) to the northeast. Flinders Island is an

undulating timestone platform: which has been

cropped and grazed for many years so that

there is little of the original flora left, Although

it has been occupied by Europeans since 1870,

records of hirds are avatlable for only three

visits. The most comprehensive list is that of

Eckert (1970) who recorded fiftv4iwoa specics

of birds of which twenty-six ean be considered

as land birds, compared with seventeen out of

thirty-three for the Pearson Tslands.

Two sea birds, namely the Reef Heron

(Epretta yucra) and the White-faced Storm-

Petre) (Pelagodroma marina) and four lind

birds, the Budgerygah (Melopsitiacuy wna

152 JOAN B. PATON

latus), the Fork-tailed Swift (A prs pucificus),

the Singing Honeyeater (Meliphaga virescens)

and the Masked Wood-Swallow (Artamus per-

sonatus) have been found on the Pearson

Islands but not on Flinders Esland, nor have

they been recorded for the South Neptune

Islands (Stirling & Shaughnessy 1970) but the

Reef Heron, Fork-tailed Swift and Singing

Honeyeater have been reported from the

Franklin Islands (Eckert 1971}. On the other

hand, Pipits (Anthus novaeseelundiae (Gmelin)

—syn. Anthus australis) and Spotted Scrub-

Wrens (Sertcornis frentalix [Vigors & Hors-

field|), both of which are very common on

Flinders Island snd have also been recorded

for the South Neptune Islunds (Stirling &

Shaughnessy 1970), have not been seen on the

Pearson Islands,

Of the seventeen species of land birds

recorded for the Pearson Islands, four ute

widely distributed over the State. These are

the Kestrel (Falea cenchroidex), the White-

fronted Chat (Ephthianura albifrons), the

Singing Honeyeater (Meliphaga virescens) and

the House Sparrow (Passer domesticus). The

Rock Parrot (Neophema petrophila) is con-

sidered to be moderately scdentary and is

found along mast of the South Australian coast

and off-shore islands where it breeds. Tt moves

freely between these islands and the mainland.

A favourite site for nesting is a limestone hole

or crevice behind over-hanging Meseimbrian-

themum or Carpobroms, sa they would be

expected to breed on the Pearson Islands. The

remaining twelve land birds are well-known

migrants or are known to move Jong distances

from time 10 time.

It may be concluded that the land birds of

the Peurson Islands have all téached the islands

during the normal movements of the species.

They might just as easily move to. Flinders

Island or to the mainland, more particularly

in the winter months, either by migration or by

chance movemienls. A comprchensive bird-

banding programme. could give conclusive evi-

dence of such movements, On this expedition,

strong winds and the technical difficulties of

erecting mistnets on stony ground resulted in

only seventeen birds being banded.

The increase in numbers of the two exotic

species, the House Spurrow (Passer domesticus)

and the Starling (Sturnus vulgaris) is cause for

concern. Some consideration should be given

to the eradication of at least the Sparrows fram

the Pearson Islands,

Acknowledgements

Records from the 196() visit were prepared

by I. M. Thomas and 8. J, Edmonds. Grants

in support of the Expedition were made by the

Deparlment of Fisheries and Fauna Conserva-

‘tion and the Royal Society of South Australia.

References

CLELAND, J, B. (1923).—The Flora and Fauna of

the Nuyts Archipelago and the Investigator

Group. No. 9.—The Birds of the Pearson

Islands. Trans. R. Soe. So Aust. 47, 119-126.

Eckert, J. (1970)).—Birds of the Investigator

Group. 5. Aust. Orni, 25, 201-205.

Ecxert, J. (1971).—Birds of the Franklin Islands

and Eyre Island. South Australia, Eta 71.

61-64.

Siikuing, S. M. & Senauciunossy, G. (1970),—

The Bird Fauna of the South Neptune Islands,

South Australia, Amy 70, 189-192.

Twiparr, C. RK, (1971)—Pearson Island Expedi-

tion 1969.—2. Geomorphology. Trans. R.

Soc, §, Aust. 95 (3), 123-130,

List of birds seen an the Pearson Islands.

BIRDS

Jan,

Sept. Nov. Jan. Jan.

1914 1920 1923 1960 1969

Eudyptula minor. Little Penguin x x x x many

Pelagodroma marina. White-faced Storm-Petrel 10 dead

Phaethon rubricauda. Red-tailed Tropic-Bird x

Phalacrocorax carho. Black Cormorant x x 2

Ardea novaehollandiae. White-faced Heron x 2

Egretta sacra. Reef Heron x x

Cereapsis novaehollandiae. Cape Barren Goose x x xX x 8

Haliaetus leucogaster. White-breasted Sea-Eagle x 2

Falea cenchroides, Nankeen Kestrel x 2

Haematopus fuliginosus. Sooty Oyster-catcher x x x 7

Vanellus miles novaehollandiae. Spur-winged x

Plover

Arenaria interpres. Turnstone 8

Calidris sp. (? ruficollis, ? alba). Red-necked x

Stint or Sanderling

Larus novachollandiae. Silver Gull x x x a few

Larus pacificus. Pacific Gull x x (nest) x m 6

Sterna bergii. Crested Tern x x x ca. 100

Sterna nereis, Fairy Tern 2

Neophema petrophila. Rock Parrot x x x Xx many

Melopsittacus undulatus. Budgerygah 2

Chrysecoccyx basilis, Horsfield Bronze-Cuckoo x

— Owl? x?

Apus pacificus. Fork-tailed Swift ca. 20

Hirundo tahitica. Pacific Swallow x x many

Ephthianura albifrans. White-fronted Chat x x 215-20

Ephthianura tricolor. Crimson Chat 5

Petroica goodenovii. Red-capped Robin x x many

Pachycephala pectoralis. Golden Whistler X x X 1

Zosterops lateralis. Silvereye x x x x many

Meliphaga virescens. Singing Honeyeater I

Passer domesticus. House Sparrow 92 ca, 40

Sturnus vulgaris. European Starling ?small ca. 50

flock

Artamus personatus. Masked Wood-Swallow x x 1

Corvus coronoides. Australian Rayen x x x x 8

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. - 7. THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY

OF BENTHIC ALGAE

BY S. A. SHEPHERD AND H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

Summary

Pearson Island is washed by clear oceanic water and is subject to very strong wave-action from the

south and west, the effect of which penetrates to over 70 m depth. The effect of water movement on

the distribution and abundance of algae in two sites, one rough-water and one sheltered, is

described. In rough-water situations, high light penetration combined with the adequate water

movement provide good conditions for growth of algae to depths of 50 m or more. In both

localities, upper and mid sublittoral zones are recognised, the mid sublittoral having three belts

dominated by various Phaeophyta. In very clear water this zonation of algal communities is

dependent largely on differences in water movement resulting from increasing depth. A comparison

between the roughwater and sheltered sites shows that nearly all species are affected in their

distribution and abundance by differences in water movement. A richer flora of Chlorophyta and

Rhodophyta is developed at the rough-water site, whereas the Phaeophyta are more abundant at the

sheltered site. Depth records of all species collected are given, together with biomass (wet weight)

variations of the commoner species at the collection sites of the Expedition.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969. — 7. THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY

OF BENTHIC ALGAE

by S. A. SHEPHERD* and H. B. S. WOMERSLEYT

Summary

Pearson Island is washed by clear oceanic water and is subject to very strong wave-action from

the south and west. the effect of which penetrates to over 70 m depth. The effect of water move-

ment on the distribution and abundance of algae in two sites, one rough-water and one sheltered, is

described. In rough-water situations, high light penetration combined with the adequate water move-

ment provide good conditions for growth of algae to depths of 50 m or more. In both localities,

upper and mid sublittoral zones are recognised, the mid sublittoral having three belts dominated by

various Phaeophyta. In very clear water this zonation of algal communities is dependent largely on

differences in water movement resulting from increasing depth. A comparison between the rough-

water and sheltered sites shows that nearly all species are affected in their distribution and abundance

by differences in water movement. A richer flora of Chlorophyta and Rhodophyta is developed at

the rough-water site, whereas the Phaeophyta are more abundant at the sheltered site. Depth records

of all species collected are given, together with biomass (wet weight) variations of the commoner

species at the collection sites of the Expedition,

Introduction

Pearson Island (Figs. 1, 2) is situated at

Lat. 33°57'S, Long. 134°15'E, on the con-

tinental shelf at the eastern end of the Great Zouigh

Australian Bight, about 64 km (40 miles) off-

shore. The geomorphology of the Island is

described by Twidale (1971).

The joint expedition of the Department of

Fisheries and Fauna Conservation and_ the

Royal Society of South Australia to Pearson

Island, 6-15 January, 1969, gave opportunity

to study with the aid of SCUBA the vertical

distribution of benthic algae and to make algal

collections from the eastern Great Australian esi

Bight. a region which is not well known floris-

tically. This account is restricted to the sub-

tidal algal ecology: the intertidal ecology was

observed briefly both on this expedition and on

a previous expedition in 1960 (Specht 1969),

and was found to agree with the account of

Womersley & Edmonds (1958, p. 230) for the

zonation on steeply sloping Palaeozoic rock on

South Australian coasts. Collections made in

1960 have been incorporated in the species

list.

Only two sites at the northern end of the

sheltered site

Eastern Cove

Long. 134° 15'E

Lat, 33° 56' 30'S

NORTH SECTION

MIDDLE

Causeway —>

SOUTH

SECTION

Fig. |. Map of Pearson Island, showing study

sites near the northern end. Inset shows

the situation of Pearson Island in the Q 490 890

metres

eastern Great Australian Bight. ki : a

“Department of Fisheries and Fauna Conservation, Gawler Place, Adelaide. S. Aust. 5000.

*Department of Botany, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000.

Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. Vol. 95, Part 3, 15th October !97].

156 S. A.

SHEPHERD AND H. B.S. WOMERSLEY

Fig. 2.

Pearson Island from Hill 781 (north section). looking south. Middle section lies on the right

and south section on the upper left. Dorothee is the most distant island. Photo, K. P. Phillips.

island could be studied in detail during the

time ivailable. One of these sites is on the

very rough windward side of the island where

surge is strong, and the other is in a sheltered

part of Eastern Cove (Fig. 1). In all, about

14 hours during four days were spent collect-

ing underwater at the two sites.

The underwater topography is similar to the

bold granite formation visible above water

(Fig. 2) and consists of massive granite blocks

separated by rifts, ledges and sometimes

caverns, Underwater, the cliffs of the island

fall steeply to a sandy bottom at about 38 m

depth on the rough-water western side. with a

rock and gravel bottom occurring again at

50 m depth, some 400 m offshore, Somewhat

further to the west depths exceed 80 m. At

the sheltered site studied in Eastern Cove. the

steep granite slope meets the sand at about

30 m, Studies were made to a depth of 50 m

on the western side and to 30 m in Eastern

Cove,

This study extends that of Shepherd &

Womersley (1970) at West Island and uses the

same terminology.

Methods

The present study was planned in the same

manner as that at West Island and similar field

methods were used. These included general

collections of algae, quantitative samples with

a hoop of area 1/10 m*, and observations

(recorded underwater on roughened perspex)

upon the vertical range and relative abundance

of species. Limited diving time permitted the

taking of only 5-7 samples with a hoop at each

depth interval; this is probably sufficient to

indicate the biomass of commonly occurring

species but not that of species of low frequency

or patchy distribution. However, species missed

in the quantitative samples are probably rep-

resented in the general collections, which

covered a wide area throughout the depth

range.

Biomass figures are based on wet weight of

the algae, after removal of surface water. This

proved to be the most practicable method

tinder the conditions, and while it is probably

less satisfactory than dry weight, it gives a

reasonable picture of biomass changes with

depth. Limited time, however. prevented an

assessment of the variation likely in such

sampling, and the figures are to be taken only

as examples of the changes of biomass with

depth. Experience has shown the usefulness

of quantitative techniques as even slight

environmental differences affect the frequency

THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY OF BENTHIC ALGAEF 157

of plunts as well as the presence or absence of

ceftain species.

Depths are related to approximate low tide

Tevel. in the absence of any tidal data from

Pearsin |. or nearby,

Environmental Factors

1, Wave auction atid surge

Brief observations indicated that the condi-

tians of sew and swell, discussed in detail for

West Island (Shepherd & Womersley 1970),

ate applicable also to Pearson Island with only

minor modification. Vhe prevailing south-

westerly swell is higher than at West Island by

about 4-1 m, and probably ranges from 1-4 m

depending on conditions: this estimation is sup-

ported by fishermen who are able to judge

wave height by the use of a depth recorder,

Wave lengths are probably longer than at West

Island and of the order of 170 m. Sinte the

surge reaches to a depth of about half the

wave length (Sverdrup et al 1942, p. 519),

waicr movement resulting from swell would be

expected to penetrale to about 85 m. In fact

# ripple pattern i the soft bottom: was observed

al JO m, and at 50 m ripples im the course

zranitic-gravel bottom outside the island were

over 1 m from crest to crest and about 30 cm

veep, indicating considerable surge at that

depth.

Bustern Cove is well sheltered from the pre-

vailing swell and even on days when conditions

are moderately rough, wave height inside the

Cove is teduced by diffractive effects from

about 2/5 mon the rough-water coast to about

0.5 m, and surge is nat perceptible below about

LO m. However, both sites studied are subject

io slormy condilions from the north to the east

but these are of short duration and would have

no appreciable effect in the sublittoral below

about 15m,

2. Temperarure, Salinity and Other Chemical

Properties

Data from various oceanographic stations

(derived from Hynd & Vaux 1963 and

C.S,1,R.0, 1966; 1967a, b. c; 1968) held in the

vicinity of Pearson Island since 1963, show

that the water temperature ranges from

18-20°C (summer) to 15-17°C (winter) at the

surface, with figures of 17-20°C (summer) to

17°C (winter) at 50 m depth, Salinity is

generally between 35.7 and 35:94/,. in summer

ond 4 winter figure of 36.4%, is given. Oxy

gen saturation figures range fron) 93 to 1G

and figures of 0.08 to O17 pg atom/littc for

inorganic phosphate and 0.3 ,g atom/litre for

nitrate are given..

3, Underwater Hlumination

Pearson Island is washed by clear oceame

water and underwater visibiltty dusing the

study exceeded 40 m. However, at 70 m

depth, water transparency was noticeably luwer

neur the bottom due to fine sediments stirred

up by the swell. Photometer readings were

taken to a depth of 33 m close inshore on the

windward side of the island and some distance

offshore. The following figures for light penc-

tration, expressed as a percentage of sub-sur-

face (about 10 cm depth) inmadiance were

obtained—

13 m depth—37% close inshore

18 m depth—S0% close inshore, 27% at

400 m affshore

25 m depth—so0% close inshore: 24% at

400 m offshore

33 mw depth—35%

400m offshore

‘The inshore readings were probubly affected

by turbulent white water which reduces light

penetration near the sea surface (Jerlov 1968,

p. 74), thus giving a relatively low reading ut

13 m depth, amt to oa high-reflecting sandy

bottom: which increases light at depth (25 and

330m depths), Fram photometric measurc-

ments made in the Great Australian Bight from

H.M,A.8, Diamantina in November 1969

(Carpenter, pers. comm.), the water about

Pearson Island would be classified as Type 1A

oceanic water of Ierlov (1951).

close inshore; 15% at

The Algal Ecology

This account describes only the communitics

on wpward facing or slightly sloping surfuces

although collections were made from vertical

faces and shaded places and are included im the

“Specics List".

Light penetration is high, and algae domi-

nate both horizontal and vertical faces and the

fauna is net conspicuous except in shaded

places such as. cilves.

Only a few grazing animals were observed

and of these the giant turbun Dinasyevice

jourdant {Kicner), which occurs occasionally

at depths below about 20 m In rough-water

localities and browses on red algae. is probably

the most important.

A brief description of the algal communities

recognised at the two sites follows,

158 5S. A. SHEPHERD AND H., B.S. WOMEFRSLEY

Roven-Warer Coast (Fig. 3)

|. Upper Sublittoral Zone \0-7 (-8) m deep|

Lven in calm weather, with low swell, surge

is loo severe to study much of this zone at close

quarters by diving. The following description

is based on observations made from the shore

and from a boat, and fron ulgal collections at

a depth of 7-8 m,

BO Bie cenpeans

FF Shinui tikd iin linea tden

ete) ee

have ita hice

Hopp mobwyale

2 ad-enp

oanesaez

P30 gus

H dQ LITTORAL

We lular canteen st

Hebogwions phangton be

SONK PRON | aera Haus

A vegetation profile at the rough-water

site, Sandy floor between 36 and 50 m

depth causes a discontinuity in the dis-

niGisgtten of algae, as shown ijn Figs. 3-8

also.

The barnacle Belenus nigrescens Lamarek,

indicative of extreme wave-beaten conditions,

is well developed im and just below the lower

eilittaral zone. while a little lower down a

coralline algal mat (mainly Coralling euviert)

is co-dominant with the barnacle. Much ol. this

Balanus-coralline alga Community is momen-

tarily emergent in the suck-back helween waves

at Jow tide. and is similar to the lower eulittoral

and xublittoral fringe community described by

Womersley & Edmonds (1958, p. 232) for

Point Sinclair and elsewhere, Collections of

Specht ia 1960 show that the characteristic

sublittoral-tringe alga, Cystephora intermedia,

occurs on Pearson Island although it was not

seen at the two study sites.

The coralline algy community continues into

the sublittoral to a depth of about 7-8 m. where

the common species are Corellina evvieri and

Metageniolithen eharoides, loxether with a few

stunted plaints of Acrocarpia paniculata,

2. Mid Sublitiaral Zone [8-50-+ m deep]

Two horizontal belts. dominated by brown

algae are conspicuous between 8 and 36 m

depth while « third distinctive community of

brown algae occurs at ubout 50 m depth

(Fig, 3),

(1) Acrocearpia paniculata dominates the vege-

ition between 8 and 20 (-25) m-. In shallower

parts of this belt, the vegetation is low and

stunted ahd clearly affected by the violent

surge; here (he undeestorey species arc mainly

coralline algue (Fig, 3) and the brown alga

Paghydictyon panteulatum. Relow about 15 10

depth red algae such as Plocumitem angusrum,

Po merrensit and P. preissiaum, Austrophyllis

deicornis and Delisea pulehra hecome com-

mon.

(2) Krom about 20 m down, ithe vegetation is

three-layered. Eeklonia radiate (a spinous

forn -see discussion), is the duminant species

of the upper storey, while the red algne

referred (o above comprise a fairly sparse

understorey. The prostrate species Peyyoneliq

novaelollandiae aut Sunderophyeus australis

cover much of the rock surface.

Except for Caulerpa sealpellifornis, which

is abundant between 10 and 15 m, green algac

are sparse at depths less than about 2 m,

Below that depth communities of Caulerpe

Hexilis, ©. longifelia and €'. eli/tenii are com-

mon (Figs, 3, 5).

A shade community of red algae occurs only

at depths betow wbout 20 m, on cuve walls and

vertical faces, The component species of this

community alsa occur on horizontal surfaces

under the canopy of Ecklonia in deeper water

lo 36 m depth. The red alga Sarcemenia

delesseriaides, conspicuous heeause of its

bright purple iridescence, occurs in shade

between 30) and 36 m,

The presence of some sediment on the rock

near the sandy bottom at 38 m, coupled with

the oceurrence at this depth of several species

usually indicative of reduced water movement

(such as Claulerpa geminata, Lobophara varie.

gata, Sargassum spinuligeram and Osmundtiria

prolifera), suggests that water movement is

probably less near the buse of the cliff at 36-39

m than in open water at 50 m where these

species are absent.

(3) At about 400 m off-shore, where the

depth ig about 50 m, an abundant growth of

THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY OF BENTHIC ALGAE

algae occurs on a travertine limestone sub-

strate, Commen brown algae are Myriodesma

guercifolium, Scyrothalla doryearpa, Cysto-

phova plarylohiuny and Sargassum bracteo-

losuint. Some 25 species of red algae are

recorded from here, of which Prerocladia

lucida, Dasycloninm incisimt, Metamastephera

flabellata and Plocamium preissianum are the

most common. Some species occurring here

(2,2. Seyrerhulia derycarpa, Sargassuni bracteo-

losum and Plocaniuwmn preixstantumn) require

considerable water movement and provide fur-

ther evidence of the deep penetration of the

swell,

SHuaitTerREep Coast (Fig. 4)

lL. Upper Sublitrorul Zone [0.2 (3) m deep]

The rock face is covered by a short algal

turf in which Zonuria sinclairii, Caulerpa

hrownii and Prerecladia cupillacea are promi-

nent, the last named species often forming a

pure conimiunity on somewhat shaded steep

faces. This zone was not studied in detat| and

probably « wider range of species oceurs.

2. Mid Sublitioral Zone [(2-) 3-29 m deep]

Three. horizontal belts may be distinguished

in this zone although their boundarles are often

blurred (Fig. 4),

fl) The uppermost belt from 3 to 10 (+12)

m deep is dominated by the fucoid ulgae Aceo-

Nir Lolba Mtete

Se eon ener

whe sey feeb

CHEB at Tay

whole ne TD beee

HE Le ae

ree TS)

Te eeee eens

------+

Be r-576

erssez

Lifrcaal

RTC)

Fiz. 4.

A vegetation profile a1 the sheltered site

(Eastern, Cove),

159

carpia paniculata and Cysiephora inenilifarmis,

with C. subfaretnua and C. brownil fairly

common in patches. Smaller species are spurse

but include Pachydicivon paniculatum, Zonaria

spiralis, Z. sinclairti and Austrophyllis alci-

cernis,

(2) From about 10 (-12) to 16 (-18) m deep,

Cystophora monilifera and Sargassum verry=

culosum become dominant; other common

species of this belt are Codium duthiae, Glos-

sophora nigricans, Dilophus fastigiatis, Bellotia

erlophorum, Colpomenia peregrina and Poly-

siphonia nigrita (as an epiphyte). Communi-

ties of Caulerpa geminata and of C. vesiculi-

fera also occur in this depth range,

(3) The lowermast belt fram Lo (-18) to 29 m

deep is dominated by Ecklonia radiata. Other

species of common occurrence are Surgassurn

varias and Bellotia eriophorunr and the red

aleae Plocamium merrensi, Thamnoclonium

dichotonutm and Delisea frypneovides. Ploca-

minm angusitum and Kallyntenta eribrosa are

common on steep faces, The only common

green alga in this bele is Cau/erpa hedleyi.

The tock is buried in sand at a depth of

about 29-30 m and communities of the sea-

grasses Heterozostera tasmanica and Posidonia

wustralis are common on the sandy bottom.

Discussion

It is well known that in the clear waters of

the Mediterranean and the tropical Atlantic,

algae grow to much greater depths than in

turbicl coastal waters (Feldmann 1937, Taylor

1961) due to the high transmittance of light.

The present study shows that in clear waters

Of the South Australian coast, such as at

Pearson Island, a rich algal flora grows to 50m

depth and probably deeper.

At West [sland it has been shown (Shep-

herd & Womersley 1970) thal water movement

as well as light are critical factors determining

the depth ranges of algae. As the cffect of

Water movement at depth on algal distribution

has been little studied, a comparison of the

algal changes with depth at the rough and shel-

tered sites on Pearson Island is of interest,

At first impression, thete seemed to be a

tmurked difference in the algae at the two sites.

lu general the results confirmed thts view and

showed that the differences are of two kinds.

Firstly, the species composition of the yegeta-

tion varies. As shown in Tuble 1, only one

third of the total number of species recorded

were found «ut both sites. Secondly, the

conspicuous species shaw pronounced varia

160

tion in density according to the degree of

roughness and depth (Figs, 5,6, und 7). Asa

result, distinctive communities oecur at dif-

ferent depths, and vertical zonation patterns

arc apparent.

Zonation

At West Island (Shepherd & Womersley

1970), three basic zones in the sublittoral were

recognised—a narrow upper sublittoral surf

zone (to about 5 m depth) consisting of a

short red algal turf, a mid sublittoral zone

deminated by large brown algag extending to

aboul 20 m depth, and a lower sublitioral zone

of red algae. he vertical extent of these

zones. was found to be correlated with light

and walter movement.

At Pearson I. the upper and mid zones are

of greater vertical extent than at West L. The

upper sublittoral is about & m wide at the

rough-water site, decreasing to about 2 or 3 m

wide at the sheltered site, The mid sublittoral

zone is also extended downwards but to a much

more remarkable degree, going to at least 50 m

depth at the rough-water site. Within this zone

distinct belts ure apparent, each of which is

domingted by one or two species of brown

algae. One result of this magnified zone

appears to be that certain species, which might

otherwise remain subordinate, achieve domin-

anee ata depth Where conditions for them are

optimal, Bergquist (1960) also describes. three

zones in the sublittoral for communities of the

Northland coast, New Zealand; these bear

some similarity to the zones described in this

paper, bul the lower two zones .as recognised

in New Zealand probubly correspond jo belts

of the mid sublittoral at Pearson Island,

A lower sublitiorg! zane, as described for

West Island, does not occu on horizontal sur

fices ut the study sites, due no doubt to the

Telatively high light intensities even at 50 m

depth. However, a red algae community is

present on shaded overhangs ete., below about

20 m, und this suggests that a lower sublittoral

zone might be expected on horizontal surfaces

al greater depths than could be reached during

the expedition.

The Pearson Island study thus supports ob-

servations made at West Islind showing the

importance of both water movement and light

upon the vertical extent of algal zones, water

movement being most important in the upper

sublittoral zone whereas both factors are im-

portant in the mid sublittoral,

S, A. SHEPHERD AND H. RB. S. WOMERSLEY

Species cunge and biomass

The vertical range and site distribution of all

species collected is given in the “Algal Species

Last”, and ‘Table | summiurises their site distri-

bution. While more Chlorophyta and Rhode-

phyla are confined to the rough-Water site than

the sheltered site, the reverse is truce for the

Phatophyta, A higher proportion of che total

is restricted to the roughewater site than the

sheltered site, with only one third of the total

common te bot sites,

‘TABLE 1

Number of Species of Chleraphiyta, Pligeaplyta

and Rhodophyta collected at the Rough-water and

Sheltered sites respectively.

Chiore- Phaée- Rhouo-

Total As Vent

phyta phyla ohyts Tutal

Species from the

rough water

site ouly 8 8 49 65 40%

Species from che

shelteted site

only 5 18 20 43 27%

Speucs

occurring at

both sites 8 (4 30 32 ARG

Total 21 40 99 = =160

The vertical distribution of biomass af same

of the commoner species of Chlorophyta

(Cuulerpa only), Phaeophyta and Rhodophyta

is given in Figs. 5-7 respectively, and their

total biomass fs given in Fig. 8. Practically all

of the species i Figs. 3-7 show marked differ-

Q y

£ ‘

tiaa fl

ra [

' :

Mie

£— 30 Cy tallies

7 ant ‘

5 t, tiwhbsie

Q Qs |

—

' kage

Techn Starnes

Depth disiribution (by wel weight) of

species of Cunlerpa (Chlorophyta) at the

rough-water (R) and sheligred (8) sites.

THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY OF BENTHIC ALGAE

161

qyslophura

renlletots

| | Scakerlo

sina o

ummams 2 DPavmo

|} Avrasatpla pant ontace

_— Pealonia ratlaca

restore rads eure sur suis

oni | Llera | Seb quseun cere asm

Fig. 6. Depth distribution (by set welght) of various Phaeophyta at the rough-water (R) and

sheltered (S) sites.

ences in abundance between the two sites, with

some of them being rare or absent from one

or other site, The depression and/or extension

of distribution of some species in the rough-

water site is evident, and this tendency is shown

by many other of the common species indi-

cated in the Species. List.

While it is possible that factors such as graz-

ing or competition between species may be

involved in some cases, it seems reasonable to

interpret the data in terms of the effect of the

principal environmental factors, light and water

movement. [tis unlikely that light attenuation

would vary much at the two sites, and since

water movement is likely to be the major eco-

logical factor differing significantly, the differ-

ences in distribution and biomass of most spe-

cies can be related (as al West Island) prin-

cipally to this factor of water movement.

While most species are commonest. under

moderate water movement, there are smaller

groups, some occurring only under strong,

and others under slight, water movement

conditions. Species occurring under the

strongest surge (ic, near low tide levcl)

are—Caulerpa brownit, Pachydictyon pani-

culatum, Acrocarpia paniculata, Cystophora

intermedia, Cordllina cuvieri, Metagoniolithon

R|$ $ R[S RIS R/S

rio

c |

E ; i

P 1

tT 20 f 1 i

H ' i}

{ ‘

4 !

Tard Lind { '

m» 30 quote A Thamagedantum '

E ' dteborcmn

i '

E Auph ecu Met anuirtoe 17 Ko} |anenza

5 AO eps elisre Lites ww hlanliae Op liensi.

50 ws ‘ ‘ t ‘

belbgea Austropro! 115 Plocamiun Piceamiun — Elucanlom Syurlpinen he

pilshra Q os 1 aletcun ts anRus tute mercengil, grelse linn ayuttably

kalm2

Fig. 7. Depth distribution (by wet weight)

sheliered (S) sites.

of common Rhodophyta at the rough-water (R) and

162

5. A. SHEPHERD AND HB S WOMERSLRY

Chlorophyte Phoeophyto

Total wet weight of Chlorophyta,

sheltered sites.

Fig. 8.

charoides and Prerocludia capillucea (the

lust numed species occuring only in shade).

Species requiring least water movement, and

hence found only in sheltered localities or

at deeper levels, are—Caulerpa geminuta,

C. hedleyi, C. vesiculifera, Bellotia eria-

phorum, Cystaphora monilifera, Scaberie

agardhii, Sargassum varians, S. verriuculosum,

Thamnoclonium dichatomum, Kallymenia evi-

hrasa and Rhodoplivllis membranacea, Lastly

there are a few species which seem indifferent

to water movernent since they grow cqually

well in strong or slight water movement, These

species ure Zonaria spiralis, Austrophyllis alci-

cornis and Placamiunt angrsrunt.

It is not suggested that the occurrence of

the above groups al species is not also depen-

dent on light intensity, Probably in most cuses

the occurrerice of a species is determined by

both the degree of water movement and light

intensity, but in the above cases the degree of

water movement appears to be of greatest signi-

fieunce. Some species. however. are found

only i Jow light conditions with moderate

Walter movement (e.g. Petssonelia noyae-

hollandiae and Sonderophyeus australis). while

others grow only in high light conditions. and

slight to moderate water movement (¢.g, Col-

pomenia peregrinu, Cystophora brownii and

C. stthfarcinata).

In general. the preferences shown by algae

at Pearson Island are similar to those of the

same species at West Island, with a few excep-

Rhodophyto

Phaeophyta and Rhodophyta at the rough-waler and

tions. Ecklonia rudiati appears to be less

tolerant of rough water conditions at Pearson

Island than at West Island. However, pupu-

lations of this species comprise two ecological

forms in southern Australia. apparently with

somewhat different water roughness prefer-

ences. The West Island form has relatively

smooth fronds with few or no surface spines,

while that at Pearson Island has samewhat

rugose fronds with the surface covered with

spines which ure often curved. The latter has

been known as FE. exusperata (Turn.) J,

Agardh, but was regarded by Womersley

(1967. p. 238) as an “age, ecological or mor-

phological variant” of the species, Further

subtidal studies may show that this densely

spinous [orm is worth recognising as a sub-

specific taxon.

Several floristic differences exist between

West Island and Pearson Island. and are shown

by a comparison of the species at the two

islands.

During three yeurs, with visits throughout

each year. 132. species wete recorded from

West Island. while a few davs’ collecting in

January 1969 at Pearson Island gave 160

species, The Pearson Island flora is richer in

Chlorophyta (21 compared to 9 species), and

in Phacophyta (40 compared ta 30). while the

Rhodophyta are similar in number (99 com-

pared to 93). Further collecting at Pearson

Island would be expected to incrense the num-

ber of Rhodophyta in particular For the eco-

THE SUB-TIDAL FCOLOGY OF BENTHIC ALGAE a3

logically important species also, there is greater

species diversity at Pearson Island, and this is

especially so in the Rhodophyta.

Natahle species present at Pearson Island

and not found ot West Island include:

Chlorophyta—Ulvaria shepherdii, Cailerpa

eliftonii, Caulerpa ellistontae, C, hedleyi,

Chlorodexmis hacultfera, Avrainvillea

clavatiramea and Rhiptliansis robusta. All

these speciexy are noteworthy as being

{except for Cawlerpa -clifrenii) strictly

confined 10 deep water (Womersley 1971).

Phaeophyta—M yriodesmta quercifolium, Sar-

gassum tristichum and §, varterns,

Rhodophyta—Galaxaura spathulata, Ausiro-

phyllis aleicornis, Kallymenia cribroglova,

K, spinosa, Thamnophyllis lacerata, Ifen-

nedya erispa, Bindera splachnoides, Lep-

josomia clifronié, Wrengelia nitella and

Hererasiphonia crassipes.

The abundance of Chlorophyta both in

species and biomass at depth is a conspicuous

feature at Pearson Island and is probably an

eifect of the extreme water clarity permitting

deep penetration of blue light (Levring 1968)

together with other suitable ecological factors.

Other regions of the world with notably clear

waters. such as the Mediterranean (Larkum,

Drew and Crossett 1967) and Caribbean

(Taylor 1967), show the presence of green

algae at depth in contrast to colder waters

where green algae rarely penetrate inte deep

wuter.

Algal Species List

Unless other collectors are nanied. all collec-

lions were made by $. A, Shepherd and depths

are given in metres following ‘R’ and ‘S’.

denoting the rough-water and sheltered locali-

ties at the northern end of Pearson Island, A

small collection was also. made at Dorathec.

the most southerly of the Pearson Isles. in

sheltered conditions, The callections of R. L.

Specht (17,i7,1980). BB.

(184.1960) and S. J, Edmonds (16,i1,1960)

were made on the 1960 Expedition, mainly on

the coast between the north and middle, and

middle and south. sections, The 1960 col-

lections were mainly intertidal or from the

upper sublittoral (abbreviated to USL),

Identifications are by H. B. S. Womerslev,

except for Ceramiacene (¢Crouanieae, Anti-

thamniene and Heterothamnency by E. M.

Wollaston, Delesscriaceae hy E. A. Mitchell

and Dasvaceae hy M, J. Parsons.

In most cases depths are given as 4 range

Carrodus.

indicating that the species was collected at the

limits stated and usually at intermediate depths,

While it is likely that most species occur

throughout the ranges given, unsuitable micro-

habitats may prevent this, On the rough water

coast the deepest collection from 50 m is

shown sepurately, since sandy bottom ovcurred

from 38 to 50 m. The time limitations of the

expedition und af SCUBA diving inevitably

mean that further studies would both increase

the number of species recorded and broaden

their depth ranges in some cases..

An asterisk indicates the commoner species,

many of which are referred to in the text.

CHLOROPHITA

ULVALES

Ulva lactace L.9 Dorathce, |-6, Pools between

South and Middle Seet., Specht

Ulvaria shepherdit Womersley, R, 20-35, 50.

CLADOPHORALES

Cladaphora vatoniaides Sonder, 8, 5-25,

SIPHONOCLADALES

Apjohnia lactevirens Harvey, R, 8-35; 5, 5-16.

Siruvea plumosy Sonder, Between South and

Middle Seet. USL, Carrodus,

CAULERPALES Canlerpaceae

Cunlerpa brownii (C. Ag.) Endlicher, 3, 0-16

Between South and Middle Sect. USL.

Specht.

AC, ae Horvey, R, (18-) 20-36. 30. S.

13-2

C. ellistaniae Womersley, R, 36.

%C) flexilis Lumouroux. R, (18-) 20-35; 5, 6-28.

* yar, ynnellert (Sond.) Wornersicy. R. 8-26

S, 13-25. Between South und Middle Sect,

USL. Specht,

i geminata Harvey. R, 35; 8, (12-) 15-20

(-25).

20, hedleyi W. v. Bosse, S. (19-) (-30).

~C!. lungifelia ©. Ag, 1. erivpata (Harv-)

Womerslcy. R, 118-) 20-35,

Fe, obsewra Sonder. R, 20-35; §&, 5-23.

C. papillosa J. Agardh. S, 5-12.

HO. youlpeltifuemix (R. Br.) C. Agardh, R, 8-35,

50: §, 20-30.

Agardh, R,

Co simplietuscule

15-35, S, 30.

+O. ventewlifera, Harvey. S. (6-) 15-22 (-25),

Udoteaeeue

Chlovadesmis baenuifera, (1. Agatdh) Dicker.

KR, 30-36

Avyrainvillea clavatiramea Gepp & Gepp-.

Middle Sect,. 20, Carrosdns,

Rhipiliapsis robusta Womersey, Ry 30.

Cuolates

*Cadinm durhieae Silva. RK, 20-25, $,

20-25.

©. paleasum J. Agardh, R, 30-32

C, harvest Silva, R, 36.

C. mamillasni Harvey. R. 33,

C. spongiosum Harvey. Between Soyth and

Middle Sect. poals. Speeliz

99.9

ote

(Turner) J.

(12-)

164

PHAEGPHYTA

SPLACELARIALES

Sphucelaria novat-caledoniae Ssuvageau. §,

20-25. A single specimen, growing on rock,

but agreeing with southern Australinn speel-

mens previously referred to this species but

epiphytic: on Myriciesma harvevanum,

Dict yorA.£s—Dictyotene

Dicrvete alternifida J, Agardh. R, 20-25,

D, furcetlata (C, Ag.) J. Agardh, 8. 15-29.

Dilophus ungustus J. Agardh. §, 13-23.

SPU gtetlapatits Sonder. R, 20-30; 3S, 15-18

(-28).

Bi robustus (J. Ag.) Womersley, R, 20-36,

“Pachydictyon paniculatum J. Agardh. R, 7-15

(-27); S, 6-25. Between South and Middle

Seet,, USL, Specht.

*Gloysaphara nigricans (J, Ag.) Womerstey. R.

20-36, 50; S, 5-23. Dorothee, (-6.

Lobaxpira bicuspiditta Arcachoug, R, 22; 8S,

§-25,

Zonarieae

Chlanidaphera micraphylla (Harv5 3. Agardh.

R, 30-35. Between South and Middle Sect.,

USL, Specht,

Diclvonteris muelleri

20)

Distramium flabellatum Womerslcy. R, 36; S,

19.23

(Sond.) Reinbold. S-

D. multiftdsm Womerstey. S$, 12-30.

Lobephora varieguta (Lamx.) Womersley. R,

36.

Padina sp, 8, 20-25. (A single specimen of a

bistratose species, sterile).

*Zonaria sineloirii Tooker & Harvey. R, (15-)

32-35; S. 0-28.

+7. spiralis J. Agardh. R, (8+) 18-22 (-36); S,

(6-) 16-20 (-25),

CHORDAKIALBS—C hordariuceae

Polycerea nigrescens (Harv, ex Kuetz.) Kylin.

S, 14 on Pastdonia. Middle Sect., 20, Carre-

aus.

Spernratochnaceae

Nemecystiy 4p, S. 20-25. A single specimen,

sterile but otherwise agreeing well with the

genus and probably close to N. pretae.

telandiae Kylin.

Splachnidiaceae

Splactnidium rugesam (1.) Greville. Between

South and Middle Seet,, mid eutilteral.

Speche,

Notheiacene

Notheia anomalqa Harvey & Bailey. On Mar-

mosira, between South and Middle Sect,,

Jower eulitoral. Specht.

SPOROCHNALES

*Bellotia erfaphorum Harvey, R, 22; 8, 14-20

(-30).

Nereia australis (Aary.) Harvey. Middle Sect.,

20, Carrodis,

Sporochnus radictformis (Turn) C. Agnrdh.

R, 22; 8, 14-30. Middle Sect,, 20, Carradus.

DICTYOSIPHONALES

Asperococens bullosus Latnouroux. 8, 14.

Middle Seet,, 20, an Pasidoniqa, Carrodies,

“Colpamenia peregrina (Sanv.) Hume), §. 6-16,

BDoruthee, Lf.

S. A. SHEPHERD AND

H. B.S, WOMERSLEY

Hydroclathrus clathratus (©, Ag.) Howe. S,

13-25.

LAMINARIALES

“Eeklonia radiuta (C. Ag.) J. Agardh. R, (15-)

20-35, 50; S, (5-) 6-30, Dorothee, 1-f Be-

tween South and Middle Sect, USI., Speutis,

PucaLes—Hormositaceae

Hermosiva banksii (Vorn.) Decasne. Between

South and Middle Sect. fower eulitioral,

Specht,

Seirococcacese

*Seyruihalia darycarpa (Jum) Greville, R.

34-35, 50.

Cystoserraceae

“Acrocurpia panicaluta ( Turn.) Areschoug, R,

8-20) (-32); S. 3-12 (-15). Dorothee, 1-6,

Beiween South and Middle Sect, USL,

Specht.

*Cystophura brawnii (Turn.) J. Agurdh. §,

(6-) 8-10,

C. intermedia J, Agardh. Between South and

__ Middle Sect, sublitioral fringe, Speche

*C. monilijera 3. Agardh, R, 20-32; S, (5-)

12-18 (-20)-.

*C. moniliformis (sper) Woniersley & Niza-

muddin, R, 7-10 (-15); 8, 3-10, Doruthee,

1-6. Ketween North and Middle Svet., USL,

Edmonds.

CG, platylobiuin (Mert.) J. Agardh, R, 50.

*C. subfarcinota (Mect.) J. Agardh. S, 3-10.

Between North and Middle Sect., USL,

Edmonds.

Myriadesma integrifolium Harvey. $, 15.

ot uerenaltie (Bory) J. Agardh. R. 30-35,

“Seaberia agardhii Greville. S, 12-26.

Sargassaceac

Sareussum decipiens CR. Bre.) J. Agardh, S,

(5+) 10-16,

*S_ varians Sonder, §, (15-) 20-30.

*S. verruculoxum (Mert.) J. Agardh, R, (20-)

30-35; 8, (5+) 12-28 (-30). Middle Sect,,

drift, Speehit.

5S. freetevlosnm J, Apardh, R. $0.

S. lacerifotivum (Torn.) C. Ag. Between South

and Middle Sect., USL, Specht.

S. reisticlum Grev, & C. Ag. ex Sondey, Be-

tween South and Middle Sect.. USL. Specie,

*S. spinudigerum Sonder. R, 45; S, 15-30.

RHODOPAYTA

NEMALtALES—Hehninthocladiaceae

Liggera harveyiana Zeh, Between Sovwth and

Middle Sect., USL, Spechr.

Nemalion helminthoides (Velley) Batters, Be-

twecn South and Middle Sect,, mid eutittoral,

Specht.

Bonnematsoniacese

*Delisea hypneoides Harvey, BR, 20-25; §. 14-30)

*P. pulchra (Grev.) Montagne. R, (16-) 20-35,

50; S, 22.

Chaetangiaceae

Galaxaura spathulata Kjellman, R. 33.

Pseudoscinuia australis Setchell, R. 22:3. 16-28,

GeLmAces—Gelidium australe J, Agardh. Be-

bcbg South and Midile Sect.. USL, Capro-

nes,

THE SUBG-TIDAL ECOLOGY OF BENTHIC Al.GAF

Plerovladia capillacea (Grmel.) Bornet &

Thuret. S, 0-3. Dorothee, 1-6. Between South

and Middle Sect., USL, Speech.

*P. fucida {R, Br.) J. Agardh. R, 20-35, 50; 5,

5-22, Porothee, 1-6,

Cave vonNEMIALFs—Dumonliaceae

Dudresnaya australis J, Agardh, S, 15.

Rhizophyllidaceae

Rhodopeltis ausiraliy Harvey, R, 30.

Squamariaceae

*Peyysanelia navae-hollindiae (Kuelz) Harvey,

R, (18-) 20-35.

*Sonderaphycus grstraliy (Sond.) Demizot. R,

Corallinaceae

*Amphiroa anceps (Lantk.) Decaisne, R, (18-)

20-35; 5, 22,

Cheilasporum elegans (A, & H.) Areschoug.

*Corallina cavieri Lamouroux, R, 0-8 (-25); 8,

13-25, on Cywraphera menilifera.

fania fustiviata Harvey, Between South and

Middle Sect.,, USL, Spechi.

Jania sp. R, 15; 5, 20-25 (a slender species).

*‘Metagoniolithan chareides (Lama) W. Vv.

Bosse. R, 0-15 (-35); 5, 4-10,

“Metmastaphora flabellata (Sond.) Setchetl, R,

30-35, 50; S, 5-12,

Identification of a few species of crustose Coral-

linaceae collected niust await monographic study

of this group.

Cryplonemiaceae

Carpopelils phyllophora CH, & H.) Schinite. Ry

*Vhamnocloninm dichwteamum (3.

Agurdh. S, 15-28.

Kallymentaceae

*dastrophyllis aleicorns (J. Ag.) Wamersley

Norris, R, 8-35, 50; S, (3-) 5-12 (-30)

Callophylis coccinea Harvey, R, 8-32; 5, 5.

©, lambertii (Turn.) Greville. R, 35.

oC sia de australis Womersley & Norris. Ry

Glaphyrymenia pustatasa J, Ag. Ry 33.

Kallymenia cribrogloea Womersiey & Norns,

Ag.) J.

R, 30,

"“K. eribvasa Uarvey. R, 20-35; 8, 14-30.

K. spinosa Womersley & Norris. R, 22-33.

Polvenélia laciniata J. Agardh, R, 30-35, 30,

Tharnophyllis lacerata Womersiey & Narris.

GIGARTINALFS—Plocamiacese

*Plocumium aneustum (s. AB)

Harvey. R, 8-35, 50; 5, 5-30.

P. cartilagineum {L.) Dixon, S, %2.

"Po mercensii (Greville) Harvey. RK, t16-)

18-35, 50; 5, (13-) 15-30, OF North Sect,

sublittoral, Specht,

*}_ preissianum Sonder. R, (15-) 20-35, 50; S,

Hooker &

Phacelocarpaceac

“Phacdlocarpus labillurdieri (Mert.) 1, Agardh.

R, 20-25, 50; S, 5-15.

DP. seysilis Harvey. 'R, 30-32,

Nizymeninceae

Stenvcladia austrulivy (Sond,) Silva, R, 50.

Rhabdoniacene

Areschougia latrencia (AH, & H.) MMarvey. S.

20-25,

Les

Rhodophyllidaceae

*Rhodophyllis membranacea (H, & H,) Harvey.

R, 22-35; S, 16-36.

R, valany Hacvey? R, 30-33,

Hypneacese

add et episcopalis Harvey. R, 8-25, 50: 5,

6-25.

Mychadeaceae

Mychodeu carnosa Hooker & Harvey, R, 30-35.

MW. compressa Harvey. S$, 5-12.

M. foliose (Harv.) J. Agardh, S, 5,

Acrotylateae

Amphivlexia Avmenacladioides I, Agardh. $,

15.

Hennedya crispa Harvey, R, 22.

Ruopy MENIALES— Rhodymeniaceae

Bindera splachnoides Harvey. 5, 13-25.

Coelarihrum ctiftenti (Hary,) Kylin, R, 30-35;

5, 20-25.

Potgaecale brownii Harvey. R, 20-355

13-23.

Leptosomia cliftenii (\, Ag.) J. Agardh? R, 30.

*Riedymenia ausiralis Sander. R, (16-) 20-24

(-35), 50; &, 13-30,

Aymenacladia polymorpha (Harv.) J. Agardh.

Dorothee, 1-6,

Lomentariaceae

Lomentaria corynephora (1, Ag.) Kylin, R,

30-32; S, 15-25.

Champia affinis UA, & Hey J, Agardh, R,

20-35; S, 20-30.

C. lusmunica Harvey, R, 30-35,'8, 22,

CRRAMIALUS—Cerumiitceae

Crolanieue

Crovania mucosa Wollaston. Between South

and Middle Sect, uppermost sublittoral,

Specht.

Ptilocladia pialchra Sonder, R, 20-25.

Antithamnieae

Antithamnion urmatune (3, Ag. De Toni. R,

20-25, on Zonarin spiralis.

A. hanewioides (Sonder) De Tani. S, 16-23,

Between ‘South and Middle Sec., USL, epi-

phytic, Spechy.

4A. verticale (Harv.) J. Agurdh. R, 30, on

Muriodesma qierelfolinm,

Avrothamnian preissii (Souwd,) Wollaston, Be-

tween South and Middle Sect. USL. on

Sargassim tristichum, Specht.

Ballia batlivides (Sonder) Wollaston. R, 22-

*B, cniliiricha (C. Ag.) Kuetzing, R, 22-35,

B. mariana Harvey. R, 22-35.

Mapruieimanipry pellucidum (Harv,) Wallasion,

R, 15,

M. secundum Wollaston R, 35.

Heterothamnitae

Trithamnion yaleare Wollaston, Between South

and Middle Sect, USL. on Prerocladia

capillacea, Specht,

Ceramicae

Centroveras clavalaturn (C. Ag.) Montagne,

Reiween South and Middle Sect, in pools on

causeway, Specht.

Ceramium spp Several species occus as epi-

phytes or on rock; determination must await

monographic study.

Wrangeligae

Wrangelia crassa Hooker & Harvey, R, 23-

W. nitella Harvey, R, 23.

166 5, A. SHEPHERD AND H. B 3, WOMERSLEY

Catlithamnivuc

Callithamnion laricinim Varvey? $8, 5, an

Merdgoniolithon charotdes,

Callithamnion sp. R, 33.

Spongocloniewe

Halopleemi preissii Sonder. R. 35.

Griffitisieae

Grifithsia pulvinata Baldock mis. Be ween

South and Middle Sect., in pools on cause-

Way, Specdit.

Ptiloteac

*"Eupitfoia articulatu (J. Ag-) Schmitz, R. 35,

50; S. 16-23.

Dasy phileae

Dasyphila preixsii Sonder, R, 50; 8, 13-23.

Rhodocalls elegans Kuetzing. R, 22-35, 30:

Sublitioral (on craypot) off North Sect,

Specht

Dasyyceae

Basa extensa Sonder, Ry 23.

Dasya nacearioides Harvey. S, 5-12.

Dasyupsis vlavigera Womersley. R. 20-25; 5,

5-12. Between South and Middle Sect,, USL,

Speelir,

(Hurv.) Falk. R,

Heterasiphonia — crassipey

30-35

Thuretia teres Harvey, S, 5,

Delesseriaceae

Delesserieae

Hypoglossium dendreides Hayy.) J. Agarch,

RK. 15.

A, reveluram ( Harv.) J. Agardh, R, 50.

41, spathulatum (Sond,) Kuetzing. R, 22.

Nitophyllese

Acrosariton uncinanin Ul. Ag.) Kylinw R, 8.

Hymenena duiltipartiia (A. & He) Kylin, Ry

50,

Creptanleura endiviaejolia (H. & H.) Kylin.

R, 8-25,

Rhodomelacene

Sarcomenieac

Surcomenia delesserioides Sonder. R, 30,

Polysiphoniae

*Palvsiphania nigrita Sonder. 8, 6-30. Doratiec.

{-f.

PB, sueoulenta Harv, 5. 30).

Pierosiphoniese

Dictyrnenia tridens (Mert,) Greville. R, 40.

Prerosiplionia? R, 34,

Herposiphoniewe

Herposiphonia monilifera (H. & H.) Falken

berg. R, 36.

M. versicolor (HL & H.) Falkenberg, R, 8-25.

Polyzonieae

Dayyclonium ineisum (J. Ag.) Kyline R, Su.

Cliftimaea pectinata Harvey. R, 35.

Amansiese

Almdisia pinnatifida Harvey. S, 1525,

Lenormandia muelleri Sonder. R, 50.

Osmundaria prolifera Lamauroux. &,

20-25.

34; 5,

Chondrieae

Chondria sp, R, 36.

Chandria sp. Between South and Middle Seet,,

USL. Specht.

Clidaius elatuy (Sond.) Falkenberg. S, 20-25,

Liurenciese

“Tagtrencia cluta (C. Ag.) Harvey. R, 20-33;

S.,22.

I... foster? Greville. S. 20-30),

1. gracilis, Hooker & Harvey? S, 15.

L, heteroelada Hurvey, R, 30-33: S$, is

L. obtise (Hluds.) Lamuuroux. §, 22,

Uneerlain position

Halediciyon aravhneidenm Harvey. Middle

Seen 20. Carmadus,

Acknowledgements

We are grateful to the Royal Society of

South Anstraliy (Research and Endowment

Fund) aod the Department of Fisheries and

Fina Conservation for grants towards the

field work. Jeanette E. Watson and John Q.

Ottaway were diving companions and their

enthusiusuc assistance was greatly valued.

Assistance from the Australian Research

Grants Committee in the provision of technical

iissistanee, is gratefully acknowledged by the

second author.

References

Brecanisr, PL, (1960). Notes an the marine

algal ecology of some exposed rocky shores

of Northland, New Zealand. Beranica mar. 1.

46-94.

C.S.ER.O. (1966).—Aust. Oceanogr, Cruise

Report No. 10.

CS.LR.0, (19670).—Ausr. Oceanogr Cruise

Report No. 16,

C.S..R.0. (1967b).—Aust. Oceanogr. Cruise

Report Na. 34.

CS.LR.O, (1967¢).—Aust. Oceanogr. Cruise

Report No. 46.

CS.LR.O. Oceanogr. Cruise

(1968 ).—Aust.

Repart No, 43.

FrepMann, J. (1937)—Recherches sur la vege»

tation marine de la Méditerranée, Ta cate

des Atbéres. Rev. Alevl. 10. 1-339,

Hywp, J. &. & Vaux, D. (1963).—Report of u

survey for Tuna in Western Australian waters,

C.S.1LR.0. Aust, Div. Fish Oceanogr, Rep,

No, 37.

JeRLay, N. G., (1951),—Optical studies of oceunic

waters, Report Swedish Deep Sea Exped, 3,

fase, 1, 1-52,

Jeriov. N. G, (1968) —"Optical Oceanography”.

(Elsevier: Amsterdam. )

Lakkim, A, W. D., Drew, E. A. & Crossti.

R, N. (1967).—The yertical distribution of

attached marine algac in Malta. J. Ecol. 55.

361-371,

Levaina, T. (1968),—Photosynthesis of some

Marine Algae in clear, tropical oceanic water,

Batanice mar, 11, 72-80.

SHEPHERD. S. A. & Womrestry, H. B.S, (1970).

THE SUB-TIDAL ECOLOGY OF BENTHIC ALGAE 167

—The Sublittoral Ecology of West Island,

South Australia. I. Environmental features

and the algal ecology. Trans. R. Suc. S, Aust.

94, 105-138,

Specnut, R. L. (1969).—The vegetation of Pearson

Islands: a re-examination—February, 1960.

Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust. 93, 143-152.

Sverprup, H. U., JonNson, M, W., & FLEMING,

R. H. (1942).—“The Oceans. Their Physics,

Chemistry and General Biology.” (Prentice

Hall: New York.)

TayLor, W. R. (1961).—Distribution in depth of

marine algae in the Caribbean and adjacent

seas. Jn Recent Advances in Botany, pp. 193-

197, (Univ. Toronto Press: Toronto.)

TwipaLe, C. R. (1971).—Pearson Island Expedi-

tion 1969. 2. Geomorphology. Trans. R. Sac.

S, Aust, 95, 123-130,

WoMeERSLEY. H. B. S. (1967).—A critical review

of the marine algae of southern Australia. H.

Phaeophyta. Aust. J. Bot. 15, 189-270.

WoMERSLEY. H. B. S. (1971).—New records and

taxa of marine Chlorophyta in southern Aus-

tralia, Trans. R. Soc. S, Aust, 95, 113-120.

WoMERSLEY, H. B. S., & EpMonps, S. J. (1958).

—A general account of the intertidal ecology

of South Australian coasts. Aust. J. mar.

freshw. Res. 9, 217-260.

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969, — 8. HELMINTHS

BY PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Summary

This paper deals with helminths collected at Pearson I. (P.I.) and near-by Flinders I. (F.1.) off the

western coast of South Australia. Most of them are nematodes, but preliminary identifications have

been made of trematodes and cestodes. New nematodes described are Skrjabinodon parasmythi

from Underwoodisaurus milii (F.1.) and Phyllodactylus marmoratus (F.1.); 5. leristae from Lerista

sp. (F.I.); Cloacina pearsoni from Petrogale penicillata (P.1.); Rictularia pearsoni and

Gongylonema beveridgei from Rattus fuscipes (P.I.). A new genus, Cristaceps (?

Amidostomatidae), is proposed for Pharyngostro~zgylus woodwardi Wood, two females of which

were taken from Petrogale penicillata (P.1.). Thelandros karta~za Johnston and Mawson, recorded

from Amphibolurus fionni(?) (P.1.), Lerista sp. and Hemiergis peronii (F.1.), is transferred to

Parapharyngodon Chatterji. Other species recorded, mostly with some redescription and figures

are: Cloacina petrogule Johnston and Mawson, Labiostrongylus longispicnlaris Wood,

Rugopharynx australis (Monnig), and Macropostrongylus pearsoni Johnston and Mawson, all from

Petrogale penicillata (P.1.); Subulura ortleppi Inglis from Rattus fuscipes (P.I.); Pl~aryngodon

kartana Johnston and Mawson from Underwoodisaurus milit (F.1.). Skrjabinelazia sp. from

Phyllodactylus marmoratus (P.1.), and Physaloptera sp. from Rattus fuscipes, are also recorded.

Trematodes recorded are Paradistomum crucifer (Nicoll) from Phyllodactylus marmoratus (P.1.)

and dicrocoeliids from Amphibolurus fionni (?) (P.1.) and Rattus fuscipes (P.1.). Cestodes recorded

are Oijchoristica sp. from Lerista tetradactyla (P.1.) and Hepatotaenia sp. from Rattus fuscipes

(P.I.).

PEARSON ISLAND EXPEDITION 1969.—8. HELMINTHS

hy ParnictA M. Mawson*

Summary

This paper deals with helminths collected at Pearson |, (P.0.) and near-by Flinders . (F.1L) off

the western coust of South Australia. Mast of them are nematodes, but preliminary identifications

have been made of trematodes and cestodes. New nematodes described are Skrighinadan pavasmytiti

from Claderwoodtsaurus milli (PAL) and Phyllodactylus marmoratusy (FL): 8. leristae from Coerista sp.

(FL) Cloacina pearsont trom Perrogale penirillata (PI); Rictularia pearson’ and Gengylonema

heveridge: from Rartis fuseipes (PL). A new venus, Cristacepy (2 Amidostomatidac), is proposed

for Pharyngostronyylas woodward’ Wood, two females of which were taken from Pefrogale penicillata

(PAL). Thelandros kertana Johnston and Mawson, recorded from Aymphibolurus fionnl( 2) (PI), Levrista

sp. and Hermiergiy peropit (PL), ix transferred to Paraplaryngedan Chatierji Other species recorded,

mostly with some redescription and figures are: Cloacina petragale Johuston and Mawson, Lahio-

wrengyvlis langispicularis Wood, Rugopharyne australis (Mannig), and Madropostrongylas pearsoni

Johnston und Mawson, all from Petroedle penicillace (PA); Subulura ortleppt Tglis from Rattus

faseipes (PL), Pharyngedon karlana Johnston and Mawson fram Underwoadlsaurus milli CPL).

Skrjuhinelazia sp. from Pliyllodactviis marmorathy (PID, and Physaloptera sp. from Rattus fuscipes,

ate also recorded,

Trematodes recorded are Parnedisiamnnum crucifer (Nicoll) from Phyllodactylis marmoratius (P21)

and dicrocoeliids from aimphiboluras fionni (2)

(PT) and Rarus fuscipes (PT, Cestodes

recorded are Odehoristiva sp, from Lerista tetradactyla (PA) and Hepatotaenia sp. from Ratits

fuseipes (PL).

Introduction

The helminths described i this paper were

collected during and after the 1969 Expedition

to the Pearson Islands, organised by the Royal

Society of South Australia and the South Aus-

tralian Department of Fisheries and Fauna

Conservation. The Pearson Islands are i small

group lying about 40 miles off the coast of

South Australia at the eastcin end of the Great.

Australian Bight, The largest of these. Pearson

L.. is about 162 heetures in extent, the others

very much smaller, Several scientific expedi-

lions have been made to the group which is

otherwise visited only by fishermen, for shelter

or far bait. Accounts of the geamorphology,

land and marine vegetation, and fauna, ate

iso given in (his volume of the Transactions,

The animals examined on the island for hel-

ninths were lizards and rats, collected by Dr

Michael Smyth, of the Department of Zoology.

University of Adelaide, Later, more helminths

were collected from animals which died after

being brought back to the mainland, Two

nematodes from Rartus fuscipes murrayé, From

Pearson L., believed to have heen collected by

the Wood Jones Expedition of 1923. and

hitherto unexamined. are also included

Tlinders Island, about 32 km (20 miles)

northeast of the Pearson group, is a larger

island which has. been grazed and farmed for

many years. Tt was visited on the way to

Pearson Faland on the 1969 expedition, and

parasites of lizards collected there are included

in this report.

The most commonly found helminths were

Nematodes, which are described in this paper.

Three collections of cestodes were sent to Dr.

John Hickman of the Zoology Department,

University of Tasmania, who has kindly given

preliminary identifications for inclusion in this

paper, Three collections of trematodes have

been identified, as fat as their condition allows,

by my colleamic Miss Madeline Angel, and

these ulso are listed.

The numbers of animals dissected is too

small to allow any deductions of infestation

Tate or of species relationships with parasites

of mainland hosts. Among the lizards. the

nematodes present are ihe same, or closely

related, species as those found in other parts of

Australia.

The nematodes ftom the Pearson Island rat

ave more interesting und have diverse relation-

ships. Svbulure ortleppi Inglis waa hitherto

kbown only fram two South African rats, and

is the first record of the genus from an Aus-

* Zoology Department, University of Adelaide, Adelaide. §. Aust 3000.

Trans. Ruy. Soc. 8. Aust, Vol, 95, Mart 3, 15th October 1971,

170

tralian ru, Gonpvlonema beveridgel on. sp.

represents a gonus only once before reported

from an Australian rodent, and never trom a

native Reatius sp., although at least 55 of these

have heen dissected ih this laboralory and no

specimens of the ahove genus found. Ricinu-

luria pearsoni nap. is quite different from the

two Rietwaria spp. described from northern

Australian rats. and more closely resembles a

specics from the Philippine [slands. 'This genus

dlso has not been Found in southern Australian

mainland rats: it was, however, collected from

Peurson T. ity 1923

Large numbers of nematodes were present in

the stomach of two rock willabies examined.

Almost all of these belong to three species, two

af which, Lahiastrangylus — langispicularis

Wood und Rugepharynx australis: (Monniz).

are widespread in macropods all over Austra-

lia, while the third, Macropostroneylus

pearson? Johnston & Muwson has never been

found elsewhere thin on Pearson I.

The type specimens of new species deseribed

will be deposited im the Soulh Australian

Muscum, and paratypes retained in the Hel-

minthological Collection of the Zoology De-

partment of the University of Adelaide,

The occurrence of helminths in the animals

collected on the expedition is shown in Table |.

No Acanthocephala were found. A list of the

helminths, identified as fat as possible and

arranged under their hosts, is given below, and

this 18 followed by detailed accounts of the

nematodes.

Trematoda and Cestoda

Reptiles

AMPHIBOLUUS FIONNI (Proctor) ?—Elongate

dictococliids, gall bladder and bile duet.

Pearson [.

PHYLLODACTYLUS MARMORATUS (Gray).—

Paradistomium cruct/er (Nicoll), gall bhidder.

Pearsen |

LRRISTA TETRADACTYLA (Lucas & Frast),—

Ovichoristicn sp,, intestine. Pearson I.

Mamrrals

Rattus rusemrs (Waterhouse) var. MURRAY

Thomas —Elongute dicrocoeliids. gall biad-

der, Meéprrordenia sp., intestine.

Nematoda

Reptiles

AMPHIBOLURUS FIONNE (Proctor) ?--Pura-

pluryngedan kareena Johnston & Mawson,

Pearson |

PATRICIA M, MAWSON

PHYLLODACTYLUS = MARMOKATUS (Grey) —

Shrjadbinodon parasmythi n.sp., Flinders. 1.5

Parapharyngoden — kartana (Johnston &

Mawson). Skrjabinelazigd sp.. Pearson Ff.

UNDERWOODISAURUS MILI (Bory) —Skrjabino-

dan pdravmythi osp,, Pharyngodon kartaned

Johnston & Mawson, Flinders 1,

LRRISTA Sp. 2 1.8p.).—Perapharyngedan

kartana (Iohnston & Mawson). Skrjahine-

don lerisioe, Flinders 4.

HEMIERGIS PERONIL { Fitzinger) —Perapharyn-

godon kartune (lohnston & Mawson), Flin-

ders. J,

Mammals

PETROGALE PENICILLATA (Griffith), —Rrige-

pharyax iusralty (Monnig), Cleacina petra-

gale Johnston & Mawson, Clouecine pearsoni

nsp,, Lahiastrangylus longixpiculariy Wood,

Macropostrongyiis pearson’ Johnstan &

Mawson, Cristucens woudwardl (Wood),

Pearson I.

Rattus euscipres (Waterhouse) var. MURRAYI

Thomas. —Rierulerla pearson’ sp.. Gonpy-

forneina beveridgei nsp.. Phyyuloplera sp,,

Seéutira ortleppi Melis, Pearson I.

NEMATODA

Cloacina petrogale Johnsion & Muwson, 1448:

277. from Perragate penicillata (syn P.

lateralis), Central Austraftia: J & M.. 1941a,

from Thiylogale eugenil, Kangaroo 1; J. &

M,, 194tb. from Petrogele penicillata,

Pearson |. and Thyleeale flindersi, Flinders

FIGS, 1-4

Host und locality! Petrogale

Pearson J,

The measurements of ithe one pale and

three lemale specimens of the present collec

tion are given in Table 2.

In the new, material Cand in the paratype

nvaterlal) oesophapeal teeth ire preseat in an

elongate group at the Jevel of a slight swelling

of the oesophagus just in front of the terminal

bulb (Fig, 3), Features which, combined. cis-

tinguish C. pefregale from other Claaeina spp.

are: the clongate submedian cephalic pupillac.

the relutively deep and thin-walled buccal cap-

sule, the anterior posilion af the cervical papil-

lae, the rather long oesophagus with i) group of

leeth in the lumen just anterior to the terminal

swolling, the nerve ring at ahout a quarter the

length of, and exeretary pore near the posi¢rior

end of, the oesophagus, and the spicule tenth

aboul # third of the body length,

peniciltata,

TTAL.MINTHS 71

region.

Fig. 3—Enlargement of oesophagus in

Cleacina petroyile. Fig. |.

end. Fig, 2,—Oesophugeal

region a-b in Fig. 2. Fig. 4— Lateral

view of bursa.

Cloacina pearsonl n.sp,

FIGS, 5-5

Host and locality; Pelrogale pear'sonl, Peursun

Six males and four females were collected;

measurements are given. in Table 2, The sub-

median cephalic pupillag are small, with the

distal segment of cach distinetly shorter thin

the proximal. The bucveal capsule is almost

cylindrical and is relatively deep (external

diameter 20-25 pm. depth 8-11 jm). The

oesophagus is very slightly swollen just anterior

lo the nerve ring (about midlength) and has a

terminal bulh. ‘The cervical pupillue are well

buck. a short distance im front of the level of

the nerve ring. ‘The excretory pore ts in the

region of the terminal bulb of the oesophagus.

No oesophageal teeth were obsetved.

The tail of the female is conical, ending in

a fine point. The vulva lies about one tail

length anteriot te the anus, The ovejectors

join quite near the vulva but the vagina makes

» short forward loop before passing to the

vulva,

In the male the alate spicules are about a

third of the body length, A gubernuculum is

present, The bursal lobes are separated from

each other by slight indentations. The arrange-

ment of the bursal rays is shown in Fig, 8. The

genital cone is well developed and bears two

small rounded accessory lobes dorsally.

The species is close to C. elegans J. & M..

1938.-C. digitata J. & M., 1940b. and C. liebigi

J. & M., 1938, but differs from these in onc

or more of the following features: absence of

thick inflated cervical cuticle, positiom of the

exerclory pore, presence of pre-neural swelling

of the oesophagus, and the length and course

of the vagina,

Macropostrongylus oo pearsoni Johnston &

Mawson, 1940a, from Petrogale penicillata,

Pearson T-

FIGS. 9-13

Host and locality: Petragule

Pearson I.

The original description of this species was

based on two specimens, one male and onc

female. Many specimens ure available, as this

was. the most numerous nematode in the

stomach of the wallaby, These are in a better

condition than the old) muterial and a fuller

description can now he given. Measurements

are shown in Table 2.

The cuticle over the anterior end forms.

six-lobed plate, most clearly seen in en face

view, which continues into the buccal cavity.

around which it forms a more or less cylin-

drical wall in which the more strongly xclero-

tised buccal capsule itself is embedded. At

about the mid-length of the buccal cavity the

lining material projects into the lumen as a

shelf or frill. In the type specimens this labial

cuticle inside the mauth is not so thick and the

shelf appears thinner and more rigid: this ts

the condition in a specimen (Fig, 11), which

was given to me by Mr, Beveridge and which

was possibly preserved differently, The shelf

is not formed of “numerous tooth-like projec-

tions’ but is cofitinugus, though irregularly

pleated; presumubly this projecting flap. which

is at different angles to the long uxis of the

wornis, in different specimens, serves in some

way to strain the food entering the mouth. The

wall of the buccal capsule proper is thicker at

its. mid-length than at either end, and it is

radially striated.

penicillare,

The four sub-median cephalic papillae lie

between Johes of the anterior cuticular plate:

zach bears a pair of small forwardly directed

172 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Figs, 5-8 Cloacina pearsoni. Fig. 5.—Anterior end.

Posterior end of female.

Figs. 9-13 Mucropostrongvlus pearsoni.

head, to same scale.

thin.

In. am.

setae. The amphids open on a large pupilla-

like elevation of the cuticle, larger than the

cephalic papillae, The thread-like cervical

papillae are at about a third of the length. of

the oesophagus from the anterior end.

The anterior two-thirds of the oesophagus

is cylindrical, and is followed by a slightly

narrower part ending in a bulb. The nerve

ring surrounds the junction of the two parts,

and the excretory pore is immediately pasterior

to this.

The tail of the female tapers gradually to

end in a short conical point. The length of

the vagina is about equal to that of the tail,

Fig. 6,—Oesophageal region. Fig. 7.—

Fig, 8.—Derso-lateral view of bursa.

s Figs, 9, 10.—Median and. en face views, respectively, of

; Fig, 11. -Head of female in which “lining” of buccal vapsule ix

Fig. 12—Oesophageal region. Fig, 13. -Ventral view of bursa, All scales given

and the distunce between vulva and anus a

little less than the length of the tail. The eggs

are about 150 hy 60 xm, The egg length given

in the original description was obviously a mis-

print, The spicules are 1/5.7-6.7 of the hody

length, They are alate for most of their length,

and end in simple tips. The heart-shaped

gubernaculum appears to have a keel which

lies between the spicules, The bursa is longer

dorsally than ventrally. The arrangement of

the rays is shown in Fig. 13, The ventro-lateral

rays and the externo-dorsal rays do not reach

the edge of the bursa and their tips lift the

bursa outwards) The tips of the two lateral

HELMINTHS 173

branches of the dorsal ray bend inwards, push-

ing the bursa in. The genira! cone is well deve-

loped, and the accessory cone, or dorsal lip of

the cloacal aperture, bears two bifid processes

(Fig. 13).

Labiostrongyhis longispicularis Wood, 1930,

from Macropus bernardus, Western Austra-

lia (7); Johnslon & Mawson, 1938, from

Macropus robustus, Centtal Australia: J. &

M., 1940, from Petregele penicillata,

Pearson 1.*

FIGS. (4-15

Host atid locality: Petrogale penicillata,

Pearson I.

Labiostrongyluy flongispicularis has been

recorded from many species of muacropaods and

from most paris of Australia. The present

specimens are rather shorter than those pre-

viously recorded for the species. The genital

cone is well developed, and the accessory cone

bilobed, each lobe carrying a small projection

In some specimens the

which. is bifid distally.

Labiostronzylus langispicilaris,

genital cone and secessory cone.

Figs. 14-15,

Figs, 16-19. Cristaceps woodwarii,

scale,

in um,

Fig. 14.—Dorsal ray of aberrant shape.

Fig. 18—Oesophageal region.

distal portions are asyinmetrical (Fig. 15). The

dorsal ray is the typical shape for the species,

although in some specimens this too is mis-

shapen (Fig. 14). The spicules are longer in

relation to the body length than in the type

specimens.

Rugopharynx australis (Ménnig); Wood, 1929,

from Macropus bernadus, Western Austra-

lia (2); Mawson, 1964, from Megaleia rufa,

New South Wales and Queensland; M.

eiganteus, Queensland.

Spirostrongylus australis Moénnig, 1926, from

Macropus rufus, S, Africa (Zoo),

Pharyngestrongylus alpha Yohnston & Mawson.

J. & M., 1938, from Petrogale penicillata

Central Australias J, & M.. 1940a, from

Petrogale penicillata, Macrapus melanaps

Pearson 1., S.A,

Pharynvostrangylus beta Johnston & Mawson

J. & M., 1938, from Petregale penicillata,

Central Australia; J. & M., 1940a, from

Macropus melanops, Petrogule penicillata,

Thylogale flindersi, South Australia.

Host and locality: Petrogale penicillata,

Pearson I.

2090

_3a0

Fiz:

I5.—

Figs, 16 & 17—Lateral and semi-en face views of head, to same

Fig. 19.—Posterior end of body. All scales. given

* Records listed here are only those where some description is given, or to a Pearson I. occurrence.

+ The records listed here are only those where some description is given or fo a Pearson I,

occurrence,.

(74

Rugopitrynxe qistralisy is a species wide-

spread in macropods all over Australia: it was

recorded trom the Pearson Island Wallaby by

Johnston und Mawson (1940, p. 97). In the

present collections it is the second most abun-

dant species in the stomach, The species was

redescribed (Mawson 1964, p, 245) and the

new specimens, though slightly smaller, clascly

resemble thase from the mainland hosts.

Cristaceps woodwardi (Wood) fn. comb.

Pharyagostrongylus woodwardi Wood, 1930.

from Muacropus hernardus (Syn. M. wood-

werdi), Western Australia (%).

FIGS. 16-19

Host and = Joculity!: —Petregule

Pearson 1,

Only twa fernules of this species were found,

The collector, Mr. lan Beveridge, stated that

they were partly in Ihe mucosu of the stomach,

und were removed only with some difficulty.

This is the situation in which the type speci-

mens were found:

pearyveni,

Che unusual cuticular ornamentation of the

head identifies the specimens as being close to

Wood's species, and In all points they agree

with his description, The small dillerences of

measurements (Tuble |} are nevligible, and no

new species is proposed for them, in spite of

the wide geographicul separation of the hosts.”

As Wood paints out. there are distinet ull-

ferences between this species und the type

species of Phuryaxostrongylns Yorke & Muple-

stone, 1926, and a new penus, C'ristucepys, is

now proposed fur jt, with the following ding-

nosis: ? Amidostomatidae: (sensu Inglis 1968).

Long slender worms; anterior end rounded,

with apical cuticle raised into. two dorso-ven-

tral rows of smill denticles: smull oval mouth

between these, Four small submedian papillue

and two «distinct amphids lying close to, but

luleral trom, the rows of dentieles; buccal cap-

sule well chilinised, more or less cylindrical,

striated; ocsophagus narrow in first half. wiilen-

ing iN second half. Mule: spicules equal, simi-

lat, lang and straight. bursa directed dorsally.

yenirul rays together, yentro-lateral separate.

medio- and postero-laterals together. externo-

dorsal separate but arising from lateral stem,

dorsal divided to base, cach branch Jong und

PATRICIA M, MAWSON

slender, brfurcating near tip. Gubernaculum

present, Feptale: tl conical, vulva shortiy in

front of anus, vagina long, uteri and ovijectors

directed anteriorly. Parasitic in gastric mucosa

of Australian marsupials (macropods),

Type species. HW Wwoodwardi (Wood), syn.

Pharyngostrongylus woodwardi Wood, 1931-

Systematic position ef the genus, No satisfac-

tory classificaion has yet been published of the

strongyle nematodes from the stomach of Aus-

tralian macropods, largely perhaps hecuuse of

the lack of detail im the earlier descriptions of

some of these, The characters of the head

[the cuticular ornamentation and particularly

the complete absence of uny lips or “fabial

roll") separate Crixtacepy trom the various

Trichoneminac [sensu Yorke & Maplestane

1926) from mucropods and wombats, in pare

ticular from the three main groups, as follows:

|, The pharyngostrongyle group (Pharyrigo-

strongylus, Qesophagonastes, Rugopharvns and

Pararugopharynx) in which there is a buccal

ring as well us a vestibule, and in which a leaf

crown, infernal or external. may or may not

be present.

2. The lubiostrongyle group (Lubiostronsyins,

Zomalvinius, Parazonioluimus), in which the

lips are very well developed and a leat crown

absent.

3. The group including Cleaeina, Phascola-

strengylys, and Macrapostrongyilis, in which

an internal leaf crown arises from a cylindrical

buccal capsule.

The small simple mouth ond rounded

antenor end with denticulate ornamentation

are qlso different from any genus so. for ces-

cribed, llowever, the Jong slender body, the

situation of the eephulic papilluc, as well as

Ube locatton in which the species is tound, are

suggestive of Filarinemea spp, (Ménnig 1929.

Mawson 1964), It is probable Unit the species

may belong in the Amidostomatidue (sensu

Inglis 1968), although the strongly chitinised

huccal capside is different from that of amy

other genus ascribed to this family. The bi-

lateral symmetry of the head shows a conver-

gence with the spirurid parasites. of the

stomach wall of other mammals and birds, ax

pointed out bv Inglis (19645).

* Wood gave the origin of the host, which hud died in captivity in England, as Western Australia.

The range of Macrapay bernurdus (Woodward's Walloroa) is given by W. D. Lo Ride (1970) ns

“raterion ol Anihens tant". id, in the Northern Territary,

HELMINTHS

Tnglis in his comprehensive study of Aus-

tralian trichostrongyles considers that all tri-

chostrongyloid genera recorded from Austra-

lian animals fall into the family Amidostoma-

tidae Travassos. 1919, In his revised definition

of this family. Inglis states that the latero-

dorsal (= externo-dorsal) rays “arise from the

base of the dorsal ray”. This is an oversimpli-

fication. as in many species the externo-dorsal

ray appeurs to have no special connection with

the dorsal ray, and this is the case in Cristaceps

woadwardi, according to Wood's description.

Rictularia pearsoni n.sp.

FIGS. 20-26

Host and locality: Rettus fuscipes murrayi,

Pearson 1.

Females of a species of Rictularia were

tuken from two of four rats dissected in 1969,

and a male and a female of the same species

arc present in a collection from the same host

Fins. 20-26.

22—Dorsal view of head of male.

of vulva,

5O ym

175

species, apparently made during the 1923 expe-

dition to the Pearson |. Male and females are

afl smaller than Ricralaria spp. described from

other Australian rats. The measurements are

given in Table 2.

In both sexes the lateral spines continue

throughout the body length. Those of the

oesophageal region are imbricate, behind this

more houok-like (Pig. 23). The mouth is more

or less circular and is only slightly inclined

dorsally. The teeth on the anterior border of

the buccal capsule are rounded rather than

pointed, and are few in number, only 10 or 12.

Of these, two are very wide and occupy most

of the ventral sector of the border, The two

blunt ventral, and the pointed dorsal, oeso-

phageal teeth at the base of the buccal capsule.

are short,

The nerve ring lies ut about the middle. and

the exerctory pore at about three-quarters. of

the anterior muscular part of the ocsophagus,

400 yim

Fig. 25—Posterior end of male. Fig. 26.—Spicules and gubernaculum. Figs,

20. 21, 22. und 26 to scale beside Fig. 22; Figs. 23. 24, and 25 to seale beside Fig. 25.

176 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

und the cervical papillae just hehind it at the

level of the eighth or ninth spine.

The tail of the female is short, conical. and

ends it a small point. The vulva lies a short

distance unterior ti the posterior end -o! ihe

oesophugus; the lips of the vulva are salient,

but there i oe ornamentation of the cuticle

wind i, ws in other Australian species. The

eges ule about SQ hy 35 pm.

In the male the spicules ure unequal, the

shorter about half the length of the longer; a

small gubernaculuuy is present, There are four

preanal fans, The caudal papillie ure typical

of the genus (Fig, 25). The cuticle around

the cloaca is not Tugose, as jn sume species of

the genus..

Two species of Riciwluria have been des-

Gribed from Australian rodents, R, cersealrst

Mawson. 1974, and R. myckerrayae Mawson,

1971. “Lhe Pearson Island species differs from

hath of these in the greater number and extent

of the Interal spines, in the shape and the small

nuoiber of peribuccal teeth, and in the dis-

linc(ly snvaller size of both sexes. ft differs

further from R, carsiairs? in the inequality of

the spicules, und from R, muekerrasue in the

shape of the buceal capsule. IL is close to R.

Wha/tont Titbangui, '931, the male of which

was described by Schmidt and Kuntz in 1967,

but differs fron; it in the detail of the dentition,

in the spicule lengih and in the arrangement

of the caudal papillae in the male, A new

species, Ricuderia pearseni, ts thercfore pro-

posed

Gongylonema beveridget np,

FIGS. 26-30

Host. yind locality: Rertus fuseipes murreye,

Peafson J,

A species of Gongylonemad was present in

the stomach of two of four ruts dissected by

the author, In one there were two fomuales and

one male and in the other two females, The

females of the second collection were smaller

than those of the first. and although numerous

eggs were present, these were without shells,

and obviously infertile.

In the male the cuticular ornamentation is

restricted to the left side of the bedy and con-

tinues only to 350 ,m from the anterior end.

A lateral ala is present on ihe right side and

continues for the whole body length, widening

to form the right caudal ala, In the fenale

the cuticular ornamentation is more extensive

and is deyelopes! on dorsal and ventral sides

of the body, though there js very tittle directly

beside cach of the (wo lateral alae, which

reach from just behind the cervical pyupifiiie

to 13-15 mo from the head. "The cutivulay

bosses Teach to 1.5 mm trom the head in a

72 mm long specimen, The buccal cupsule is

60 pm long in the male anil in the shurtest

Jemalé, and 70 zm long in the tertile females.

In beth sexes the cervical papillae lie behind

the level of the posterior end of the huccul cap-

sule and just in front of the origin of the literal

alae, The nerve cing is just behind the cervical

papillae, the excretory pore in the female ix al

about two thirds the length of the anterior part

of the ovsyphaous, in the mule nearer the junc-

tion of this with tke glandular part. It has

been slated by various authors that many of

the measurements usually given lor nematodes

have no specific value in the case of Gongvio-

nema spp.; Desportes, Chahaut & Campana

(1949) restrict the useful measurements to

lengths of the body, buccal capsule. spicules,

gubernaculum and tail, the distance of the

vulva from the posterior ent, und the egg size,

In the four femile worms of the present col-

lection there is certainly considerable variation

in the distance of the nerve ring. cervical

papillae, ete. from the anterior end. due

largely to the state of contruction of the speci-

mens, The specimen shown in Fig, 29 jo i

relaxed terale, infertile, while Fig. 28 Is of

the largest fermale, which is in a somewhat can-

tracted stite,

On the conical tail of the female, the phas-

mids are close to the tip; the vulva lies about

a ninth to a tenth of the body length from

the posterior end. Eggs in the vagina are

55-60 by 35-36 pm, with thick smooth shells

and containing a coiled larva,

fo the nile the caudal alie meet behind the

hocly; the right ala is wider than the left. The

arrangement of the caudal papillae 4 shown

m Fig. 30. ‘The Ieft gpicule is nine times the

length of the right. the gubermaculum is shorter

than the right spicule. spatulyte, with a

broadened tip.

There ure only twa records of Crongylonema

sp. from rodents in Australia; Fielding (1928,

p. 126) noted G, sp. From Retr nervegieys,

Re rattus, Mus muveulus, and Hydronrys

chrysogaster. fram north Queensland; and

Johnston (1918, p. 61) suggested that eges

from the liver of Adus muscutuy (Sydney)

Were those of G. sp. Many native rodents,

including 35 Aydronivyy chrysogaster, have

heen dissected in this department, but no

Gongyloneme sp. has been found, except for

HELMINTHS 77

eres eae

NOE

}

zl.

(oO

Figs. 27-30. Gongylonema beveritdgei,

Fig. 27—Anterior end of male. Figs. 28 & 29.—Anterior ends

of contracted and relaxed females, respectively. Fig. 30.—Posterior end of male.

Figs. 31, 32. Physaloptera sp. Fig. 31—Lateral view of head, Fig. 32,—Inside. of one pscudolabium.

the two collections from Pearson 1. A new

species is proposed for these, .as they differ

from any species of which I have seen a des-

cription, in the presence in the male of one

lateral ala continuing throughout the body

Iength. The specific name is given in acknow-

ledgement of the help of Mr, lan Beveridge,

Physaloptera sp.

FIGS, 31, 32

Host and locality: Rarius fuscipes murray,

Peurson I.

Only one female Physaloptera sp. was found

in the Pearson [, rat. It is 37 pm long, with

very short collar surrounding only the bases

of the pseudolabia. The submedian papillae

are prominent, On the inner surface of each

pseudolabium there ate two median teeth, the

inner of which is heavily built with three blunt

cusps. while the other is smaller, and also

blunt-tipped. The oesophagus is 6 mm long.

with anterior muscular purt 800 pm; the dis-

tance from the anterior end of the nerve ring

is 600 pm, of the cervical papillae 1110 jm.

The vulva lies shortly behind the oesophagus:

there are two ovaries, Rygs in the uteri are

without shells, apparently infertile,

In the absence of a male it is impossible to

assign this worm to a species. It is not unlike

P. troughioni Johnston & Mawson, 1941, from

Rattus fuscipes greyi from Kangaroo Island,

South Australia.

Subulura ortleppi Inglis, 1960, from Rfiab-

domys pumilio and Rattus (Praomys) nama-

quensis, South Africa.

Host and locality: Rattus fuscipes mustrrayi,

Pearson I.

Dr. Inglis has himself kindly verified the

identification of these nematodes. and can find

no difference between them and his Lype speci-

mens, except that the Pearson I, ones ate

rather smaller. Subulura ortleppi was by no

means uncommon in the Pearson T. rats, being

present in some numbers in all four ruts. dis-

sected. Subulura sp., not yet determined,

occurs also in native rats from Queensland,

Pharyngodon kartana Johnston & Mawson,

1941: 145, from Underwoodisaurus milii,

Kangaroo [.. J. & M. 1943, from Phylledac-

tylus gunthert, Lord Howe L.

FIG, 33

Host and locality: Underwoodixaurus milil,

Flinders L.

WR PATRICIA M. MAWSON

Pharyngadon Rartena was present i each of

the three specimens examined of this host, It

js apparently Widespread in Australia, and is

not confined to geckos, as it has been identified

(unpublished), from Menilergis peronii Tram

Kangyroo Island. The present specimens differ

slightly from the type and other specimens

from Kangaroo Island, which have beet re-

examined, hut the variations do not appear ta

wirtunt the erection of a new species.

Measurements are given in Table 3,

The male worms are very similar to the tyipe.

although they are shorter, and the oesophagus

and tall spike are slightly longer in relation to

the hody length. The tail spike bears a few

very smull spines which have not been seen in

the Kangaroo [sland specimens,

The female bears narrow double lateral alae

from just behind the heud to the level of the

anus (present in the type material also). The

\ail spike is about a quarter to a fifth of the

body length in the ovigerous female. nearly a

hit in young females. The spines on the tuil

are few and though long, are not as stout os

indicated by the original figure (J. & M. 1941.

Fig. 63, The vulva and the excretory pore

shortly in frant of the vulva, are oesophageal

in all specimens, even, in some very coniracted

specimens. very close to the head, but in most,

at Or near the nesophageal bulb. In the Kan-

gurod Island specimens the vulva is post-

oesophageal.

Skrjabinodon parasmythi nsp.

FIGS, 34-36

Host ani? locality: Underwoodixvaurus mili

(typehost), Pivllodacevlas mmarmoratus, Flin-

ders Island,

A few males but no female were present in

euch of three U/. wilti dissected; one specimen

of P.marmoratuy contained five females, only

one of which is ovigerous; it is nor certain

that the females belong to the same species as

the males, but both ate from geckos in the

same region, and the females do not belong

to the only other relited oxyurid species

(Pharyneoyon kartana) so far found in geckos

on Flinders Island,

Measiirements ure given in Table 3. The

species is. very similar to Skrjahbinadon sovelri

Angel & Mawson, 1968. from geckos near

Adelaide, but it Is distinguished in the male by

the presence of a well-developed spicule, und

the relatively shorter Wil spike. In the female

also the tail spike is relatively shorter, and the

few spines on it (re slender and jolnted, not

rounded a¢ in ¥. sea. The oesephugus js

longer in relation to the body length in both

sexes. Ln these femules, as in §, smvihi, there

are narrow double lateral alae.

The only other species described as having

@ spinous tail in the female and a spicule in

the male ure §, apapillosuy (Koo, 1938) jn

which the tail spines aré very much more

numerous, and 5. scvlopor? (Cuballero. 1938)

in which they are very much larger

Skrjabinodon leristae n_sp,

FIGS, 37-39

Host and locality: Leristus sp., Flinders J.

Although chis callection consists of only one

male and three female worns, and the ntale is

without the extremity of the tail, it apparently

tepresents a new species, Measurements are

vive in Table 3,

Lateral alac are present in both sexes, and

are double in the female. The excretory pore

and vulva in the female are at about the level

of the bulb of the oesophagus, The male warm

is damaged in this region, but the excretory

pore cannot be seen im the rest of the body,

A spicule is absent, The arrangement of the

caudal papillae of the male arc shown in Fig,

39. The tail spike is spinous in both sexes. In

the female the spike ix 2.6-3.0 times the dis-

tance from the unus to the base of the spike.

Eggs are 120-125 hy 38-40 ym: polar plugs

were not seen.

The species differs from S. snyihi Angel &

Mawson in the more posterior position of the

anus in relation to the tail spike length, the

shorier oesophagus and tail spike (both absn-

lutely and in relation to the hody length) and

the presence of larger spines on the male tail.

It is distingashed From. §. paraverychi chiefly

by the absence of a spicule.

Parapharyngajon kartana (Johnsion &

Mawson} new comb

Thelandras kartana Johnston & Mawson, 1941.

from Henilergts perenii, Kangaroo [s.: Angel

& Mawson, (948, from A, peronii, und Piryt-

faduety/us marmarates, near Adelaide. S.

Aust,

FIGS. 40, 4|

Hosts and localities: Amphibolurus fionnif{?).

Pearson I, Rhodone sp, Hemiergts peronii,

Flinders J,

These specimens have heen compared with

ihe paratypes and with the specimens des-

cribedl in 1968. and it is noted that alae are

present i the male for about two thirds of the

body length: the femule is not alate. It is there-

Fig. 33.

Figs. 34-36.

Figs. 37-39.

Figs. 40, 41.

HELMINTHS 179

Pharyngodon kartana, tail of male.

Skrjabinodon parusmythi, Fig. 34—Anterior end of female. Fig. 35.—Posterior end of

female. Fig. 36.—Posterior end of male.

Skrjabinodon leristae, Fig. 37—Anterior end of female. Fig. 38.—Posterior end of

female. Fig. 39.—Cloacal region of male.

Parapharyngedon kartana. Fig. 40.—Posterior end of juvenile. Fig. 41—Part of the

surface of the body of juvenile, near mid-length, showing cuticular spines,

180

fore necessary to transfer the species to the

genus Parapharyngodon Chatterji, 1933. It

may iso be noted that the coils of the ovary

Teach around the corpus of the oesophagus,

though this was omitted from the figure given

in 1968 (Angel & Mawson 1968, Fig. 8).

The specimens from Pearson I. and Flinders

I, are on the whole larger than those from the

Adelaide region and many are larger than

those [rom Kangaroo I, Their measurements

are given in Table 3, Among them are five

apparently young specimens in which the

cuticle is spiny (Fig. 41); the spines ure

arranged in rings around the bady, graduating

in size from small anteriorly to large pos-

teriorly as far as the caudal constriction, then

ending in a region of tiny spines at the base of

the tail smke (Fig. 40) There are no other

spines on the tail. This condition appears to

be similar to that found by Schad (1960, p.

116) in young specimens of his species TAelun-

dros salamandrae. Among the present five

small, plump, spined specimens from Rhodona

sp. are four females and one male (spicule

present). That the spinous cuticle is a feature

of a very young adult rather than of a fourth

Stage larva is suggested by the condition in two

PATRICIA M. MAWSON

larger but still young females in which the

bases of a few spines are distinct.

Skrjabinelazia sp,

Host and locality: Phylodacrylis marmoratus,

Pearson 1.

Only three female worms are present, and

in the absence of a male the generic identifica-

tion is not definite. Females of a similar species

were recorded fram the same host species

from near Adelaide (Angel & Mawson, 1968).

Acknowledgements

On Pearson I., | was indebted to my col-

league, Dr, Smyth, who permitted me to cxa-

mine lizards of his collection for parasites;

and who collected rats for me, Grants in sup-

port of the Expedition were made by the

Department of Fisheries and Fauna Conserva-

tion and the Royal Society of South Australia.

The gut of the Pearson Island Wallaby was

obtained from Mrs, M. E. Christian, a veteri-

nary surgeon, of Adelaide. and helminths from

this host species and the Pearson Island rat

were given to me by Mr. Jan Beveridge of the

Veterinary School of the University of Mel-

bourne, Lam very grateful to these people for

their help.

TABLE 1

Incidence of helminths.

This table lists only those hosts dissected by the author. Some of the specimens referred to in the fext

were collected by other people.

P.L indicates Pearson L, F.l. Flinders 1,

Number

Host Number para- Number yielding:

Loculity dissected sitised 9=Trematoda Cestoda Nematoda

Phyllodactylus marmoratus (Gray) Fl. 2 Z x? = 3

Underwoodixanrns milii (Bury) EAL 3 3 — — 3

Amphibolurus fionni (Proctor)? PT. Il 10 2 10

A, striatus F.1, 1 Q -- :

Lerista tetradactyla (Iucas & Frost) jet 4 i ae a

Lerista sp. (9 n. sp.) BAL 4 3 — =— q

Hemierais.peronit’ Fitzinger eG! : Q = - -

Ahlepharus vreyi (Gray) FI. 3 0 = = =

A. lineoocellatus (Dumeril & Bibron) Pi. | 0 — — --

Petrogale penicillata (Griffith) PJ. 1 | — 1 1

Raftus fuscipes murray) Thomas PI, 4 4 ! 3 3

————eee— ee SS

181

HELMINTHS

PexL]ar ‘apRUlay a]ITOyUT 4

papov.UOD JYMIWOS ‘saTBUTay a]IIey Om) y

sndeydosso/qIsua]

BA[NA—PUd “1}]SO_d

alod ax3—-—

“ded ‘a1AIa0—

Bull JALQU— pus “Uy

“ydosso jo jied ‘Uy

‘ydosag

yysuay Apog

ajpuda

yysus] opnoids /yysUs]

qisugy *ss0/y]3u09)

twunynovurlegns

(s} ysuayz arnords

aiod “19xa—

‘ded “S1AIg9—

SUI dAlau—pua “Wy

‘ydoseo so jied jJuy

ysuay Jeo} ‘snseydosag

(um) Y3usT

ayo

8 ZI ‘Ol B'9e ‘SOT OL OCI—-L'6 9L—OL

Ost O£e “OFE O61 “061 06¢ O8I—O0el O00S—OSP

009% 0079 ‘008L OS ‘OTE Ol. OLE—OLT 06L£—O0FL

06S &% OOL ‘00S 056 O6E—OLE 069—O0ES

OT OOL “OFT 002 ‘OSE Orr O9T—OEL OST—O0ET

Ste 007 ‘OTE OS ‘O8E O0E O1Z—061 Or9—005

00L 026 ‘008

00€9 ONTL ‘0OTS OOTT ‘Or6 0001 Otr—O0F 066—0F6

Os tL +9 $62 ‘O'SC ial OL Sr_—Cr eL£—69

1(a)ss 4 (8s

ST oC Ve—9'e LOLS

v ve 69 61I—ELL OL—T9

06 08 |

org OFT § OL0OI O0EZ 0091—00z1 0101—0r6

O9€ é Org OLE—OCE OT9—O¢S

Ol QOTL 08 OSI—STI 061—OST

S61 OOFT — OLZ—O8T O8S—O0CS

00F hrs

O00 OOFrT Osgs 088 Otr—O0Pr O£6—OL8

—_ OCT oP = 0'6T T'9 OsS—Te SOLS

1spilaaag imosipad IpapaMpoom suppnaidsisuo] appsoajad sungaja juosipad

muauoj«suoy DMDINIOR sdaavjsisy Sn] ASUOLISOIQDT pulono] Dd DUIIBO]D snp ATUOLSOdOLIDIN

‘Win! 1) adv Spllaliadnsnatu j)0 pawaipul astm4ayso ssaqun 44Xal aYT UW) paquiosap saioads piinaids pun ajASuodss {oO Siuawaanspa py

c ATV

182 PATRICIA M. MAWSON

TABLE 3

Measurements of oxyirids.

Measurements are given in em unless otherwise stated. Under Parapharyngodon kartana measure-

ments under (a4) are of spectmens from Amphiholurus fionni, those under (b) .of Specimens from

Lerista sp.

—————S

Pharyngedon Skrjabinodon Skriabinodon Parapharyngodon kartana

Species Kartana parasmythi leristae (a) (b)

Mule

length (mm) 1.30—1.64 1.5—2.0 13 16 2.3—4.2

(young

Specimen)

oesophagus 300—360 350 — 350 350—780

antr, end—nerve ring 140—150 130 200

—Excr. pore 370—425 400-—520 $00 1150—t400

tail spike 250—280 250—300 — 40 65—O)

spicule —_— 60—65 — 70 60 —65

length-oesophagus 4.1—5.0 4.1—5,7 — 4.6 5,3—7.5

length/tail spike 5.2 —6,2 5.7—7.1 — — =

Female

length (mm) 3.5—4,0 3.9 4.2—5,3 44—4 8 7.3—8.2

oesophagus 39))—450 280 350—400 1000—1100 1500—1950

anir. end—nerve ring 40—150 100—105 — 170—200

—excr, pore 300—340 300 260—280 — 1900—2400

vulva 360—400 350 300—310 — —

tail (incl, spike) 850—1060 1200 $850—960 350—400 300—600.

tail spike 710—900 900 640 —700 — =

Postr. end -— vulva (mm) — — — 2.6 3.7—4.2

length /oesophagus b.4—9,3 13.9 11.7—18.7 4.4 4.3—5,3

length/tail spike 4.4—5,] 43 &5—7.4 — -

References

ANGEL, L. M., & Mawson, P. M. (1968) — -Hel-

minths from some lizards mostly from South

Australia. Trans. R, Soe, §. Aust, 92. 59-72.

CABALLERO. E. (1938).—Nematodes parasites des

roatiles, Annts, Purasit. hum. comp. 16, 327-

433.

Despuries, C,, CHabaub, A. G., & CAMPANA-

Rouger, ¥. (1949).—Sur les gongylonémes

Je Muridae et leurs formes latyaires, Annis.

Farustt. dain. Comp. 24, 447-459,

Freon, J, W. (£928 ).—Qbseryations on rodents

and their parasites. J, R, Soc. NSW. 61, 115-

134.

TyGiis, W. G, (1960)—Furthey observations on

the comparative anatomy. of the head in ithe

nematode family Subuluridae: with a descrip-

tion af a new species. Proc. rool. Soc. Lonel.

135, 125-136.

Incuis, W. G, (1965).—The nematodes parasitic

in the gizzard of birds; a study in morpho-

logical convergence. J. Heiminth 39, 207-224.

Tnowis, W. G. (1968).—The geographical and evo-

lutionary relationships of Australian tricho-

strongyloid parasites and their hosts. J. Lina.

See. (Zool) 47, 327-347.

Jounston, T. H. ({918)—Notes on certain

Entozoa of rats and mice together with a

catalogue of the internal parasites recorded

as occurring in rodents in Australis, Proe. R:

Sac, Ou. 30, 53-78.

Jonwston, ‘T. H., & Mawson, P. M, (1938).

Strongyle nematodes. from Central Australian

kangaroos: & wallabies. Trans. R, Sac. S.

Aust. 2. 263-26.

Jounston, T, H., & Mawson, P. M. (1940a)—

Nemaiodes from South Australian marsuptals.

Trans, R. Sov. S. Aust, 64, 95-100.

Jounston, T. H., & Mawson, P.M. (1940b) —

New and known nematodes from Australian

marsupials, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 65,

468-476.

Jounston, T. H., & Mawson. P. M. (19414),—

Some tiematodes from Kangaroo Island,

gout Australia, Ree §. dust, Mus. 7, 145-

Jounston, T. H., & Mawson, P.M. (1941b).—

Some purasitic nematodes in the collection of

the Australian Museum, Ree, Aust. Mus. 21,

9-16.

Koo, S$. Y. (1938),—A new species. of Pharyin-

godon (Nematoda: Oxyuridae) from a Can-

tun lizard, Gekko gekko, with temarks on the

evolution of the group, Lingnun Sci. J. 17.

395-400.

Mawson, P.M. (1964)—Some nemitoda

(Strongylina and Oxyurina) from Kangaroos

(Muacrepusy spp.) from Eastern Australia.

Parasitology 54, 237-262.

Mawson, P, M, (1971).—Two new species of

Rictularia (Nematoda) from Australian

rodents. 7'rans, R. Soc. & Anst, 98, 61-64,

HELMINTHS 183

Moénnic, H, O. (1926).—Three new helminths.

Trans. R. Soc. 8. Africa 13, 291-298,

Monnic, H. O, (1929).—Filarinema flagrifer

m.sp., n.g., a trichostrongylid parasite of the

kangaroo. [Sth Ann. Rep. Director Vet.

Serv. Dept. Agric. Union S. Africa 1, 307-

310.

Ripe, W. D. L. (1970).—“A guide to the native

mammals of Australia.” (Melbourne, Oxford

Univ. Press.)

Scuap, G. A. (1960).—The genus Thelandros

(Nematoda: Oxyuroidea) in North American

salamanders, including a description of

Thelandros salamandrae nsp. Can. J. Zool.

38, 115-120.

ScumipT, G. D., & Kunrz, R. E. (1967)—Nema-

tode parasites of Oceanica. Il. Redescription

of Rictularia whartoni Tubangui, 1931, and

notes on other species from Palawan, P.I. J.

Parasit. 53, 1281-1284.

Tusaneoul, M. A. (1931).—Worm parasites of the

brown rat (Mus norvegicus) in the Philippine

Islands, with special reference to those forms

that may be transmitted to human bcings.

Philipp. J, Sci. 46, 537-591.

Woop, W. A. (1929).—A note on Rugopharynx

australis (Monnig 1926). Ann. Mag. nat.

Hist. 10s, 24, 552-554.

Woop, W. A. (1930).—On a new species of

Labiastrongylus. Rep. Director Inst. Animal

Path., Univ. Cambridge (1929-30), 205-208.

Woop, W. A. (1930)—Some new parasitic nema-

todes fram Western Australia. Rep. Direc-

tor Inst. Animal Path., Univ. Cambridge

(1929-30), 209-219.

Yorke, W., & MAPLESTONE, P, A. (1926),—The

nematode parasites of vertebrates.” (London, )

VOL 95, PART 4

30 NOVEMBER, 1971

TRANSACTIONS OF THE

ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

CONTENTS

Smith, Meredith J. Small fossil vertebrates from Victoria Cave, Naracoorte,

South Australia. I. Potoroinae (Macropodidae), Petauridae

and Burramyidae (Marsupialia) - - - - - - 185

Daily, B.. & Milnes, A. R. Stratigraphic notes on Lower Cambrian fossiliferous

metasediments between Campbell Creek and Tunkalilla Beach

in the type section of the Kanmantoo Group, Fleurieu Peninsula,

South Australia - - ~ - - - - - - 199

Tyler, M. J. Discovery in the Everard Ranges of a species of leptodactylid

frog new to the fauna of South Australia - - - - - 215

Forbes, B. G. Stratigraphic subdivision of the Pound Quartzite (Late Precam-

brian, South Australia) - - - - - - - 219

Symon, D. E. Nine new species of Solanum from Australia - - - - 227

* a * *

OBITUARY: SIR JAMES HARRISON - - - - - - - - 241

OBITUARY: SIR JOHN CLELAND - - - 2 “ " : PAD

Annual Report of Council, 1970-71 - - - - . - - - - 248

Award of the Sir Joseph Verco Medal - - - - - - - - 249

Balance Sheet - - - - - - - - - - - - 250

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS

STATE LIBRARY BUILDING

NORTH TERRACE, ADELAIDE, S.A. 5000

SMALL FOSSIL VERTEBRATES FROM VICTORIA CAVE, NARACOORTE,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

I. FOTOROINAE (MACROPODIDAE), PETAURIDAE AND. BURRAMYIDAE

(MARSUPIALITA)

hy Merepita J. Smirn*

Summary

Abundant fossil remains of marsupials and rodents lave been found in a silty deposit in Victoria

Cave, near Naracoorte, South Australia.

The presence of large extinct herbivores in the assemblage

suggests. that the deposit may be of Pleistocene age-

This paper describes remains of Potoreus apicalis,

FP. platveps, Bettongia gaimardi and B. penicillata (Macropodidae, Potoroinae), Pseudachelrus pere-

prinus and Petaurns brevicepy (Petauridae) and Cercartetuy nanus (Burramyidaey.

Extensions of the

previously known ranges of P. upicaltiv, P. platyveps and B, gaimurdi are noted. Peteraus morgant

Finlayson, 1938 is shown to be a synonym of P. platycips (Gould, 1844).

Introduction

Numerous caves in the Tertiary limestone

near Naracoorte, South Australia, have been

knuwn for over a century (Woods 1862). and

several have been open to tourists for nearly 70

years. Naracoorte (lat. 37°O'S, long, 149°48"

E) is about 320 km SE of Adelaide near the

Viclorijn border. Victoria Cave (S. Aust, 82)

is one of these tourist caves but a section pre-

viously unknown was entered in 1969 by mene

bers of the Cave Exploration Group of South

Australia (CEGSA), This section included 4

large chamber, partially filled with silt, with a

few bones and skulls lying on the surface. One

member of the exploration party (Mr. R. 'T.

Wells} recognized remains of extinct species

(Sthenurus sp. and Thylacolee sp.) and ini-

tiated a study of the deposit. This study has.

been pursued by CEGSA members, in close

co-operation with the South Austrahan Gov-

ernment Tourjst Bureau.

The tleposit consists of damp, but friable,

light-brown carth with bones of ansmals rang-

ing in size from diprotedontids ta macropoilds,

and down to dasyurids and rodents. Bones are

most abundant in the top 15 cm. The strati-

graphy will be described in. detail (Wells, un-

published). Radio-carben dates are not yet

available, but the abundance of sthenurines,

thp-otedontids and Thylacoleo (Wells, unpub-

lished) suggests that the deposit was formed

during the Pleistocene and sealed before the

Recent, The large marsupial herbivores typical

of the Pleistocene seem to be lacking from

early Recent assemblages and such genera as

Diprotodan, Sthenurus, Praceprodon and Pro-

femttodon probably hecame extinct at the very

end of the last glacial period (Tedford 19677).

No remains have yet been found of non-

endemic mammals, such as rabbit, fox or

house-mouse, nor of man or dingo,

Bone deposits in seyeral other Naracoorte

caves have been investigated previously. Woods

(1862) described lime-encrusted bones of

several modern species, rodent bones being the

most abundant. From a recent deposit in the

Bat Cave, ‘Tidemann (1967) identified 27

mammal species, including the dingo, fox and

tabhit. Two species of Sthenurus from Hay-

stall Cave were described by Merrilees (1965).

‘The present paper, and others following, will

describe remains of small vertebrates believed

to have lived in the Naracoorte area during the

Pleistocene.

Methods

(a) Location of excavation, The silt deposit

is roughly 60 m. fong and 15 m wide; it is at

least 2.5 m deep and bone chips occur in cores

taken at that depth. Near the entrance of the

deposit, an area about 3 m long and 1.5 m

wide has been excavated to the depth of 80 cm

near its middle. (Slumping of the silt necessi-

tates a sloping-sided pit.) Further jnto the

chamber the top 15 env of an irregular area

about 12m Jong and between 1.5 and 3 m wide

has been excavated,

{b) Preparation. The silt surrounding large

bones and skulls was gently cleared away with

small metal trowels, and collected in buckets.

It was sieved through either circular hand-held

“48 Leabruck Drive, Rostrevor, S, Aust, 5074,

Trans, BR, Soc. S. Aussi, 95, Part 4, 30 November 1971,

Ist

Wire sieves, 60 cm in diameter, or through a

suspended rectangular wire sieve, 120 cm x 60

em, The mesh on all sieves was 8 per 25,4

mm. Al! tooth-bearing fragments and isolated

teeth were picked from the sieves by hand, and

many other bones were-also retained. Ali bone

samples were labelled with their position and

depth in the. deposit.

After the bones had dried for several days

in the atmosphere of a normal room, the silt

could be brushed away with a camiel hair

brush. Any lime encrustations were dissolved

in 5% acetic: acid, after which the bones were

thoroughly washed in water. Even such a low

eoncemration of acid made the hones extremely

brittle and crumbly, and all acid-treated frag-

ments were impregnated with Bedacry! dis-

solved in methyl-ethyl-ketone.

The specimens will become the property of

the South Australian Museum,

fc} Measurement. As very few skulls of

small animals were preserved, measurements

were mainly confined to dimensions of teeth,

The length of prernolur and molar teeth was

Measured as the maximum antero-posterior dis-

tance on the labial side, width was taken as the

greatest width across the cusps perpendicular

to the antero-posterior axis of the tooth. Other

measurements wefe taken as defined in

Cockrum (1955). AL were made with either

Helios diul-reading calipers calibrated to 0.01

mm or with Nippon Seiki vernier calipers cali-

brated to 0.05 mm. Very small specimens

(e.g. of Cercartenis) were measured with the

aid of a binocular microscope at 10% magni-

fication,

id} Statistics, Ags the material is frag-

mentary. it is possible that an individual animal

is teprésented in the saniple by more than one

fragment, and in calculation of the statistics of

the sample of each species, care was taken 10

inctude euch animal only once. Tooth wear and

molar eruption stage were considered as well

as configuration (either right side or left side)

in estination of the minimum number of indi-

viduals, but location was not considered as the

deposit may have been reworked by water

movement in the cave.

(2) Taxonomy atd tooth nomenclature. The

classification of the mammals follows Ride

(1970) uoless stated otherwise. The tooth

nomenclature of Tale 11948} is used, the sec-

MEREDITH J. SMITII

torial premolars being designated Py, and P44

and the molarifori) premolars dP 44,

Family MACROPODIDAE—Subfam

POTOROINAF

Potorous upicalis (Gould, 1851)

The long-nosed potoroos have been recog-

nized as Iwo geographically-isolated species, P.

teidaceylus (Kerr, 1792), from eastern Aus-

tfaha and Tastiania and P. gilberti [Goutd.

1841) from Western Australia (Troughton

1962}, but computer analysis of cranial dimen-

sions und proportions of animals from many

populations suggests that the populations full

into two different groups, which probably still

represent two distinct species, One group con-.

tains the populations from coastal New South

Wales and south-western Australia (formerly

part of FP. rridactylus and all of P. gilberti, now

named P. sridacryfus) and the other group

(formerty past of P. tridactylus, now named P,

apicalis) contains those from Victoria and Tas-

mania (Hope Ph.D. thesis, 1969)*_

Identification of fragmentary remains of

lone-nosed potoroos is difficult; the Naracoorte

remains are assigned to FP. apiculiy for the fol-

lowing reasons.

(i) The aasals are narrow, the maximum

width (one skull only) being 10.0 mim.

The molar gradient is slight {Table 1,

Figure 3).

The dimensions of the permanent pre-

molars (Table 1) fall within the range

of P. apicalls (Hope 1969),

(tv) The cutting edge of P'4 és almost straight

and in line with the molars (Piz. 3),

whereas in P. rridactylus the posterior

cusp of the tooth is offset labially, gav-

ing the tooth a curved cutting edge and

concave labial face (Hope Ph.D. thesis).

Remains of P. apicalis occurred sporadically

through the deposit, They comprised 24 man-

dihular and 13 maxillary fragments, and one

incomplete skull. In 19 of these P3 and dP4

were present, in 13 the permanent premolar,

P4, had erupted, and in & the stage of tooth

eruption could not be determined.

The deciduous sectorial premolar PS, is

shorter than the permanent tooth P44 but is

similar in shape, with a conical anterior cusp

projecting beyond the main cutting edge of the

(iii)

‘Hope, J. A, 11969 \—Biogeography of the mammals on the islands of Rass Strait with an account

ot vanation in tne genus Patoraus,

Unpublished Ph.D, Thesis, Monash University,

SMALL FOSSIL VERTEBRATES FROM NARACOORTE

Lar

TABLE |

Dimeusiony (rim) of cheek teeth of Polorous apicalis from Pieveria Cave.

Maxillary teeth

Mandibular teeth

Taath Dimension _ Observed Mean

Nw Range tH ae.

"9 Ieugth 3 36—4.0 473 + 0,126

Widih 3 2.124 2.21 0.071

dgP4 Length 4 33-335 3.55 + 0.161

Width 4 2.4—2.5 247 = 0.030

P4 Length 4 6.5—7.9 7.26 +0238

Woautth a 2.4--2.6 2.535 + 0.089

Mt Lenath 6 3.8—-+4 4.11 + 0.089

Post width fh 2,9—4.2 3.17 & 0.150

M2 Length - 4 3.8—+6 421 > 0.164

Ant. width 4 363.9 3.73. + 0.094

M3 Length aR ;

Ant. width L 34 ‘

M¢4 = Length ! afi

Ant. width 1 31

M1-3) Length I V1.3

tooth. Most commonly the labial and lingual

surfaces arc marked by thee faint grooves.

These may rarcly be ceduced to. two in PH,

und are often increased to four in P+, by the

appearance of an additional short groove on

the posterior cusp of Py

Colonies of P. apicalis exist in southern Vic-

torta (Hope Ph.D. thesis; Ride 1970) and

remains from McEachern Cave, near the Glen-

elg River in extreme south-western Victoria are

referred to this species (Hope Ph.D. thesia).

Bones of Pororous were also found at Millicent,

South Australia (Finlayson in Tindale 1933),

In an Aboriginal campsite near Mt. Burr, P.

apicalis was found at several levels. the deepest

carbanedated as having been Jaid down about

7,500 vears BP and the uppermast as 300 years

BP (Campbell, Edwards & Hossfeld 1966*;

personal observations), Tidemann (1967) did

not record Potorous from Recent cave depo-

sits at Naracoorte or Tantanoola, The only

record of the species in South Australia in

European time is a skull examined by Thomas

(1888) from the Murray River.

Potorous platyops (Gould, 1844}

Taxonomy, T have examined the followmg

specumens. Five nearly complete skulls with

mandibles, from the National Museum of Vic-

toria (NUM.Y.) (C6769. C6770, C6771,

"Campbell. T. P.. Edwards, R,, and Hossfeld, P. §,

24 pp, Transcript A.LA.S. Library, Canberra-

south-east of Sourh Australia.

Cacett. Observed Mean Coen

varintion N Range + xe. Voration

5.84 3 3,-3.8 3.45 + 0).127 8.27

3,56 > 1,6—2.) 1.88 > 0,089 10,62

7.88 & 3.0—3.& 3.33. 0.077 5.72

2.46 6 2.12.2 712> hoas 5.24

6.55 6 3.4—TAD 3,92 + 225 9.31

4.6% f 2.1—2 4 ZT o> (L081 37h

5.30 1o at- 44 2 + 044 3.32

308 1b 2.6—3,1 2.5 +0047 3.18

7.81 3 4.34.7 4.45 = 0.046 2.96

5,05 T 3.13.5 3.29 + 0.038 3.06

55 s 4.2—44 4.44 + 0,087 593

af S 3.138 3.33 = 0.066 5.98

4 3.43.8 3.62 > 0,099 5.45

° 4 2.33.1 28L+0172 1221

6 12.3—13.0 12.76 + 0.13 2,62

C6772, C6773), three mandibular and one

maxillary fragment from the Western Austra-

Jian Muscum (W,A.M.) (Nas, 64,10,35,

70.3.21, 70,.4,)1 and 70.4,66), the cotypes of

P. morgan’ (South Australian Museum

(S.A.M,) PL68 and P3413), one topotype skull

and four mandibles of P. mergani trom Kelly

Hill Caves (R, T. Wells, private collection),

one skull and six mandibles from other caves

on Kangaroo Island (S.A.M, M8402, M8403

and C. Tidemann, private collection), and three

maxillary and four mandibular fragments from

the Fromm’s. Landing (Shelter 2) archaealo-

gical excavation (specimens in S,A.M., Wake-

field 1964b).

The broadfaced potoroo was described from

specumens captured in the southwest of Western

Australia (Thomas 1888). The last reliable

record of live specimens is of five taken. in

1875, and now lodged in the National Museum

of Vicloria (Ride 1970). Finlayson (1938)

identified two sub-fossil skulls from Kangaroo

Island, South Australia. as a broad-faced

potoros, similar to P. platyeps, but specifically

distinc|. He named this new species P. mor-

gant, The chief characters of the South Aus-

tralian specimens, distinguishing them from the

Western Australian specimens were stated to

be:

(1966) —Atchaeological excavations in the

188

MEREDITH J, SMITH

TABLE 2

Skull dimewsions (mm) of Potorous platyops from Westéri Australia (C6773 and C6771), Kangarvo

Island (P3413, PGR, M8402) arid Naracoorte (P16050, P16046),

Casa Carll? p34is

Churacter Piles Ms462 P6050 Piptds

Height 11 4k 3.6 28 “ : 3.2

Length misitis 22h 23,1 14 2S.fs ‘ ii .

, creu{, ERX. t2.1 2.3 Ih4 109 108 ZI 1.7

Width nisuls iq, 33 +x 45 44 45 :

Least inter-orbital

COostricton 15.4 14.2 )4.9 1G6l Gy 164 16.7 ie

Palatine length 229 .¢9 21,9 225 v4 22. 217 : A

Palatilar lengttr cal7§ cali cu 27.5 ‘ 2ThK .

Distance [!-h™ 90 4.6 7 74

Internal width M2-NM- 10.2 8.9 3.7 91 v4 .

Cant, Joph)

Length M1-M# 46 9) YS a9 mt 10.4 99

(i) nasals longer, less expanded posteriorly

and with postero-internal and postera-

external angles more acute,

inter-Orbital region wider,

palate longer,

molar rows longet,

first upper incisor shorter,

luwer incisor more spatulate and lacking

the “upward phalangerine curvature” of

Western Australian animals (Finlayson

1938).

In Tahle 2. some of these characteristics are

compared among five adult skulls (P4—M4

erupted). (The animals tn the last two columas

will be discussed below.) Although M8402

from Kangaroo Island corresponds with the

cotypes of P. morgani in having longer, pos-

teriorly narrow nasals, it differs (rom them in

the conturmation of the posterior margins of

the nasalsy, und closely resembles the two

Western Australian adults. There is overlap in

inter-orbital width and palatine length,

Alihough 1) of P3413 ts much shorter, all the

teeth of this specimen are severely worn, Little

difference could be detected in 1, of four speci-

mens. The permanent premolar and cach of the

first (three molars is longer and broader on the

average in Kangaroo Island animals but there

is overlap in all dimensions except length and

width of P4. (Table 3, Figs, | and 2). The

grealer length of the molar row is parually

compensated by shorter diastemata I.-C and

C-P},, so that the palutilar length is similar in

the two groups, The check tecth are morpho-

logically similar and the description of the den-

titioty Uf / morgani (Finlayson 1938) applies

accurately to the Western Australian specimens,

Despite the greater mean size of molar teeth

th the Kangaroo Island simple, the similarity

in hoth size and morphology of skulls and mor-

di)

(itl)

(iv)

(¥)

(vi)

phology of teeth between Kangaroo Island and

Western Australian specimens indicates that the

two populations, are closely related and not

distinct species. Ride (1970) considered

Patorouyx morgani Finlayson, 1938, a synonym

of PF. platyeps (Gould, 1844).

Tate (1948) examined the type specimen of

#. platyops and found the sectorial premolar

to be 4.2 mm Jong, He thought that this tooth

and the sectorial premolar (length approx. 4.5

mim) in the specimens examined by Thomas

C188) were possibly the deciduous peemolar,

PY, but the figures in Table 3 show. that they

Fall outside the range of P& and within, or very

near, the range of P4, Tate also found the

inter-orbital breadth of the type to be 16 mm,

which is as wide as in South Australian speci-

mens.

Teeth of specimens from the Framm’s Land-

ing archaeological excavation are compurable

in size to those from Kangaroo Island (¢.¢.

M!-8 length 9.2, My —4 length 9.8). Simp-

larly Finlayson (1959) found that in tive man-

dibles from the Devon Downs urchaevlogical

site, Mj —4 length ranged from 9,7 to 10.3

(mean 10.0). Finlayson’s observation that the

My, is relatively large in mainland specimens is

confirmed by a single M4 from Fromm's Land-

ing, with length 2.7 and width 2,3.

Naracoarte speciinens. Twe incomplete

skulls, three maxillary fragments and 15 man-

dibular fragments of Polterous platyops were

found. Of these 7 carried P3. and dP4; in 6,

P4 had crupted and in 7 the stage of tooth

eruption could not be determined. The shape

of the skull (Table 2) and the size of the

teeth (Table 4) closely resemble these charac-

ters in Kangaroo Island specimens. the cheek

teath being slightly larger than in Western Aus-

tralian animals.

SMALL FOSSIL VERTEBRATES FROM NARACOORTE 189

TABLE 3

Dimensions (mm) of cheek teeth of Potorous platyops from Western Australia and fram Kangaroo

Island, South Australia.

Western Anstratia

Kangaroo Island, South Australta

Tooth Dimension Observed Observed

N Range Mean tse. CV. Ww Range Mean+se, CY.

Ps Length 3 2.7—3.4 2.85 > 61 3.69

Width 3 1.6—-1.8 1.67 + .043 449

dP+ Length 3 2.4—7 2.57 = .08R §.95

Width 3 L.&—2.0 191+ 052 4.71

Pi Length 3 43—49 4.59 -& 159 6.01 3 5,1—§.3 S.1S + O58

Width 3 1.8—i.9 L&T + O35 3,23 3 2, 2.1 2.02 + .025

Mi Length a ?.9—3.9 3.37 — .166 10.98 4 3.2235 3,34 + DTI 4.26

Anterior width 5 7.73.0 2.84 & ,057 4,52 4 3.0—3,2 3.06 1: 040 2.59

Posterior width 5 2.4—2. 2,62 + O87 740 4 2 8—}32 2.92 + .082 5.6L

M2 Length 4 3.1—3.7 3.40 154 9,09 4 343.6 4.50 > 052 3.00

Anterior width 4 3,0—3,4 3.08 = .092 6.01 4 3.1—3.5 3.26 + 091 5.56

Posterior width 4 2.6—2,8 2.77 = 049 3.56 4 27—3.2 2.92 = 106 7,29

Ms Length 3 2.63.0 2,77 + 107 6.69 4 ZR 3.2 3,06 + 078 5.77

Anterior width 3 2.6 2.60 + .009 0,59 4 2,6--3.0 2.80 + .077 §.52.

Posterior width 3 7.2—2.4 2.29 — AIT) 5,39 4 2.1—2.6 239+ 124 10.39

Mi Length 3 2,0—2.3 7.10 = 84 6.95 3 1,9—2,2 1,99 > N95 R25

Anterior width 3 2.02.1 2.04 + 38 3.26 3 19—2.1 2.01 + N64 S47

MI-8 Length 3 8.6—S3.9 O19 + 39K 7.50 4 9.8—9.9 O84 + O28 O58

Py Length 3 71-25 227 + 135 10.32 1 2.65

Width 2 {2—13 143 + 125 12.41 1 1.70

dP, Length 2 2.324 2.36 + .050 3,07 3 2.6—2.8 2.65 —— .076 4.99

Width 2 1.6—1,7 1.66 -& .080) 541 3 1.9—2,2 1.98 = _OR3 7.28

Py Length 4 3.9—4,3 4.07 + 095 4.65 4 42-—-4.4 4.27 + O73 2.95

Width 4 1,5--1,7 1.88 —h 030 3.76 3 1.7—1.8 173+ O17 1.67

M, Length 6 2.735 3.09+ 138 10.95 5 2,9—3,3 3.12 + 066 4.73

Anterior width 6 19—2.4 2.04 = OSL 6,18 5 2.12.6 730 > .OR4 8.21

Posterior width ia 2.22.4 228 — .040 4,32 5 23I—2,7 2.48 + .062 5.4

Ms Tength G 2.93.9 3,31 > 153 11.29 5 314—3.6 3,50 + ,037 2.39

Anterior width 6 2,3—2.8 2.56 + 074 ‘TAZ 5 2,5—3.1 2.83. ORO 6.36

Posterior width 6 24—2.8 255i OF4 6,18 5 2,.6—2.8 268 + O44 3.69

Mg Length 4 2.73.3 2.96 + 110 144 5 3.1—3, 3.20 + .044 3.65

Anterior width 4 7.4—2,5 2.44 + 015 1,23 5 2.42.9 2.68 = .085 7.06

Pusterjor width 4 2.12.2 2.13 + 025 2.34 3 222.4 2.31 + 043 21

M, ~~ Length 3 22-24 2,34 > .055 4,08 2 1,9—2.5 ZIG .280 1816

Anterior width 3 1,9—2.1 2.04 +- 078 6,58 2 2.0 LOR + .030. 143

M,_» Length 4 81-98 B934,349 783 $$ 927-99 Oso+ 145 268

The P53 is blade-like. composed of two cusps.

the conical anterior cusp being larger and

longer than the antero-posteriorly flattened pos-

terior cusp, which bears a shallow vertical

groove on hoth inner and outer surfaces. The

cusps are connected by a thin ridge (Fig. 4).

The tiny anterior tubercle of the anterior cusp,

found in a specimen from the Nullabor Caves

(Lundelius 1963) could not be detected in

either of two Naracoorte specimens, nor in

isn MEREDITH J. SMITH

TABLE 4

Dimensions (mm) of chéek teeth af Potorous platyops, fram Nuraceorte.

Maasillary ‘Teeth Mandibular'Teeth

Tooth Dimension “Observed “Observed

P3 Length 2 3,0 2.99 =— ,035 1.66 3 2.617 2.66 = .050 328

Width MI 1,7--L.8 1.74: .063 30 3 14—1.6 1.50) =F 44 5.08

dP4 = Length = 2,5—2.9 2.72 = 175 9.12 3 12—2.f 2.41 -+ 147 8,39

Width z 2.0L QW +.150 10.05 3 17-19 $77 + 052 5.8

Pa Length 2 4.7 4.69 O10 (1.50 2 44—455 444 => 015 0.48

Width nt) 1.8—L3 LAG = .V6U 56 2 1,8—2.0 1.89 2.140 10.48

Mt Lenvih 4 34—3.7 3.57 + 075 4.23 4 3,1—3.4 3.22 + .052 3.21

Amterior width 4 2.8—3.3 3.11 = 097 6.25 4 222.5 2.34 + .068 5.78

Pastentior width 4 2.5—2.8: 2.72 4 .066 4.85 4 24—2,8 2.60 = 167 4.19

M2 Leneth 4 333.9 D568 + 124 6.96 4 3.5—3.8 3.61 + 073 4.03

Anterior width 4 31—3.3 3.23 = 56 3.48 4 1730 2.87 + TL 4.98

Posterior width 4 2.6—2.9 2NL 4.073 549 4+ L729 178 + W4l 2.97

M3 Length 3 39..-3.2 3,05 = .087 4.92 3 3,-3.9 3.13 + .063 3.51

Postersor width 3 24-24 2523 cb 127 9.50 3 2.42.5 2.46 + 030 21

M4 ~—s Length 1 1.9 < 1 2.5

Anterior width i 20 i 2 é

N.M.V. C6769 and C6770, The dP4 is sub-

quadrangular, the antero-external cusp being

produced into a flattened blade, in line with the

blade of P4.

The P+ in P16066 has a dominant sub-

conical anterior lobe us described by Finlayson

(1938) and Thomas (1888). but the posterior

lobe bears two shallow grooves, 80 thal, with

the groove extending upwards from the pos-

terior edge of the anterior cusp, the tooth is

3-grooved.

The P4. may be similar to, but smaller than,

PS, but in P16075 the groove on the posterior

cusp is not detectable so that the tooth bears

only u single groove. ie. the groove between

anterior and posterior cusps. Specimen 70.3,.21

from Western Australia is similarly single-

grooved, The wntero-external cusp of dP4 is

so reduced that it is virtually absent, and the

tooth is trianvular in occlusal view, with the

antero-internal cusp flattened antero-posteriorly

into a blade, in line with the hladé of P4. The

P*, is similar to P4.

Distribution. Subfussil remains of P.

platyops have been found in coastal Western

Australia near Dongara, about 430 &m north

of Perth, at Bremer Bay and in the southern

Nullabor region {Butler and Merrilées 1971).

In South Australia the species 1s recorded not

only from Kangaroo Island, but also from Abo-

riginal campsites by the River Murray at

Devon Downs. und Fromm’s Landing (Finlay-

son 1938, 1959; Wakefield 1964b). These

Murray River specimens were ut levels carhon-

dated as between 1800 and 1900 years BP.

Only at Naracoorte does the range of P.

Platyops overlap the range of P, apicalix. In

the region of Western Australia known to early

collectors as King George's Sound, the ranges

of P. platyops and P. tridactylus may overlap

(Glauert 1950)-

Bettongia gaimardi (Desmarest, 1822)

No specimens of 8, gaimardi were found in

the main bone deposit but at the edge of a

nearby rockpile formed by roof collapse, four

fragments of B. gafimurdi were found close to

the remains of a Protemnodon cf, brehus. They

comprise two upper molar rows and two man-

dibles, and almost certainly were derived from

only one animal. Dimensions of teeth are given

SMALL FOSSIL VERTEBRATES FROM NARACOORTE iy

in Table 4,

braved,

The P+ is 8-grooved, Pi 7-

TABLE 5

Binensiens (mim) of ihe cheek leeth of Betlongia

cuimarnd fran Mictorin Cave.

P16067a Flai¥7b Pisio7e PINNOTE

(Upper tUpner (Lower (Lower

Tsoth Dithension right) left? Tight) lett

Length 7.7 TB 74 7.0

P4 Ant widih 2.6 2.6 2.5 16

Height 37 3.8 3.1 3.1

Length 4.5 AG 4.1 4.|

MI Ant. widih 4d 4.1 3.1 3.2

Post. width = =-4.0 3,9 4.6 34h

Length 4.6 47 4.8 47

M2 Amt. width 43 4A 37 40

Post, width 4.1 4.2 4.1 4.1

Length 4.2 4.1 4.4 ae

M3 Ant. width 42 4] 4.0 —

Post. width = 3,3 3.5 3.4 ——

Length _ 3.3 -—— 4.2 4.9

M4 Ant. width a4 — a5 35

Post. width 2.4 3.L 3.1

Ml-3 Length 12.9 17.9 13.0 _—

These fragments are identified as B. gaimeardi

rather than 8. /eseir because

(1) the upper molar rows are almost straight

(Fig. 5) whereas in A. Jeseur they arc

decidedly arched,

the molar size gradient is slight,

whereas in B. feseur M4 1s very small

relative to My and Mf,

the lower mundible is fess robust than

in B. leseur,

The mainland population of B. gaintardi,

presumably now extinct, occurrec as a modem

animal about the Bustern Highlands and wdjs-

cent coastal tracts of south-eastern Australia

from south-@aslern Queensland to south-

western Victoria (Wakefield 1967). The Tas-

manian subspecies, B.g. curiculus, is extant,

Finlayson (1959) fnund sub-fossd B, guineural

at Tantanoola in far south-eystern South Aus-

tralia and in an Aboriginal midden at Mt, Bury

(Finlayson. {a Campbell, Edwards & Hossteld

1966, Transcript ALAS. Library, Canberra}.

Its presence at Natucoorte extends the western

extremity of its known range about 100 km

northwards.

Bettongia penicillata Gray, 1837

Two incomplete skulls, two. maxillary frag-

ments and ten mandibular fragments of 2B.

penicillata were identified. The permanent

premolar had erupted in only 2 specimens ind

(i)

(iti)

the remaining eleven retained P3 and dP4. Ln

ub feast G of the latter the posterior molar

teeth were still crupting through ihe bone,

Vhe P+ is 7-grooved in one specimen, 1%

(one specimen) is 6-grooved and the P*} and

4 are consistently 5-grooved (2 4ad 8 speci-

inens respectively), The size, shape and out-

ward flexing of Pl, or Pq (Figs. & and 7)

Are consistent with modern B. pericillata but

the auditory bullae, present in one suh-achult

skull only, are smaller than cammonly

observed in this species (length 12.25, hreauth

7.75, compared with length 12.8-14,2 (mean

13.8) breadth §.2-9.1 (mean 8.5) in 5S sohe

adult skulls (Finlayson 1958). Dimensions of

the molariform and molyr teeth (Tybles 6a and

6b) broadly overlap or slightly exceed those

of the modern and Pleistocene samples mea-

sured by Finlayson (1958) and ‘Vedford

(1967) but in Pleistocene specimens from both

Naracoorte and Lake Menindee the length of

P+, and the height of P3 and Pt ace much

less than in modetn specimens, Skull and

tooth sizes vary widely within modern popula-

tions of B. penicilliia (Finlaysan 1958)-

At the time of European settlement of Aus-

tralia, BL penieillara ranged from south-western

to central and castern Australia but was absent

from Victoria (Waketiclt 1967). Wakefield

(19640) did not find this species in cave déepo-

sits in south-western Victoria, but its remiains

were found in an Aboriginal midden we Mt

Burr (Finlayson i Campbell et al, 1966, tran-

script A.LA‘S. Library, Canberra), 8, gaf-

mardi and 8. leveur also occurred in the mid-

den,

Retrangia leyeur (Quoy and Gaimard, 124)

has not been found in the deposit, although in. ts

commion in recent cave deposits in the sume

area (Tidemann 1967) and in south-western

Victoria (Wakefield 19642).

Family PETAURIDAR

Pseadocheirus peregrinus (Boddaert, 1785)

The selenodont section of the Petauridse

Was. represented by three maxillary and six

mandibular fragments which were considered

to be similar to the modern species of ringtail

possum (Psevdocheiras peregrinusy) and ditfer-

ent from Schoinobates volans for the following

reasons.

{i} P+ consists of 3 cusps. almust in line.

but with the middle cusp offset lubially.

The pointed! anterior cusp is separated

from lhe middle cusp by a deep cleft,

but a ridge joins the middle and pos-

192 SMALT. FOSSIT. VERTEBRATES FROM NARACOORTE

TABLE 6a

Dimensions (mm) of upper cheek tééth of Bettongia penicillata from Naracoorte and fram two other

populations.

Source Naracoorte, ? Pleistocene Luke Menindee, S. Aust. and W. Aust.,

Pleistocene* modern}

Tooth Dimension PI6U92 PI6OS2 P16095 PI6OV! N OR. Mean N O.R.— Mean.

ps Length 4.5 BA 4.4 ae 2 4,.)—4.9 4.50 ‘* 4.045 44

Crewn height 2.7 he 3.4 is 2 34}—3.1 3.05 7 3.5—4.3 4.0

dP+ Length 3.4 pi 3.7 aia a; 2.9—3.1 3.00 7 3.0—3.6 3.3

Width 27 as 29 3 2.5—3.1 2.80 7 3.0—3.3 3.1

Pi Length 6.1 6.7 3 5.6—6.6 6.17 ? 7,0—7.4 Td

Crown height 37 37 3 3.6—4.1 3.80 ? 4346 44

Mi ‘Length 42 43 46 6 34-42 380 IW 37-42 40

Post. width 3.6 4.1 40 6 3.7—4,3 3.92 IL 3.7—4,3 4.0

M2 Length 4.6 44 6 3.6—4.2 3.83 11 3.6-—4.5 4.0

Ant. width 4.0 43 6 35—4.1 3.90 11 3,8 4.4 4.0

Mal Lenegih 45 4.0 q ' 3 3.3—3.6 3.50 ll 3.5—1.0 3.7

Ant, width 37 3.6 : 2 3,3—3.4 3.35 iL 3.2—3.8 3.6

Mt Length 2.9 Me 7 1 2 be lL 2.2—3.0 2.5

Ant. width 2.7 7. 4 +; by 43 il 2.02.9 25

Mt Length ze 11.9 3 11.2—119 iL47 11 {1.0—-12.7 11.8

* From Tedford (1967) = 7 From Finlayson (1948)

TABLE 6b

Dimensions (mum) of seme luwer cheek teeth of Bettongia penicillata from Naracoorte and froin twe

other papulations.

Source Naravuuries 2 Pléisiocbne Lake Memindee, S. Aust. and W. Aust.

Pleistocene* modernt

‘Looth Dimension N OLR, Mean = s.c. N O.R. Mean N OLR, Mcan

Py Length 5 43843 4.02 + 0.085 3 4.4—4.4 4.00 ? 3.7—-4,1 4,0

Crown height 5 3—3.6 3.48 + 0.068 3 3.3—34 3.37 ? 4.544 a9

dP, Length 5 34-33 32540002 3 27-30 283 #7 DR 35 3.0 —

Width 3 24—2) 2.62 + 0,082 2 2.3—-2.6 2.45 7 2.4—2. 25

Py, Length 1 58 4 58-61 593 Il 62-67 64 —

Ant, height 1 3.9 ot 3 3,7—4.2 4,00) 11 4.1—4,3 42

Width 1 25 gt 3 2.2—1.8 2.5) ll 2.7—3,0 2,9

My Length 6 A813 4.17 1 0.089 3 34—37 57 Il 45—4 \) 37

Post. width 6 34—3,8 3,61 0.059 3 3,2—3.7 3.53 il 3.5 1 3.6

My Length 4 4.0-35.0 4.57 10.196 2 40- 4.2 4.10 ii 3.6—4,2, 4.0

Ant. width 4 4,6—4,0 4,83 + 0.0R0 2 3.739 3.80 11 3.74.1 3.9

M3 Length 2 3:4—1.0 3.85 — 0.100 { 42 a Tl 4.5—3.9 Sul,

Ant. width 2 3,5—3,7 3.55 = 0,100 1 3.4 mw li 3.5—4,0 37

My, Length 1 28 it I 25. 4 11 2.73.5 3.0)

Ant. width 1 2.8 ph 1 24 -- li 2.7—3.2 3.0

M,-3 Length 2 11.2-—-12.1 11.642> 0485 1 10.9 8 4 tho 44.1—12.5 11.5

* From Tedford (1967) + From Finlayson (195$}

(i)

(iit)

MEREDITH J. SMITH

terior cusps, In Schoinobares the ante-

rior und middle cusps are also joined by

a ridge,

There is no lingual ridge on the middle

cusp of P' whereas in Schoinobates a

lingual ridge curves postero-lingually

from near the apex of the central cusp

und fades out near the postero-lingual

corner of the tooth.

There is only one posterior valley on

P?. whereas in Sehoinobates there is a

second cingular basin postero-lingual to

the ridge of the central cusp.

(iv) The labial cusps (paracone and meta-

cone) of the Upper molars are simple,

not ridged, whereas a strong postero-

TABL

193

internal ridge runs from the apex of

paracone and of metacone of the upper

molars of Schoinobates.

(v) There is no ridge in the valley between

the entoconid und the hypoconid of M4

and M.. This ridge is present in M4

and M. of Schoinobares, and in M4—

of Pseudocheiruy archeri, but is absent

in Pseudocheirus peregrinus,

However, the teeth are larger than the mean

of a sample of 10 modern specimens of P.

peresrinuy laniginoysuxy from southern Australia

(Tables 7a and 7b) and are consistent with

those of P. antiquus Broom, 1896 where Mt—8

measured 12.7, 12.9 und 13 mm respectively

in three specimens. The alveolus of P! is so

E 7a

Comparison of dimensions (mm) of maxillary teeth of Pseudocheirus peregrinus from Wieraria Cave

with those of ar

Pseudocheirus peregrinus

E g

nodern sample.

Pseudocheirus peregrinus

footh Dimension Victoria Cave South-east Australia, modern, N ta

P16099C P16099e P1A099F Range Mean | sce.

P# Length 2.5 2.6 2.1—2.7 2.41 0,053

Width 2,2 2.2 1.5—2.0 1.80 + 0.043

Pi Length 3.5 3.1 3.5 3.0—3.4 3,24 + 0.057

Width 2.5 2.4 27 2.2—2.5 2.30 + 0.034

M! Length 4.7 AN 46 4.1—4.5 4.32 + 0,048

M= Length 43 44 4.5 3,9—4.2 4.08 > 0.031

Width 4.0) 3.7 3.9 3.2—3.8 3.49 + 0,065

Ms Length 43 3.9—4.2 4.03 + 0.046

Width 3.5 3.2—3.7 3.37 = 0.058

M!3 — Length at 12.8 11.8—12.5 12.09 + 0.080

TABLE 7b

Comparison of dimensions (mm) of mandibular teeth of Pseudocheirus peregrinus from Victoria Cave,

with these of at

Pseudocheirus peregrinus

nodern sample.

Pseudocheirus peregrinus

Tooth Dimension Victoria Cave __ South-cast Australia, modera, N = 10

P16099a P16099b P16099d PI6105h Range Mean + s.e.

Py Length aT v4 3.9 3.0—3.6 3.41 + 0.064

Width te sf 1.8 1.6—1.8 1.72 = 0.027

M, Length 47 43 4,0—4.5 4.27 + 0.052

Width 2.5 24 2.0—2.5 2.27 = 0.045

Ms Length 4.2 4.4 4.2 4.0—43 4.10 = 0,036

Width 2.5 2.4 2.5 2.3—2.6 2.40 = 0.034

Ms Length 4.0 43 3,8—4.1 3.93 = 0,038

Width 2,5 2.4 2.2—2.5 239+ 0.034

My Length 4.0 3.8—4.5 4.18 + 0.075 (N = 8)

Width 2.2 2.1—2.5 2.30 + 0.040 (N = 8)

Ventral view of skull of adult Potorous platyops from Western Australia, N.M.V. C6773, X 1.5,

Ventral view of skull of cotype of P. morgani (adult), S.A.M. PI68. X 1.5,

Ventral view of skull of adult P. apicalis, P16051, X 1.4.

Labial view P? dP+ M! of sub-adult P. platyops, P16077, X 3.4.

Occlusal view P4-M4 of adult Bettongia gaimardi, P16097a, X 1.9.

Fig,

Fig.

Fig,

Fig.

It.

Labial view of right mandible of sub-adult B. penicillata, P16093, X 1.6.

Occlusal view of the same, X 1.6.

Occlusal view of right mandible of Pseudocheirus peregrinus, showing Py and My, P16099d,.

X 4.2.

Lingual view of the same. X 4.5.

Labial view of left mandible of Petauruy hreviceps, P16100b, X 2.6.

Labial view of right mandible of Cercartetus nanus, P16101x, X 4.3.

close ta that of P* as to be almost confluent

with at, as in Broani's specimens. It is pro-

bable that further study of Broom Cave speci-

mens will show thal P, antiguas is conspecific

with FP. peregrinwy, and until such a study js

made, the Naracoorte specimens will be

referred to us P. pereurinnies,

The P| (one specimen only) (Figs. 8 und 9)

differs from that Of P. peregrinus. In the Nara-

coorle specimen the unterior cusp is marked

by three sharp ridges from the apes, one an-

terior, the others postera-internal and postere-

external respectively, The latter is continuous

with an antero-posterior ridge of the posterior

eusp. A strony posterior ridge from the median

cusp detlects labtally near the posterior end of

the cusp and meets the medial surtace of the

posterior cusp. A ridge from the posterior

cusp forms the posterior edge of the tooth and

ends at the postero-lingual earner, In modern

P, peregrinuy the anterior cusp 1s smoothly

conical, marked only by a blunt anterior ridge.

The mediin and posterior cusps are cisely

adjacent and indistinctly ridged. The anterior

cuspule is seareely distinguishable in the Nura-

coorle specimen; this cuspule is viriably deve-

loped in Po peregeias and consistently weill-

developed in Schoinahares volans.

Petuurus breviceps Waterhouse, 1439

Seven mundibles (Pig. 10) and one traxil-

lary (rugmient of the Sugar Glider, Peranris

brevieepy, were found. They were distin

guished from P. porfoleensis by the size of the

molar teeth, whieh are relatively large in P.

nerfolevneix (Calaby, 1966) and trom Gynine-

helideus leadheatert. by the lower incisors.

whieh afte small, delicate and almost pracum-

bent in G. leadbearers, In modern P. breviceps

TABLE &

Dimensions (in) af the cheek teeth of Petaurus

breviceps from Vieteria Cave.

Urner Lower

PiGloUE FLot0du PLEO) Prelooe

Toth Dimension Qighn wiehh dete frighel

Pd length 1.45 a 4 a

Max. hreadth 1.00 2 a9 :

MI Length 250 720 235 2.45

Mak. hreadth 210 1.45 15n LAS

M2 Length 2000 225 219

Max. breadth 1.65 1.60 1.55

M3 Length 1.75 L885 LS

Max breadth 130 «61.40 1.35

M4 length _- 50 1.60

Max.breadth =. 1.10 4.10 ¢

MI-3) Length 5.95 635 625

MEREDITH J, SMITE

and in the Naracaorte specimens the lower

incisors are robust and markedly upturned near

the lip. Dimensions of the cheek teeth of P.

brevieeps tram Victoria Cave are given) in

Yable 8.

The Sugar Glider is not uncommaen in the

Naracoorte area at present,

Fumily BURRAMYIDAE

Cercartetus nanay (Desniarest, 1818)

A total of 41 nvandibular und 2 masillary

fragments of CL nands were found, The diage-

nostic Py aid the presence of only three molar

teeth showed the tooth-bearing: mundibles ta be

referruble fo this species (Wakefield 1963)

(Fig 11), and examination of the alveoli of

edentulous mandibles indicated that thev too

bore the distinetly bicuspid P! churucteristic

very slightly bilobed (Wakefield 1963),

The pigmy possum most commonly found

us i modern species in South Australia is C.

conefanus, although Co metus Oeeurs in sauth-

etn Victoria and its range extends into the

extreme lower south-east of South Australia

(Wakefield 1963). The S.A.M_ collection in-

eludes a single South Australian specimen of

Coreen, (M7373) and that was collected in

the Naracoorte Caves area in 1965. The length

of the lower molar row of that specimen is

less thon that of the Nuracoorte Fossil speci-

mens (Table ¥). but the range of the latter

overlaps that of three Tasmanian specimens

(C. nanus) in the South Austrahan Museum,

Tidemann (1967) identified both C. nents

Bat Cave at Naracoorte. | have examined five

mandibles assigned by him ta C. concinnuy and

TABLE 8

Length (mm) ef lawer molar row in Cerearteius

nanus from several populations,

Lenuth

Mi Ms

Observed

ringe

Specimens N Mean se

Victoria Cave, Naracoorte 7 44.4.3 42 + 0.045

Bat Cave. Naracoorte

(Tidemann )

4.9. 4.0 3.95 + 0.05

Nuracoorte. modern

(M7373) 1 3.7

Tasmania. modern (M7924,

7925, 8261) 3.84.1 4.03 + V.088

SMALL FOSSIL VERTEBRATES FROM NARACOORTE

of these, three have the large Py chacucteristic

of sanity and in the other two the alveoli sug-

vest that P4 was similarly large. In one of

These xpecimens, My—, = 3.9 mm and in a

specimen correctly referred by Tidemann to C.

nanus Mj—, = 4.0mm, These specimens ure

\herefore intermediate in size between the

modern specimen and the fossils.

Discussion

(2) Method of accumulation of deposit, The

smaller species considered here are represcated

by adults und sib-adults in similar proportions,

Whereas the sample of the largest spceics,

Bervrongia penicillara, ty biased in favour of sub-

adults. This may mdicate that these animals

Were victims of a predator able to take prey no

largcr than an adult Poforous apicalis or a suber

adult &. penicillata, The identity of the pos-

sible predator cannot be considered until the

carniveres it the deposit have been investi-

gated, Large owl species must not be over-

looked.

Alternatively the cave may have been a

simple pitfall trap, or animals that died else-

where may have been washed in.

ib) Climatic — interpretetions. Virtually

nothing is known of the environmental require.

ments of the extinct Pororous plaryeps; P.

apicaliy is today Tound in south-eastern Aus-

tralia, including Tasmania, where the January

average maximum temperature does not exceed

28°C and the ayerage annual rainfall is greater

than 760 mm (Hope Ph.D. thesis). Berrangia

penicifard has been found in a wide range of

environments, {Tom high cainfall forests ta

197

spinitex jplains (Finlayson 1958) whereas. the

warten-dwelling B. lesear inhabits compara-

lively arid areas, or, in welter regions, Chooses

small areas Which provide the terrain neces-

sary for warren-digzing, The two species co-

exist in woodlands and plains but B, /esedr is

absent from scleraphyll forest (Tedford 1967),

This limited evidence suggests that the cave

deposit may have been laid down in an area of

aclerophyll foresi, rather than the woodland of

modern times. The total environment will be

considered in detail when the stratigraphy of

the deposit and the animal remains have been

more fully investigated.

Acknowledgements

Excavation of the deposit would not have

proceeded. withaut the enthusiastic help from

CEGSA members in digging and sieving,

Transport costs for these helpers were defrayed

by a grant from the South Australian Govern-

ment Tourist Bireaw. The late Mr. E, Maddock

ably mediated between CEGSA and the Tourist

Bureau and actively assisted in the working of

the depostl,

Tam grateful to Dr. W. G. Inglis, Director

of the South Australian Museum for his

approval and advice. Miss J, M, Dixon

(NALLY. Dr. D. Merrilees (W.A.M.) and

Ms. C. R. Tidemann kindly loaned specimens

in their care. T thank Mr. R. Ruehle of the

S.A.M, who prepared the photographs for Figs.

1-7 und Mr. B. Sangsler, who prepared Figs,

S11. fF am especially grateful to Mr. R. T,

Wells and Mr. P. BF. Aitken Jor many discus-

sions and for their criticism of the manuseripr.

References

Burner, W. H.. & Meraiinrs, D. (1971),—

Remains of Petorons plaryops (Marsupialis,

Mactopodidae) and other mammals from

Bremer Bay, Western Australia, J. R, Sew

tase. Cin press.

Baoom, R. {1896).—Report on au bone breccia

deposit near the Wombsyyn Caves, N,S,W..

with destriprions of some new species of mar-

supials, Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 21, 48-41,

Cacaoy. J, H. (1966).—Mammals of the Upper

Richmond wnd Clarence Rivers, New South

Wales, C.S.LR.O, Division of Wildlife RKe-

seatch Technical Paper, No. 10.

Cockrum, FL. (1955) —“Labaratory Manual of

Mammalogy.” (Burgess, Minneapolis. }

Fintayson, H. H. in Trnpare, N- B. ¢1933),—

Tantgnoola Caves, South East oF South Aus-

tralia: geological and physiographival nites.

Trans. R. Sac. 8. Ausi. 57, 130-142.

FirtAyson, H, H, (1938).—On a new species of

Potoraus (Marsupialia) from a cave deposit

on Kangaroo (sland. South Australig, Travis,

R. Soc. 8. Aust. 62, 132-140,

Fintayson, H. H, (1958),—On Central Astra- -

lian Mammals. with nice of related species

from adjacent tructs. Parr ILL The Potarainae

Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 13, 735-302,

Fincavson. A. HL (1959) —-Subfossil Potorcinue

(Marsupialia) from South Australia. T'rars.

R. Soc. §. Aust. 82. 294-300.

Goaverv, L. (0930).—The development of our

knowledge of the marsupials of Westert Alis-

tralia of, RR. Soe WY) Alest. 34, 115-134,

LUNDELIUS. F_ L. {1963).—Vertchrate remaing

from the Nullahoy Caves, Western Australia,

JOR, Sac, WY. Aust, 46, 75-80.

198 MEREDITH J. SMITH

MERRILEES, D. (1965) —-Two species of the extinct

genus Sthenurus Owen (Marsupialia, Macro-

podidae) from south-eastern Australia, includ-

ing Sthenurus gilli sp, nov. J. R. Sac. W. Aust.

48, 22-32.

Ripe, W. D. L. (1970).—"“A Guide to the Native

Mammals of Australia.” (Oxford Univ. Press:

Melbourne. )

Tate, G. H. H. (1948) —Results of the Archbold

Expeditions, No, 59. Studies on the anatomy

and phylogeny of the Macropodidae (Marsu-

pialia), Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist. 91, 237-

351.

TEDFoRD, R. H. (1967).—The fossil Macropodidae

from Lake Menindee, New South Wales.

Univ. Calif. Publ. Geol. Sci. 64, 1-156,

‘TipeMann, C. R. (1967).—Some mammal remains

from cave deposits in the south-east of South

Austraha, S. Aust. Nat. 42, 21-26.

pialia and Monotremata in the collections of

the British Museum (Natural History).”

(London. )

‘YrRouGuton, E. (1962).—“Furred Animals of Aus-

tralia.” 7th Ed. (Angus and Robertson, Syd-

ney).

WAKEFIELD, N. A. (1963).—The Australian Pigmy

Possums. Vict. Nat. 80, 99-116.

WAKEFIELD, N. A. (1964a)-—Recent mammalian

sub-fossils of the basalt plains of Victoria,

Prac, R, Soc. Viet, 77, 419-425,

WAKEFIELD, N. A. (1964b), in MuLvANEy, D, J.,

Lawton, C. H., and Twipae, C. R. (1964).

Archaeological Excavation of Rock Shelter

No. 6. Fromm’s Landing, South Australia.

Prac. R. Soc, Vict. 77, 479-516,

WAKEFIELD, N. A. (1967).—Some taxonomic revi-

sion in the Australian marsupial genus Ber-

tongia (Macropodidae), with description of a

new species. Vict. Nat. 84, 8-22.

Woops, J. E. (1862).—‘Geological Observations

in South Australia.” (Longmans, Green.

London.)

STRATIGRAPHIC NOTES ON LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS

METASEDIMENTS BETWEEN CAMPBELL CREEK AND

TUNKALILLA BEACH IN THE TYPE SECTION OF THE KANMANTOO

GROUP, FLEURIEU PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY B. DAILY AND A. R. MILNES

Summary

Hyolithids and other Lower Cambrian fossils occur within marbles in low-stage metamorphic rocks

(Forktree Limestone and Heatherdale Shale) forming the core of a north-east plunging regional

anticline, overturned to the south-east. A great thickness of partially bioturbated Kanmantoo Group

metasediments, dominantly clastics, but including sulphide-rich calc-phyllites of the Talisker Calc-

siltstone, conformably overlie the Heatherdale Shale.

The rapidly deposited clastics, including numerous thin conglomerates, are interpreted as products

of the Kangarooian Movements known to have affected the region now occupied by Investigator

Strait and Gulf St. Vincent.

The newly proposed stratigraphic subdivision for that part of the Group discussed should lead to a

more reliable picture of the occurrence and the relationships of these rocks to other sequences

within the Mt. Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island.

STRATIGRAPHIC NOTES ON LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS META-

SEDIMENTS BETWEEN CAMPBELL CREEK AND TUNKALILLA BEACH IN THE

TYPE SECTION OF THE KANMANTOO GROUP, FLEURIEU PENINSULA,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by B. Datry* and A. R. Mitnes*+

Summary

Hyolithids and other Lower Cambrian fossils occur within marbles in low-stage metamorphic rocks

(Forktree Limestone and Heatherdale Shale) forming the core of a north-east plunging regional anti-

cline, Overturned to the south-eust. A great thickness of partially hioturbaléed Kanmunloo Group

metasedinients, dominantly clastics, but including sulphide-rich cale- phyllites of the Talisker Cale-silt-

stone, conformably overlie the Heatherdale Shule,

The rapidly deposited clastics, including numerals thin conglomerates, are interpreted as products

of the Kangarovian Movements known to have affected the region now occupied by Investigator

Strait and Gulf St. Vincent.

The newly proposed stratigraphic subdivision for that part of the Group discussed should lead to

a more reliable picture of the occurrence and the relationships cf these rocks to other scqucnces within

the Mt. Loafiy Ranges and Kutigaroo. Fsland,

Introduction

The Fleurieu Peninsula south of Adelaide, FIGURE | T ae

South Australia, holds the key to the age rela-

tionships of the metasedimentary rocks consti-

tuting the Kanmantoo Group, This vast

sequence crops out in an arcuate belt extending

from Ausirilia Plains, north-east of Eudunda

in the eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges, through

Fleurieu Peninsvla and across large sections of

Kangaroo Island (Fig. 1). Sprigg and Cam-

pana (1953, p. 14) defined its tvpe locality as

“the section observable along the south coast

of Fleurieu Peninsula, between Campbell Creck

and Rosetta Head, Victor Harbour, where the

formations are well exposed and very charac- F aansexco sean

arto bie? i

teristic”, | be ne a

The present paper gives the results of our GEODRDEHICAL LOGALITYS MAP

investigations of the geology of the lower part | LEGEND

of the Kanmantoo Group, beautifully exposed Se tase cassie ne MIRAE ene

along the tugged southern coustline of Fleurieu fn CACHICRaLIvGs HEAD SE | SenVESNAMe

Peninsula between Campbell Creek and the Be Ee W ie cackaade Be eee rc

western extremity of Tunkalilla Beach’. It is Ete eee MIWE

anticipated that subsequent papers will: Nt WINLaTon. Tih Bete Mats bbuen

Mo MOUNT CHARLES ya YANK ALILO a

{a) complete the stratigraphic scheme for the +

Kanmantoo Group within its type area;

'Where possible, our traverse was alang the base of the clills. Certain stretches, never more than

200 metres in length, were impossible to negotiate and in these cases we were forced to collect data

along the lop of the cliff.

“ Department of Geology and Mineralogy, University of Adelaide, Adelaide, S. Aust. 5000.

* Present address: C.S.1,R.O., Division of Soils, Glen Osmond, S. Aust. 5064,

Trans. R. Soc, 8. Aust. 95, Part 4, 30 November 1971.

(b) lest the newly devised scheme hy applying

the results to the peology of the Dudley

Peninsula, Kangaroo Talat;

(€} present the resulls ol a remapping pro-

gramme for part of Fleurieu Meninsula:

(UW) comment on the progressive meta-

merphisa) of certaln key Alrativraphic

horizons Jrom the chlorite. through the

hiaiie and into the andalusite grades of

metamorphism; and

(e) sliseuss preliminary rubidium-strentium

geochrenological data for the Kanmanton

Group

PROBLEMS OF THE AGE AND

RELATIONSHIPS OF 1HE KANMANTOO

GROLI'

Opinions regarding the age of the Kanman-

foo Group metasedimentary racks have varied.

Rocks now known to belong to the group were

Originally described by Wonlnough (1908) as

part of the Barossa series of Precantbrian age.

The first hint of their true age was given hy

Madigan (1925) who, from an exumination of

the coustline berween Sellick Hill and Victor

Harbour. argued with some reservations that

all the pre-Permian tocks of Fleurieu Peninsula

south of Yankalilla valley were likely to be

Cambrian m uge

The eurliest mention of the Kanmantoo

Group (actually Karniantoa Series) was by

Spriggs, While and Campana (1951) in the

legend of the Adelaide 1:63,360 sheet. This

showed the “series occuring east of the

Nairne Fault. which separated it from rocks

belonging to the Proterozoic Era (Adelaide

System), Torrensian. Sturtian and Marinoan

Series [or using the style of nomenclature of

Daily (1963), the Late Preeambrian (Adelaide

Supergroup), Torrens, Sturt and Marino

Groups respecnvely). lis age was shown as

“? Early Palacozoic Era”

Tn addition to defining its tvpe area, Sprige

ang Campana (1953, p. 13) pointed out that

the Ranmantoo Group follows above “a limited

band of *(7) algal structured’ marble” aud the

“(2) coproliti¢ phyllite slates four miles south-

cast of Cape Jervis". Our mapping sobstn-

utes these Observatinns, and shows that the

Kanmantoo Group conformubly overlies meta-

morphosed beds which we correlate with the

Forktree Limestone and Heatherdale Shale of

Abele & MoGowran (1959), the type area for

which 4 it the mother part of Fleurieu Penin-

sula, The nage of the lower pact of the group

B, DAILY AND A, R, MINES

is therelire considered to be Lower Cambrisn.

Sprigé and Campana (1953) suggested that the

grovp omy extend into the Ordovician.

From) sotheir mapping of the Echunga

1:63,3600 sheet, Sprige and Wilson (1954)

showed that the Kanmuntoo Group tullowed

above the Macclesfield Marble which. because

of its position in the sequence, was equated by

Sprigg (in Sprigg & Campana 1953) with the

Archaeocyatha-rich limestones on the westtrn

side of the ML, Jolly Ranges, In addition, the

Echunga sheet showed the main disiribution of

the Kanmantoo Group ta be to the cast of the

Nenrne Fault, in contact with rocks to the west

ranging from the Marinwan Serics up to and

including the lawer parts of the Kanmantoc

Group. On the Gawler 1:63,360 sheet, Cam-

pana f1953) did not use the term Naicne Pault,

Nevertheless, the Kanmanteo Group is shown

in Fault contact with the Torrensian Series west

ol the northern continuation of the Nairne

Fault, the same relationships as drawn on the

Adelaide 1;63.360 shect.

The mapping of the Yankalilla and Jervis

1:63,360 sheets (Campana & Wilson 1954u,

1954b; Campana, Wilson & Whittle 1955)

showed that contrary te Madigun’s earlier inter-

pretajions, parts of Fleurieu Peninsula con-

tained areas of metasedimentary mocks and

inlrustves Teferred to the Archacan Era, the

Adelaide System. and Cambrian as high as the

phosphate-rich Heatherdale Shale. All these

formations were older than the Kuamanioa

Group as defined by Sprigg & Campanu. Sub-

sequent re-mapping by Thomson and Horwitz

(1962) largely substantiated these conclusions.

regional structure between Rapid Bay and

Delamere as portrayed on the Jervis 1:63,360

and Barker 1 ;250,000 sheets was incorrect, and

that large areas mapped wy Kiunmantoo. Group

belonged to the Sturt and Marino Groups. Fur-

ther, the discovery of Lower Cambrian Fossils

above the Marino Group in both the Mount

Terrible Formation and Setlick Hill Limestone

(melLumorphosed phase) confirmed the Lower

Cambrian age of the Delamere marbles, and

proved conclusively that the Kanmantoo Group

in tho Delamere region cenfonmably overlies

the Heuthercdiale Shale (phyllite phase}, ond

that its basal formation ts the Carrickalinga

Head Formation (metamorphosed phase) and

likewise Lower Cambrian in. age

Earlier, several publications had already dis-

inissed the concept of the Naime Fault. Cam-

pana & Horwite (1956) were the earliest to

LOUWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS

uo thes When Uiey postiilated that the Kanman-

ton Group was Lransgressive ucrass rocks vary-

ing in age From Archaean te the Lower Cam-

hrian Heutherdale Shale (phyllite phase), Daily

(1056) accepted this unconformity hypothesis

(bul see helow). However, Horwitz, Thom-

son & Webb (1959), Horwitz. 11960), Horwitz

& Theoson (1960) and Thomson & Horwitz

(1961) argued that net only was the Kanman-

too Group iransegressive, but that the earhest

Cambrian represented by the basal arkose of

the Mount Terrible Formation was also trans-

gressive across folded Adelaide System rocks

in the Sellick Hill area. We are in agreement

with the tcunseressive nature of the Mount

Terrible Formatiun (Daily 1963), but we dis-

fule the transgressive character of the Kanman-

too Group ws well as many of the stratigraphic

correlations made by Morwitz. Thomson &

Webb (1059) invelving melamerphic and

unfossililerous rocks on the eastem side of the

Mi. Lofty Ranges. which they referred to under

the term “'basal Cambrian”. (Under present

stratigraphic nomenclature. this would embrace

rocks of Lawer Cambrian age from the base of

the Mount Terrible Formation to the top of

the Heatherdale Shale.) For example, there is

ulreatly evidence in hand indicating that many

occurrences of their “basal Cambrian" involve

rocks of Late Precymbrian age. Moreover, we

note that Thomson in Parkin (1969, p. 103)

now doubts the validity of the “basal Cam-

brian” age of the Macclesfield and Mount

Barker Quartzites and believes that they “are

also probably members of the Strangway Hill

Formation”. In additpon, we note that the phos-

phat slate reyarded by Horwitz, Thomson &

Webh (1959) us the equivalent of the Healher-

dale Shale, is shown in their stratigraphic suc-

cession above the Macclesiteld and Mount

Barker Quartzites.

We are of the opinion that the main hulk

of the Kanmantoo Group in the eastern Mt.

Lofty Ranges is in fault contact with rocks

runging from the Barossa Complex to the

Heatherdale Shale, and we do not believe that

{he group is transgressive as postulated by Cam-

pana & Horwits (1956) and Horwitz, Thomson

& Webb (1959). We think that when key

areas which we are now re-investigating have

201

been re-mapped, faulting will be shown to have

played a prominent role in the distribution of

Kuanmantoo Group rocks not only in the Mt.

Lofty Ranges and Fleurieu Peninsula, but also

for Kangaroo Island. In support of this we

cite ihree examples;

L. Thomson fn Parkin (1969, p. 102) regards

the Kanrmantoo Group as resting uncon-

formubly on Barossa Conrplex rocks south-

cust OF Yunkulillia ill, However, this con-

tace is quite clearly a Eoult cantuct?.

The Kanmanton Group as mapped hy

Coats & Thomson (1959) on the Truro

1:63,360 sheet almost certainly occupies a

graben structure. As mapped. its coutact

with the Lower Cambrian metamorphic

rocks about 2 km south of Truro is best

regarded as a fault contact,

3. Alang the Devil's Backbone. ulmost 2 km

north-west of Inman Hill, Horwitz &

Thomson (Milang 1:63.360 sheet, 1960)

show Cambrian rocks resting wnconform-

ably on Sturtian rocks®. the Jatter being

regarded by Forbes (19571 as basal Strang-

way Hill Beds, Forbes mapped a fault be-

tween hus Strameway Hil) Beds and the

underlying Grey Spur Beds. which he

regarded as resembling the Adelaide Sys-

tem. We agree chat the fault ns mapped

is correct, Further, we regard the basal

Strangway Hill Beds of Forbes as equiva-

tent to the Tapley Hill Forroation ¢ phyllite

phase), and the overlying “Cambrian

marble and “pyritic shales interbedded

with quartites” of Horwilz & Thamson

(1960) as the Brighton Limestone (murble

phase) and basil Marino Group metasedi-

ments respectively. Thus We believe that

most of the type Strangway Hill Beds of

Forbes docs not belong to the Kanraanroo

Group, Further, the mapping by Horwitz

& Thomson (1960) suggests that a major

fault separates the Kinmantoe Group from

What we regard ws Scurt and Marine Group

rocks, “Thus hecwuse of the uncertainty

regarding both the stratigraphic position af

the Strangway Hill Beds in their type area,

and their relationships to rocks in the lype

atea of the Kanmantoo Group. and in view

of the fact that Strangway Hill Formation

*Campana (1955} interpreted this as u Faule contact

One of us (B.D, in conjunction with the

University of Adelaide Geology MT cluss for 1964, excuvated the contact ia show the refationships of

the Kanmuntoo Group io the underlying Rarossa Complex,

AThomsen & Horwitz (Barker 12250000 shect, 1962» show “basul Cumbrian" resting on Vorrensinn

tocks instead of Sturtian rocks as in their earlier contribution,

has been used by later authors lo refer spe-

cilically to the basal part of the Kanmantoo

Group. we believe that the terms ure best

sliscarded. Further credence is given fo

this suggestion jn view of the stratigraphic

scheme developed tn this paper for the

luwer part of the Kanmantoo Group within

Jig Lype area along the southern coastline

of Fleuricu Peninsula.

In connection with the relationships of the

Kanmantoo Group in the eastern Mt. Lofty

Ranyes, we are reluctant.to dismiss the concept

of the Nairne Fault as pertaining to the Ade-

laidé 17.63.3600) sheet. Kleeman & Skinner

(1959. p, 70) have pointed out that the Nairne

Fault as delineated on the Echunga 1:63.340

sheet was “disproven hy the mapping of marker

horizons and structural features: across the line

of the supposed fault”, The mapping of the

Steathalbyn Anticline by Offler {1963} is in

agreement with this statement, However we

are of the opinion that the Naitne Fault exists

on the Adelaide 1:250,000 sheet (Thomson

1969) where, in the Mount Charles region.

Thorson has interpreted a double oncontorm-

itv bounding “basal Cambrian” rocks. We

prefer to interpret (he same relationships as a

consequence of faulting. namely the Nairne

Faull, We predict that when the siructure of

the castern Mt, Lofty Ranges has been

resolved, Lhe boundary separating the younger

Kanmantoo Group from mainly Precambrian

fucks lving to the west will he a set of evr

echelon faults, and not an unconforniiry as

shown On the more recent maps published hy

the Geological Survey of South Australia. Tt

shutild he nuted, huwever, that where Luwer

Cambrian rocks are overlain by Kanmantoo

Group rocks without structural discordunce,

conformity between them can be expected.

Finally, we do not accept the proposition put

forward by Kleeman and Skinner (1959) that

the base of the Kunmantoo. Group should he

placed at the base of the “Nairne Pyritic For-

mation", because the base of the group as

defined by Sprigg & Campana (1953) has

priority, and is well beluw the Nairne Pyrite.

B. DAILY AND A. R. MILNES

The Geology of the Type Kanmantou Group

beiween Campbell Creek and Tunkalitla Beach

STRATIGRAPHY

In presenting the veology of this 16 kin of

coastline we have heen foreed to abandon the

term Straingway Ji) Formation as discussed

above, and also the tcrm Toman Hill Forma-

tion (see Foutnete 7), and to introduce

a number of new stratigraphic names. The

new schenie is given in Table | and the distn-

bution of the stratigraphic units recognised is

shown on the yccompanying geological map,

Fig 2. Whilst the position of the boundaries

hetween the formations vind various members

are accurately portrayed on the coustline, we

Must pool out that we have not mapped them

as far inland as the map might sugyest. ‘Their

projection inland is for the sake of clarity only.

All but one of the formations are fossili-

ferous, The whole sequence is regarded us

being Lower Cambrian in age From its fossil

cantent, und by gnalogy with the Lower Cywn-

brian sequence occuring on the north coast of

Kungaroo Island (Daily 1956; Horwitz & Buily

in Glaessner & Parkin 1953, Fie. 145 and Daily

1969).

A. Porkaien limrsvann (MARBLE PHASE)

AND HEATHERDALE SHALE TPEBYLLITE 1yASH)

Marble and phosphatic nodular phyllites

(Figs. 3-10) occupy the core of a north-

easterly plunging regional anticline whose

westem limb is overturned*, Evidence for

this overturning is given. by facings from

eross-bedding in the stratigraphically younger

Cartickalinga Head Formation on the western

limb of the fold, and also by cleuvage

hedding mntersections and the scnse of the para-

sitic Folds on the same limb. Both the Heather-

dale Shale and the Forktree Limestone can be

Inspected in Madigan Inlet’ and just eyst

thereul’.

The urea of outerop of the Heatherdale Shale

along the south coast is greatly exaggerated on

the Jervis 1:65.360 sheel, where ir is shown

{The regional anticline with an overturned western hmb was first recognised jointly during un excur-

siun' lo Madigan Inlet in 1963 by one of us (B.D.) and Dr, R. J,

George, who in the same year

Presented a thesis towards a B.Se.(Hons) Degree entitled "The geology of the Talisker Mine Area”

We wish ta record that we have consulted that work during the preparation «af this paper.

This ceographic leature is named im recognition of the important discoveries Made by the Jale Dr.

C_'T. Madigan, who first recognised and correctly interpreted the occurrence of the Delamere marble

(Madigan 1925. p. 20%), and later jn 1939, the phosphatic nodwear phyllites (sce comment by Sprige

in Sprigg and Campana 1953) al this loculity.

LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS

extending from jist west of Campbell Creek to

just cast of Madigan Inlet, Our interpretation

of the geology ami siracture of the same ated

is radically different. tt also differs from that

given in Thomson (1963), where failure to

recognise the closure of the regional anticline

al Madigan Inlet and the overturned western

limb of the fold has resulted in an ineorrect

siratgraphic column and siructure fur the areas,

Moreover, these errors have led to unwarranted

assumptions of facies changes from Cambnan

carbonates at Delamere to quartz-rich clastics

on the coasilinec, We reiterate the stalement

made by Daily (1963) that both Precambrian

and Cambrian sequences on Fleurieu Peainsula

show “remarkable constancy of facies”,

The north-eusterly plunge of the mottled

upper member of the Forktree Limestone is

visible on the extreme point on the eastern side

of Madigan Inlet. On the castern and nermal

limb of the fold, hyelithids und spicules of

ihe sponge Chancellorig were discovered in the

uppermost 2 m of the Forktree Limestone.

They are visible as phosphatic steinkerns on

bedding surfucey within the marble, just above

a wave-cut platform. All the fossils have been

deformed tectonically.

The contuct between the Forktree Limestone

und the lower member of the Heatherdale Shale

ix marked by the appearance of phyllite bands

up to B cm thick. The almost black phyllites

separate thin interbeds of dark blue-grey lime-

stone up to 1) em thick, and the sequence as

« whole is far better bedded than the lighter

coloured streaked und mottled marbles of the

Forktree Limestone Phosphatic nodules occur

from the base of the member, but these are

sparse. Hyolithids occur sporadically through

the lower [2 m, but gre abundant in a hand

of thin limestone about half way up the cliff

face al the op of this interval. The band can

he traced to the break in slope above the cliff,

where fossils can be collected safely. Non-

calcareous and black metasilistones with minor

impure limestone interbeds to $5 cm_ thick

occur above the fissiliterous interval. Black

phosphatic nodules elongated towards N70” at

47° are abundant from this interval onwards.

Higher in the mentber there is a marked

increase in carbonate vontent, restilting in a

sequence of flaggy limestones with thin calc-

phyliite partings. This part of the sequence is

Temimscent of the topmost members of the

Parara Limestone of the Billy Creek, Chace

Ranvc, and several other sections in the Flin-

ders Ranges, (Curiously, phosphatic nodules

204

and stringers of phosphite occur withla the

Parara Limestone in many areas of the Flin-

ders Ranges.)

The calcareous beds give way to 4n Upper

member consisting of black and nof-caleateous

phyllites, in which the abundant phosphutic

nodules plunge towards N85*° al 60°, How-

ever, the phyllites elo contain ovoid (srrerched),

calcareous concretions up te | mi across and

elongated in the same djtection as the phos-

phatic nodules, Hyalithids occur sparsely iu the

con¢retions, which recall similar large concre-

hogs (also Fossiliferous) occurring ih the upper

member of the same formation at Carrickalinga

Head, The upper memher contains sulphides,

and their presence is readily discernihle fron

the rusty slains seen on the surface of the

rocks,

The newly discovered fossils are not in them-

selves diagnostic enough to fix the age of the

sequence with any precision. However, iden-

ucal fossils occur in the same formations in

the same: stratigraphic pusitions in the Norman-

ville-Sellick Hill area, Recently, one of us

(B.D.) has located hyolithids in the basal parts

of the Heatherdale Shale along Stockyard

Creek east of the Cupe Jervis-Delamere road,

this realising the third predicted position

“where fossils might reasonably be expected to

occur in these metamorphosed rocks (Daily

1963, p. S81).

The overnurned limb of the Heatherdale

Shale is notably attenuated by shearing, and

inspection will show that whereas a complete

sequence is found on the normal limb, parts

of the formation on the overturned limbd have

been eliminated by fauluing. Such faulting is

characteristic of most of the other formations

occurring on the western and overtiimed hmb

of the regional anticline, and will be allusiced to

below. We have not photted «a fault on the map

simply because none was to be found. Never-

theless, it is quite obvious that beds present on

the other limb of the very tight fold are not

present on the overturned limb.

B. Tite KANMANTOO Group

ti) Carrickalinga Head Formation

A radical and fundamental chanve in’ sedi-

mentation is ushered in at the base of the Kan-

mantoo Group (Figs, 8-18), There is ro

transition, and consequently the costact

belween its basal member, herein termed the

Madigan Inlet Member. and the Heatherdale

Shale is perfectly sharp, It is visible on the

eastern side of the first mdentation east of

Madivan Inlet, where black phyllites to meta-

siltstones, stained from the breakdown of sul-

phides, are in contact with a thin grey phyllite

marking the base of the Kanimantoo Group.

Black phosphatic nodules occur right up to the

contast (Fig. 10). The member ts charac-

terscd by phyllites (frequently bedded) aolter-

nating with more inassive beds of impure meta-

siltstones 1o metasandstones. ‘The proportion

of phyllite to the coarser elastics varies within

the member. For example, the thin phyllite

interbeds are absent in the upper parts of the

member where metasilistones to fine grained

metasandstones are dominant. Abundant small

scale sedimentary structures, especially ripple

phenomena, are prominent in this interval.

Small north-easterly plunging folds are evident

in the same beds. Characteristic of the coarser

clustica are large actinolite-garnel nodules. or

segregationg which make their appeurance

about 34) cm aboye the base of the meather.

These are ditacted towards N50° al a moderate

angle, Pale grey ovoid nodules up to 2 cm

across, and stringers of the same material occur

in distinet layers through wbout 25 cm of a

dark grey phyllite interbed on the overturned

limb of the Madigan Inlet Menther. The

nodules consist: predominantly of phosphate.

Abundant pegmatite stringers, consisting of

quarlz, chlorite, muscovite, calcite and opaque

mineral cut the metasedimentary rocks on both

limbs of the regional anticline, Small gurnec

porphyrohiasts are developed in the metasedi-

Mentary rocks immediately adjacent to some of

the pegmatites,

The middle member of the formation, herein

referred to as the Blowhole Creek Siltstone

Member (phyllite phase}, rests conformably

on the Madigan Inlet Member. I is seen

between Ihe mouth of the first creck west of

Bilowhole Creek and n small inlet just east of

Cumpunn Creek® The scquence consists

almost entirely of pale grey laminated phyllites

which are deformed into a serics of minor folds

plunging up to 45° towards the north-eust.

Where fine sand and silt interbeds occur, as in

the upper parts of the member, minor sedimen-

sary structures such as small scale current

ripples and current-bedding, fossils in the form

oF worntravis, and minor folds with steep,

short and overturned western limbs are very

evident, It is seen that the minor folds fiith-

B. DAILY AND A R MILNES

fully mimic the style of the major anticline lor

the region.

Pegmatite veins containing quartz, chlorite

and biotite are common. in the Blowhole Creek

Siltstone Member. Av amphibolite dyke about

3 m wide cuts the phyllite sequence, and can be

inspected just west of the beach fronting Blow-

hole Creck. It is intersected hy quartz pegrna-

Niles which indicate intrusion of the dyke prior

to the final phase of metamorphism. Another

amphibolite dyke, which cuts the Madigan Inlet

Member, can be secn on the first point south

of the contact with the top of the Heatherdale

Shale.

The lower boundary of the overlying Cam-

pana Creck Member is gracdational fover about

1m) from the underlying member, and is seen

in the cliff in the small inlet just east of Cam-

pana Creek, Fallen blocks indicate the change

in gross lithology. and show the abundant small

scale anc deformed sedimentary structures to

perfection (Fig. 11) in the thinly laminated

beds made up of ullernations of grey phyllites

and paler grey metasiltstone and metasand-

stone layers, Many beds show bioturbation

features (Fig. 12).

The section described above ts te be con-

sidered a9 a subsidiary type section for the

Carrickalinga Head Vormation, described in-

formally by Daily (1963) and used formully in

Daily (1969). For the first time a definite

upper limit can be given and its thieefold divi-

sion specified. Moreover, it is now clear that

the Carrickalinga Head Formation and the

Mount McDonnell Formation (Daily 1969)

are synonymous, the two uppermost members

of the fonmer being the metamerphic counter-

parts of the shales, silts and minor courser clas-

lics found helow the Stokes Buy Sandstone

along the horth coast of Kangaroo Island,

north-west of Mount McDonnell, Both forma-

tions are characterised by the high incidence of

bicturbation within the sequence. It is proposed

that the Mount McDonnell Formation be dis-

carded a5 a stratigraphic term becuse of its

identity with the Carrickalinga Head Porma-

lion.

Gi) Backsrairs Passage Formarion

A thick sequence of metasandstones overlies

the Carrickalinga Head Formation and is in

turn overlain by 4 sequence of calc-phyilites.

‘So named to honour the significant conteibutians made to the understanding of the geology of the Mt.

Lofty Rages by Dr. Bruno Campana,

LOWBR CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS

We propose to refer lo this saidstone sequence

ws the Backstairs Passage Formation, named

after the surait separating Fleurieu Peninsula

From Kangaroo Eslund,

The fotijation boundary is drawn on the east

side of a hf m wide gulch in which no outcrop

is seen. However. coufarmiry between the two

furmations is assumed. From the hase up-

wards, most of the rocks are well laminated,

With grey metasandstone heing the dominant

rock twpe. In the basal parts of the forma-

tion ahbundanr sile is present, and this is very

evident where differential erosion of the thin

grey metasandstones and darker erev’ metasilt-

stones has produced thinly ribbed or striped

outcrops. Baturbyted intervals are present par-

uicularly in these lower silt intervals. Some

smull scale cross-bedding with sets up to 25 cm

thick are noticeable in the more massive sand-

stones near the baxe of the formation, Here,

too, thin metusiltstones up to | m thick break

the monotony of the laminated metasandstones,

With the decrease in silt content, the lami

nated sandstones make bolder and more mas-

sive Oulcrops and appear much paler flan the

earlier described clastics due to the better sort-

ing resulting in less fines abd the consequent

decrease in dark micas, Mica is still present

hot evenly dispersed, giving the weathered

tocks a “salt and pepper" appearance, Although

the rocks are still Well laminated. cross-bedding

becomes a prominent feature from about a

third of the way through the fermation, The

sels are Penerally about 1 m or less in thick-

ness, although 2 m thick sets were recorded.

The sunds fill low amplitude channels cut into

the laminated beds and are themselves Iomima-

ted, Small atid large scule slumps have resulted

From movement down the direction of the

cross-bedding. The vuriability in direction of

slump axes precludes any conclusions tegard-

ing a source direction for the sediment,

It is uncertain whether the fiat laminations

represent a very high energy Tezime, or were

produced under shallow water and less ener-

getic canditions. Whutever the answer, il seems

clear that they represent rapid deposition

hecause of the instability of the cross-bedded

sets of laminated sands involved in the slump-

ing, and also because of the absence of bia-

uurbation in the sane beds as comipared with

the high incidence of hioturbation seen in the

lower portions of the formation, Presumably

these were deposited under much less energetic

conditions. It is possible that the formation

could be subdivided into two members on the

basis of Its silf content and type of bedding,

hut we da not wish to do this at present.

On the overtiirmmed limb of the regional anti-

cline between Cunypbell Creck aad Madigan

Inlet, the Canickulinga Head Formation and

in particular the Backstuirs Passage Formation

have been greatly attenuated by shearing jimd

Faulting, This is especially so for the latter,

which has been alf but eliminated on the coast-

line. A fault, although not observed, is shown

on our map to take account of the missing

interval,

It is probable that the Backstairs Passage

Formation and the Stokes Bay Savidstone of

northern Kangaroo Island are synonymous,

However, further work needs to be carried oul

on the Stokes Bay Sandstone before any finality

can be attained. Until an adequate comparison

can be made we will continue to employ the

Backstairs Passage Formation as a warkable

stratigraphic uit,

(iil) Tativker Calo-siltstene (pliyllie phase)

This newly named formation is the most

characteristic member of the Kanmantoo

Group so far encountered in our traverse along

the south coast. The formation 1 unfossili-

ferous, is contact with the adjacent forma-

tions is sharp. The cale-sibyilites are strongly

bantied and predominantly light and dark grey

in colour, The lighicr bands are generally

more calcareous. Jn places the lighter bands

are coarse grained marbles, occurring as thin,

discontinuous stringers within the formation

due to the strong deformation within the ares.

Minor folds are ubiquitous. Sulphide-rich

zones ure evident from the rusty colouring on

the exterior of the phyllites

On the overturned limb of the regional anti-

cline, the formation appears to occupy about

twice the width of outctop us On the eénstein

limb, Io fact it is better examined there

hecatise ol its easy accessibility. A dry weather

track. suitable only for four-wheel drive

vehicles, passes to the west of the Talisker Mine

and is readily negotiated as far as Campbell

Creek, From this point the calc-phyllites occur

eastward for neurly I km, Again they are

characteristically banded, and differennal

Weathering in places gives the rock a ribbed

appearance. Sceregations of quartz-chlorite-

muscovite pegmatite are prominent as on the

normal lintb of the regional anticline. Perhaps

the most conspicuuus feature of the overturned

limb 18 the intensity of the small scale folding

so beautifully expressed in the cliff faces. Neat

206

Campbell Creek, southerly plunges are com-

mum, but further ¢ast the plunges are tewsrds

the jorth-eagt at varying angles, generally shal-

low. Mineral streaking on hedding planes is

directed towards the south-east between N1 10°

to N1S0° Sulphide-nch (predominantly pyrr-

hotite) bands of cale-phyllites are common,

particularly near the basal and middle parts of

the formation, One sulphide band abuut 10m

thick lies immediately east of a 60 cm thick

quartzite, and is conspicuous fram the oxida-

tion colours on the phyllites, Cleavage within

the band is communly enhanced by the pre-

sence of sulphides and their oxidauon pyro-

ducts. Other similar sulphide-rich bands occur

in the formation to the cast but are not shows

am Pig. 3. Indeed, the whole sequence con-

twins varying amounts of sulphides, and the

zones ure sa numerous that it is impracticable

te plot them on the scale of our map.

A strongly boudinaged amphibolite dyke cuts

che formauon, and is visible on the coustline

in about the middle of the formation on the

eastern lib of the regional anticline

(iv) Tupamaoppa Pormartion®

On the normal limb of the regional anticline,

an enormously thick and extremely mong-

lonous seyuence of dark coloured and dirty

Mietasandstones with thin grey phyllite inter.

heds rests conformably on the Talisker Cale-

silsione. fn general aspect, the formation

recalls the busal member of the Carrickalinga

Head Fornttion, in that the metasandstanes are

are split by thin phyllites, and it limited expo-

sires could be confused with it. ‘The meta-

sundstanes include fine grained to coarse

grained viineties, the latter being the cam-

Noner, avd In these there is obvious biotite and

felilspur Internally the sandstone beds, gene-

rally of the order of less than L m and rarely

mire than 2m in thickness, are poorly betlded

to well bedded. Cross-bedding is common, and

in some intervals large scour channels filled

with cross-bedded sands are obvious. for

example hetween Porpoixe Head and Deep

Creck. Flat bedded and small seale current

hediled sandstones are wlso present. Actinolite-

garnet nodules are again common within the

TThe formation has been named after the geographic feature called Tapanappa Till,

B. DAILY AND ALR, MILNES

mMetusandstunes, but they du occur in some of

the metasiltstane to phyllite interbeds.

Ia sOme parts of the formation the metg-

sandstanes are highly cleaved, no doubt due

to Jarge amounts of fines in the original sedi-

ment, which have recrystallised 10 micas. The

only fossils found within the formation were

worm-cants in metasandstones interbedded with

metasiftstones in the vicinity of Porpoise Heat

The phyllites are generally grey (o dark grey

in colour, and tend to weather ollve-green away

from the coast. ‘Vhey vary in thickness from

mere partings to beds up to Lt} m thick, but the

fatter are exceplional. They ure commonly Jess

than 0.5 m thick. Overall, there stems to be

more phyllite present from Tunkililla Beach

eastwards. The phyllites occasionally are woll-

bedded. and in some focalities, for example cist

of Deep Creek and in the old coastal cliffs in-

land from Tunkalilla Beach, porphyroblasts of

micas and chlorite are randomly oriented

within the rocks.

The only other rock type present is conglo-

merate. This first appears in the sequence in

the cliffs just west of Aaron Creck. Similar

thin bands occur sporadically and higher tm the

formation, bul wssume more importance as

Tunkalilla Beach is approached, Vhe conglo-

Tmerates appear to be lenticular. and wre gone-

rally less than 2m thick. ‘They are cut-and-fill

into the underlving sediments, and ate fre-

quently croess-hedded and contain pebbles of

quamtz fineluding blue opalescent quartz),

feldspar, quartzite, gneisses, rare phyllites, and

limestones and dolomites, The carbonate

pebbles (imarbles! are always present and make

up a significant proportion of some bands. The

maximum pebble size seen was approximately

& cm in diumeter, The significance of the con-

glomerates is discussed below-

Two significant sulphide-rich bands were

located within the Tupanupps Formation dur-

ing our traverse, and these an: shown on Fig. 2.

Both are approximately 2.5 m thick, and con

sist of culcareous latiinated phyllites interbed-

ged with thin metasiltstone beds up to § cm

thick. The phyllites show small seale current.

bedding The sulphide is fine grained and

evenly disseminated through the phyllites anu

metasiltstones, and is shown by petrographic

On the Harker

1:250,000 sheet, the Inman Hill Formation (Forbes 1957) as shown on the youth coust of Fleurieu

Peninsula includes the metasediments we have mapped as Backstairs Passage Formation, Talisker

Cale-sittstone, and Taponappa Formation.

As we ate wneertoin that the beds herein termed Tapa-

nuppa Formation are the same as included in the rype Ining HiL Formation. we prefer to use the

former term. (See also Tuble 2.)

LOWER CAMERIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS 207

examination to be dominantly pyrrhotite. Onc

unusual Feature uf the sulphide band neuer Por-

poise Heal is the presence of abundant fine

2tained sphene. This is absent from the band

to the east of Boat Harbour Creek.

The finding of major sulphide-rich bands

within the Tapanappa Formation, and in fact

their occurrence throughout much of the basal

part of the Kanmantoo Group as described

herein, has interesting implications. This is

especially important in view of the fact that the

presence of sulphide bands within Kanmantoo

Group metasedimentary rocks is a characteris

lic feature of the Nairne Pynte Member, and it

has been the tendency of earlier workers to

map this Member on the basis of the sulphide-

rich “marker beds”.. Clearly. the presence of

sulphides is not a valid single criterion for the

recognition of the Nairne Pyrite, and such use

may lead fo quite incorrect stratigraphic and

structural interpreiutions of the geology in parts

af the southern and eastern Mr. Lofty Ranges,

The position of the lower boundary of the

Tapanuppa Formation on Fig. 2 lies about 1

km further east than the boundary of the In-

man Hill Formation on the Barker 1:250,000

sheet. [ft would appear that Thomyon &

Horwitz have included the Backstairs Passage

Formation and the Tulisker Calc-siltstone in

what they have called the Inman Hill Forma-

tion. They ure specifically excluded Gom the

Tapanappa Formation as used herein because

they ure distinct units, capable of bemg recoz-

mised and mapped clsewhere, and their inclu-

sion in the Tapaunippa Formation would des-

troy the uniformity of that formation. For the

purpose of this paper, we have tentatively

lagated the upper boundary of the Tapanappa

Formation on the normal limb of the regional

anticline approximately 2.5 km wese of ‘Tunk

Head. Here, in the elifls inland trom Tunka-

lila Beach, the Tapansppa Formation is over-

lain vonformubly by 4 10 m thick band of

dark coloyred and laminated phyllite, followed

ubowe by a sequence of fine vrained to coarse

grained metasandstones with thick phyllite

interbeds. On the overturned westem limb of

the regiona! gniicline, we interpret the Talisker

Fault (Jervis 1:63,360 sheet), along the coast-

ling just west of Campbell Creck, as a con-

formable boundary between the Talisker Calc-

siltsione and the stratigraphically younger

Tapanappa Formation.

As seen from Fig 2, the Tapanappa Fer-

mation is mainly eastfacing. except where

folds intervene, Fold plunges are shallow, with

axes directed towards the north-eyst or south-

west. In this regard they mimic the axial diree-

tion of the regional anticllnal closure al Madi-

gun Inlet. We have been unable to locate

major Faulting within the formation, How-

ever. shearing is associated with the folding

but is apparently pot significant on a macro

scale.

STRUCTURE

Our observations to dale miinly apply te

the eastern limb of a regional anticlinal struc

ture, in which the western limb is overturned

and shows evidence for considerable tectonic

thinning. All mesoscale folds so fat observed

conform to the style of the regional structure.

‘They are inclined und asymmetric, with east

limbs of anticlines longer than west limbs, and

an asial plane cleavage dipping stéeply towards

the south-east. In many cases, dislocation of

the averlurned west limbs of mesoscale anti

clines and the east limbs of mesoscule synclines

has taken place along thrust zones which nearly

parallel the axial plane cleavage, -As described.

these folds correspond to the F, tulds of Offer

& Fleming ¢1968}.

A w-diagram, plotted from nigasuted bed-

ding attitudes, shows the overall fold uxis te

be plunging at a very shullow angle towards

approximately N45". However, mesoscale

fold axes are spread along a preat circle, This

spread is substantiated from measurements of

long axes of phosphate nodules in the Heather-

dale Shale, and actinolite-garnet rods in the

Currickalinga Head Formation and the Tapa-

nappa Formation, and is interpreted as jndica-

ting refolding of F, folds by a second delorma-

tion, Bedding plane lineations in the Forktree

Limestone and the Talisker Cale-siltsione. due

to the elongation of culeite crystals and sul-

phide mineral grains respectively, plunge to-

wards approximately N115° at about 65° und

may correspond to the fold axis of the second

generation folds. The bedding plane lineations

are the only evidence so far observed for

second peneration structures, We have scen

similar relationships in adjacent areas inchiding

the Encounter Bay area and Dudley Peninsula,

Kangaroo Island. However, the further defini-

tion and understanding of these overprinting

relationships wall be dependent on the extension

of our present traverse along the south coast

of Fleurieu Peninsula.

Considerable tectonic thinning of formations

has Oceurred on the western limb of the

regional anticline. For example. as discussed

208

above, much of the Heatherdale Shale, the

upper two members of the Carrickalinga Head

Formation, and all but the uppermost few

metres of the Backstairs. Passage Formation are

missing from this section. We prefer to ascribe

the absence of much of the Carrickalinga Head

Formation and the stratigraphically younger

Backstairs Passage Formation as the result of

faulting. bit we were unable to find such a

fault, Consequently, a Lentative fault has been

drawn in the appropriate place on Fig. 2 to

atcouol fur the missing interval, We believe

it probable that the Heatherdale Shale has been

thinned as wu result of thtisting along cleavage

panes, which arc closely snuced und dipping

uta shallower angle than the hedding, although

faulting within the formation must remain a

possibility,

We wish to make quite clear that any thick-

nesses of formations and members computed

from Fig. 2 can have no meaning because of

the ubiquitous small scale folding, In all but

the most competent formations and members.

the folds are generally not of sufficiently large

scale to show on our map. The incompetent

carbonate-rich formations and the fine grained

phyllite aud metasiltstone members of the Car-

tickalinga Head Formation particularly, are

complexly folded on a small scale. with folds

varying in amplitude from several centimetres

up to several metres.

METAMORPHISM

OMer & Fleming (1968) have assigned the

metasedimentary rocks ulong the southern

coastline of Fleuricu Peninsula to the biotite

zone of metamorphism, passing eastwards into

the bigher grade andalusite-staurolite zone. The

lower boundary of theie andafusite-staurolite

zone intersects the coastline at about the posi-

tion of the regional anticlingl axis at Madigan

Tnlet, and has been defined by the “incoming

Oo! andesing or andesine + epidote in cule-

schists and cale-silicate rocks”, However, they

stress that the boundary is only approximlely

located on parts of Fleuricu Peninsula, includ-

ing the southern coastline, “hecause of the lack

of suitable rock types”,

Our investigations have shown thal the fol-

lowing mineral assemblages occur in the meta-

sedimentary rocks between Camphell Creek

und Tunkalilla Beach:

fa) in cole-silicate rocks—

andeatine, — calcite, actinolite. garnet, +

chlorite, + epidote, — biotite:

R. DALLY AND AR. MILNES

(h) in cale-phylfites and calcareous metasilt-

stangey—

undesing, | muscovite, biotite, cabeite, +

actinollte, 4 garnet, +- chlorite:

andesine, hiotite, chlorite;

(dd) in tmpure metasandstones—

undesine, chess-albile, biotite, + garnet,

— epidote, muscovite.

Quartz is. ubiquitous in all assemblages. We

have not observed staurolite, andalusite or cor-

dierite, nor have we seen the andalusite-type

knots consisting of quartz, muscovite, chlorite,

++ albite deserihed by Offler & Fleming (1968)

as preceding the first uppesrance of andalusite

in pelitic schisis elsewhere in the Mt. Lofty

Ranges. Thus we are nor able to Incite the

lower baundury of the andalusite-staurolite

zones as defined by the staurolite or andalusite

isograds, However, on the basis of the coenis-

tence of plagioclase with calcite, epicdote, and

actinolite, and because of the stability af the

assemblage quarte + chlorite, it is possible to

locate the grade of metamorphism at the Lop of

the low-stage (as defined by Winkler 1970)

hetween the almundine garnet isograd and the

staurolite tograd.

Discussion and Conclusions

As a result of our study of the Kanmantou

Group in ils type area, several facts emerge

from which y number of conclusions can he

drawn,

(a) Srratigraphic Relationshipy

On Fleurieu Penimala, the Kanmantoo

Group rests conformably and with sharp can-

tact on the Heathercdale Shale, Moreover. in

the same region, there is no evidence for either

unconformity or disconlormity at its base, as

proposed initially by Campana & Horwitz,

(1956) and most, recently by Thomson in

Parkin (1969). In all areas where Kanmintoo

Group rocks rest on rocks older than the

Heatherdale Shale, faulting can be shown to

explain the sitttation, as for example south-east

of Yankalilla Hill, Similar fault relationships

ave belicved to exist through much of the

eustern, Mt, Lolty Ranges, where the uncon-

formity concept has been applied hy many

geologists to explain relationships firat inter-

preted by Spnge, Whittle & Canpunw (1951)

us due to Faulting.

LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSIDIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS

(b) Phe Kangaracian Movements and Kan-

meaitoo Group Sedinrenration

Vhe clear-cut contact between the Heather-

dale Shale and Kanmantoo Group indicates the

suddenness with which the new type of sedi-

ments became avuilghle and were brought into

the basin of deposition. They were essentially

non-calcaredus and in contrast to the earlier

deposited Cambrian sediments. The new sedi-

ments were imuinly unsorted sands and silts

eroded from newly emergent land masses up-

lifted in response to movenrents in the present

Investigator Strait and Gulf St, Vincent’. Other

areas involved were the Gawler Nucleus and its

southerly prolongation onto and perhaps even

beyond the present continental shelf, Such

Lawer Cambrian movements, both positive

(for source areas) and negative (for deposi-

tional areas) and their connection with Kan-

mantog Group sedimentation were first alluded

to hy Sprigg (1955) and Jater documented by

Daily (1956, pp. 99-100, 125-128, 138-140),

Campana (in Glagssner & Parkin 1958, pp. 17-

18), Horwite & Daily (fm Glaessner & Parkin

1958, p, 55), Daily (1963. p. 596; 1969, p. 52

und elsewhere®, Daily & Forbes (1969) named

these movements the Kangarooian Movements

falter the locality Kangaroo Isand, along the

north coast of which their effects are best

recorded) in preference to the term “orogeny”

as initially suggested in 1956. Thomson fin

Parkin 1969, p. 99; 1970, p. 215) has used the

terms Cassinian Uplift and Waitpingan Subsi-

dence to aecount for the sume movements:

however, it is proposed here that the teem

Kangurogian Movements is more appropriate

because if retains the spirit of the concepe as

used in Daily (19561-

In addition, the nioverments as recorded on

hoth Kangaroo Island and Yorke Peninsula

were multiple in character, Moreover, the

instability in the Jatter region, as shown in the

sedimentary record, extended from the Lower

Cambrian mto the Middle Cambrian. Periods

209

ot quiescence puncluated the positive phases

of the movements, and at these times lime-

Sumes Were deposited.

On Fleurieu Peninsula, the Kanmantoe

Group metasediments reflect am almost canun-

uous supply of clastics tram the nearhy teo-

tonic lands, The sands are impure and poorly

sorted, atl on the whole indicate sapid depasi-

list in a rapidly subsiding basin. However,

deposition was not rapid crough 10 prevent

organisms from reworking the newly laid sands.

iis in parts of the Carrickalingz# Head Forma-

lion and Backstairs Passage Formation. The

Talisker Calc-siltsione is an exception in that

there is a general fall off in the supply ol

coarse clasties at the time of ity deposition, but

it would scem that negative movements within

the busin were such that the depositional inter-

face was brought to depths where stagnant bol-

tom conditions favoured the deposition of

abundant sulphides.

The Vapanappa Formation coniuins many

lenses of small scale conglomerates. Rock frag-

ments are commonly angular, and hence show

evidence of litle transport, Many pebbles are

of older Precambrian eneisses wnd other crys-

talline rocks, and the high incidence of

marbles, by analogy with Kungaroo [sland and

Yorke Peninsula, presumably represent the

stripping of Lower Cumbrian limestones and

dulomites, and the underlying erystalline base-

ment, from nearby rising Faull blocks, The

high feldspar content of metasandstones within

the Kanmantoo Group is an indication of’ the

strong tole played by the crystalline basement

in supplying much of che sediment,

(ch The New Srratigruplie Scheme for the

lower part of the Katvinantoa Group

The stratigraphic scheme as given in Table 1

will form the basis for our future investigations

elsewhere within the area of distribution of the

Kanmantoo Group. We regard the Talisker

Calc-siltstone as a marker bed, and wish to

“Several unpublished reports by one of us (B.D.) and held of open tile by the Soulh Australian

Mines Department, have developed this theae, especially for the Yorke Peninsula Region,

(a) Daily, B_(19571.—Progress report on the Cambrian seqtiente met with in the Mialaton Strati:

gtaphic Bore 1, Scction 133, Hd. Ratnsay, Yorke Peninsula, Sauth Australia, Unpublished scport

to S.A. Mines Department.

fb) Daily, B, (1967).—Stansbury West No, | and Sd ibralt i No. | Wells—Subsurface Stratigraphy

and Palasontology of the Cambrian Sequence,

Unpublished report to Beach Petroleum N.L.

fe) Daily, B. {1968).—Stansbury Town Ne. | Well -Subsurface Stratiecraphy and Palacontolugy af

the Cambrian Sequence. Unpublished report to Beach Petroleum N.L-

As mentioned in fc), a discussion of a correlatian chart for all wells mentioned in (ay. (by wad iv)

was presented to the South Australian Division of the Geological Society of Austratia, July 27, 1967,

TABLE 1}

Stratigraphic scheme far the lower part of the

Kanmantoo Group in its type section

Tupanapps Formation

Taliskor Cale-Siltstone

Backstairs Passare Formation

Campana Creek Member

Blowholes Crock Siltatane

Member

Madigan Inlet Member

—?

Cartickalinga Head Formation

Ranmantoo Grovn

Upper member tunnamed!

Heatherdale Shale

Lower member (unnamed)

Forkiree Linecstonac iJpner member (annayted)

point out that we haye recognised it recently

on both limbs of an overturned anticline on

Kangaroo Island. It is imperative that a search

be made inland on Fleurieu Peniosula for these

culc-phyllites, particularly in the type section

of ihe Inman Hill Formation (Forbes 1957)

us well as further north.

As shown in Table 2, three stratigraphic

schemes have been applied to the type section

of the Kanmantoo Group. We reject the lowest

two units in the Thoamson & Horwitz scheme

for the reasons stated abeve, but can nol com-

ment on the Brukunga Formation as this inter-

B. DAILY AND A, R, MILNES

val is still to be investigated by us, With regard

to the two other schemes, it is. important to

note that the formation baundaties mapped

both by Dr. R. J. George (see footnote 4)

and us on the normal limb of the regional anti-

cline are practically coincident. We differ

from George essentially in the choice of names

for the formations recognised. George chose

his nomenclature beciuse he was impressed by

the occurrence of sulphides in the Tulisker

Calc-siltstone, and because it lay siraligraphi-

cally above a cross-bedded, shimped arkasic

formation, and below 4 greywacke sequence.

These three formations he equated with the

Nairne Pyrite. the Inman Hill Formation, and

the Brown Hill Greywacke respectively. There

would be considerable merit in this action bul

for the fact that on the Barker 1:250,000

sheet, the Brukunga Formation is mapped

along the south coast of Fleurieu Peninsula as

commencing nearly 16 km to the cast of the

upper limit of the ‘Talisker Calc-siltstone, We

cannot ignore the possibility that George is

correct in equating the Tulisker Calc-siltstone

With the Nairne Pyrite, which incidentally does

contuin calearcous mictascdimentary rocks. If

this suggestion is correct, then the geology of

the Kanmantoo Group on the Barker

1:250,000 sheet is in need of much greater

tevision than we presently propose.

TABLE 2

Schemes of Stratigraplic Nomenclature utilised in the type section of the Kanmantoa Group between

Thomson & Horwite (1962)

Thomson in Parkin (1969)

Brown Hill Greywacke Membect

Formation

Naitne Pyrite Member

! Brokunga

Inman Hill Formation

KANMANTOO GROUP

Strangway Oil Formaliony

Campbell Creek and Rosetta Head

George (tinpublished )

- Not investigated

Greywacke of Brown Hill

Nairve Pyrite Equivalent i

Inman Hill Farmation

Carnickalinga Head Formation

| Daily & Milnes (this paper)

| Not yet investizaied

Tapanappa Foriintion

Talisker Calo-siltstone

Backstaics Passuge Formation

Carrickwlingu Head Formation

* Thomson & Horwitz (1962) have not mapped this tacmber along the coastline within the type section,

+ The term Strangway Hill Forthation. was. not nged in the Jegend of the Barker 1:250,000 sheet (Thomson

& Honvitz 1962) for the rocks exposed along the coastline between Campbell Creek and the base of the

Intnan Hill Formation.

However, the Strangway Hill Formation is shown in Fig. 44 in Thomson in Parkin

(1969), as occupying this interval of coastline: Tn fact. as scen from our Fig, 2 the same coastal suction cone

tains rocks within the regional anticline ranging from Forktree Limestone to the Talisker Calc-sillslone,

LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS a |

Acknowledgements

Portion of expenses relating to this work the project and for arranging the Beach Peiro-

were defrayed from the University Research leum grant; also Professor A- R- Alderman and

Grant, the remainder from a grant made ta the Drs. A. W. Kleeman and J. B. Jones who were

University by Beach Petroleum N.L. Wewish kind enough to give us the benefit of their

to thank Mr. R. C. Sprigg for his interest in criticisms,

Fig.

Fiz.

Fig.

Fig:

Fig.

EXPLANATION OF FIGURES

Anticlinal closure in mottled marbles of the Forktrce Limestone forming the core of the

north-eysterly plunging regional anticline, east side of Madigan Inlet.

Deformed mottled marbles on the overturned limb of the regional anticline, east side of

Madigan Inlet. View looking towards N200°. Coin 2.3 cm in diameter.

Flaggy outcrops of marbles: with thin phyllitic partings, near top of upper member of the

Heatherdale Shale, east limb of regional anticline, small bay just east of Madigan Inlet.

Deformed ovoid limestone coneretions in upper member of Heatherdale Shale, immediately

cast of Fig. 5. Hammer length 28 em.

Aligned black phosphatic nodules in dark coloured phyllites on overturned limb of Heather-

dale Shale, creek exposure at Madigan Inlet, Coin 2.8 cm in diameter.

View looking, south showing the extremely attenuated Hestherdale Shale on the overturned

limb of the regional anticline, Madigan Inlet, From Jefi to tight—Marbles of Forkiree Lime-

stone on point, phyllites of Heatherdale Shale forming bay and in creek exposure in right

foregroiind, and metasandstones and phyllites of Carrickalinga Head Tormation on coast.

Figure 1.3 mi tall.

Contact between light coloured basal beds of the Kanmantoo Group and the black sulphide-

rich phyllites of the underlying Heatherdale Shale, cove just east of Madigan Inlet. View

lagking south.

Hammer on contact between Heatherdale Shale and basal phyllite of the Kanmantoo Group,

Note clongated dark coloured actinolite-garnet nodule in metasandstone about 35 em to right

of hammer,

Deformed bedding in interbedded metasandstones and metasiltstones neat base of Campana

Creek Member of the Cuarrickalinga Head Formation, just east of Campana Creek. Hammer

handle lies. parallel to cleavage,

Bioturbated beds near base of Campana Creek Member of Carrickalinga Head Formation,

same locality as Fig. 11. Pen is 14 cm Jong.

Well laminated metasandstones, lower portion of the Buckstairs Passage Formation, 0.5 km

sauth-east of Blowhale Creck, Lens cap 7 cm in diameter.

Laminated (top) und slumped (bottom) metasandstones of the Backstsirs Passage Forma-

tion, 1 km south-east of Blowhole Creek.

Banding in dark and light grey (calcareous) phyllites of the Talisker Cale-silistone on the

overturned limb of the regional anticline, just east of Campbell Creek. Note pegmatitic

segregations of quartz and chlorite (also light coloured).

Parasitic folds (plunging towards N50°) in Talisker Cale-siltstone on the overturned limb

of the regional anticline, about 0.5 km south-cast of Campbell Creek. Note short overturned

limbs and long normal limbs of folds, and shearing of overturned limbs.

Band of small scale conglomerate with overlying laminated metasandstone in ‘Tapanappa

Formation, just west of Tunkalilla Beach.

Large partly rounded pebbles of quartzites and gneiss in small scale conglomerate. same

locality as Fig. 17. Maximum diameter of pebble (upper right) is 7 cm.

112 B

DAILY AND ALR. MILNEIES

References

Aneur, C., de McGowan, 8, (1959),—The geo-

logy of the Cambrian south of Adelaide

(Selick Hill to Yankalillay. Traas. RR. Soe.

S, Ass, 82, 31-320.

CAMPANA, B. (1953)—Gawler map shéet, Gealo-

vicul Atlas of South Australia, 1:63,360 series.

(Geol, Surv. S. Aust: Adetside.)

Campana, B. (1955).—The structure of the

eastern South Anstralinn Ranges: The Mt.

Lofly-Olary Are. J. geat, Soc. Ausf. 2, 47-61.

Campana, B. (1958)—/a M, Ti. Giluessrer &

L. W. Parkin (Eus.). Che geology ot, South

Australia. J. geol. Sov. Aust. & (24, 3-27.

CAMPANA, B., & Horwrrz, R, C. (1956)—The

Kanmanioo Group of South Australia con-

sidered as # tranagressive sequence. slurst, J.

Sev. 18 (4), 128-129.

CaMPANA, B,, & Witson, B. (19540) —Yankulilla

map sheet, Geological Atlus of South Aus-

tralia, 1:63,360 series, (Grol, Surv. S. Aust:

Adelaide.)

Cameana, B.. & Witson, B. (1954b).—Jervis map

skeet, Geological Atlas of South Austriilia,

1:63,360 series. (Geol, Surv. S. Aust: Ade-

laide, |

CaMeana. B., Watson, B., & Warrier, A, W. G,

(1955) ——The eeology of the Jervis aud Yan-

kalilla military sheets, Explanation of the geo-

logical maps, Rep, Invest.. Dep. Mines S, Aint.

No. 3.

Coats, KR. P.. & Tomson, B. P. (1959).—Truro

Map sheet, Geological Atlas of South Austra-

lia, 1263.360 series, (Geol. Surv, S. Avst.;

Adelaiite, )

Daier, B. (1956)—The Cambrian in South Aus-

tralia, Jn RJ sistema Cambrico su Paleageo-

erafia Y el problema de su base. Ren, Internat,

geol. Congr. 20th, Mexico, 1956, Vol, 2, 9I-

147.

Dairy, B. (1963)—The fossiliferous Cambrian

succession on Fleurieu Peninsulu, Soulh Aus-

tralia, Ree. §. Ause, Maus, 14 (3), 579-601,

Dawy, B. €1969),—Fossiliferuus Cambrian sedi-

ments and low-grade metamorptics, Fleurieu

Peninsula, South Australia. 7n B. Daily (Ed.}

Geological Excursions Handbook, 49-54.

ANZAAS, Seca Oa 1969,

Dany, B. & Porves. B, G. (1969).—Notes on the

Proterazaic and Cambrian, Southern and Cen-

tral Flinders Ranges, Sourh Australia. fx

RB, Daily (Gd.), Geological Excursions Hand-

book, 23-30, ANZAAS, Section 3, 1969.

Forars, B. G. (1957),— Stratigraphic sucecssion

cast of Grey Spur, South Australia. Trans. R.

Soc. S. Aust. BY, 59-66.

Horwitz. B.C, (1960)—Géologie de la région

We Mi, Compass (feuille Milang), Australic

Meridionale, Eelay. geol, Helv. $3 (1), 211-

TMorwrrz, R, C., & Darcy. B. (1958).—in M. F.

Glaessner & L, W, Parkin (Fds.). The peo-

logy of South Australia, J, geal. Sor, Aust. §

(2), 46-60.

Horwitz, BR. C.. & Thomson, B, P, (1960),—

Milang map shect. Geological Atlas of South

Australia, 1:63.360 series. (Geol. Surv, S.

Aust; Adelaide.)

Horwnaz, R, C..Tuimasun, HB, & Wens, BB.

(1959|.—IJhe Cambrian-Precambrian boun.

dary in the eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges segian:

South Australia, Trons. RK. Soc, § Anat. 82,

205-214.

Kifewan. A. W., & Skinner, Bo J. (1959) —The

Kanmantoo Group in the Strathalhyn-Harri-

Bale region, South Australia. Trane. Ro Sav,

J. lust, #2, 61-71.

Maotoan, C. T. (1925).—The geology of the

Fleurieu Peninsula, Pare 1—The coase from

Scllick’s Hill to Victor Harbour. Tres. R-

Soe. 8. Aust. 44, 198-242.

OrpvrerR, kK, (1963),—Structural geology of the

Strathalbyn Anticline, South Australin, Tras,

R, Sac. 8. Aust, 87, 199-208,

OFFLER, Ri. & FLEMING, P. D. (1968)—A syn-

thesis of folding and metamorphism in the

Mt, Lofty Renges, South Australia. 7, rel,

Sac. Aust 15 (2), 245-266,

Sprig, &. C. (1955)—The Point. Marsden Cum-

brian beds, Kangaron Tsland. South Australia,

Trans, R. Soc. 8, Aart. 78, 165-163,

Sericg, R. C., & Cawpama, B. (1953).---The ngs

und Cacies pF the Kanmantoo Group, Arar

Sel 16 (1), 12-14.

Serica, R.C.. Witte, A, W.G., & Campana, B.

C19St ).— Adelaide map sheet, Goological

Auas of South Australia, 1:62,380 series.

(Geol, Surv. S. Aust. Adelaide.)

Sprisc, R. C.. & Wuson, B. ¢19S84)—Echunga

map sheet, Geological Atlas of Rous Aus-

tralia, 1:63,360 Series (Geol, Surv, S. Aust,:

Adelaide, }

Tomson. B. PL (1943)—Reyional structures,

southern Fleuried Peninsula, Quart. peol.

Notes, Geol, Surv. 5. Aust. No. 6.

THomson, B. PL (1969)—Adelaide map sheet,

Geological Atlas of Sonth Australia. 1:250000

Series. (Geol. Surv. 8. Aust.: Adelaide.)

THomson, B. P. (1969).—The Kanmantoo Group

and Early Palaeozoic. Tectonics.. Jy LW,

Parkin (&d.) “Handhook of South Australian

Geology", 97-108. (Government Printer:

Adelaide. |

THomsen, B. P. 11970}.—A review of the Pre-

eambriqn and Lower Palaeozoic tectonius nf

South Australia. Trans. R, Soc. 8 Aye, 94,

193-221,

THomson, B. P., & Horwirz, RB. C. (L9eby.

Cambrian-Precambrian uncenformity in Sel-

lick Hill-Normanville Area of South Australia.

Aust. J Sei. 24 (1), 40,

THomson, B, PL, & Horwrrz; R. CG. ¢1962).—

Barker mag sheet, Geological Atlas of South

Australia, 1:250,000 <eries. (Geol. Surv. 8,

Aust.: Adelaide}

Winxier, H. G, F. (1970).—Ahantition of metn-

morphic facies, introduction of the four divi-

sions of metamorphic stage, and of a classifi-

cation based on raugr edly in common rocks,

Neues Jb. Miner, Mh, 5, 189-248,

WooLNoucn, W. G. (1908).— Notes on the geo

logy of the Mount Lofty Ranges, chiefly th the

a east of the Onkaparinga River. Tams.

Sac 8, Apest. 32, 121-137.

LOWER CAMBRIAN FOSSILIFEROUS METASEDIMENTS

214 B. DAILY AND A. R. MILNES

DISCOVERY IN THE EVERARD RANGES OF A SPECIES OF

LEPTODACTYLID FROG NEW TO THE FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

BY M. J. TYLER

Summary

Pseudophryne occidentalis (a species of leptodactylid frog formerly known from Western

Australia) is reported from the Everard Ranges in the north-west of South Australia. Morphological

data are provided and the species is compared with P. bibroni and P. douglasi. The Everard Ranges

population bridges a major disjunction in the geographic distribution of Pseudophryne; it is

uncertain whether it constitutes a relict in the path of a Pleistocene pluvial migration, or is the result

of a more recent migration during arid conditions.

DISCOVERY IN THE EVERARD RANGES OF A SPECIES OF LEPTODACTYLID

FROG NEW TO THE FAUNA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

by M. J. Tvirr*

Summary

Psedaphryne occidenralis (a species of leptodactylid Frag formerly known from Western Australia)

is reported from, the Everard Ranges in the north-west of South Australia, Morphological data are

provided and the species is compared with P. bibroni and P. douglasi. The Everard Ranges popula-

Won bridges a major disjunciion in the geographic distribution of Preudophryney it is uncertain whether

i, constitutes a relicL in the path of a Pleistocene plovial migration, or is the result of a more recent

migvation during acid conditions,

Introduction

In November 1970, Dr. E. Matthews of the

Sauth Australian Museum visited the Everard

Ranees in the north-west of South Australia,

and there obtained six frogs that fell into some

cardboard cups which he had sunk in the soil

to tran insects. One of the specimens is New

hetrechus centralis, a leptodactylid species

widely distributed throughout southern and

central Australia and previously known Lo

occur in the Everard Ranges. The remaining

five wie considered to be representatives of the

leptodactylid Psendophryne occidentalis Parker,

previously known only from localities ia the

southern inferior of Western Australis

Here 1 provide duta on the morphology af

the South Australian population of FP. acer

denialis, with evidence in. support of the specific

identification. and discuss the significance of

the presence of the genus and species in this

part of Sovth Avstralia.

Morphology

The serics comprises four adult males with

snout to vent lengths of 23.3-26.1 mm, and

one gravid female (26.5 mm) which have been

allotied the South Australian Museum registra-

tion numbers R.11738-11742, ‘The specimens

differ from the original description of Parker

(1940) only in the colour of the dorsum (dull

slate in preservative instead of dull brown),

and skin texture (dorsally smooth in foul speci-

mens and sparscly and very fincly tubercular

in the fifth; “regularly beset with small warts

above, except on the snout" in the type),

Comparison With Other Species

Two species of Pyendophryie were pre-

viously known to occur in South Australia:

P, semimarmerata Lucas in the lower south-

cast, south of Naracoorte (Woodruffe & Tyler

1968); ynd P. bihroni Gunther, extending from

the northern limit of P. sesimurniorata (with

which it hybridizes) to the Flinders Ranges.

Pyendopliryvne semtirnnirmorata, Po bibrani

and all other Pyeudophryne species occurring

in sOulh-eastern Australia possess oval-shaped,

dermal glands on the distal portion of the pos-

terior surface of the femora, In contrast, the

three specics Of Pseudophryne occurring in

Western Australia (PF, douglasi Main, P. guen-

theri Boulenger and P. oecidentaliy), and the

frogs collected in the Everurd Ranges, lack

such glands.

Main (1964) characterises P. gueatheri by

its comparatively large size (maximum snout to

vent length 30 mim; 26 mm in P, vecidentalts),

single phalanx in inner toc (two in P. oeciden-

talis) and possession of supra-scapular folds

(absent in P, oecidentalis).

Because Main (1964) stated that the dorsum

of P, occidentalis and P. bibroni bears fattened

confluent warts whereas FP. dovglasi does not, I

compared the frogs from the Everard Ranges

with a series. of P. douglasi (Western Austra-

lian Museum R. 10531, 11532, 11534) and

examined the skin texture of these three species,

In specimens from South Australia the dorsum

of P, bibroni varies from completely smooth

to conspicuously warty, with a complete inter-

gradation of textures. A smaller sample of

Western Australian P. occidentalis inctudes

some individuals with sparsely tubercular skin

and others with large confluent warts, whereas

the P, donglasi have anly minute, conical

tubercles more sparsely distributed than in

Main's (1954) illustration of that species. Skin

*South Australian Museum, North Terrace, Adclaide. S. Aust. 5000,

‘Trans, R, Soc, 5. Ast. 95, Part 4, 30 November 1971-

Zhi

lexture is evidently more yanable than has

been acknowledged previously: P. douglayi

differs in this character only in the absence of

the extremely warty condition.

Pserdopliryne douglasi alsa differs from P

vecidentaliy in its habitat. Main (1971) con-

sidered the requirements of the former species

to he “some form of cover associatecl with

shallaw water beneath which adult frogs can

shelter’, and noted that the localities at whieh

this species has. been collected are within the

uupics. This. contrasts with 2. eccidentelix

which dees not enter the trapics but extends

inte areas of low and unreliable rainfall. where

it exists near temporary pools (Main 1965),

Habitat of the South Australian Population

The frogs were collected ut Victory Well

(132°30°E; 27"3'S) at the southern foot of

the Everard Ranges, approximately sixty-five

kilometres west of Everard Park Homestead

(Fis, 1).

The pool beside which the frogs were

trapped was approximately two metres in dia-

meter and 0.3 metres deep. Al the time ot

collection the pool was rapidly drying up. und

the ground surrounding it was devoid of vege-

tution. Duti on rainfall in this portion of

South Australia assembled by the Comman-

wealth Bureau of Metcorology are limited, and

the only data for Everard Park ure for 1948

when 99 mm (3.9 inches) were recorded. At

the Ernubella Mission in the Musgrave Ranges

{00 km to the north of the collection site, rain-

fall records for the period 1935-1968 are:

annual mean 234 mm (9,22 inches}: maximum

424 mm (16.7) inches); minimum 52 mm

(2.06 inches).

Discussion

Littlejohn (1967) lists eight anuran species

(representing six genera} occurring in south-

eastern Australia that form pairs with closely

reluted species in south-western Australia,

separated by a distance of at least 1,600 km.

Pseudopliryne occidentalis is included in this

list and is regarded as the south-western repre-

sentative of the south-eastern species P. brbreni,

The geographic distribution of these two species

is shown in Figure 1.

The postulated mechanism for speciution in

such genera, viz. the multiple invasion through

the intermediate area, requires evidence that of

inore than one occasion a corridor has exmted

with a higher rainfall than at present (Main,

Lee & Littlejohn 195k: Littlejohn 1861; Lee

M. J. TYLER

1967). The site of the corridor is considered

to lie south of the Nullybor Plain, perhaps

heeause such a traverse would minimise the

distunce travelled by the migrating populations

The migrations ate believed to huve occurred

in the Pleistocene pluvial pertads.

The discovery of P.. occidentalis in the

Lveraid Ranges extends the known geographic

range of this species eastwards by 880 km, and

is Of importance for three reasons, Firstly, it

represents the most easterly penetration of any

of the south-western species: secondly, it

largely bridges the 1,600 km gup between the

south-western and south-eastern mentbers of

the genus; and thirdly. it lies far to the north of

the postulated corridor.

At present it is unknown wiicther the Ever-

ard Range population represents an isolate (i.e.

uw portion of a formerly more widespread

population now restricted by increasing avidity

tow small suitable habitar), ar the most eastern

limit of the noW continuous distribution of a

species which may have invaded the area dur-

ing climatic conditions comparable to the pre-

sent.

Each hypothesis and cxplanation seems

plausible, because P. occidentalis is particularly

well adapted to desert conditions and is the

only Species occurrinu in the desert environ-

ment that Jays eggs out of water (Main, Litthe-

john & Lee 1959: Main 1968). The ecological

versatility of this species reported’ hy Minin

(1959) might have enabled it to penetrate cast

during conditions inhospitable to the migration

of other south-western species.

The initial entey of Psendopliryne into

Western Australia necd not have been via the

route utilised by species dependent pon

moister conditions, and not necessarily contem-

porary with the migration of such species.

PB 6ctidentakis

Distribution of Pseadaphryne uccvidentalix

and P. bihreni, Distribution of P, ecel-

dentatis provided by Dr. G Storr; P,

hibront Uistribution derived From speci-

mens in S.A. Museum and published data

of Moore (1961) and Littlejohn (1967),

EVERARD RANGES LEPTODACTYLID FROG

More intensive collecting in the north-west of

South Australia would clarify the matter.

Acknowledgements

I am indebted to Dr. Glen Storr (Western

Australian Museum) for the loan of specimens

217

of Pseudophryne dougilasi and for data on the

distribution of P. occidentalis.

Rainfall data were provided by the Com-

monwealth Bureau of Meteorology, Dr. W. G-

Inglis (South Australian Museum) and Dr.

Storr constructively criticised the manuscript,

References

A. K. (1967)—Studies in Australian

Amphibia. TI Taxonomy, Ecology, and Evolu-

tion of the Genus Heletoporus Gray (Anura:

Leptodactylidae). Aust, J. Zool, 15, 367-439,

LittLesonun, M, J. (1961)—Age and origin of

some south-western Australian species of

Crinia (Anura; Leptodactylidae). In W. F,

Blair (Ed.), “Vertebrate Speciation”, pp. 514-

536. (University of Texas Press: Austin.)

LitLesoun, M. J. (1967).—Patterns of zoogeo-

graphy and speciation in south-eastern Austra-

lian amphibia. Jn A, H. Weatherly (Ed.),

“Austritlian Inland Waters and Their Fauna:

Eleven Studies”. pp. 159-174. (Australian

National University Press: Canberra.)

Main, A. R. (1959).—Comparison of breeding

biology and isolating mechanisms in Western

Australian frogs. Jn “The Evolution of Living

Organisms”, pp. 370-379. (Roy. Soc. Vic.:

Melbourne. )

Main. A. R, (1964).—A new species of Pseude-

phryne (Anura: Leptodactylidae) from North-

Western Australia. W. Aust. Nat. 9, 66-72.

LEE,

Main, A. R. (1965 ).—“Frogs of Southern Western

Australia.” (Handbook No, 8, W. Aust. Nato-

ralists’ Club: Perth.)

Main, A, R. (1968).—Ecology, systematics und

evolution of Australian frogs. Jn J. B, Cragg

(Ed.), “Advances in Ecological Research”,

Vol. 5, pp. 37-86. (Academic Press: London.)

Main, A. R., Les, A, K., & Litrtegoun, M. J.

(1958).—Evolution in three genera of Aus-

tralian frogs. Evolution 12, 224-233.

Main, A. R., Litttegonun, M. J., & Lee, A. K.

(1959). —Ecology of Australian frogs. Jn A,

Keast, R. L. Crocker and C. S. Christian

(Eds.), “Biogeography and Ecology in Aus-

tralia”, pp. 396-411. (W. Junk: The Hague.)

Moore, J. A. (1961).—The frogs of eastern New

South Wales. Bull. Amer. Mus, Nat, Hist. 121

(3), 149-386.

Parker, H. W. (1940).—The Australasian frogs

of the family Leptodactylidae. Novit. Zool.

42, 1-106.

WooprvuF FE, D, S., & Tyrer, M. J, (1968) —Addi-

tions to the frog fauna of Sonth Australia.

Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 15 (4), 705-709.

STRATIGRAPHIC SUBDIVISION OF THE POUND QUARTZITE (LATE

PRECAMBRIAN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA)

BY B. G. FORBES

Summary

The Bonney Sandstone Member and Rawnsley Quartzite Member of the Upper Proterozoic Pound

Quartzite are defined and described in a section measured in Bunyeroo Gorge about 380 km north

of Adelaide, South Australia.

The Bonney Sandstone Member, previously known as the lower red member of the Pound

Quartzite, is composed of reddish sandstone and siltstone, and is 305 m thick in the type section.

The overlying Rawnsley Quartzite Member is composed predominantly of white sandstones,

contains in its lower part the Ediacara fauna and is about 508 m thick. Both Members display a

variety of sedimentary structures suggestive of shallow water conditions. To the north of the type

section the members are readily identified in Brachina Gorge but not so readily in Parachilna Gorge.

STRATIGRAPHIC SUBDIVISION OF THE POUND QUARTZITE

(LATE PRECAMBRIAN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA)

by B. G. Forspes*

Summary

The Bonney Sandstone Member and Rawnsley Quartzite Member of the Upper Proterozoic Pound

Quartzite are defined and described in a section measured in Bunyeroo Gorge about 380 km north of

Adelaide, South Australta,

The Bonney Sandstone Member, previously known as the lower red member of the Pound

Quatizite, is composed of reddish sundstone and siltstone, and is 305 m thick in the type section.

The overlying Rawnsley Quartzite Member is composed predominantly of white sandstones, contains

in its lower part the Ediacara fauna and is abovl 508 m. thick.

selimentary structures suggestive of shallow Water conditions.

Both Members display a yanety of

To the north of the type section the

members are readily identified in Braching Gorge but not so readily in Parachilna Gorge.

Introduction

The purpose of this paper is to name and

define the already known lower reddish and

upper white members of the Upper Protero-

7oic Pound Quartzite, South Australia. This

is largely at the suggestion of Wade (1970) who

has described the fosstl fauna of the upper

member and incidentally given much infornya-

tion on the lithology and distribution of the

Pound Quartzite.

The term “Pound Quartzite” appears to have

heen used first hy Mawson (1938, p. 255) who

described a section just north of Parachilna

Garge. This section may thus be accepted as

the type section of the Pound Quartzite, and

Dalgarno & Johnson (1966) have shown. its

approximate position (approximate because

Mawson did not show the section line on a

map) on the PARACHILNA 1:250,000 geo

fogicu!l map. On this map the upper and lower

members of the Pound Quartzite have heen

shown between Hawker and Parachilna: this is

substantially in agreement with the subdivision

proposed here and that which Mawson (1941)

desetthed. Mawson recognised ihe two mem-

bers at Wilbena Pound in a section near St.

Mary Peak.

Other authors who have more recently des-

cribed the Pound Quartzite and commented on

previous work are Goldring & Curnow (1967,

upper member at Ediacara) and Leesan (1970,

Beltana area), Dalgarno & Johnson (in Thom-

son et al. 1964) discuss the Pound Quartzite

in its setting in the Wilpena Group.

Stratigraphy

General

In order te arrive ata useful subdivision of

the Pound Quartzite a section was measured

with tape and compass in Bunyeroo Gorge,

about 58 km north of Hawker, or 380 km

north of Adelaide (see Fig, 1) and sections

examined further north in Brachina and Para-

chilna Gorges.

The Pound Quartzite in Parachilna Gorge is

uncharacteristic because of the extensive occur-

rence of reddish beds in the upper member. A

more significant discrimination of the two

members of the Pound Quartzite can be made

in Bunyeroo Gorge in which, therefore, their

type sections Were measured. They are des-

ctibed in detail in the Appendix with a less

detailed description of the Pound Quuartzite

type section near Parachilna Gorge,

Since no previous workers have placed any

limestones in the Pound Quartzite, the base

of the Pound has been chosen aboye the lime-

siones of the gradational interval between the

typical Wonoka Formation and the overlying

Pound.

Bonney Sandstone Member af the Pound

Quartzite

The Bonney Sandstone Member is named

after Point Bonney on the castern edge of

Wilpena Pound. ‘The type section of the Mem-

ber is Bunyeroo Gorge, approximate lat.

31°25’S and long. 1387°33’E. “he Member is

characterised by reddish sandstones, siltstone

* Geological Survey of South Australia, 169 Rundle Street, Adelaide, South Australia, 5000. Pub-

lished with the permission of the Director of Mines-

Trans R. Sov. Aust. 95, Part 4, 30 November, 1971.

220 8B, G, FORBES

LOCALITY

Leigh Creek

feel

| 4

-—Parachilno a

See

Inset B

a79-} ae

Pt. Augusta

< j\

Scale

500 1000 KILOMETRES

Scale in metres

Oo soo

LEGEND

Section examined _ _—§ > _ Bonney Sandstane Member

Unit number -_~ ~~ Wonoka Farmatian

Raverislt’y- Ghudt reife Members ee lh After Dalgarno ond Johnson 1966

71—475 Del.c RS. BG Forbes Seiiat Gee log ist SA_ Dept. of Mines

Fig. 1. A; Location of type section of Members of Pound Quartzité in Bunyeroo Gorge.

B; Section in Pound Quartzite north of Parachilaa Gorge, Geology after Dalgarno & Johnson

1966-

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE POUND QUARTZITE 211

and quartzite, fagey to medium bedded, which

overly flaggy limestone and siltstone of the

Wanoka Formation and underly the harder,

more quartzitic white upper member of the

Pound Quartzite. The Member is about 305 m

thick and dips about 55 degrees north-westerly.

Harder sandstone or quartzite beds form pro-

minent strike ridges: see Fig. 2.

The basal bed is reddish. micaceous silty

sandstone which overlies a calcitic greyish or

olive sandsione-siltstone sequence (Wonoka

POUND QUARTZITE

North of Parachilna Gorge

Ubat Teac Colour

Bunyeroo Gorge

Unit fii, Colour

Scale in Metres

Rowneley

Quortzite

Meriber

Bonney

Sendsione

Member

LEGEND

Brawnish

Grey

Fale pinkish

Reddish

While cr very pole arey

Yallow—agreen

Siltstone on shole

Sandstone

tit) Quarinite or

harder sondstane

thferred lower

fossiliferous beds

8.G.Fatkey Sania Genlogist St piney

Stratigraphic columns for the Pound

Quartzite in Bunyeroo Gorge and north

of Parachilna Gorge.

Formation) on limestone. The uppermost beds

arc pale reddish medium- und coarse-graineil

sunilstones.

Rawnsley Quarizite Member of the Pound

Ouyarizite

The Rawnsley Quartzite Member is named

alter Rawnsley Bluff, the south-eastern rampart

of Wilpena Pound. The type section locality

iy as for the underlying Bonney Sandstone

Member. Characteristic rocks are white or

very light grey quartzite and sandstone; these

form more prominent ridges than the under-

lying reddish sandstones of the lower member

and the overlying softer white sandstone of the

Cambrian Parachilna Formation, The Mem-

ber is about 508 m thick.

The base of the Member is distinguished

mainly by colour—white, as against the pre-

dominant red of the Bonney Sandstone. About

69 m above the base, succeeding sandstone and

quartzite beds, are flagstones, the lowest fossili-

ferous bed 3 of Wade (1970, Fig. 4B), ‘This is

overlain by reddish sandstone and siltstone,

then a thick sequence of sandstone and quartz-

ite, the lowermost beds of which are fossili-

ferous while the higher heds form a prominent

ridge. No fossils were found by the writer

during measurement of the section, but Wade

(1970, Table 1) lists indeterminate medusoids,

Ediacaria flindersi Sprigg, a1 new species of

medusoid and 4 trace fossil, form B of Glaess-

ner (1969).

Recognition Elsewhere

The red and white members of the Pound

Quartzite have been recognized widely in the

COPLEY and PARACHILNA 1:250,000 map

ureas and in the north-west and eastern part of

the ORROROO 1,250,000 map area, but a

precise choice of boundary between the Mem-

bers defined here is not always easy.

In Brachina Gorge, south side, pale reddish

flaggy sandstone of the Bonney Sundstone

Member is overlain by 2.2 m of white sand-

stone, then a thick sequence of hard, more

Prominent white quartzite. Since fhe colour

boundary here between red and white sand-

slones is irregular the base of the Rawnslcy

Quartzite Member iy best placed at the base of

the prominent quartzite.

in Parachilna Gorge and the section exa-

mined just north of there, cheice of boundary

is guided by position of the lowest fossiliferous

heds and by lithologic correlation of pale red-

dish sandstones of unit 5, Parachilna Gorge,

with unit 15, Bunyeroo Gorge, The Rawnsley

Quarizite Member contains many more soft

sandstones and red beds in the Parachilna

Gorge than in Bunyeroo Gorge.

Environment

Sedimentary structures in the Pound Quarte-

ite have heen noted in the Appendix (Buo-

yeroo Gorge Section) and include tabular and

trough. cross-beds, micro-cress-lamination, part-

ing lineation, ripple marks, mud cracks, prints

resembling fain prints, clay flakes, wavy bed-

ding, fiaser bedding (resembling lenticular

deposits in tipple troughs) and slump struc-

tures,

Prints Jike rain prints have only been found

un loose flagstones and their orientation is yet

to be established, If correctly identified, they

indicate subacrial exposure of muds, Mud

cracks may also develop under these condi-

tions, but none were seen at the level of the

prints. Shrinkage of clay can occur under

witer, as indicated by White (1961; noted hy

Goldring & Curnow 1967, p. 207). Mlaser

bedding may originate in a tidal Mat environ-

ment (Reineck & Wunderlich 1968), Troughs

we commonly a few centimetres deep, bul une

of 30 em depth was noted. Shallow marine. to

possibly tidal flat, conditions are thus indicated.

Current trends shown by ripple marks and

cross-bedding vary widely, In the Bonney

Sandstone Member there is a slight predomin-

ance of transport to the north-east while in the

Rawnsley Quartzite Member it is to the south-

east. Ripple marks tend to trend both narth-

easterly and south-easterly in each Member.

Not much significance can be attached to these

results because of the few observations made,

Acknowledgements

T am grateful to Dr. Mary Wade for her

helpful suggestions duritig preparation of this

text. The figures were produced by the Draft-

ing Branch, Departenent of Mines.

References

Dancarvo, C. R., & ToHNson, J. 5. (1966).—

PARACHILNA map shect, Geological Atlas

of South Australia, 1:250,000 sertes. (Geol,

Surv. S, Auste: Adelaide.)

Datcamno, C. R., JoHnson, J, BE, & Corrs, R, P,

(1964) —BLINMAN map sheet. Geological

Aullas of South Australia, 1:69,360 series

(Geol. Sury. S. Aust.: Adeluide. }

b. G. FORBES

GLABSSNER, M, F. (1969).—race fossils trom the

Precambrian and basal Cambrian. Lethaia 2

(4), 369-393,

GoLpeine, R, & Curnow, C. N. (1967)—The

stratigraphy and facies of lhe lale Precum-

brian at Fdiacara, Sonth Australia, J, geal

Soc. Aust. 14, 195-2).

Lesson, B, (1970)—Geology of the Beltana

1:63.360 map area. Rep, Iavest. geol. Surv.

& Aust. 35, 1-92,

MANDELBAUM, H.. & Sanvorn, J.T. (1982).

Table for computing thickness of strata mea-

sured {ma traverse or encountered in a bore-

hole. Bull. Geol. See. Am, 63, 765-778,

Mawson, BD. (1938).—Cambrian and sub-Cum-

brian Cormations at Parachilna Gorge. Trans,

R. Soe, S. lest, 62, 255-262.

Mawson, D. (/941),—The Wilpena Pound For-

mation aud underlying Proterozoic sedinients.

Trans, R. Soe. 5. Aust. 65, 259-300.

Reiweck, H. L., & Wunpekiicn, F. (L968).

Classification und origin of faser and lenticu-

lar bedding, Sedimeniology 11, 99-104.

son, J. FB. (1964),—Precambrian rock eroups

in the Adelaide Geosynelines a new stbsdivi-

sion. Quart. geol. Notes geal. Surv. §, Atvst. %

Waor, Mary (1970).—The siratizraphic distribu-

tion of the Hdiacara, fanna in Australia

Trans, R. Soe.8, Alsi. 94, 87-104,

Waive, W. A, (1961)—Colloid phenomena in

sedimentation of argillaceous rocks. J. Seui-

ment, Petrol, 1. 560-570.

Appenslix

In the doscriptions below, quartzite refers to

hard, prominently outeropping sandstones

which may not all be quartzite in the strict

sénse, cross-beds refers to tabular crass-beds

and the accompanying dimensions are the

Maximum thickness. of the unit; ripple mark

Jength is wave length or distance between adja-

cent ridges; beds refers to distance between

joints which are parallel to bedding.

A. The Pound Quarrzite in Bunyeroe George.

The section was measured hy 100 feet tape

and compass and thicknesses of beds calculated

with the aid of tables hy Mandetbaum & San-

ford (1952), It is underlain by the upper part

of the Wonoka Formation which contains ved

beds very similar to the lower member of the

Pound Quartzite. Colours have been des-

tribed with reference to the Rock Colour Chart

of the Geological Society of America.

UUrrit

“

% Sundstone,

SLURATIGRAPHY OF THE POUND QUARTZITE

Thirkness

Notes

Bonnvy SANDSTONE Mrpmare

Sandstone, slightly micaceous, silty, pale

reddish, fing (o medium-grained, well

laminated, 2-4 tm cross-beds, lenticular

bedding, wavy ‘bedding, small scale

slump structures, ripple marks with 2-5

em length and restored trends ‘030°,

OSS°, mud cracks, 5 mm-1 cm clay

flakes, beds 2-30 cm: slighi ridge.

Quartzite, pale reddish, weathering pale

brownish grey, fine to. medium-grained,

laminated, ripple marks with 2-4 cm

leneth and restored trends 20°, 045°,

100°, 3 cm cross-beds, mud cracks, 1 cm

clay flakes, beds 3-12 cm; valley edge,

Qnartzite, finely micaceous in darker

laminae. pale brownish to yellowish

grey. pale brownish weathering, fine to

medlum-grained, laminated, wavy and

lenticular bedding, sniall-scale Slump

strugtures, beds 5 mm to & om; valley

edge.

4 Sandstone, siltstone, finely micaceous in

purt, pale greenish prey. moderate red

to greyish red, weathering greenish and

reddish, fine to medium-grained, lanv-

nated, ripple marks 7-10 cm length and

restored trend 085°, mud cracks, crose-

hedding, minor | ¢m sandy lenses. clay

pellets up to 6 cm, beds 3 mm-5 co};

valley and slope.

Sandslone, moderate reddish, weathenne

dark reddish and pale brownish, fine ja

medium-graincd, laminated, parting

lineation with restored trend 170°,

micro-cross-lamination, transport ap-

proximately NI and ?NW, heds 1-22

em! ridge.

Partly covered interval, flaggy reddish

siltstone and quartzite similar to (4);

valley.

Sandstone, slightly micaceous, felds-

pathic, moderate red and pale to greyish

red bleached in patches to pale orange.

weathering pale brownish and reddish,

medinum-grained, laminated, cross-heds

122 cm, 10 em and 50 cm (trough),

T em mud flakes; irregular to rounded!

+ cm concretionary nodules stand owt

on weuthered surface: beds 5-70 cm:

ridge.

feldspathic, micacéows,

minor shaly sandstone, siltstone, reddish

colour, similar to (7). medium-grained,

laminated, 10 em _ cross-bed, micro-

cross-lamination, trough cross-bed 30

em by 3 m in section, nodtiles 1-2 cm,

beds up to 65 om; ridge and slope,

HOCires)

0.7

Vrvit

Thickness

Notes

Sandstone. micaceous, feldspathic, silty,

moderate red to greyish red, wealhering

light and dark reddish, fine ta medium.

grained, laminated. 4 cm _ cross-beds,

1-2 em ripple marks wilh restored trend

160°, beds 5 mm—20 em; poor outcrop

in upper part.

Sandstone, feldspathic, micaccous, pale

jo moderate reddish. weathering reddish

brown, grey, medium-grained, lami-

nuted, cross-beds 2 cm to 1 m, trough

eross-beds 1-30 em, beds 2 cm ta 1m;

ridge-forming, hul poorly outcropping.

Siltstone and flaggy sandstone, inter-

bedded, medium reddish, fine to

medium-grained, laminated, 3 cm trough

cross-beds, 5 imm—9 cm beds,

Sandstone, feldspathic, pale seddislr,

medium-egrained, laminated, 60 cm

cross-bed, beds 6 ¢m-

Siltstone and sandstone. similar to (17);

poor outcrop.

Quartzite and sundstone, pale redchsh

and reddish, weathering pale reddish to

dark grey, imedium-grained, #0 cin

eross-bed, transport to ?RNE, ripple

marks with restored trend 150°, beds

3-450 em; slight ridge.

Sandstone, ¢alcitic in part, ?feldspathic,

very pale and darker reddish colour

banding, in places moderate with white

patches and veins, medium-grained with

coarse-grained lenses, laminated, wavy

bedding, slump structures, apparent

transport to SW, ENE and NE; 6-20

em cross-beds and trough cross-beds,

somewhat massive and smooth-weather-

ing; cave formation and pitting: U.3 m

mediun-grained quartzite Jens aboul

1.8 im below top.

Total thickness of Bonney Sandstone

Member, umts I«15; 305 im.

RAWNSLEY QUARTZITE MEMBER

Sandstone, slightly clayey, slightly cal-

citic in parti, white, yellowish grey,

minor pale pink layers, weathering pale

brownish, medium and coarse-grained,

laminated, 6-20 em cross-heds with

lransport NE and ?SE, one restored

iransport direction 130°, wavy bedding,

flaser bedding, ripple marks with 3-4

em length und restored trends of 020°

and 030°, heds 5 cm-! m, pitting and

honeycomb weathering

Sandstone and quartzite, clayey, white,

Weathering greyish-orange, very pale

(metread

224

Uni

Watts

Orange, coarse and meditumn-grained.

Jaminated, 5 cm ccross-bed with trans-

port *NE, 35 em trough crogs-bed, minor

layers of rounded 3. mm quartz grains:

hancycomb weathering, more blocky

and prominent outcrop than (16), thick-

ness uncertain hecuuse of faulting.

(74 (Considered ta be eyuivulent to 17

and apparently not faulted. south side

of Bunyeroo Gorge). Sandstone and

quartzite, chiyey, slightly calcitic in

part. white. very pale brownish, very

pale pinkish coarse and medium-grained,

laminated, 25 wod 35 cm cross-beds

with transport south-easterly. wavy bed-

ding, penecontemporaneona faults, beds

1-60 cm: weathering pits wand honey-

comb weathering, cidge-forming.

Sandstone (flagstone). pale grey, pale

reddish, weathering pale ofange ar yel-

Jowish grey, fine-grained, well-lami-

nated, bedding slightly lenticular in

places, slight cross-heds or troughs

I? om, rare circular rain prints,

flaggy, beds 4-12 em; outcrop on valley

side east of prominent ridge, north-

Ward extension of fossiliferous hed 3

(Wade 1970).

Sandstone, silly sandstone, siltstone,

moderate reddish. pale fo greyish red,

fine-grained, well laminated, bedding

partly wavy and lenticular, 4 cm trough

cross-bed, beds 2 mm—13 cm averaging

1-2 cm, valley side, northward exten-

sion of fossiliferous bed 3 (Wade 1970).

Quartzite with minor reddish coarse-

grained sandstone, clayey. white, wea-

thering pale brawnish or greyish oange,

medium and coarse-grained, laminated,

hedeing slightly lenticnlar or wedge-

Hike, 6-25 cm cross-beds with transport

SE, SSF, raised circular ?coneretionary

stractures, mud cracks, ripple murks

with length 24, 10 em, one ripple trend

O50*, current ripples. indicate iransport

290", 330°. reddish sandstone 16-60

cm troughs irend 020-030", 1-3 em

pile greenish grey shale pellets, 1-4 cm

rounded white concretionary patches,

beds 2-80 cm; minor honeycomb wea-

thering, ridge-former: the base is fossilj-

ferous bed f (Wade 1970),

Quartzite, clayey, slightly calcareons,

white, pale hrownish weathering,

meditim-grained, 24 ent clay pellet euvi-

tics, 10 cm cross-hed, tranyport to SE.

beds 3 em-Z m! Weathering pits. outcrop

nol as prominent or blocky as ¢20}.

&, G. FORBES

Thickness

(metres)

145

Thlekiess

Unit Nunes (metres)

22 Quartzite, slightly clayey und slightly

culcitic in part, white, very hight grey.

weathering pale brownish, medium and

coarse-grained, laminated, 4-40 em

cross-beds, transporr ta SW, SE, BSE,

13-17 em {rough cross-heds, clay pellet

cavities up to 6 om, beds 3-95 om:

ridge-forming.. upper part covered by

calluvium, Is

Quartiziie, slightly clayey, white lo very

light grey, weathering reedish brown,

pale brownish, generally = medium-

grained, some coarse-grained layers,

laminated, 12-40 cm cross-heds, with

Irinsporl approximatcly 7S, SE, W,

ENE. 9-15 cm trough cress-beds, ripple

marks with length 1-4 em and restored

trends. approximately 010°, 045°, 120°,

145°, 180", interferenge ripple murks,

{2 cm clay pellet cavities, L cm white

rounded concretions in upper part, good

4-25 cm Jayering in upper part, beds

13-85 coi; ridge forming—harder than

the overlying white sandstones of the

Parachilna Formation, 91

Rawnsley Quarlzile Member, units |4-

23:

Total thickness, 508 m.,

Total thickness of Pound Quartzile: Ris

B. The Pownrd Quarizite in a type section nearih

of Porachilna Gorge.

(Position as on Blinman 1:63,360 geological

map, Dalgarno, Johnson & Coats 1964). The

Pound Quurtzite tn the wrea examined is under-

lnin immediately (under unit 1) hy a thin

limestone, then flugey reddish sandstone «and

siltstone and further thicker fimestone heds of"

the Wonoka Formation, The Pound Quartzite

is Overluin by softer, coarse-grained. clayey

sundstone of the Patachilna Formation. Thick-

nesscs are approximate and have been mea-

sured from an air photo (Blinman run 2, 952),

scale approximately 1:50,000),

Tiichiess

Unir Notes (merren)

BoNNEY Sanpsvonn Mrmnr

} Sandstone and siltstone, slightly mics-

ceous, reddish, laminated, laggy; poorly

exposed on easi-facing slope. 3%

Sandstone and quartzite, slightly clayey.

paler reddish and more prominently

outcropping than (1), medium-graines,

laminated, flagey to medium-bedded,

cross-bedding, clay pellet cavities:

upper, steep, east-facing, slope, 33

Unit

STRATIGRAPHY OF THE POUND QUARTZITE

Thickness

Notes

Sandstone, brownish-grey, and reddish,

flaggy, clay pellet cavities; eastern side

of ridge top.

Quartzite (and poorly outcropping sand-

stone), slightly clayey, pale reddish,

medium-grained, laminated, medium-

bedded, clay pellet cavities, ripple

marks, 2 cm brown spots, 1-2 cm white

concretionary spots; ridge crest and

upper western slope.

Sandstone, softer, pale pinkish, medium

and coarse-grained, laminated, partly

flaggy, cross-bedding, smooth and mas-

sive outcrop in valley.

Total thickness of Bonney Sandstone

Member: 217 m,

RAWNSLEY QUARTZITE MEMBER

Sandstone, similar to and grading into

(5) but with harder white rippled or

wavy bedded sandstone layers 4-1 cm

thick, becoming whiter in upper part,

(metres)

Unit

2325

Thickness

Notes

honeycomb weathering; forms an east-

facing cliff.

Quartzite, slightly clayey. white or pale

pinkish, medium-grained, laminated,

medium-bedded to flaggy, with minor

Teddish, flaggy siltstone and sandstone.

clay pellet cavities, ridge-former.

Sandstone and quartzite, clayey, white,

very pale grey or pale pinkish, fine to

coarse-grained, laminated, flaggy, cross-

bedding, ripple marks; minor thin, pale

yellow green siltstone layers in lower

part, generally softer than adjacent units

and resembling (5); honeycomb wea-

thering.

Quartzite, partly clayey, white or very

pale grey, medium and coarse-grained,

laminated, medium-bedded, cross-bed-

ding: ridge former.

Total thickness of Rawnsley Quartzite

Member: 363 m.

Total thickness of Pound Quarizite:

(metres)

238

580

NINE NEW SPECIES OF SOLANUM FROM AUSTRALIA

BY D. E. SYMON

Summary

The descriptions and illustrations of nine new species of Solanum are given.

NINE NEW SPECIES OF SOLANUM FROM AUSTRALIA

by D. E. Syaron*

Summury

The descriptions and ustrafions of nine new species of Solanum are given.

Introduction

Several recent collecting trips, especially Jn

north-western Australia, have added consider-

ably to the material available of Solanum and

io an understanding of the genus in Australia,

The area is proving to be most interesting in

the disiribution of some sections of the genus.

All the collections known to date of the andro-

dioecious species are concentrated in this area,

and although more widespread, species belong

lo Section Melongena Nees. are found mainly

in the north-western parts of Australia. The

infrageneric classification of the genus as a

whole is still quite inadequate, partly due ro

the lack of any recent comprehensive mono-

graph and the very uneven state of knowledge

of the genus, The tuber-hearing Section

Poetaoe Walp. is relatively well known and has

had imtensive taxonomic attention, whereas

there are still many undescribed species in Aus-

tralia and South America in the Sections with

stellate hairs.

In the followmg descriptions the standard

abbreviations for herbaria have been used,

Solanum cleistogamum Symon sp, nev.

Herby usque 60 em alta, efftsa, perennis et

fortasse colonialis vel nonnunquam annuus; cauli-

bus pro ratione tenulbus, Partes omnes pilisx stel-

Tatis dermsis approximatis minutis pubescentes,

adspeclu géenerali eriseo-viridi plus minusve clis-

color. Spinae usque & mm longae, tenues, rectae

er pallidae, in caule, petiolo et calyce copiosue, in

pedunculo, pedicello, paginis superioribus et

inferioribus pauciores. vel absentes. Folia 3-8 x

2-3 ocm. ambitu ovata wsque ovato-lanceolata,

margine integro. vel repando cum lobis indistincte

evolutis, sin et apice loborum lato et rotiindato,

upive folli ucutato, bast truncata usqnue subcordata,

plerumaque inaequali.

Inflerescentia cymosa 1—4 flora, fiore basali

sacpe sessili (sed pedicellato) et pedunculo (flos

basalls nullus) vel rhachis floralis 1-4 cm, floribus

pauci apicem versus fasciculatis ¢ pedicellus.¢. 1

em, tubus calycis 2~3 mm spinosus; lohi calycis

2-3 mm, lineares. espinosi: corolla c. 1 cm diam.,

pullide caesia pleromque clausa rémaneny vel se

tarde apertens: filamenta 15-2 mim, incurva;

antherae 2.5-3 mm; oVarium | mm diam,, glab-

rum: stylus 5 mm. pallidus; stigma viride. Pedun-

eulas fructifer 25-4 cm, pedicellus 22.5 em,

elongatus e1 plerumque valde deflexus, calyx

atictus et basem Fructus tegens, Racca mature ¢,

| em dium.. globosa, initia pallide viridis, succu-

lenta =matura trunsluvida vel purpureo suffusa,

Semina 2.5-3 mm, pallida, minute reticulata.

Typuy: D. B, Symon 5418. iii 1967,

about 32 km north of Onslow, Western Aus-

tralia. Common in small depressions an

Triedia sand plain, Annual ar short lived

shrub, sprawling habit. possibly cleisto-

gamous. {PERTH (holotypus), ADW,

CANB, K. L).

FIG. 1

A sprawling herb to 60 cm long, an herba-

ceous perennial and posstbly colonial or some-

times afinual, stems relatively slender, All

parts pubescent with close, dense, minute stel-

late hairs, general aspect grey-green, slightly

Uiscolorous. Spines to 8 mm, slender. straight,

pale, common on the stem, petiole, calyx, less

common or absent on peduncle. pedicel snd

upper and lower leaf surface. Leavey 3-8 x

2.5 cm, ovate to ovate-lanceolate jn outline,

entire of repand with a number of shalinw,

weakly developed lobes. the sinus and tobe

upex broud and rounded, leaf apex acute, base

(tuncate to subcordate, usually yery unequal,

Inflarescenee a \—4 flowered cyme, the basal

flower often adjacent to the stem and the ped-

uncle (if no basal Mower) or floral rhachis I—4

om, the few flowers clustered towards the end.

Pedicel c. 1 cm) calyx tube 2-3 mm, spiny;

calyx lobes 2-3 mm, linear, spineless; corolle

¢, | em diam., rotate. pule lavender, frequently

remaining unopened or opening tardily; fila-

menis 1.5—2 mm, ineurved: anthers 2?.5-3 mm;

ovary | mm diam. glabrous; style 5 mm, pale,

xligma green, at or below the level of the

anther pores, Fruiting pedunele 15-4 em,

* Waite Agricultural Research Institute. Glen Osmond, South Australis. 5N64-

Traits, R, Soc, S, Aust, 95, Part 4, 30 November 1971.

Tag

pedicel 2-2.5 cm. Jengthened and usually mar-

hedly deflexed. calyx enlarged to cover the base

of the fruit, Mature ferry co 1 em diam.,

glubose. finally pale yellow-green, or slightly

Hushe with purple, succulent and slightly

translucent, very aromatic and readily shed

without the pedicel. Seedy 2.5-3 mm, pale.

minutely reticulate; seventeen fruits fron

plants in cultivation, from Symon 3418 had

(27-) 40 (-54) seeds per fron. Chromo-

son number, mn = 12 (Symon S418) counted

by Barbara Randell.

Chis species bas been confused with §. ellip-

went R. Br sensu lato and §. berridue Dun.

it differs from the former in having smaller

(abour | cm instead of 2-3 em diam.), paler,

frequently cleistogumous fiowers, smaller

(about | em instead of 1,5-2 em diam.),

deciduous and satomatic fruit and smaller,

weakly lobed, leaves. Fram the latter it differs

in huving smaller flowers (about 1 cm instead

ol 1.5-2.¢m diam.), more slender stems, longer

and more slender peduncles (about 25-4 em

instead af 1-2 cm} and smaller truit (about

| em instead of 2.cm diam.) of different tex-

ture. Factors controlling the openmyg of the

(Inwers are not known. Plants were collected

in the field in which no open flawers could be

found. Plants grown from seed fram these

were substantially cleistogyrmous but did it

limes produce flowers which opened, Herba-

cium collections show that plants do al limes

prodice open flowers in the field.

The species is widely spread across the drier

areas oF northern Australia, and like S. lueent

F. Muell, mav be found in two contrasting ece-

Jogical sites, either in well drained sites in

rocky outcrops, or in slight depressions and

apparently moister areas in Triedia sand plains

as well as being found in sore mallee wood-

lunds. A representative collection from W.

Australia is Syanon 5448, 4.vi.1967, 115 km

nerth of Geraldton, from “Mallee woodjand.

with fairly dense Cassia und Acacia shrubs on

a stony rise". disinbuied to AD, ADW. MEI}.

PERTH; and lor the Northern Territory,

Chippendale, 31.vii.1958, Curlew Waterhole,

Lander River, 113 km north-west of Willowra

1S—"'‘l.ow spreadng perennial, corolla pale

purple, infrequent in Mouded soil near waler-

hole”, distributed to ADW, CANB. NT, NSW.

The specific epithet is derived From the fre-

quently cleistogamous habit of the species.

Solanum ebyrmeum Symon sp. nov.

Herba vel sulfrutes effusns, colonialis, perennis,

isque 50 cm ullus, caulibus had div persistentibus

Db. E, SYMON

vel basi lignosts, Ommncs paties dense pubescenics,

pilis slellalis nonnunguam Taxis et pallidis

adspectit generpli grisea-vinid) JeViter discoluri

Sinae usque 5 mim longue, in coulihus peédicellis

fructiferis et calyce copiosae vel cispersae. in

petiolis, paginis Foliorum superioribuy et inferiori-

bus puuciores. Folia 25-6 x 1-4 om, fortha

modice yariabilia, ambitu ovata vel elliplica, sed

cium Jobis S+7 profundis vel brevioribus, sinubus

inferioribus tisqne ad tres partes costam versus

utingemlibus, celeris breviuribus, sinubus

plerumgue rotundatis, lohis ablongis vel rownds-

1 apice rotundito vel aculo, basi inacquali trun-

cala usque cuneata; interdum foliola fere Innceo-

fata adsunt,

minusve peduneilato infra cyina flocum mascu-

lorum sistens. Flos hermaphrodijus: pedunculos

communis (-! cm, pedicellus c, | cm spinosus.

tubus calycis 2.3 mm spinosus, lobi 5 mm trian-

gulares, acumina flistincta, saepe bobis 2-3 partum

conjunelis calyci adspectum bilabiatum pruehen-

tibus; corefia 3 om diam., pentagona, Alamenta

1-2 inny antherae 7 mim; ovarium globosum,

apice pilis paugis glandulosis praedirums stytns c.

| cms Stigma capilatum.

Flos masculus; rhachis foralis (6 cm, 3-usque

mulijAorns; calyx co, 5 mm flongus, bilabiatus;

coralla 2-3 cm diam., pentagon; filamenta brevis

antherac ¢, 6 mm, oblongae, superne leviter

aungustalue; oyurium ceficiens. Peeicellus fructifer

2-3 cm, deflexus, spinis dispersis; calycis labi

11.5 om, triungulares, spinosi, demum recurvati:

bare 15-2 cm diam. elohosa, initio virieli-

fasciala, demum albido-viriditiltea, Semen 2-2,5

mm, fitseo-hrunnenm vel nigruny, minute reticuta-

lum.

Types: D. E. Symon 6954, 19.V.1971,

about 19 km eqst of the Fast Byines River,

Norther Territory. In seasonally dry shal

low Melulenca swamps or Mats. Approxi-

mate Lat. 15°50/S, Long. 130°00’E. (CANB

fholotvpus), ADW, K, NV) PERTIN)

FIG. 2

A sprawling, herbaceous or subshrubby,

colonial perennial to O<.5 m wide, the stems

short lived or slightly woody at the hase, All

parts denscly pubescent with somewhat lonse,

pale, siellaie hairs, generu] aspect grey-green.

Splines to 5 mm, abundant or scattered on the

stems, [ruiting pedicels. amd the xpiny calyx, bess

common On petioles, upper and lower leaf gur-

faces, Jeavex 2,5-6 *% 1.4 em, rather variable

in shape, ovate to elliptic in outline but with

S—7 deep ur shallow lobes, the lower lobes cut

to three-quatters of the way to the midvein,,

others shallower, sinuses mostly rounded, apex

rounded or acule; levF base unequal, truncate

to cuneate, occasional almost lanecolate Ieafiets

with Few lobes may nceur,

NEW SPECIFS OF SOLANIIAS 228

Inflaoveseenee ooc hermaphrodite flawer aur-

mounted by a cyme of male Bowers. Herma-

Phrodite Mower; situated O-) em from the base

of the peduncle; pedicel c. 1 em, spiny; calyx

tube 2-3 jm, spiny; lobes S mm triangular,

the tips chstinet, often 2—3 lobes partiatly fused

lo give the calyx a ovo lipped appearance;

corolla 3 em diam. pentagonal; filaments |—2

min; anthers 7 mm: ovary globular with a few

glandular hairs at the summit; seyle c. L cm;

stigma capitate.

Male lower: peduncle 1-6 ¢m, with 3 to

many flowers, calyx c. 5 nim long, sometimes

two lipped; coro/fa 2-3 em diam. pentugenal,

fiaments short; anthers c. 6 mm, oblong,

slightly tapered; ovary lacking. Fruiting pedicel

2-3 cm, deflexed, with scattered spines; calyx

lobes 1=1.5 cin, triangular, spiny, Finally rotsed

or recurved. berry £2—-2.5 em diam.. globular,

ut first striped green, falter pale whitish-green-

ish-yellow. Seeds 2-2,5 mm, very dark brown

or black, minwely reticulate, Ten fruits had

(29-) 57 (-99) seeds per fruit.

This species is restricted in its distribution to

a few large; seasonally dry, shallow, Melifeuca

swamps between the Victona River and the

Western Australian border in the north-west of

the Northern Territory. Nine collections have

been seen. The species is most closely related

to 3, diversiflorumt F, Muell, with which it

shares a relaavely dwarf habit, lobed leaves.

similar pubescence, and an undromonoecious

inflarescence. It differs from S. diversiflertum

in its sprawling rather than intricate growth

habit, larger, less deeply lobed leaves, smaller

number of mule flowers, and in its smuller

fruits with fewer and smaller seeds

A representative collection is Syren 5229,

(8 vi.1967, 24 km east of the East Baines river.

N.T. cistributed to ADW, B, CANB, K, NSW.

NT. PERTH. US.

The specific epithet refers to the ivery colour

of the fruits,

Solanum gilesti Symon sp, nov.

Frvtex parvus et cotonialis usque 0.5 m altus,

effusus vel erectus. partes omnes pilis stellatis

dJensis et approximatis pubetcentes, caules et

calyces, conspicue cinnamenei. Folia discolora

paginis superivibus pallidis sed adspeciw genersli

cinnamoneo, Spinge usque 5 mm longae, rectae

lenues cinnamonese in caule dispersae. in petiole

paucae. a foliis absentes, in calyce conspicue copio-

sac. Folia 2-4 x 1-3 cm, ambiter ovata asque

oblango-ovata § lobis indistincte evalutis, sinuhus

non profurdis. et rotundatis, apice folii obtusa vel

weuto, murgine repando, hasi truncate usque lare

clineata, aequalr vel inaequali,

Inflarescentia eymosa brevis 1-2 flora, pedun-

culus Q&S inm, flaccosus ferrugineus pubescens;

pedizellus $7 mm, calycis tuhus c. 5 mim Fongils,

Inhis 1-3. mm late toiangulalis. Carella 2.5 em

dixm., pentagonalis, ilamenta 2—3 mm longa tenua,

antherae 7-8 mim conspicue apicem versus deere-

acentes laxe rectac, ovarium glabrum, stylus 10-15

mm rectus, pilis stellatis infra sparsim pubescentes

plus minusve sigmoideus, stigma terminalis capi-

(ala perixigue bilobata. Peduneolus fructifes

deflexus 1,0-1.5 cm, calycis tubus I—t.5 em diam,

quctus bagcam includens (sed pauci frueius notati

sunt). conspicue spinéscens, Jobrs c, 3-2 mm

longis triangularibus et sine spinis; harea ¢. 1 orn

diam. glohosa; fructus marturas ab auctore non

visu.

Typaus: A. 5. George 9014, 27,vii 1467,

about 11 km west of Dovers Hills, northern

Gibsong Desert, Western Australia. Spread-

ing shrub 30-40 cm, flowers pale purple,

Approximate Lat. 23°05°S, Long. [28°35'R.

{ PERTH—holotypus).

FIG. 3

A small colonial sivub to OS m, spreading

of erect, all parts densely and closely pubescent

with stellate hairs strikingly orange-brown on

the younger growing paints, stems und galyces,

The leaves brownish green above, paler below,

distinctly discolorous. general aspect brightly

ferruginous golden-brown on the young parts.

Spines to 3 nim, straight, fine, orange-browr,

scattered on the stems, a few on the petiole,

absent from the leaves, abundant and eonspi-

cuous on the calyx. Leaver 2—-+ x 1-3 em,

ovate to oblang-ovate in outline ind with wp

to & broad shallow lobes, the sinuses shallow

and rounded, the leaf apex rounded or acute,

the margin undulate-repand. leaf base truncate

to broadly cuneate, equal or unequal,

fnflorescence @ short cyme of 12 flowers;

peduncle 0-5. mm, floccose ferruginous pubes-

cent; pedice! 5-7 mm: calyx tube about 5 mm

long, the lobes 1-3 mm broudly triangular:

corolla 2.5 cm diam., pentagonal the fnter-

pelalur membrane nol exceeding the petal tip;

filaments 2-3 mm long, slender; anthers 7-8

mam distinctly tapered upically, loosely erect;

ovary glabrous; style 10-15 mm erect, sparsely

steNate pubescent helow, slightly sigmoid; stig-

ma terminal, capitate, very slightly bilobed.

Friiting pedicels defiexed, 1.0-1.5 em, culyx

tube 1-1.5 cm diam., enlarged to cover the

fruit (hut very few fruits have been seen), con-

spicuously spiny, the lobes about 3—5 mm long.

triangular, spineless: berry: about | cm diam,

lobular, colour and texture when mature not

known. Seeds not seeti.

The species. is sparsely distributed in Central

Australia in the general area of Lake Mackay

in the northern Gibsons Desert. Eight collec-

tions have been seen, S.. gilesii is a distinctive

species and is most closely related to S, lasio-

phylum Dun. trom which, however, it differs

quite clearly, The new species has discolorous

rather than concolorous leaves, the tomentum

un the leaves is sparse above, the leayes are

also smaller and usually have a distinctly undu-

jate-sinuaté margin. The coloured spines on

ihe tips and calyces are striking. Table 1 sum-

ll, E SYMON

marises some comparisons between S$. gilesii

and related species.

A Tepresentative collection for Western Aus-

tralia is that hy George 8909, 25.vii, 1967

North-cast of Sir Frederick Range. in ADW

and PERTH. and tet the Northern Territory is

one by Larz 692, 30.vii.1970, 65 km seuth-

south-west of The Grenitles.

The species is named after the Australian

explorer. E. Giles, who first collected i in

1876.

TABLE 1

Conrpurisons belween S, gilesii, 8, lachnephyllum, and related species.

leaf tomentum

5, vahbrielae Domin seTiceaus pale

S. gilesii Symon Sparse above

S lachnophylum Symon very dense woolly nale

S. lasiaphyllam Dun. woolly pale

Solanum karsensis Symon sp. nov,

Herba perennis, colonialis, usque 25 cm;

adspectu generali griseo-viridi, plus minusve dis-

volori; partes omnes pilig Stellatis densis approxi-

matis pallidis pubescentes. Spinwe usque | cm,

pullidae, firmae, plus minusve Tecurvatae, in cauli-

hus sparsae vel deficientes, celerum rarae vel

nullue. Folia 1.5-2,5 x 1-1,5 om, ambitu ovata,

margine undulato, usque quinque-lobata, lobus

brevibus et indistinctis, lobis inferioribus melius

evolutisy apex laminae et loborum rotundatus, basi

cuneata vel truncata; petiolo 3-10 mm_ longo,

crissiusculo,

Inflorescentia cymosa, extra-axillaris, usque |2-

flora; pedunculus 0-1 (75) cm, rhachis foralis. 1-2

(4) cm; pedicellus 4—5 mm, tubus calycis 3-5 mm;

Jobi 2-4 mm, irtangulares; acumina 1 mm, brevia:

corolla 2 cm diam., rotata, purpurea; filaments |

mm crassa} antherae 3 mm, oblongae; ovarium

apice pilis glandulosis: paucis instructum, stylus L

em, erectus. Pedicelll frucrifer? 1-1.5 om, reflexi;

tubus calyciy usque 7-10 wom diam, auetus,

bageam includens, onficio parvo saepe lacerato;

lobi calycis 2-3 mim longi, vix accrescentes; bacca

¢, 7 mm diam., globosa, colore et textura ignota,

Typus:; A, Smith, Dec. 1961, “Tara

Downs", Wentworth, New South Wales.

(NSW 59352 (holotypus)},

FIG. 4

Spines

orange-brown

Approx. j .

Leof shape leaf Fruit = Fruit

sizecm shape Wa,

ovate toovate- Sx3 Blabuse i-4

lunceolute

ovate tooblong- 3x2 elobose [2

ovale

ovate-laneeolate 6xX2,5 ovgid J-2

ovate to broad 5x4 glohose 1-6

elliptic

A colonial herbaceous perennial to 25 em

high. All parts pubescent with dense, close,

pale stellate hairs, general aspect egrcy green,

slightly discolorous, Spines to 1.5 cm, pale,

firm, straight or slightly recurved. pubescent in

the lower half, scattered on the stems, rarely

lacking, tare or absent on any other parts.

Leaves 1,5-2.5 x 1=-1.5 em, ovate in outline.

margin undulate and with up to 5 shallow and

weukly developed lobes, the Tower lohes more

often present, Leaf and lobe apex rounded,

base cuneate to truncules petiole 3-10 mm,

Whickish,

Inflorescence a Tew (to 12) Qowered cyme

from an extra-axillary position, Peduncle 0-1

(25) om, floral rhachis 1-2 (4) em (when the

peduncle is absent the lower flower is adjacent

to the stem), pedicel 4-5 mm, culyx tube 3-5

mm, Jobes 2-4 mm triangular, lobe tips | mm,

shorts coralla 2 cm diam., rotate, purple: fila-

ments 1 mm, thick; anthers 3 mm, oblong:

ovary with a few glandular hairs towards the

summit; style 1 cm, erect, Fruiting pedicels

{-1.5 em. deflexed, calyx tube 7—LO mim diam.

enlarged to cover the berry, the orifice small,

often torn, calyx lobes not much enlarged, 2-3

mim long: berry aboul 7 mm diam, globular,

colour and texture not known. Seeds 4-3 mm

NEW SPECIES OF SOLANUM 331

long, relatively large, dark, minutely reticulate

but this is. frequently obscured by adherent

pitch-like gum, few (about 4) seeds per fruit.

‘The new species is restricted in its distribu-

tion to the western parts of New South Wales,

mainly between the Rivers Darling and Lach-

lan, Twelve collections have been seen, It is

most closely related to S. oligacenthum P-

Muell, with which it shares an erect habit. rela-

tively small, shallowly lohed leaves, rotate

corolla, small fruits and dark seeds, Tt differs

from §. olfgacanshtum in its dwarfer stature,

larger spines, Jonger leaves, and enlarged calyx

enveloping the fruit.

A Tepresentative collection is Macgillivray

741, 16.x.1921, Kars Station, western N.S.W.,

now at ADW and NSW.

The specific epithet refers to Kary Station

where it was early collected.

Solanum lachnophyllum Symon, sp. nov.

Fruter 60 cm, densus et effusus. Partes omnes

pills stellatia pallidis dense lanato-pubescentes,

adspectu genctrali cinereo, concolor, Spinae usque

| cm, ingequules, tenues, reciae. pallidae, in catile

copiosae, in petlolo, psginis follomem superiorihus

ct inferioribus, pecunculo et pedicello pattciores.

Folia 5-8 x 2-3 cm, ovate-lonceolata, margine

integrn, apice acutato, basi cuneata usque totun-

data: petiolo 2-5 mm. pro ratione brevi et crassa.

tnflorescentia cymosa, extra-uxillaris, 2-3 flora,

peduncilus 1-1-5 cm, pedicellus * mm, tubus

calycis ¢, 7 mm, campanulatus, lohi c. 5 mm

triangulares. corolla 2-3 cm, pentagona, Antherae

ovarium et stylus non vist. Pedicellus fructifer

-1.5 em, deflexus; tuhus calycis usque 2 cm

longus, aurctus, baccam includens; bacca 15-2 cm

fonga, ovata usque avato-conica.

stony hillside 58 kni éast of Meekatharra,

Western Ausiralia. Dense, widely branched

shrub 30-60 em high. leaves thick. soft.

hairy-tomentose, flowers. violet, (PERTH

(holotypus).)

FIG, 5

A dense, spreading smull stevh to 60 cm

high. All parts densely woolly pubescent with

pale stellate hairs, general uspect grey. con-

coloraus, Spines to 1 cm, unequal, fine,

straight, pule, abundant on the stem, fewer on

the petiole, upper and lower leaf surface, ped-

uncle, pedicel and entyx, eaves 5-8 % 2-3

cm, entire, ovatétanceolale. apex acute. base

cuneate to raunded; petiole 2-5 mm, short and

thick.

Inflorescence a cyme with 2-3 flowers; ped-

Uncle 1-1.5 em, pedicel $ mm, calyx tube c.

7 mm campanvlate, the lohes c, 5 mm, Lrian-

gular; corelfla 2-3 cm, pentagonal, anthers,

ovary and style not seen. Fruiting pedicel

defiexed. calyx tube to 2 cm. enlarged to

enclose the berry completely, ferry 13-2 em

long, ovate to ovate-conical, colour at maturity

not krown.

Except for one collection, the species is con-

fined to an area between Wiluna and Mecka-

tharra. Western Australia. Five collections

have been seen.

It is most closely related to S, /esiophyiuen

Dun. with which, it shares a dense tomentum

and enlarged and enveloping calyx. It differs

from S. lavfophylidm Dun, in having an excep-

tionally thick, woolly blanket-like tomentum,

longer narrower leaves and ovoid rather than

globose fruits. A table of comparisons with

related species is given under S, gilesit Symon.

A representative collection is thal by Speck

1484, 18.x.1958, 52 kin west of Wiluna in the

Nullagine Hills, now at CANB.

The specific epithet refers to the blanket4like

lomentum on the beaves.

Solanum leopoldensis Symon sp, nov.

Fridexc D.5=t m altus et 1-1.5 m Jatus intrcatus

effusus dioicus cotonialis, Spinae 1-6 mm, coplosae

in caule, in paginis superioribus et inferioribus in

pecduncule in pedicello, in calyce spinosissimn,

rectae aul plus minusve recurvatae, tenes. palli-

dae, Folia adspevtu virida, sed pilis stelatis densis

minutts; pilis minutis vlandulosis pubescentia.

Folia (2—) 5 (-8) * (1-) 1.5 (-3) cm, lanceolata,

lobis tflangularibus in mareine fere aequaliter posi-

1i8, sinubus rotundstis ad terliam parte costatn

versus fissis, Iebo «1 apice acute vel acuminusto,

basi cuneata aequali vel inaequali; petiolo 0-5 mm

brevi,

Inflareseentia e Bove singular. hermaphrordito

sislentes et ¢ cymis florum masculorum in plantis

diseretis. Flores masculi in cyma usque 11-fores

pedunculus 0-3 om, rhachis 2-3 em, pedicellus c.

5-8 mm tenuis: tubus calycis brevis apertusque,

tobi 5 mm obtuse triangulares ad lanceolatos inter-

dum partim conjuncti, apices 1-2 mm lineares,

corolla 3 cm diam, late stellata ratata, apes dis-

tincli 1-2 mm, Yilacina; filamenta 1-2 mm brevia-:

amthetas 5 mm, lanceolatae erectae: sine ovario,

Flores hermaphroditi singulares: pedicellus 5.10

mm: tubus calyeis 5-6 mm spinosissimus; apices

5 mm lineares disereti paticis spinis; raralla usque

3 om diam. laté stellata rotata; filamenta 7 mm,

autherae 5 mm, decrescentes, approximate erectue.

slyfus 2 mm ultra antherae apices extans; stigme

ferminalis plus minusve magna et pallida Ferenir

\.S—3 em diam. depressus globularis. in spinosis-

337

232 D. EF. SYMON

Sime truncato cAalycis tbo inclusus, apices lobac

O.5-L cm lineares spinosi. color ef téxtura fructus

maturi incogniti sed aliquot in herha dhiri et firmi

inventi sunt, Seria 15-2 om longa, disfincte

minute reticulata brunnea, S& in uno fructo.

Typus: 0. E. Spmon 7040, 26.v,1971,

from rocky gully cleft at the base of Bold

Bluff, King Leopiild Ranges, Western Aus-

tralia, A dark green spreading fruit-bearing

plant. Approximate Tat, [7°17'S, Long.

125°25'B. (PERTH {(holotypus). ADW,

CANB, K. L, NT).

FIG. 6

An intricate, spreading, dioecious shrub

0.3-13 m high and 1-1-5 m wide forming small

colonies. Spines 1-6 mm, abundant on stems,

upper and lower leaf surfaces, peduncles, pedi-

cels, aml Lhe very spiny calyx. straight or

slightly recurved, slender, pale coloured.

leaves green in aspect, but densely covered

With minute stellate hairs whose central cell is

very short and hroad and Iniergl cells rather

short and blunt, minute glandular hairs also

present, Legves (2-) 5 (-8) x (1-) 1-5 (+3)

em, lanceolate, with (7-) 9 (-13) triangular

lobes fairly evenly spaced along the margin,

sinuses rounded and cut one third of the way

to the midrib, lobe and leaf apex acute or

acuminate, base cuneate, equal or unequal:

petiole O—5 mm, short.

Inflorescences consist of solitary herna-

phrodite Howers and cymes of male flowers

on separite plants. Male flowers in a cyme

of up to Ii flowers, from extra axillary

postion, peduncle 0-3 cm, rhachis 2-3 em,

pedicel 5-8 mm, slender: calyx tube short and

open, the lobes 5 mm, biuntly triangulyr to

lanceolate, sometimes several fused together,

the tips | 2 mm, Iinear; corotly 3 cm diam.,

broadly steilate-rotate, pubescent on petals out-

side, interpetalar tissue glabrous. the tips dis-

tinct 1-2 mm. pale lilac: filaments {-2 mm,

short; anthers 5 mm, lanccolate, erect; ovary

lacking, Hermaphrodite flowery solitary, pedi-

ee] 5-10 mm, calyx tube 3-6 mm very spiny.

the tips 5 mm, linear, distinct, with few spines;

corolla ta 3 em diam.. broadly stellate-rotate.

petal tips distinct 1-2 mm; filaments 2 mm,

anthers 5 mm, tapering, closely erect; style pro-

jecting 2 mm beyond the anther tips, stigma

terminal. relatively large and pale. Fruit t.5-

2 em diam, depressed globular, enclosed in the

very spiny, accrescent. truncate calyx tube, the

Jobe tips (5-1 em, linear, spiny, colour and

toxture of ripe fruit not known but sore drying

on the bush to a hard firm lexture, Seeds 1.5—

2 mm long, distinetly minutely reticulate, dark

brown, 580 in one fruit,

S. leapeldensts is restrieted |n ats distribution

to the King Leopold Ranges in the noruh of

Wester Australia, where it is found in rocky

gullies and creeklines at the base of the moun-

inins, Six collections havé been seen. The

species Woes nol appear lo be closely related

fo any other androdioecious species and dif-

fers particularly in the more intricate habit of

growth, the toothed margin of the leaves, the

§parse tomentum and green uspect. Compari-

sons with the andromonoccious species 4.

eedipus Synion are given under that species,

Seedlings grown from Svmen 5318 produced

male and hermaphrodite plants. One of these

had | or 2 hermaphrodite flowers on o short

peduncle and another had a hermaphrodite

Nower helow the cyme of male flowers. These

conditions have not been noticed in plants col-

lecled in the wild..and do perhaps indicate that

the separation of the two types of flower may

not he complete or may bé influenced hy

cnvironmental conditions,

A representative collection is Syenon 5315,

24.41.1967, 21 km from Inglis Gap on the

north side of the King Leopold Ranges, distri-

buted to ANDW, B, CANB. K, f. NSW,

PERTH.

The specific epithet is devived from the Leo-

pold Ranges Where the species occurs,

Solanum ocdipus Symon sp. nov,

Frufex usquea 2 m altus erectus sparsim camosus

colonialis paucis caulibus, queruin juvenes: virides

spinosique, seniores fusci et lignost perpaucis

spinis. Spinee 5-10 mm in caulibus copiasae, in

supeoribus ct inferioribus puginis dispersac,

petiolo pedunculo dispersac; absentes éx pedicello,

copiosae ct conspituac in calycis tutbo et lobis,

spinue erectue, lenues, pallidae, Folia aspeciu

virida, glabra, practer minutds stellatos pilos in

folionim wxillis et in petiolixs et in juvenibus folio-

rum buasibus, Folia ¢(7-) 9 (—20) x (3-) 5 (-8)

em, ambint elliptica sed wsque ad £9 lobos trian

gulares in margine; lobi 1-2 minorihus dentibus,

incisi, sinus rotundati vados} rarim ad plus quam

qWartam partein <ostum yersus fissi. apices folii

et Jobi acut) vel acuminati; bosis folii cuncuta

insequalis, petiolis 1 3 cm.

Inflorescensio flas sineulanis hermaphroditus in

basi cymxe florim niasculorum. Inflorescentia

non viss. Pedunculus Aorum masculonim 4-20

cm longus ferens usque ad 40 florés. Pedicellus

tiuctifer 2 em, crescens ef aucius xd 5-6 mm

diam., in basi calycis tubi, Tuobus calycis 5-6 mm.

tobi 15-2 cm Jongi triangulares, apices lineares et

fructum excedentes. Becca 15-2 en) globosa stb

NEW SPECIES OF SOLANA

viridis, Semriia 4-4,5 mm longa pro ratione crassa,

nigra, muricata. 37 et 38 semina in duiobus fructi-

bus visis.

Tipu, D, E. Symow FLI9 291971.

from low quurtzite oureTop between Kalum-

bura Mission and Longini Landing, Kimbeér-

ley Division, Westem Australia, An erect

shrub {o 27, bright green in aspect, form-

ing a colony of a few stems. Approximate

lat. 14°15°S, Long 126°36°E. (CANHB,

fholotypus), ADW, K, L. NT, PERTH),

FIG, 7

Anvercet, sparsely branched, sfrub to 2 m

high furming small colonies of a few stems, the

young stems green and spiny, older ones

brown, woody, and almost spincless. Sphacs

5-11 mm. abundant on the stems, scuttered

an the upper and lower leaf surfuce, petivle

and peduncle, absent from the fruiting pedicel.

abundant and conspicuous on the calyx tube

and lobes, the spines straight, slender and pale.

Leaves green im aspect, glabrous except for

mibute stellate hairs m the leaf axils and on

the petioles and Jeaf bayes of young leaves.

Leaves (7-) 9 (—20) x (3—-) 5 (-9) cm, ellip-

tic in outline and with up to 19 tnangular lohes

along the margin; the lobes with 1-2 smaller

lobes, the sinuses rounded, shallow, zarely cut

more than one quarter of the way to the mid-

rib, leaf and lobe apex acute or acuminate; leaf

base cuneate, unequal: petiole 1—3 cm.

Inflorescence a single hermaphrodite Hower

at the base of a cyme af male flowers, Flower-

ing state not seen. Rhachis of the male flowers

4—20 cm long and bearing up to 60 flowers.

Fruiting pedicel 2 cm, tapered and enlarged to

5-6 num diam. at the base of the calyx tube.

Calyx tube 5-6 mm, the loheg 1.5-2 em tona,

triangulur, the tips linear and exceeding and

enclosing the fruit which is visible between the

lobes. Berry 15-2 cm, globular, very. slightly

bilobed in the few seen, pale green, Srerds

4-45 mim long. relatively thick, black. dis-

tinerly muricate, 37 and 38 seeds in two fruits

examined,

This species is known only from the type

collection and one made by A, Cunningham at

Montague Sound. Although very distinctive

and quite large, this species has been mrely

collected. It does not appear io be at all

clesely related to the other Australiad andro-

monoecious species. This species differs

in its bright ereen aspect. very sparse stellate

hairs, swollen pedicel and thicker, larger.

muyicate seeds. It is possibly more closely

related to §, leopoldensis from which it

133

differs in being antromonoecious and nat

androdioecious, and in addition has longer

swollen. pedicels, exposed fruit, much larger

seeds, and an erect sparsely branched habit

compared with S$. leapoldensis which is rela-

lively intriente. However few planis of &.

eedipus are known, On each of twe duvs they

were visited, the plants at Kalumburu were

heavily attacked by grasshoppers,

The specific epithet wses the name of King

Oedipus well known tor his swollen foot and

réfers indirectly to the enlarged and swollen

pedicel of the mature fruit,

Solanum papaverifolium Symon sp, nov,

Herbe usque 30 cm, erecta vel effusa, colanialia,

perennis, basi via lignosa, caulibus ex videtur ultra

uoum atnum haud persistentibus, adspecty gene-

rali viridi concwlori. Planta inter spinas glabra,

Practer pilos miuutos glandulosos in novellis. pilis

stellatis at videtue nullis. Spinge usque § mm,

Fenues. rectae, pallidge, in caule, utraque pagina

Folii, pediccUo. et calyce ohviae. Folia ec, 5 x demi,

ambalu ovata, sed in lobos 5-1] penitus dissecty,

quogue lobo 1-2. x 0.5 cm, sinubus fere usque

ad costam profunde dissectis, lobis iterum lobulis

vel dentibus 1-5 instructis: spice Laminae ét lobi

acuto, basi cuneata inuequali; petiolo 11.5 em.

fnflorescentia cymosa, 2 caulis parte superlore,

exoria, Horibus: I, pedunculus c. 1 cm, rhachis

foralis 1-2 cm: pedicellns ¢, 1 cm, tenuis; calycls

tnbus 2-3 mm, fobis 3-5 mm lanceolatis, acumini-

bus purvis; corolla 2 em diam. stellata; filamenta

c. 1 mm} antherae 3.5-4 mm, oblongae: ovarium

pilis paucis glandulosis pracditum; stylus 5-6 mm.

stigma leviter bilobalum. Pediceifus fructifer 12

cm, firme curvatim deflexus; calyx auctus basem

fructus tegens, lobis fructum inclidentibus et exce-

dentibus: bacce 12-18 x 10-12 mni, depresse

globosa, Ravovirens, Jevitet intensius viridi-vittata,

Typus; FON. Gidley, 11.vi,1969, on the

property of Dr. Thomas. “Manerao”,

Graman, about 56.km north-west of Inverell,

New South Wales. (NSW (holotypus),

ADW, BRI, CANB. K, MEL.)

FIG, &

An erect or sprawling, colonial, perennial

herb to 0 em. scarcely woody at the base, the

stems probably lasting one season only, genersl

aspect green, concolorous Plant glabrous

hetween the spines except for minute alandylar

hairs on the ywung prowths, stellate hairs

absent. Spines to 5 mm, fine, straight, pale.

present on the stems, upper and lower leaf sur-

Face, pedicel and calyx. Leaves c. 5 x 4 cm,

ovate in outline but deeply dissected into $—11

lobes, each 1-2 x QS cm, the sinuses deeply

234

cut almost lo the midvein, the Johes themselves

with L-S lobes or teeth, leaf and lobe apex

acute, hase cuneate, Unequal; petiole 1—1,5 em,

Inflareseence a cyme from the upper parts

of the stem, with 1-6 flowers; peduncle c. |

eng, Moral rhachis 1-2 cm! pedicel c 1 cm,

slender; calyx tube 2-3 mm, the lobes 3-5 mm

lanceolate, acumens small; carofla 2 cm diam.,

stellate; filaments c. | mm, anthers 3,5—4 mm,

oblong; ovaly with a few glandular hairs; style

S-h mm: stigma slightly bilobed, Fruiting

pedicely |—2 om, firmly curvedly deflexed, calyx

enlarged to cover the base of the fruit, the

lobes enclosing and exceeding it, berry [2-18

x 10-12 mm, depressed globular, greenish yel-

low, with fame stripes of deeper green.

This species occurs in southern Queensland

and northern New South Wales. between Dalby

and Quivindi on heavy, black soils and is fre-

quenly «escribed as a weed of cereal crops.

Twenty-three collections bave been seen, &

prpaverifoliun is most closely rctated to J.

aedenophorwm F. Mucll, from which it differs in

its THich more deeply cleft leaves, lack of stcl-

late huirs, fewer minute glandular hairs und

sttialler Aidwers.

A Tepresentative collection from Queensland

ist $8, 2, Bveriss, Nov 1951, Yandilla, now at

BRT, and from New South Wales: €. Afaore,

undated. Liverpnal Plains, now al BM, K, and

NSW. The specific epithet was chosen because

of the similarity of the leaves of the new

species to those of Payuver hybridiun L.

Solanum fumulicola Symon sp. nov.

Verba perennis, colonralis, elfusa, usque 30 cm

alta, Inermis, Partes omnes. pilis stellatiy densis

lipproxiinalis minulis pubescentes, adspectn gene-

qali giwen-viridi] plus minusve discolori. Folia

(23.7 4 (-8) x U4-0.8 em, lineart-lanceotata,

murgine inizgrp, upice acutalo, basi cuncata, foliis

exsiccando ssepe secs nervum medium. pliralix;

pelioly pro rata brevi,

Inflerescentia cymosa, extra-axillaris, t-6 flora;

pedunculus 1-1.5 cm; pedicellus - cit, gracilis;

caly® 2-4 mm, lobi 1-1,5 mm, obtuse triangulares,

acuminibus brevibus: corolla 2 em ciam,, stellata;

filamenin ¢, 1 cm: antherue 4 mm oblongue, sur-

sum angustatae; ovarium apiece pilis steffatis paucis

praeditum; stylus c¢. 6 mim, erectus; stigma capi-

titum. Peduacalus fructifer 2-3 om, leviter elon-

gulus; pedicellus c. 1-5 cm, deflextis; calyx avetts,

hasin fructus tegens; bacca, 1-|.5 cm diam., matura

fiavida,

Tupas: D, B Synten S085, 7.vi.1967,

abot! 40 kim est of the Stuart Highway al

Db. E. SYMON

Daly Waters, Northeny Verritory. “In a

seasonally dry swamp with many mounds

ihout tree stumps and unt hills ‘The Sola-

num Was common on the mounds, and

always above the lower levels, colonial,

siraggly, flowers blue. few fruits seen (too

curly), the plants were in active growah.”

{ADW 332986 (holotypus), AD, B. CANB,

K, NSW, NT, US).

FIG, %

A sprawling, colonial, perennial erb to 30

cm tall. All parta pubescent with dense, close.

minute, stellate huirs, general wspect grey green,

dightly discolorous. Plant spineless. Leaves

(2,5-) 4 (-8) « 0.4-0.8 cra, linear linceolate,

margin entire, apex aciite, base cuneate, loaves

of herbarium specimens often folded long the

mid vein; petiole 0.5-1 cm, relatively short.

inflorescence a cyme fron. an extra axillary

posilion and with 1-6 Aowers, peduncle 1-1-5

em: pedicel } cm, slender; calyx 2-3 mm. lobes

1-1,5 mm bluntly triangular, lobe tips short;

corella 2 em diam. stellate, filaments o 1 mm;

anthers 4 mm, oblong, tapeted upwards; ovary

with a few stellate hairs at the summit; style

c. 6 mm erect, stigma cupitate. Fruiting

peduncle 2-3 cm. somewhat lengthened,

pedicel c. 1.5 em, dellexed; calyx enlarged to

cover the base of the fruit, berry 1-15 om

diam, yellowish when ripe, Chremeasone

nunber, n — 12 (Symon 5085, ADW 33286).

counted by Barbara Randell.

S. tumudicola occurs. in the central areas of

the Northern ‘Territory, several collections

coming from near Elliott: it also oecurs in

adjacent parts of Queensland, Fourleen collec-

tions have been secn. This species is closely

related to S. esurigle Lindl. and is at times

difficult to separate From it, It shares with $

exsuriafe the herbaceous babit, spinelessness,

relatively narrow unlobed leaves, and uniform

close tomentum. It differs from S. esveiale in

its more slender hubit and much narrower

leaves and its chromosome number, that of

S. esuriale being w — 24 (Symon 2146. 3451,

3977). It may also appear similar to some

narrow lenved forms af §. coactiliferum J. M.

Black from which it differs in its herbaceous

perennial habit rarely making second year

growth. while the latter is a small woody under-

shrub with stems generally lastimg several years

and frequently bearing slightly recurved spines.

and it Usually has depressed globular fruits on

shart peduncles,

NEW SPECIES OF SOLANUM 235

A representative collection from the North-

ern Territory is that by Perry 3491, 16.ii1.1953.

19 km west of Tobermorey Station, distributed

to AD, BRI, CANB, NSW, K. and trom

Queensland one by Blake 17839, 18,v.1947.

halfway between Brunette Downs and Rock-

hampton Downs, distributed to BRI, CANB,

kK.

Fig. 1.

The specific epithet refers to the occurrence

of the species on low mounds and on the raised

ground at the base of trees at the type locality.

Acknowledgements

I am grateful to Mr. Airy-Shaw and Mrs.

H. M. Jackson for assistance with the Latin

diagnoses. and Mrs, Barbara Randell for

chromosome counts in several species.

there Arh hat

so Se rin Or THe Moser bescireiTe

at aa]

Vaow No

\ oe Dag My

ant. fey

Solanum cleistogamum Symon, holotype,

D. E. SYMON

wusreute

WERRARIIM) GE THE Wale

Solanum gilesti Svmon, holotype.

Solanum eburneum Symon, holotype.

Fig.

™

CIES OF SOLANUM

NEW SPE

‘ad ApOpOY “UOLUAS WTP CYdOUYob) Wnnjos +g “TL

Serer Ly 9, perzeny

aia Men eee eee a a

VITTHLEhyY Meat a ns

‘WOISYBHSH JLvLs

‘ad ojoy “UOWAS sivuasuny WinubjOS “Pp “BIA

Ee frames

JING Ls TA NOWWS SON Wie

SITVM HLNOS AGN 40 WNIYSYIH TWNOLLWN

D. E, SYMON

Solantion vedipus Symon, holotype.

Fig.

holotype.

Solanum leopoldensis Symon,

Fig. 6

239

NEW SPECIES OF SOLANUM

‘ad AjOjOY “UOLWAS ByOar NUD WaNOjOy

‘6

“ald

‘ad OOY ‘UOWAS waiiyoflMaandyd wnunjos

"3 BIW

OBITUARY: SIR JAMES HARRISON

Summary

On the 16th of September, 1971, His Excellency, Major-General Sir James Harrison, K.C.M.G.,

C.B., C.B.E., died suddenly on a flight from Sydney to Honolulu. The Fellows of the Royal Society

of South Australia felt the untimely death of Sir James with deep sorrow and as a sad and severe

loss. Sir James was 59 years of age.

HIS EXCELLENCY MAJOR-GENERAL SIR JAMES HARRISON.

K.C.M.G., C.B., C.B.E.,

GOVERNOR OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Patron of the Royal Society of South Australia, 1969-1971

On the l6th of September, 1971, His Excellency, Major-General Sir

James Harrison, K.C.M.G., C.B,, C.B.E., died suddenly on a flight from

Sydney to Honolulu. The Fellows of the Royal Society of South Australia

felt the untimely death of Sir James with deep sorrow and as a sad and

severe loss. Sir James was 59 years of age.

The Society received the honour of the patronage of Sir James in April

1969, and although his term of office was only a short one he will be remem-

bered as few before. Sir James was not only patron of this Society in

name but one who was keenly interested in its affairs and demonstrated his

interest by active participation at a number of functions during the past

years, Although troubled by ill health, Sir James also contributed. He was

the first patron to speak to a meeting of the Society for many years. In his

address in April 1970, entitled “The Scientist under the Microscope”, Sir

James presented a searching scrutiny of the role of the scientist in present-

day society, concluding with a word of caution against isolation in self-

determined detachment.

Those who were privileged, as I was, to accompany Sir James on one

of his inspection trips to the outback, soon became aware of his acute

powers of observation, his stratght-to-the-point questions, and above all his

broad and balanced outlook. His keen interest in industrial development

and mineral exploration, for instance, matched a rare understanding of the

need for conservation. His appreciation of science was combined with

concern ahout overzealous applications of some results of scientific research

and the influence on the natural environment of such applications, Ever

present there was a deep concern for the country and his fellow man.

The Royal Society of South Australia will always remember Sir James,

the patron and the man.

H. WOPFNER, President.

OBITUARY: JOHN BURTON CLELAND

Summary

At the time of his death, Sir John Cleland was the oldest member of the Royal Society of South

Australia, having been a fellow for over 75 years and Honorary Fellow since 1949. During this time

he served the Council of the Society in various offices and always took an active interest in the

activities of the Society.

JOHN BURTON CLELAND,

KT., C.B-E., M.D., CH.M., F.R.A.C.P,

OBITUARY

JOHN BURTON CLELAND, Kt.,

C.B.B., M.D.. Ch.M., F.R.A.CP

22,Vi, 1878 - 11 viii, 1971

At the time of his death, Sir John Cleland

was the oldest member of the Royal Society

of South Australia, haying been a fellow for

aver 75 years and Honorary Fellow since 1949,

During this time he served the Council of the

Socrely i various offices and glways took an

active interest in the activitics of the Socicty,

Sir John Cleland chose medicine fer his pro-

fessional career, specializing, in pathology and

public health, He rose to eminence in these

ficlds, but im addition made notable contribu.

tons in botany, ornithology, anthropology, wild

life conservation and natural history generally,

During his long lifetime he comributed some

hundreds of articles to the scientific und more

geveral literature, The present uecount

attempts to deul more particularly with bis con-

tributions to gencral biological scienec; his

achievements in the ficld of medicine will be

mentioned only incidentally, as they will be

deale with elsewhere,

John Burion Cicland was born at Norwood,

South Australia, on 22nd June, 1878, He was

the elder son of Wilham Lennox Cleland

(1847-1918). who ut that time was in private

medical prnetice. Not long afterwards W. L.

Cleland was appointed Resident Medical Offi-

cer (Le, Medical Superintendent) of the Park-

side Lunatic Asylum, as it was then called, and

moved inio residence there with his family.

At an early age, J. B. Cleland developest a

love of natural history, an interest no doubt

fostered by his father, who, apart from heing

a medical practitioner specializing in psychia-

iry, lectured at the university level in materia

medica, und on oceasions, in botany. Addi-

tionally, in both 1898 and 1899, as President of

the Royal Society of South Ausiralia, W. L.

Cleland gave Presidential AdUtesses on anthra-

pological subjects. He was also interested in

geology, reading a paper.on this to this Society

in J887 (Vol, (01,

Between the Asylum and the foothills of che

Mount Lofiy Ranges was open country with

few houses. Every opportunity was at hand to

study natural history, and at an early age

J. B. Cleland had gathered together a small

museum of stones, Mowers and also seashore

objects.

Initially Cleland was sent to 8 private school

ut Parkside, and later ta Prince Alfred College.

He commenced the study of medicine at the

University of Ad@lulde in 1895, his teachers

being Ralph Tate, Edward Rennie, Willian

Brage, Edward Stirling and Archibalcl Watson.

In [896 p dispute arose between the clinical

tenchers wt the Adclwide Hospital and the South

Austruluim Government. This came to a head

in 1897 ued the Honorary Teachiag Staff all

resigned. In consequence all students hac to

transfer to either Melbourne or Sydney to com-

plete their courses, Cleland chose Sydney, as

he had been advised that the natural history.

particularly the birds, was hetter there. this

being ascribed to the poorer soil and greater

dliversity of vegetation,

Clelund graduated in medicine in Sydney in

L900, After internship at the Prince Alfred

Haspital anda period of work in pathology, he

went as a ship's surgeon on a steamy ship to

northern Australian and far eastern ports, On

sopping at Cairncross Islets on the Great

Barrier Reef. he made some observations on

the bird life, ancl later wrote an arlicle, “Two

hours on a coral island", which was published

in the Svdney press. This was tits first exsay

into writing on ornithology; ax a schoolboy he

had contributed an article on fungi to the

school magazine.

In 1903 he trivelled to the United Kingdom,

getting further training in pathology, bacterio-

logy and tropical medicine. On return to Aus-

tralia in 1905 he joined the staff of the Public

Health Department in Perth. As there was an

outbreak of plague in Perth at the time,

Cleland was able to make observations on rats

and their ectoparasites as. well as his more for-

mal patholoyical duties. In 1907 he invesu-

gated the disease “Surra’ in. camels at Port

Hedland, W.A., including collecting the ticks

(Hyalenuna acgypliunt) and parasitic fies

(Hippoboscidae) brought from India on the

camels. Cleland’s knowledge ad efforts

resulted in the identification and destruction

of the infected camels,

In 1909 he transferred to the Government

Bureau of Microbiology in Sydney, where he

remained for 11 years, Tt was here that

‘Truns, R. Sne, §. Anst. 9S, Part 4, 30 November 1971

244

Cleland was to make his two major contabu-

ons in the experimental medical field, The

first of these was the establishment that dengue

fever is transmitted hy the mosquita Ardes

ucgypri, This was. accomplished with his col-

leagues Kradley and MeDonald in 1916, by the

ust of hiiman voluntecrs, The other contribu-

iow Made by Cleland with his colleagues was

un the newly discovered “Australian XX

Uisewse”, whieh occurred in 1917 and 1918 in

country towns of New South Wales, Queenns-

lant amd Vicloria. Virus strains were isolated

by transmission to monkeys, also a sheep,

home undo a calf. ‘The nature of this virus-

burne Wisease was not established until many

yours later, when uw recurrence led lo its being

re-named Murray Valley cneephalitis, found

in be transmitted by culicine niesqitilves from

an wvian reservoir,

In 1920 Cleland was appointed Murks Pro-

fessor of Pathology at the University of Ace-

Inide, this being the foundation appointment

Cleland was very happy to uccept this position,

Which brought him back into an academic

atmosphiers, with his horizons widened by

working in other areas for a period of 20 years.

This. appointment marked the end of his ex-

perimental studies in epidemiology, However,

apart fram his routine pathological and teach-

ing Unlies he was able to resume the role-of a

general nuturalist, pursuing interests in’ botany

and wnthrepoalagy, as well as ornithology, He

retired from this position in 1948, at the age of

70.

Botanical Studies

AC quite an eatly age Cleland becyime inte-

rested in the fieshy agaric fungi, his fancy

possibly having been taken by their striking

coleration and elegant structure. Even in old

age he could recall vividly a specimen of

Ceriinurius areheri with its purple cap. and

spider-web veil. its gills changing from purple

tg rusty-red. He was always fascmated by the

colors of plants and other natural objects,

including stained tissues. His interest in Ruvsule

led to rhe schoolboy article published in the

“Priice Alfred College Chronicle” in 1893, Ne

made allempts lo preserve the colours and

shapes of fungi, but these efforts were nor sue-

cessful. Following this, his father bought for

him M. 0, Cooke’s (1892) “Handbook of Aus-

tralian Fong’. Laler Cleland was able to

extend his interest In the larger fungi to other

Australian stales, and at the present time his

twer volumes (1934, 1935) on fungi in the

RK V. SOUTHCOTT

South Australian handbook series ure (he

nearest approach to a flora on these groups of

Australian fungt, tn due course he was able

to salve some of the problems of recording the

Fugitive colours uf Lunyi by enlisting the aid of

Phyllis Clarke in Sydney, Rosa Fiveash in Ade-

laide, and others. In addition to his interests

in the colours and morphology of the fungi he

was interested wr theif edibilily and possibly

noxwus eects We would taste the fungi

curefully, ial ask others to qe the same, An

ippreciation of Clelund’s centributions to

mycology was written by Hansford (1959), to

which the reader may turn for more detail.

Cleland’s thterest ii plants more generully

wis isu Lo lead Lo a number of papers on dis-

tribution of yvasculur plants, particularly in

South Australta. A sensitive appreciation of

Cleland’s contributions ta viscular botany was

made by Constance Eardley (1959). in the

same commemorative series in the Transactions

of the Reyal Society of South Australia.

Cleland was not @ tuxonamist in this field of

biology, bul mainly a collector and floristic sur-

yeyor. apart from his gathering ol ukita un

possible harmful effects of plants to mah, atid

to a lesser extent, to other animals. As Con-

sunce Eardley’s appreciation indicates, possibly

Cleland’s greatest contribution in vaseular

hotany, apart from his thorough and systematic

collecting wherever he Went. was his support

of John McConnell Black as 4 batanical taxc-

nomist, Later. Cleland gave considerable pro-

motion to the Seeand Edhtion. of Black's Flora,

after Black's death in L931.

Cteland’s final paper on the noxious effects

of plants to man was by Cleland & Lee (1963),

which epitomizes. his previons olforts,

A ramble with Clelabd was always yn insbruc-

live eXperience. Fo his local woodlands there

were few plants he could not recognize ut

sight. In addition ho knew what knowledge

was availible of the ahorigingl uses of the

plant, and frequently a good deal of ity taxo-

nomic history.

Anthropology

As a child Cleland came in contact with

inentally deranged Australian aboriginals. con-

fined at the Parkside Lunatic Asylum, leading

to a sympathetic interest in them, At the Uni

versity of Adelaide in the early 1920's, the

Professor of Anatomy was Frederick Word

Jones, who included physical anthropology

among his wide interests. Another colleague

Was Thornas Draper Camphell, Inter Professor

OBITUARY—JOHN BURTON CLELAND

of Dentistry. who also had a consuming inte-

rest in anthropology, particularly in aboriginal

customs und sume aspects of their material

culture, apart from his professional tnterest in

their dental anatemy. Cleland and Campbell

joined Wood Jones in the formation of the

Board of Anthropological Research at the Uni-

versity of Adelaide. and expeditions were

made 10 Central Australia und remote areas of

South Australia. Cleland was one of the ori-

wal members of the Board, and became its

Chairman in 1930. holding this position for

THANY Years,

Cleland’s early interests in anthropology

were in blood groupings, as well as in general

ecological uxpects such as the use of indigenous

plants tor natrve food materials and drugs. He

took 4 cOonsideruble interest in the diseases of

the uboriginals, contribwting a number of

papers on this subject. His more general

stucies were largely made in collaboration with

the zoologist Thomas Harvey Johnston, the

anthropologist Norman B. Tindale, and others.

Cleland’s veal lar anthropology led to his

being elected President of the Anthropological

Society af Sowth Australia an two occasions.

1945-6 ancl 0958. Additionally he was for a

number of years a Member of the Aboriginal

Affairs Board of the Suuth Australian Govern-

ment. An appreciation of his work as an

anthropologist is given by ‘VT. 1D. Camphell

(1954), in the wommemorative series of uppre-

clations in the Transactions of the Royal

Suciely of South Australia, celebrating Cle-

land’s SOth birthday.

Other biological diteresty

Mention has been made of Cleland’s. early

interest in ornithology. and throughout his: life

omithology remained a major interest. As a

ood general naturalist he had some knuwledge

of insects and marine animals, taking most

intercst jn the toxic effects from their biles.

stings, physical contact injuries. or ill-cffeets

of ingestion. Even in olf age these interests

remained, tesulting in effective collaboration

in study of the toxic effects of plants ancl ani-

mals. Thus when Cleland broke his leg at the

age of ahnut 80 he began to put together notes

on the effects of injurious murine animals and

in dite course this led to the publication of

Cleland & Southcott (1965), 2 work dealing

with the harmful effects of invertebrates to man

in the Australian region. Clelund would think

about o problem for many vears, and enlist the

wid of Others where he could see an opper-

waity, A series Of papers in collaboration

with the writer on possible hypervitaminosis A

among Australian aboriginals, Japanese and

Australign fishermen and sailors, as well as

Amaretic explorers, from the eating of carni-

vore liver, was dhe resuli of his puzzling for

many years over a series of illnesses which first

came to his notice in South Australia in 1935,

The shed skin of the heel of one of the suffer

ers, which he preserved iried for many years,

was analysed fur arsenic. but only insignificant

traces were found. KBvyentunlly it was possible

to make » plausible hypothesis that these were

all a manifestation of hypervitaminosis A,

Recent analyses of the livers of Antarctic hus-

kies have confirmed the hypothesis that Mertz

and Mawson in 1913 suffered from this com-

plaint. and although by then Cleland was

almost completely blind, his intellect was quite

unimpaired and he took a good deal of plea-

sure in the news.

Wild life conservation

Probably one of the most tangilde ways in

which Cleland was able to express his devotion

Ca natural history wus in bis efforts in wild life

conservation, In [927, ut the age of 49, he

Was President (for the first time) of the Royal

Society of South Australia, and became ex

officio one of the Commissioners of the

National Park. as the title then wie At the

tine The Nation) Park” referred only i the

Belair National Park, in the ranges behind

Adelaide. In 1929, on a vacaney oecurring,

he was nominated in his own name, In 1936

he became Chairman of Commissioners and

remained so until 1965, continuing on the

Commission as Deputy Chairman until 1969,

at the age of ninety.

Two major and recurring problems came

hefore the Commissioners in their attempts to

protect the fauna and ‘ora under their care.

The major of these was the constant threat of

bushfires in the limited area at first placed

under their jurisdiction, A wider problem,

which for many years they were powerless [0

aller, was that of the constantly diminishing

areas of native bushland, under the pressures

MW increasing population and industrialization

om the one hand. and for greater fon produc-

tion on the other. For many years the Goy-

emmment of the day was unwilling to consider

the selling aside of any possibly arable land

for the apparently non-productive purpose nf

wikl life conservation. Ultimately and be-

lutedly the need became recognized, perhaps

because the Governmenl tn part saw such

ian

reserves 11 the light of possible recreation or

sports areas. The accelerated immigration

programme of the P950"°s hrought into promi-

hence how poorly Australia m general (and

South Austfalia in particular) is provided with

such reserves. Eventually if became recog-

nized that wild life reserves are in fact what

their name implies, and not reserves af land

for sporting areas lightly disguised by a sur-

rounding belt of bushland. The Commission-

ers came in time ta have considerable land

holdmes placed under their cure. Clelanil, as

Chairman of Commissioners, willingly accepted

the heavy responsibilily of advising the Gev-

ernment on the capabilities of the various arcas

offered from public or private sources as pos-

sible reserves, Contemporancously with the

establishment of the National Trust of South

Australia, (he National Park Act was amended

ww jwelude mature reserves vested in the Com-

missiitiers whe now became the Conmission-

os af the National Park snd Wiki Lite

Reserves, The original area at Belair, together

with censiderable additions in the Mr. Lofty

Ranges, putticularly at Para Wirra, and very

latge afeas near the Victorian border and on

Fyre Peninsula, were now under one authority.

Clelnant spared no effort in promoting this

cause, atid made every attempt to preserve

tracts of yecetation in thelr natural state, In

the country districts often the only availahle

nat areas were the roadside strips of mallee

and other trees with their lower sturey vege-

tathon, Many rural land-holders wanted these

strips removed, the usual reason syen being

that they harboured weeds and vermin. Some

support was given to the land-holuets al vari-

ous official levels. On one occasion it was

stated thal the Bushfires Prevention Commitiee

had two major prublems to deal with, these

heine Prolessor Cleland and rabbits.

The wpparently diverse controls of the

various bodies with mnterests nm Faung and flora

preservation. was not actually as diverse as it

at first appears, when it is realized that Cleland

served on various of these semi-fovernment

bodies, such as the Fauna and Blora Board.

administering Flinders Chase, Kangaroo Island,

and the Flora and Vina Advisory Committee.

advisory to the Minister of Agriculture of

South Australia. No doubt in these. activities

Cleland was yble to get at least some sem-

blance of 1 common policy.

In 1957, gt the age af 79 Cleland was able

to Make @ tip to New Guinea, His forensic

interests were stimulated when he was given a

k. ¥V. SOLTICOTT

colleclion of recipes for the cooking of human

flesh ln New Guines he travelled to a num-

ber of widely scuttered centres, including Port

Maresby,, the Fly Delta, Goroka and Lae—air

transport Making such travelling possible for

an elderly, even though active man. Liter he

was able to make u uip to the Fore country.

Where the newly discovered disease “kuru” had

been recorded by Gadjusck and Zigus.

Allhough jt was not known at the time, thts

discuse is apparently largely perpetuated by

cannibalism.

His loss of sight in his kite BO's was a cun-

siderable hardship, preventing him from read-

ing the early uccounts ef Australiin and other

exploration, 4s well as curly medicul and bio-

logical texts in Which he took so much pleu-

sure. Nevertheless he bore thls blow staicully,

accepting it as part of the ageing process.

Apatt from his active participation in the

allairs of the Royal Society of South Australia

(see further below) und the bodies mentioned

earlier, be wos a mentber of a nuntber of medi-

cal and scientific sucieties. He had served as

President for a number of these, including the

Royal Society of New South Wales, the Royal

Australasian Ornithologists’ Union ond the

Medical Sciences Club of Suuth Australia,

being one of the founding members of the

lasi-numed,

Cleland always sirove for complete intel-

lectual honesiy. As an iWustration of this, the

writer remembers Cleland jn 1947 telling how

he had recently been on i trip to the Coorong

in company with Julian Huxley and some other

eminent biologists. Cleland stated that in tell-

ing his colleagues about the habits of hirds

there was a natural tendency to embellish the

account, which had to be kept rigidly in check,

Cleland was mude C.B.E. in 1949, and was

knighted in 1964. Mor those who had known

him for many years it was difficult to change

trom “Professor Cleland” to “Sir doh’ an

addressing him, With his natural modesty he

seemed to. prefer the tithe by which he had so

long been known. Another well-deserved

honour was the haming after him of the

Cleland Wild Life Reserve, later Te-nurmed

Cleland National Park, on the western slopes

of Mt Lofty. This will be a lasting memorial

to his efforts in. the field of wild life conserva-

tion. He was commemorated also in the

names of several plants and animals, A com-

paratively oinor honour whieh Cleland valued

was having a kindergarten in the neighbouring

suburb of Beauitront named after him

OBITUARY—JOHN BURTON CLELAND

At the time of his death Cleland was the

oldést member of the Royal Socicty of South

Australia, and the one with the longest mem-

bership, having joined in L895. On returning

to South Australia in 1920 he was able to par-

ticipate actively in the Society’s affairs, He

served on the Council from 1921-1926, 1932-

247

1937, and as Vice-President for 1926-1927 and

1941-1942, He was elected Presideni on two

occasions, 1927-1928 and again 1940-1941.

He was awarded the Verco Medal in 1933, and

was elected to Honorary Fellow in 1949.

R. VY, Southeott.

Selected References

(Including appreciations, leading references, and recapitulatory and epitomizing studies )

Awon, (1968).—A tribute to John Burton Cleland

bn ts ninetieth birthday, Med. J. Aust, 1,

Camepnene, T. D, (1959),—I. B. Cleland and

anthropology. fn John Burton Cleland—A

tribute on his eightieth birthday. Trans. R.

Sov. S. Atst, 82, 343-344.

CLELAND, J. B. & Len, D. J. (1963).—The

poisonous and urticating plants of Australia.

(nH, L. Keegan & W. ¥. MacFarlane (Eds.),

“Venomous and Poisonous Animals and

Noxious Plants of the Pacific Area”, pp. 3-14.

(Pergamon Press: Oxford.) (Lists in biblio-

graphy Cleland’s works on the medical effects

of native Austrajian Plants.)

CLeLanp, J. B,, & Soutiucotr, R. V. (1965).—

“Injuries to Man from Murine Invertebrates

in the Australian Region.” National Health

and Medical Research Council, Dept. of

Healih, Commonwealth of Australia, Spec.

Rept. Ser. No. 12. (Lists and evaluates

Cleland’s. publications on this subject, in a

general survey of the field.)

CLevanp, J, B,, & Saurucetr, R. V. (1969a).—

Illnesses following the eating of seal liver in

Australian waters. Med. J. Aust. 1, 760-763.

CLELAND, J. B., & SourHcoil, R. V. (1969b)-—

Aypervitaminosis A in the Australasian Ant-

arctic Expedition of 1911-1914: a possible

explanation of the illnesses of Mertz and

Mawson, Med. J. Aust. 1, 1337-1342,

EARDLEY, Constance M. (1959).—J. B. Cleland

as a botanist. Jn John Burton Cleland—A

wibute on his eightieth birthday. rans. R.

Soe. §. Aust, 82, 339-341.

mycologist. /n John Burton Cleland—<A tri-

bute on his eightieth birthday. Trans. R. Soc.

S, Aus, 82, 341-343,

Laneastrr, A. O. (1964).—“Bibliography of vital

statistics in Australia and New Zealand.”

(Australasian Med. Publ, Co. 1td.: Sydney.)

(Lists Cleland’s contribulions ta epidemio-

logy.)

Muscrave, A. (1932),—“Ribliography of Austra-

lian entomology 1775-1930 with biographical

notes on authors and collectors.” (Royal

Zoological Society of New South Wales: Syd-

ney.) (Lists Cleland’s contributions to medi-

cal entomology, to 1930.)

SOUTHCOTT, R. V., CHESTERFIELD, N. J., & Luca,

PD. J. (1971).—Vitamin A content of livers

of huskies and seals from. Antarctic and sub-

antarctic regions, Med. J. Aust. 1, 311-313.

vAN Rooyen, C, E., & Ruoves, A. J. (1940) —

“Virus Diseases of Man.” (Oxford U_P_)

WuirteLtt, H. M. (1954).—*"The literature of

Australian birds: A History and a Biblio-

graphy of Australian Ornithology.” (Paterson

Brokensha Pty. Ltd.: Perth.)